418111000LE4.0 - V1 - LTE End-to-End Solution Overview

Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Title page
Alcatel-Lucent Long Term Evolution (LTE)

End-to-End Solution | Release LE4.0
Solution
Overview
418-111-000
Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary
Issue 1
March 2012
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2010–2011 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside
Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners. The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Sun Solaris is a trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

YouTube is a registered trademark of Google.
Oracle and Sun Microsystems are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Limited warranty
This system is a single homogenous system consisting of component parts designed to operate in the manner that the switch is configured when provided to
the customer. Changes to system level configurations set "at the factory" can affect the availability, throughput, standards compliance, and stability of the
product and result in expanded unplanned downtimes as unforeseen issues arise with untested configuration settings. Changes from factory settings can result
in violation of warranty and maintenance agreements with Alcatel-Lucent and should not be performed without the expressed written consent of
Alcatel-Lucent.
Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary
Contents
About this document

Purpose .................................................................................................................................................................................... xxxvii
xxxvii
Reason for reissue ................................................................................................................................................................ xxxvii

xxxvii
Scope ........................................................................................................................................................................................ xxxvii

xxxvii
Intended audience ............................................................................................................................................................... xxxviii

xxxviii
Related information ........................................................................................................................................................... xxxviii

xxxviii
How to comment ................................................................................................................................................................ xxxviii

xxxviii
Part I: LTE Solution Introduction
1 Long Term Evolution (LTE)
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1-1
Aids to using this document
What has changed in this document? ............................................................................................................................... 1-3

1-3
Glossary ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-3

1-3
Specialized meaning for key terms .................................................................................................................................... 1-3

1-3
How to read this document .................................................................................................................................................... 1-5

1-5
The need for LTE
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6

1-6
Increasing demand .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-7

1-7
Flattening revenue per user ................................................................................................................................................... 1-7

1-7
The need for high leverage networks ................................................................................................................................ 1-8

1-8
Need to scale and converge older networks .................................................................................................................... 1-9

1-9
Summary .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-10

1-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary iii
418-111-000 Release LE4.0 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE defined
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-12

1-12
What is LTE? ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-12

1-12
Applicable to all major wireless standards .................................................................................................................... 1-14

1-14
How LTE works
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-16

1-16
Increasing throughput between the UE and the Core Network ............................................................................. 1-18
1-18
All IP packet-based network .............................................................................................................................................. 1-25

1-25
Use of new radio spectrum ................................................................................................................................................. 1-25

1-25
Quality improvements .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-26

1-26
Comparing the LTE architecture with pre-existing architectures ......................................................................... 1-26

1-26
New network components defined by LTE
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-29

1-29
Evolved UTRAN (eUTRAN) ........................................................................................................................................... 1-31

1-31
Evolved Packet Core (EPC) ............................................................................................................................................... 1-32

1-32
A sample LTE network
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-36

1-36
Sample LTE network ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-36

1-36
Benefits of LTE
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-39

1-39
High capacity and low latency ........................................................................................................................................... 1-39

1-39
High leverage networks - new revenue opportunities ............................................................................................... 1-40

1-40
Efficiency and reduced operating costs .......................................................................................................................... 1-41

1-41
Provides “Efficient Always-On support” ....................................................................................................................... 1-42

1-42
Increased flexibility in use of spectrum ........................................................................................................................ 1-43

1-43
Increased spectral efficiency .............................................................................................................................................. 1-43

1-43
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Use pursuant to applicable agreements 418-111-000 Release LE4.0
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Easy convergence and interworking with other wireless networks ..................................................................... 1-44
1-44
User-visible benefits .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-44

1-44
2 The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2-1
About the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
What is the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution? .............................................................................................. 2-3

2-3
Parts of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution ................................................................................................ 2-5

2-5
LTE network
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-6

2-6
Components of the LTE Network ....................................................................................................................................... 2-6

2-6
About the Radio Access Network ....................................................................................................................................... 2-8

2-8
About the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network ..................................................................................................... 2-8

2-8
About the Core Network ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-9

2-9
About the Common Core Network .................................................................................................................................. 2-10

2-10
About the IMS and Applications Area ............................................................................................................................ 2-10

2-10
About the OAM&P products .............................................................................................................................................. 2-11

2-11
LTE Services
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-13

2-13
Summary of services ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-13

2-13
For further information ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-15

2-15
The ng Connect program
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-16

2-16
About the ng Connect program ......................................................................................................................................... 2-16

2-16
How the ng Connect program works .............................................................................................................................. 2-17

2-17

2-18
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary v
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-19

2-19
All the benefits of LTE ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-20

2-20
A pre-Integrated Solution ................................................................................................................................................... 2-20

2-20
Benefits of not having a multivendor solution ............................................................................................................ 2-21

2-21
Ease of evolution .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-22

2-22
Preservation of capital .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-23

2-23
Use of ng Connect .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-23

2-23
Significant cost reductions in Mobile Backhaul ......................................................................................................... 2-24

2-24
Use of Self-Organizing Networks (SONs) .................................................................................................................... 2-24

2-24
Alcatel-Lucent's “Green Touch” initiative .................................................................................................................... 2-25

2-25
Converged RAN approaches .............................................................................................................................................. 2-26

2-26
Converged RAN ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-26

2-26
LightRadio ™ ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-28

2-28
Summary table ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-30

2-30
3 LTE Services
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3-1
Services Portfolio
About the Services Portfolio ................................................................................................................................................. 3-3

3-3
Advanced Integration Methodology (AIM)
About AIM .................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-5

3-5
Consulting
About Consulting Services .................................................................................................................................................... 3-6

3-6
Consulting Services offered .................................................................................................................................................. 3-7

3-7
Analysis
Analysis Services offered ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-9

3-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Design
Design Services offered ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-13

3-13
Deployment
About Deployment Services ............................................................................................................................................... 3-14

3-14
Project Management Services ............................................................................................................................................ 3-14

3-14
Installation Services .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-15

3-15
Integration Services ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-16

3-16
Field Integration ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-16

3-16
Application Integration Solution ...................................................................................................................................... 3-17

3-17
Solution Integration and Validation Service ................................................................................................................. 3-18

3-18
OSS/BSS Transformation and Integration .................................................................................................................... 3-18

3-18
Security Enabler Integration ............................................................................................................................................... 3-19

3-19
Migration Services ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-19

3-19
IP Transformation Centers .................................................................................................................................................. 3-21

3-21
Operation
About Operation Services ................................................................................................................................................... 3-23

3-23
Maintain ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-23

3-23
Optimize .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-24

3-24
Operate and manage .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-24

3-24
4 Deployment options
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4-1
Before you begin
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-3

4-3
Terminology ................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-3

4-3
LTE Network Deployment Option
About the option ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-5

4-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary vii
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Diagrams ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-5
4-5
How it works .............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-8

4-8
Interfaces ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-8

4-8
LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option: eHRPD 1xEVDO
About the Option ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-9

4-9
Diagrams .................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-10

4-10
How it works ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-12

4-12
Interfaces .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-13

4-13
LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option: GSM and W-CDMA
About the Option .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14

4-14
Diagrams .................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-15

4-15
How it works ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-17

4-17
Interfaces .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-17

4-17
5 High-level migration strategy
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5-1
Migration options ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5-1
3GPP2 to LTE evolution high-level summary ............................................................................................................... 5-4

5-4
3GPP to LTE evolution high-level summary .................................................................................................................. 5-5

5-5
Basic principles .......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-6

5-6
LTE designed for easy migration ........................................................................................................................................ 5-7

5-7
Migration planning resources ............................................................................................................................................... 5-8

5-8
Part II: LTE Network Provided Services
6 UEs and Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6-1
About UEs ................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2

6-2
Explosive growth in LTE ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-3

6-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About InterOperability Testing (IOT) ............................................................................................................................... 6-4
6-4
Alcatel-Lucent's support for LTE and for IOT ............................................................................................................... 6-4

6-4
About the Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT Team ........................................................................................................ 6-5

6-5
The NVIOT Forum ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6

6-6
IOT Process ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-7

6-7
Achievements of Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team ...................................................................................... 6-8

6-8
7 Approaches for voice with LTE
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7-1
About voice with LTE
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3

7-3
Voice with LTE defined .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-3

7-3
Approaches for voice with LTE ......................................................................................................................................... 7-3

7-3
The CSFB approach
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-5

7-5
About CSFB ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-5

7-5
How it works .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-6

7-6
Benefits ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-6

7-6
Limitations .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-7

7-7
Network and UE impacts ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-8

7-8
Current implementation .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-8

7-8
The VoLTE approach
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-9

7-9
About VoLTE ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-9

7-9
How it works ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-10

7-10
Use of IMS network elements ............................................................................................................................................ 7-11

7-11
Use of common core network elements ......................................................................................................................... 7-15

7-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary ix
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network and UE impacts ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-16
7-16
Current implementation ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-16

7-16
The SVLTE approach
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17

7-17
About the SVLTE approach ............................................................................................................................................... 7-17

7-17
How it works ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-18

7-18
Benefits ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-18

7-18
Limitations ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-19

7-19
Network and UE impacts ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-19

7-19
Current implementation ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-20

7-20
The SR-VCC approach
Use of Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SR-VCC) ............................................................................................ 7-21

7-21
The Service Centralization approach
Service Centralization ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-22

7-22
Migration
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-24

7-24
Considerations ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-24

7-24
Migration path ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-25

7-25
Comparison of approaches for voice with LTE
Summary of approaches ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-27

7-27
8 SMS with LTE
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8-1
About SMS .................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-1

8-1
The need for SMS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-3

8-3
Ways to deliver SMS in the Solution ................................................................................................................................. 8-3

8-3
SMS over the SGs/S102 interface ...................................................................................................................................... 8-4

8-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SMS over IP (IMS-hosted SMS) ......................................................................................................................................... 8-6
8-6
9 Cell Broadcast with LTE
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9-1
Public Warning System (CMAS)
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2

9-2
What is Public Warning System (PWS) ........................................................................................................................... 9-2

9-2
What is Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS) ................................................................................................... 9-3

9-3
How it works .............................................................................................................................................................................. 9-3

9-3
Commercial Mobile Alert System architecture .............................................................................................................. 9-3

9-3
LTE Network requirements ................................................................................................................................................... 9-5

9-5
Network and UE impacts ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-6

9-6
10 Approaches for video on LTE
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1

10-1
About video over LTE
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2

10-2
Basic definitions ..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2

10-2
About video over LTE .......................................................................................................................................................... 10-4

10-4
Standards for video over LTE ............................................................................................................................................ 10-5

10-5
Summary of approaches for video with Video Communications Service ......................................................... 10-6
10-6
The Video Communications Service approach
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-7

10-7
About Video Communications Service .......................................................................................................................... 10-7

10-7
Current capabilities ................................................................................................................................................................ 10-8

10-8
Video Communications Service architecture ............................................................................................................. 10-11

10-11
SVLTE UEs ............................................................................................................................................................................ 10-12

10-12
New network elements to host new applications ..................................................................................................... 10-13

10-13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xi
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use of IMS core ................................................................................................................................................................... 10-14
10-14
How it works ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-16

10-16
Limitations ............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-17

10-17
Network and UE impacts .................................................................................................................................................. 10-18

10-18
11 Roaming in LTE networks
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1

11-1
About inter LTE networks roaming
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-2

11-2
Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-2

11-2
Approaches for Inter LTE network roaming ................................................................................................................. 11-3

11-3
LTE Roaming approaches
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-4

11-4
LTE Roaming with Home routed traffic approach ..................................................................................................... 11-4

11-4
LTE Roaming with Local Break Out (LBO) approach (supported in a future release) ................................ 11-6
11-6
LTE Mobility requirements needed for Roaming ....................................................................................................... 11-9

11-9
12 Government-mandated services
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1

12-1
1357 Unified Lawful Interception Suite (ULIS)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-2

12-2
About the 1357 ULIS ............................................................................................................................................................ 12-2

12-2
How it works ............................................................................................................................................................................ 12-3

12-3
Lawful interception within different parts of the Solution ...................................................................................... 12-5

12-5
Advantages of the 1357 ULIS ........................................................................................................................................... 12-5

12-5

12-6
Emergency Services
About Emergency Services ................................................................................................................................................. 12-8

12-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Number Portability
About Number Portability ................................................................................................................................................... 12-9

12-9
About TTY/TTD Support
TTY/TTD Support ............................................................................................................................................................... 12-10

12-10
13 Public Safety
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1

13-1
About Public Safety
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-2

13-2
Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................................. 13-2

13-2
Public Safety Expectations with LTE ............................................................................................................................. 13-3

13-3
How it works
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-4

13-4
No specific Network Equipment required for PS ....................................................................................................... 13-4

13-4
Public Safety configurations, devices and frequency spectrum ............................................................................ 13-5

13-5
Sharing Network Elements ................................................................................................................................................. 13-7

13-7
Hosted Core Model ................................................................................................................................................................ 13-9

13-9
Priority Access ...................................................................................................................................................................... 13-10

13-10
14 LTE End-to-End Security
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-1

14-1
Air Interface Security
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-2

14-2
About Air Interface Security .............................................................................................................................................. 14-2

14-2
Common security threats to the air interface ................................................................................................................ 14-4

14-4
Control plane security ........................................................................................................................................................... 14-4

14-4
User plane security ................................................................................................................................................................. 14-6

14-6

14-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xiii
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network Access Security
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-8

14-8
About network security ........................................................................................................................................................ 14-8

14-8
Common security threats to the network ................................................................................................................... 14-10

14-10
Recommendations for providing network security .................................................................................................. 14-11

14-11
For further information ...................................................................................................................................................... 14-12

14-12
Part III: Network Elements Overview
15 About the network element descriptions
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-1

15-1
Complete list of Network Elements in the Solution .................................................................................................. 15-1

15-1
Components of the Solution ............................................................................................................................................... 15-4

15-4
How the network element descriptions are organized .............................................................................................. 15-4

15-4
16 Network elements used in the Radio Access Network
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-1

16-1
9100 MBI/O (BTS)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-4

16-4
About the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) ......................................................................................................................................... 16-4

16-4
Changes in the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) to support LTE .................................................................................................. 16-5

16-5

16-6
9125 TC
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-7

16-7
About the 9125 TC ............................................................................................................................................................... 16-7

16-7

16-9
9130 BSC/MFS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-10

16-10
About the 9130 BSC/MFS ................................................................................................................................................ 16-10

16-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes in the 9130 BSC/MFS to support LTE ....................................................................................................... 16-11
16-11

16-11
922x 1xEVDO Base Station (BS)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-13

16-13
About the 922x 1xEVDO Base Station (BS) ............................................................................................................. 16-13

16-13
Changes in the 922x 1xEVDO BS to support LTE ................................................................................................. 16-14

16-14

16-15
9326 NodeB
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-16

16-16
About the 9326 NodeB ...................................................................................................................................................... 16-16

16-16
Changes in the 9326 NodeB to support LTE ............................................................................................................. 16-17

16-17

16-18
9370 RNC
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-19

16-19
About the 9370 RNC ......................................................................................................................................................... 16-19

16-19
Changes in the 9370 RNC to support LTE ................................................................................................................. 16-21

16-21

16-21
9412 eNodeB
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-22

16-22
About the eNodeB ............................................................................................................................................................... 16-22

16-22
About the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB ..................................................................................................................... 16-23

16-23
How it works ......................................................................................................................................................................... 16-23

16-23
Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB ..................................................................................................... 16-23

16-23
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-24

16-24
Support of FDD .................................................................................................................................................................... 16-29

16-29
Software .................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-29

16-29
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xv
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connections to other network elements ....................................................................................................................... 16-29
16-29
User interfaces ...................................................................................................................................................................... 16-30

16-30

16-30
LTE RRH Product Family
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-31

16-31
About the LTE RRH Product Family ........................................................................................................................... 16-31

16-31
Advantages ............................................................................................................................................................................. 16-33

16-33
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-35

16-35
Support of both FDD and TDD ...................................................................................................................................... 16-36

16-36
Software .................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-38

16-38

16-38
9926 d2U eNodeB Base Band Unit
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-39

16-39
About the Distributed eNodeB Solution .................................................................................................................... 16-40

16-40
About the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU ............................................................................................................................... 16-43

16-43
Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU ................................................................................ 16-43

16-43
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-44

16-44
Support of both FDD and TDD ...................................................................................................................................... 16-45

16-45
Software .................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-47

16-47
Support for the R-OCM ..................................................................................................................................................... 16-47

16-47
User interface ........................................................................................................................................................................ 16-49

16-49

16-49
17 Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-1

17-1
About the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-3

17-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Segments of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network ...................................................................................... 17-3
17-3
Connectivity models .............................................................................................................................................................. 17-5

17-5
Security ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-5

17-5
Changes caused by LTE ....................................................................................................................................................... 17-6

17-6
Challenges for the customer ............................................................................................................................................... 17-6

17-6
Solution ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-7

17-7
7705 SAR
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-9

17-9
About the 7705 SAR ............................................................................................................................................................. 17-9

17-9
How it works ......................................................................................................................................................................... 17-10

17-10
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-10

17-10
Software .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-12

17-12
User Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................................................... 17-12

17-12

17-12
7750 SR
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-14

17-14
About the 7750 SR .............................................................................................................................................................. 17-14

17-14
How it works ......................................................................................................................................................................... 17-15

17-15
Advantages ............................................................................................................................................................................. 17-15

17-15
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-17

17-17
Software .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-18

17-18
Use of the 7750 SR in LTE Network ............................................................................................................................ 17-18

17-18
Changes in the 7750 SR to support LTE ..................................................................................................................... 17-20

17-20

17-20
18 Network elements used in the Core Network
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-1

18-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xvii
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5060 WCS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-4

18-4
About the 5060 WCS ............................................................................................................................................................ 18-4

18-4
Ready to support evolution to LTE .................................................................................................................................. 18-6

18-6

18-6
5780 DSC
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-7

18-7
About the 5780 DSC ............................................................................................................................................................. 18-7

18-7
How it works ............................................................................................................................................................................ 18-8

18-8
Advantages ............................................................................................................................................................................... 18-9

18-9
Benefits ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-9

18-9
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-10

18-10
Software .................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-13

18-13
Connections to the network .............................................................................................................................................. 18-14

18-14
User interfaces ...................................................................................................................................................................... 18-15

18-15

18-15
7549 MGW
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-17

18-17
About the 7549 MGW ........................................................................................................................................................ 18-17

18-17

18-19
7500 SGSN
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-20

18-20
About the 7500 SGSN ........................................................................................................................................................ 18-20

18-20
Changes in the 7500 SGSN to support LTE ............................................................................................................... 18-23

18-23

18-23
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-25

18-25
About the 7750 SR PGW and GGSN functions ....................................................................................................... 18-26

18-26
How the functions work .................................................................................................................................................... 18-27

18-27
Changes in the 7750 SR to support LTE ..................................................................................................................... 18-28

18-28
Advantages ............................................................................................................................................................................. 18-29

18-29
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-30

18-30
Software .................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-34

18-34

18-35
User interfaces ...................................................................................................................................................................... 18-35

18-35

18-35
7750 SR (SGW)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-37

18-37
About the 7750 SR (SGW) ............................................................................................................................................... 18-37

18-37
How it works ......................................................................................................................................................................... 18-38

18-38
Advantages ............................................................................................................................................................................. 18-38

18-38
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-39

18-39
Software .................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-43

18-43

18-44
User interfaces ...................................................................................................................................................................... 18-45

18-45

18-45
9380 3G MSC
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-46

18-46
About the 9380 3G MSC .................................................................................................................................................. 18-46

18-46
User interface ........................................................................................................................................................................ 18-51

18-51

18-51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xix
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9471 Mobility Management Entity (MME)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-52

18-52
About the 9471 Mobility Management Entity (MME) .......................................................................................... 18-52

18-52
Advantages ............................................................................................................................................................................. 18-53

18-53
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-54

18-54
Software .................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-57

18-57

18-57
User interfaces ...................................................................................................................................................................... 18-58

18-58

18-59
9471 Wireless Mobility Manager
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-60

18-60
About the 9471 WMM ....................................................................................................................................................... 18-60

18-60
How it works ......................................................................................................................................................................... 18-61

18-61
Advantages of the 9471 WMM ...................................................................................................................................... 18-61

18-61
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-61

18-61

18-62
User interfaces ...................................................................................................................................................................... 18-63

18-63
Changes in the 9471 WMM to support LTE .............................................................................................................. 18-63

18-63

18-63
HSGW
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-64

18-64
About the HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW) .......................................................................................................... 18-64

18-64
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................ 18-65

18-65
Software .................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-65

18-65

18-65
User interfaces ...................................................................................................................................................................... 18-66

18-66

18-66
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Radio/core (hybrid) network elements
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-1

19-1
9271 eRNC
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-3

19-3
About the 9271 Evolved Radio Network Controller (eRNC) ................................................................................ 19-3
19-3
How it works ............................................................................................................................................................................ 19-4

19-4
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-4

19-4
Software ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-5

19-5
Connections to other network elements ......................................................................................................................... 19-5

19-5
User interfaces ......................................................................................................................................................................... 19-6

19-6

19-6
20 Network elements used in the Common Core Network
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-1

20-1
1357 LIG
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-3

20-3
About the 1357 LIG .............................................................................................................................................................. 20-3

20-3
Advantages of the 1357 LIG .............................................................................................................................................. 20-4

20-4
Hardware .................................................................................................................................................................................. 20-4

20-4
Software ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-4

20-4
Connections to other network elements ......................................................................................................................... 20-5

20-5
User interfaces ......................................................................................................................................................................... 20-5

20-5
Changes in the 1357 LIG to support LTE ...................................................................................................................... 20-6

20-6

20-6
8610 ICC (OCS)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-7

20-7
About 8810 ICC ...................................................................................................................................................................... 20-7

20-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxi
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connection to the network .................................................................................................................................................. 20-9
20-9

20-9
8615 IeCCF (OFCS)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 20-10

20-10
About the 8615 IeCCF ...................................................................................................................................................... 20-10

20-10

20-12
8650 SDM HSS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 20-13

20-13
The 8650 SDM HSS ........................................................................................................................................................... 20-13

20-13
How it works ......................................................................................................................................................................... 20-14

20-14
Advantages of the 8650 SDM HSS ............................................................................................................................... 20-14

20-14
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................ 20-15

20-15
Software .................................................................................................................................................................................. 20-17

20-17

20-17
User interfaces ...................................................................................................................................................................... 20-18

20-18

20-18
VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 20-19

20-19
About the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS ................................................................................................................................... 20-19

20-19
Changes in the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS to support LTE .......................................................................................... 20-22

20-22

20-22
21 Network elements used for IMS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 21-1

21-1
About IMS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 21-4

21-4
What is IMS? ........................................................................................................................................................................... 21-4

21-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What does IMS do? ............................................................................................................................................................... 21-5
21-5
The Alcatel-Lucent IMS Solution .................................................................................................................................... 21-6

21-6
IMS functions implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution ................................................ 21-7
21-7
5060 MGC-8
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 21-9

21-9
About the 5060 MGC-8 ....................................................................................................................................................... 21-9

21-9

21-10
5100 CMS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-11

21-11
About the 5100 Converged Messaging System ....................................................................................................... 21-11

21-11
Changes in the 5100 CMS to support LTE ................................................................................................................. 21-12

21-12

21-12
5110 SMSC
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-13

21-13
About the 5110 SMSC ....................................................................................................................................................... 21-13

21-13

21-15
5140 BMC
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-16

21-16
About the 5140 BMC ......................................................................................................................................................... 21-16

21-16
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-18

21-18
Changes in the 5140 BMC to support LTE ................................................................................................................ 21-18

21-18

21-18

21-19
5410 PS/XDMS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-20

21-20
About the 5410 PS/XDMS ............................................................................................................................................... 21-20

21-20
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxiii
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes in the 5410 PS/XDMS to support LTE ...................................................................................................... 21-21
21-21

21-22
5420 CTS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-23

21-23
The 5420 CTS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 21-23

21-23
Changes in the 5420 CTS to support LTE .................................................................................................................. 21-24

21-24

21-25
5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-26

21-26
About the 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF) ................................................................................................................................ 21-26

21-26
Providing Call Session Control Function (CSCF) functions ............................................................................... 21-27

21-27

21-29
5900 MRF
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-30

21-30
The 5900 MRF ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21-30

21-30
Changes in the 5900 MRF to support LTE ................................................................................................................. 21-31

21-31

21-31
7510 MGW
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-33

21-33
About the 7510 MGW ........................................................................................................................................................ 21-33

21-33
Type of LTE/IMS function ............................................................................................................................................... 21-34

21-34
Advantages of the 7510 MGW ....................................................................................................................................... 21-35

21-35
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................ 21-35

21-35
Software .................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-38

21-38

21-38
User interfaces ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21-40

21-40
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes in the 7510 MGW to support LTE ............................................................................................................... 21-41
21-41

21-41
7520 MGW
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-42

21-42
The 7520 MGW .................................................................................................................................................................... 21-42

21-42
Advantages of the 7520 MGW ....................................................................................................................................... 21-43

21-43
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................ 21-43

21-43
Software .................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-44

21-44
User interfaces ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21-44

21-44

21-44
8950 AAA
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-45

21-45
About the 8950 AAA .......................................................................................................................................................... 21-45

21-45

21-48
22 OAM&P products
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 22-1

22-1
Layers of OAM&P support
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 22-4

22-4
About the Network Management Layer (NML) ......................................................................................................... 22-4

22-4
About the Element Management Layer ......................................................................................................................... 22-5

22-5
About the Network Element Layer ................................................................................................................................. 22-5

22-5
1360 COM
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 22-6

22-6
About the 1360 COM ........................................................................................................................................................... 22-6

22-6
Changes in the 1360 COM to support the LTE ........................................................................................................... 22-9

22-9

22-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxv
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1300 XMC
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-10

22-10
About the 1300 XMC ......................................................................................................................................................... 22-10

22-10
Changes in the 1300 XMC to support LTE ................................................................................................................ 22-11

22-11

22-12
1310 OMC-P
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-13

22-13
About the 1310 OMC-P ..................................................................................................................................................... 22-13

22-13
Changes in the 1310 OMC-P to support LTE ............................................................................................................ 22-15

22-15

22-15
1357 IMC
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-16

22-16
About the 1357 IMC ........................................................................................................................................................... 22-16

22-16
Advantages of the 1357 IMC .......................................................................................................................................... 22-17

22-17
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................ 22-17

22-17
Software .................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-17

22-17

22-18
Changes in the 1357 IMC to support LTE .................................................................................................................. 22-18

22-18

22-19
5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-20

22-20
5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM) .......................................................................................................................... 22-20

22-20
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-21

22-21

22-22
8950 SAM
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-23

22-23
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxvi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the 8950 SAM ......................................................................................................................................................... 22-23
22-23
Changes in the 8950 SAM to support LTE ................................................................................................................. 22-25

22-25

22-26
9153 Operations and Maintenance Center For Radio (OMC-R)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-27

22-27
About the OMC-R ............................................................................................................................................................... 22-27

22-27
Advantages ............................................................................................................................................................................. 22-28

22-28

22-29
9253/9254 OMC-RAN
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-30

22-30
About the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN .................................................................................................................................. 22-31

22-31
Hardware description .......................................................................................................................................................... 22-31

22-31
Software .................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-32

22-32

22-32
User interfaces ...................................................................................................................................................................... 22-32

22-32

22-32
9256 OMP
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-34

22-34
About the 9256 OMP ......................................................................................................................................................... 22-34

22-34

22-36
9353 WMS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-37

22-37
About the 9353 WMS ........................................................................................................................................................ 22-37

22-37
Changes in the 9353 WMS to support LTE ................................................................................................................ 22-38

22-38

22-39
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxvii
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9452 WPS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-40

22-40
About the 9452 WPS .......................................................................................................................................................... 22-40

22-40

22-42
9958 WTA
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-43

22-43
About the 9958 WTA ......................................................................................................................................................... 22-43

22-43
Changes in the 9958 WTA to support LTE ................................................................................................................. 22-45

22-45

22-45
9959 NPO
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-46

22-46
About the 9959 NPO ......................................................................................................................................................... 22-46

22-46
Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................................ 22-48

22-48
Software .................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-48

22-48
Changes in the 9959 NPO to support LTE ................................................................................................................. 22-48

22-48

22-48
NEM
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-50

22-50
About the NEM .................................................................................................................................................................... 22-50

22-50
Changes in the NEM to support LTE ............................................................................................................................ 22-51

22-51

22-51
OMC-CN
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-52

22-52
About the OMC-CN ............................................................................................................................................................ 22-52

22-52
Changes in OMC-CN to support LTE .......................................................................................................................... 22-54

22-54

22-54
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxviii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SMT
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-55

22-55
The SMT ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-55

22-55
How it works ......................................................................................................................................................................... 22-55

22-55
Changes in the SMT to support LTE ............................................................................................................................ 22-56

22-56

22-56
TSIS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-57

22-57
About TSIS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 22-57

22-57
Changes in the TSIS to support LTE ............................................................................................................................ 22-59

22-59

22-60
WEM
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-61

22-61
About the WEM ................................................................................................................................................................... 22-61

22-61

22-62
A LTE interfaces
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... A-1

A-1
IP connectivity .......................................................................................................................................................................... A-1

A-1
Graphical view of the LTE interfaces ............................................................................................................................... A-2

A-2
Reference table of interfaces ............................................................................................................................................... A-3

A-3
B Resources
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... B-1

B-1
Release Notes ............................................................................................................................................................................ B-2

B-2
Planning Hub site ..................................................................................................................................................................... B-2

B-2
Technical reading on LTE ..................................................................................................................................................... B-3

B-3
Accessing and navigating the LTE Library ................................................................................................................... B-3

B-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxix
Issue 1 March 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
More about the LTE Library on OLCS ............................................................................................................................ B-6
B-6
Accessing and navigating the OLCS web site ............................................................................................................... B-9

B-9
Accessing network element documentation through the Product Index ........................................................... B-11
B-11
Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web site ............................................................. B-11
B-11
List of LTE customer documentation ............................................................................................................................ B-13

B-13
Alcatel-Lucent official web sites on LTE and LTE-related topics ....................................................................... B-23
B-23
Alcatel-Lucent training on LTE ........................................................................................................................................ B-24

B-24
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Services support for LTE ........................................................................................................... B-26

B-26
Tips for getting started with LTE Specifications ........................................................................................................ B-26

B-26
Glossary .................................................................................................................................................................................... B-31

B-31
C Alcatel-Lucent LTE project release naming convention
Project release naming conventions .................................................................................................................................. C-1

C-1
D Mobile Backhaul Solution
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... D-1

D-1
Need for the Mobile Backhaul Solution .......................................................................................................................... D-2

D-2
About the Mobile Backhaul Solution ............................................................................................................................... D-2

D-2
Mobile Backhaul Solution architecture ........................................................................................................................... D-4

D-4
For help with your Mobile Backhaul Solution .............................................................................................................. D-6

D-6
Training ....................................................................................................................................................................................... D-7

D-7
For further information .......................................................................................................................................................... D-7

D-7
E Defining and displaying the user and control plane
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... E-1

E-1
User plane and control plane defined ................................................................................................................................ E-1

E-1
F What's new in the Releases
Revisions to this document ................................................................................................................................................... F-1

F-1
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxx Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
List of tables
1 Reason for revision ............................................................................................................................................. xxxvii
1-1 Terms used in this document and their meanings .......................................................................................... 1-3
2-1 Solutions for customer issues and problems ................................................................................................. 2-30
5-1 1xEV-DO to LTE evolution summary ............................................................................................................... 5-4
5-2 3GPP to LTE evolution summary ........................................................................................................................ 5-5
7-1 IMS functional entities added or modified for VoLTE .............................................................................. 7-12
7-2 Previously-existing functional entities and network elements used by LTE and by VoLTE ....... 7-15
7-3 Comparison of approaches for voice with LTE in the Solution ............................................................. 7-27
12-1 How Number Portability is provided ............................................................................................................... 12-9
12-2 How TTY/TTD Support is provided ............................................................................................................. 12-10
16-1 9412 eNodeB Compact Controllers in LE4.0 ............................................................................................ 16-26
16-2 9412 eNodeB Compact Modems in LE4.0 ................................................................................................. 16-26
16-3 9412 eNodeB Compact TRDUs in LE4.0 ................................................................................................... 16-26
16-4 9412 eNodeB Compact MC-TRXs in LE4.0 ............................................................................................. 16-28
16-5 9412 eNodeB connections to other network elements ............................................................................ 16-29
16-6 LTE RRH Product Family that support FDD vs TDD in LE4.0 ......................................................... 16-37
16-7 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU sub-racks that support FDD vs TDD in LE4.0 ......................................... 16-45
16-8 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU Controllers that support FDD vs TDD in LE4.0 ..................................... 16-46
16-9 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU Modems that support FDD vs TDD in LE4.0 .......................................... 16-46
17-1 Documentation on the 7705 SAR ................................................................................................................... 17-12
18-1 Documentation on the 7500 SGSN ................................................................................................................ 18-23
18-2 7750 SR (SGW) connections to other network elements ...................................................................... 18-44
18-3 HSGW Interconnections .................................................................................................................................... 18-65
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxxi
Issue 1 March 2012
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-1 9271 eRNC connections to other network elements .................................................................................. 19-5
22-1 Documentation on the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN .......................................................................................... 22-32
A-1 LTE Network Interfaces and Protocols ............................................................................................................. A-3
B-1 LTE End-to-End Solution Documentation Library .................................................................................... B-13
B-2 Documentation Library for LTE End-to-End Solution ............................................................................. B-14
B-3 Documentation Library for ePC – 5780 DSC .............................................................................................. B-15
B-4 Documentation Library for ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM Core .............................................................. B-15
B-5 Documentation Library for ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM LTE ............................................................... B-16
B-6 Documentation Library for ePC – 9471 MME ............................................................................................ B-16
B-7 Documentation Library for ePC – 7750 SR (Backhaul and PGW/GGSN/SGW support) .......... B-17
B-8 Documentation Library for ePC – 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN/SGW) ...................................................... B-18
B-9 Documentation Library for LTE RAN Access ............................................................................................ B-18
B-10 Documentation Library for LTE 9452 WPS ................................................................................................. B-20
B-11 Documentation Library for LTE 9958 WTA ................................................................................................ B-21
B-12 Documentation Library for LTE 9959 NPO ................................................................................................. B-21
B-13 Documentation Library for CDMA – eBTS, eRNC ................................................................................. B-22
B-14 Recommended classes for LTE ......................................................................................................................... B-24
B-15 Recommended classes for 1xEV-DO .............................................................................................................. B-25
B-16 Recommended classes for CDMA ................................................................................................................... B-25
B-17 Stage 3 specification documents for the ePS ............................................................................................... B-28
B-18 Security specifications for the ePS .................................................................................................................. B-29
B-19 OA&M specifications for the ePS .................................................................................................................... B-29
F-1 Technical information that is added or changed in LE3.0 .......................................................................... F-1
F-2 Technical information that is added or changed in LE4.0 .......................................................................... F-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
List of figures
1-1 Current challenges faced by service providers ............................................................................................. 1-10
1-2 Contents of the Evolved Packet System (EPS) ........................................................................................... 1-13
1-3 Key innovations of LTE ........................................................................................................................................ 1-17
1-4 Basics of OFDM ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-19

1-19
1-5 Comparison of OFDM and CDMA .................................................................................................................. 1-20
1-6 Basics of SC-FDMA ............................................................................................................................................. 1-21
1-7 LTE throughput improvements in the Radio Access Network (RAN) ................................................ 1-22
1-8 Multiple antenna techniques ............................................................................................................................... 1-23
1-9 MIMO support on the downlink vs MIMO support on the uplink ....................................................... 1-24
1-10 Comparison of LTE architecture and a sample CDMA 2G/3G architecture ..................................... 1-27
1-11 Migration of basic telecommunications functions from 2G/3G to LTE ............................................. 1-28
1-12 eUTRAN and EPC in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution .................................................. 1-30
1-13 evolved Packet Core (EPC) compared to earlier Core Networks .......................................................... 1-33
1-14 Functional entities within the EPC ................................................................................................................... 1-34
1-15 Major components of an LTE network ............................................................................................................ 1-37
2-1 Complete view of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution ............................................................ 2-4
2-2 Major components of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE network .............................................................................. 2-7
2-3 Five phases of Services LTE support ............................................................................................................... 2-14
2-4 Converged BTS Portfolio ..................................................................................................................................... 2-27
2-5 LightRadio product family .................................................................................................................................. 2-29
3-1 Five phases of Services LTE support ................................................................................................................. 3-4
3-2 Consulting Services for each part of the LTE evolution path .................................................................... 3-6
3-3 IP Transformation Center (IPTC) ...................................................................................................................... 3-21
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxxiii
Issue 1 March 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-1 LTE Network Deployment Option (data only) ............................................................................................... 4-6
4-2 Major components of the LTE Network Deployment Option ................................................................... 4-7
4-3 LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option ............................................................... 4-10
4-4 Major components of the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option ............ 4-11
4-5 LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option .................................................................. 4-15
4-6 Major components of the LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option ............. 4-16
5-1 Migration paths to LTE ............................................................................................................................................ 5-2

5-2
5-2 Compatibility of the LTE Standard with previous standards ..................................................................... 5-3
6-1 NVIOT IOT process ................................................................................................................................................. 6-7

6-7
6-2 Sample results of band availability testing for a set of FDD UEs ........................................................... 6-9
6-3 Sample results of interoperability testing of FDD LTE UEs ................................................................... 6-10
7-1 IMS-related network elements that support VoLTE .................................................................................. 7-14
9-1 Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS) architecture .......................................................................... 9-4
9-2 CMAS implementation in LTE ............................................................................................................................. 9-5
10-1 Video calling ............................................................................................................................................................. 10-9

10-9
10-2 Video Communications Service architecture .............................................................................................. 10-11
11-1 Roaming Architecture with home routed traffic .......................................................................................... 11-5
11-2 Roaming Architecture with LBO and Home IP services .......................................................................... 11-7
11-3 Roaming Architecture with LBO and Visited IP services ........................................................................ 11-8
12-1 Lawful Interception in the Solution .................................................................................................................. 12-4
13-1 Public Safety Upper 700 MHz Band ............................................................................................................... 13-6
13-2 8950 SAM (Subscriber Activation Manager) for Public Safety Networks ........................................ 13-8
13-3 Alcatel-Lucent LTE hosted solution for Public Safety .............................................................................. 13-9
14-1 LTE Standards Reference Model Architecture for security ..................................................................... 14-3
14-2 Air Interface Security: Control Plane Security ............................................................................................. 14-5
14-3 Air Interface Security: User Plane Security .................................................................................................. 14-6
14-4 LTE Standards Reference Model Architecture for security ..................................................................... 14-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxiv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-1 Network elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution ....................... 15-3
16-1 Hardware for the 9412 eNodeB Compact or LTE Cube ........................................................................ 16-25
16-2 e-NodeB architecture with MC-TRXs .......................................................................................................... 16-27
16-3 Hardware for the MC-TRX module ............................................................................................................... 16-28
16-4 Hardware for the Sample RRH ........................................................................................................................ 16-35
16-5 Architecture of the Distributed eNodeB Solution ..................................................................................... 16-41
16-6 Hardware for the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU ................................................................................................. 16-44
16-7 Transmit Receive Duplex Unit (TRDU) hardware ................................................................................... 16-44
17-1 Hardware for the 7705 SAR-8 ......................................................................................................................... 17-11
17-2 Hardware for the 7750 SR ................................................................................................................................. 17-17
17-3 Use of the 7750 SR in LTE Network ............................................................................................................. 17-19
18-1 Hardware for the 5780 DSC ............................................................................................................................. 18-11
18-2 Hardware configuration of the 5780 DSC ................................................................................................... 18-12
18-3 5780 DSC logical design and connections to other network elements ............................................. 18-14
18-4 Hardware for the 7500 SGSN .......................................................................................................................... 18-22
18-5 Hardware for the 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN) .................................................................................................. 18-31
18-6 MG-ISM configuration ....................................................................................................................................... 18-33
18-7 Hardware for the 7750 SR (SGW) ................................................................................................................. 18-40
18-8 MG-ISM configuration ....................................................................................................................................... 18-42
18-9 7750 SR (SGW) connections to other network elements ...................................................................... 18-44
18-10 Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC in the UMTS Circuit Core Network ................................................. 18-47
18-11 Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC within R4 UMTS Network ................................................................... 18-48
18-12 Hardware for the 9471 MME ........................................................................................................................... 18-55
18-13 Hardware configuration of the 9471 MME ................................................................................................. 18-56
18-14 9471 MME connections to other network elements ................................................................................ 18-58
18-15 9471 WMM interfaces ........................................................................................................................................ 18-62
20-1 8610 ICC connections to the LTE network elements ................................................................................. 20-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxxv
Issue 1 March 2012
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-2 Hardware for the 8650 SDM HSS .................................................................................................................. 20-16
21-1 Hardware for the 7510 MGW .......................................................................................................................... 21-37
21-2 7510 MGW interfaces ......................................................................................................................................... 21-39
22-1 Use of OMC-CN in LTE network .................................................................................................................. 22-53
A-1 End-to-End LTE Solution architecture and interfaces ................................................................................ A-2
B-1 Solution-level and core LTE customer documentation ............................................................................... B-4
B-2 OLCS access ............................................................................................................................................................... B-6

B-6
B-3 Release Notes and manuals ................................................................................................................................... B-7
B-4 Selecting a document in the OLCS LTE Library list ................................................................................... B-8
D-1 Combined network management provided by the Mobile Backhaul Solution ................................. D-5
E-1 Control plane and user plane as shown in network diagrams ................................................................... E-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxvi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
About this document
About this document
Purpose
This document describes the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, and includes
information on the following topics:
• The need for Long Term Evolution (LTE) networks
• An overview of LTE
• The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
• Deployment options
• Network elements
• Interfaces
Reason for reissue

Technical information that is added or changed for this issue of this document is
identified in the following table. This table is empty because this document is the first
issue in LE4.0.
Table 1 Reason for revision
Feature ID Feature Name or New material or changes

(FID) Reason for Changes
- — —
It has to be noted that all the changes made in this document for the Releases are tracked
in Appendix F, “What's new in the Releases”.
Scope
This document presents the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution as it exists in the
current release. Future developments of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution are
not presented in this document.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxxvii
Issue 1 March 2012
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Intended audience
This document is useful to any reader new to LTE and new to the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution. This document is recommended reading for all network planners,
engineers, technicians, service providers, and managers who require a basic
understanding of LTE, of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution and of the LTE
network elements, products and services used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Related information
All Alcatel-Lucent LTE-related customer documents are available from the Online
Customer Support (OLCS) web site (https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/
lte/). For a list of Alcatel-Lucent LTE-related customer documentation, see Appendix B,
“Resources”.
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatel-
lucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxviii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Part I: LTE Solution Introduction
Overview
Purpose
This part gives an introduction to the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
Chapter 1, Long Term Evolution (LTE) 1-1

Chapter 2, The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution 2-1
Chapter 3, LTE Services 3-1
Chapter 4, Deployment options 4-1
Chapter 5, High-level migration strategy 5-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary I-1
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Solution Introduction Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
1 Long Term Evolution (LTE)
1
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains what Long Term Evolution (LTE) is and why service providers are
migrating to LTE. The sections in this chapter cover the following:
• The need for LTE
• What LTE is
• LTE basics: how LTE works
• New network components for LTE
• What an LTE network is
• The benefits of LTE
Covers ONLY the current release

Note that this document, the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Overview customer
document, 418-111-000, covers only the current release of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution. Future items that are not yet implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE End-to-End Solution are not described in this document. Therefore, when you read
this document, remember that new features that are not implemented in the current release
are not described in this document.
Contents
Aids to using this document 1-3

What has changed in this document? 1-3
Glossary 1-3
Specialized meaning for key terms 1-3
How to read this document 1-5
The need for LTE 1-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 1-1
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Increasing demand 1-7

Flattening revenue per user 1-7
The need for high leverage networks 1-8
Need to scale and converge older networks 1-9
Summary 1-10
LTE defined 1-12
What is LTE? 1-12
Applicable to all major wireless standards 1-14
How LTE works 1-16
Increasing throughput between the UE and the Core Network 1-18
All IP packet-based network 1-25
Use of new radio spectrum 1-25
Quality improvements 1-26
Comparing the LTE architecture with pre-existing architectures 1-26
New network components defined by LTE 1-29
Evolved UTRAN (eUTRAN) 1-31
Evolved Packet Core (EPC) 1-32
A sample LTE network 1-36
Sample LTE network 1-36
Benefits of LTE 1-39
High capacity and low latency 1-39
High leverage networks - new revenue opportunities 1-40
Efficiency and reduced operating costs 1-41
Provides “Efficient Always-On support” 1-42
Increased flexibility in use of spectrum 1-43
Increased spectral efficiency 1-43
Easy convergence and interworking with other wireless networks 1-44
User-visible benefits 1-44
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) What has changed in this document?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What has changed in this document?

New material and changes in this issue
A complete list of the changes and new material in this issue of this document is given in
the Reason for Revision in the About This Document chapter. Click on “Reason for
reissue” (p. xxxvii) to be taken to that list.
Glossary
For further information
For an extensive glossary of LTE terms and telecommunications-related terms, go to the
LTE End-to-End Solution Terminology, 418-111-012.
Specialized meaning for key terms

Introduction
Within this document, certain terms are used in specialized ways. This topic lists these
terms and gives the definitions used in this document for these terms.
Terms as used in this document

In this document, for brevity's sake, the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is
sometimes referred to as the Solution. Also, the following terms are used in this document
to represent the following hierarchy within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution:
Table 1-1 Terms used in this document and their meanings
Term Meaning
Solution or The complete Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, encompassing
Alcatel-Lucent LTE software, hardware, services, application enablement, and other
End-to-End Solution capabilities; that is, everything discussed in this book.
“parts” or “Major The three major parts of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution:
parts of the Solution” • LTE network
• LTE Services
• ng Connect program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Specialized meaning for key terms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-1 Terms used in this document and their meanings (continued)
Term Meaning
Component One of the six “domains” or major parts of a complete LTE network:
• Radio Access Network
• Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
• Core Network
• Common Core Network
• IMS and Applications
• OAM&P
Functional entity New logical entity defined by LTE designers for the LTE network, such
as the eNodeB or the MME.
LTE Technically speaking, the new network and the associated standards are
named the Evolved Packet System (EPS). Technically speaking, the
name “LTE” only refers to the radio access component of the new
network. However, the name “Long Term Evolution” is now widely
associated with the entire new network and is commonly used to refer
to the whole of the new network. Therefore, in this document, the name
“LTE” is used to refer to the entire network and to the associated new
radio access technology.
Network element A unique entity within a network, comprising one or more functional
entities. Each NE consists of multiple physical and logical resources,
which can be configured and monitored separately, or as a group. The
NE and the NE’s physical and logical resources are recognized as
distinct objects by an element or network management system. An
example of a network element would be a single Alcatel-Lucent 9412
eNodeB.
() Parentheses after a network element name represent the function or
functions that the network element plays in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution. For example, “5420 CTS (TAS)” represents the
following:
• 5420 CTS, which is the name of the network element
• (TAS), which means that in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution the 5420 CTS hosts the TAS function.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) How to read this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How to read this document

Covers ONLY the current release
The document, the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Overview customer
document, 418-111-000, covers only the current release of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution. Future items that are not yet implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE End-to-End Solution are not described in this document. Therefore, when you read
this document, remember that new features that are not implemented in the current release
are not described in this document.
Choose information for your technology type

This book is a reference guide to the complete Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution includes information for many different
radio access technologies. Therefore when you read the book you need to choose the
information that is appropriate to your circumstances and the radio access technology or
technologies in use at your customer site.
Example
For example, if you wish to read about deployment options and use 3GPP radio access
technology at your site, you will probably
• skip over the “LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option: eHRPD
1xEVDO” (p. 4-9) section
• and read the “LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option: GSM and
W-CDMA” (p. 4-14) section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The need for LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The need for LTE
Overview
Purpose
Long Term Evolution (LTE) is the commonly used name for the next generation of
broadband radio access technology for wireless networks. Before explaining more about
LTE, however, this document first describes why LTE is needed.
Pressures faced by service providers

Today's service providers are faced with multiple challenges that can be divided into the
following categories:
• Exponentially increasing demand for mobile broadband services
• Reduced revenues leading to the need for a changed business model
• Need for high leverage networks to support increased traffic and new revenue
opportunities
• Need to scale and converge older existing networks onto a common platform
Each of these challenges discussed below.
Contents
Increasing demand 1-7

Flattening revenue per user 1-7
The need for high leverage networks 1-8
Need to scale and converge older networks 1-9
Summary 1-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Increasing demand
The need for LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Increasing demand
Demand is growing
User demand for mobile broadband service is skyrocketing and growing beyond the
capacity of current systems. Mobile data usage surged in 2008 and continued ramping up
in 2009, fueled by the success of smart phones such as the iPhone, 3G-enabled laptops,
ultra-mobile PCs and innovative handsets, plus online video and social networking
applications.
Users want higher-level services

Users are demanding a higher Quality of Service (QoS) and a seamless multimedia
experience. Users are also expecting enriched, personalized services with a guaranteed
Quality of Experience (QoE). Examples of personalized service include video phone,
remote home web cam, and applications that provide services depending upon where the
user is located. In another example, the network could provide fair usage policies and
notifications to end users when certain bandwidth thresholds are reached.
2G and 3G systems designed for voice

In addition, many current second generation (2G) and third generation (3G) wireless
networks were originally designed to handle primarily voice traffic. Therefore, even when
additional capacity is added to these wireless networks, these wireless networks are not
built to handle large volumes of data gracefully.
Flattening revenue per user

Flattening revenues
For many service providers, subscriber growth rates are slowing due to market saturation,
and traditional user-paid revenues are flattening
Carrying more traffic but not being paid for it

Many web applications and content, particularly video, are sponsored by third parties
such as advertisers, and are thus free to end users. Service providers end up carrying extra
traffic from these applications on their networks without generating extra revenue, due to
flat rate, “all you can eat” charging.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Flattening revenue per user
The need for LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Need for new ways to generate revenue
This flattening revenue per user creates the need for ways to differentiate services
provided over LTE networks and to capture more revenue. The new controls over Quality
of Service (QOS) introduced by LTE have been created in response to this need.
The need for high leverage networks

Two key challenges facing service providers
High leverage networks address both of the following key challenges service providers
face today:
• Service providers must scale and converge a variety of complex existing networks
onto a common platform while at the same time continuing to cut costs.
• Service providers must change their business models to match the new realities of
their business. Service providers must find new and innovative ways of extracting
additional revenue from their existing networks, and also of generating new revenue
based on offering new services and applications.
What is a high leverage network?

A high leverage network is an intelligent network that allows service providers to
continuously offer both of the following, adjusting in real time to the needs of each:
• scalable and reliable bit transport at the lowest possible cost
• application enablement, Quality of Service (QoS) and traffic optimization
What is application enablement?

Application enablement is an approach that brings service providers and developers
together to combine their network and web capabilities to create and deliver high demand
advanced services and new intelligent applications. Application enablement is a way for
service providers to make new use of their assets of bandwidth, billing, location,
presence, and security, as well as their relationships with end users, to generate new
revenues. By offering these select capabilities as Application Programming Interfaces
(APIs), service providers give developers access to a set of tools to create new
applications and services to run on service provider networks. Unifying the strengths of
service providers and developers facilitates the creation of applications, and in turn,
creates a better end user quality of experience (QoE). As mentioned earlier, this process
also gives service providers new sources of revenue.

For further information on turning service provider networks into high leverage networks,
see:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) The need for high leverage networks
The need for LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
http://www2.alcatel-lucent.com/hln/
http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/application_enablement
For examples of applications that can be enabled by high leverage networks, see “High
leverage networks - new revenue opportunities” (p. 1-40).
Need to scale and converge older networks

Pressure to reduce costs
Service providers are experiencing constant pressure to reduce both capital expenses
(CAPEX) and operating expenses (OPEX) of current 2G and 3G wireless networks. This
topic lists various strategies service providers are looking at and using to reduce costs.
Scalable networks
Scalable networks are intelligent networks that can monitor the amount of bandwidth
needed for each session in real time and scale the amount of resources assigned to use the
minimum amount of bandwidth necessary. Scalable networks are necessary if service
providers want to continue to be low-cost bit transport providers.
Reducing network complexity

As networks grow larger and more complex, there is a pressing need to simplify the
networks and simplify the network interfaces that service provider personnel must learn
and use. A common platform reduces network complexity and reduces operating
expenses.
Using spectrum efficiently

Radio spectrum is a limited resource. Also, what radio spectrum does exist is fragmented
between different companies and different technologies. Thus it becomes more and more
important to make efficient use of the spectrum and to avoid the waste caused by the
fragmentation of the spectrum.
Saving space
As real estate grows more and more expensive, service providers find they can save
money by reducing the amount of physical space (called footprint) taken up by existing
equipment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Need to scale and converge older networks
The need for LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reducing carbon footprint
Service providers are also under pressure to reduce the energy consumption (carbon
footprint) of their networks. Service providers who reduce their carbon footprint can also
realize significant savings in energy costs, which are a key contributor to the Total Cost of
Ownership (TCO).
Summary
Graphical summary
The following figure summarizes the challenges facing service providers today.
Figure 1-1 Current challenges faced by service providers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Summary
The need for LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
KEY:
• Walled garden - The term “walled garden” is used here to refer to total service
provider control over applications, content, and media used by UEs communicating
over the service provider network.
• Wireless triple play - The term “wireless triple play” refers to the combined use of
voice, data and video.
• New Value Chain - The term “New Value Chain” refers to the new business model
required for today's service providers.
What do service providers need?

To remain competitive, service providers in today's marketplace need the following:
• Next-generation all-IP wireless broadband networks that can support Quality of
Experience (QoE) and the skyrocketing demand for bandwidth, while reducing total
cost of ownership (TCO), so that the service providers can continue to reduce the cost
of delivering services.
• Innovative business models that can generate additional revenue new sources.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE defined
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE defined
Overview
Purpose
The topics in this section define Long Term Evolution (LTE).
Contents
What is LTE? 1-12

Applicable to all major wireless standards 1-14
What is LTE?
What is Long Term Evolution (LTE)?
As stated previously, Long Term Evolution (LTE) is the commonly used name for the next
generation of broadband radio access technology for wireless networks. The
specifications for this technology were written by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project
(3GPP) standards body.
Actual name is EPS

The actual name used by the 3GPP body to describe the latest generation technology is
Evolved Packet System (EPS). The Name EPS is used to refer to both of the new network
components designed by the 3GPP standards committees: the eUTRAN and the EPC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) What is LTE?
LTE defined
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-2 Contents of the Evolved Packet System (EPS)
Note: For definitions of “control” and “user”, see “User plane and control plane
defined” (p. E-1).
Standards project committees

Two sets of 3GPP standards committee members worked on standards for the two new
network components.
Members of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) project worked on the evolution of the radio
interface and the access network, the Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
Network (eUTRAN) component.
Members of the System Architecture Evolution (SAE) project worked on the evolution of
the Core Network, the Evolved Packet Core (EPC) component.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) What is LTE?
LTE defined
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
“LTE” became the name commonly used
Technically speaking, the new LTE network is named the Evolved Packet System (EPS)
and the name “LTE” only refers to the radio access component of the new network.
However, the name “Long Term Evolution” is now widely associated with the entire new
network and is commonly used to refer to the whole of the new network. Therefore, in
this document, the name “LTE” will be used to refer to the entire network and to the
associated new radio access technology.
Applicable to all major wireless standards

Can interwork with all major wireless standards
The LTE standards have been designed to interwork with all the wireless network
standards supported by both the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) and the Third
Generation Partnership Project CDMA2000 (3GPP2) standards bodies. This means, for
example, that a call can easily be handed off from an LTE network to a non-LTE network
and back. For example, a person at a coffee shop could access the Internet using a local
WiFi network, but would lose the connection after leaving the coffee shop and after the
call was handed off. In contrast, if the user were using LTE instead of WiFi, the
connection to the Internet would be maintained even after the user left the coffee shop.
• 3GPP - The 3GPP standards body sets standards for the following technologies:
– Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), originally Groupe Spécial
Mobile (GSM)
– General Packet Radio Service (GPRS)
– Enhanced Data Rates For GSM Evolution (EDGE)
– Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (W-CDMA), which is also called
Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS)
– High Speed Packet Access (HSPA)
– Evolved High Speed Packet Access (HSPA+)
• 3GPP2 - The 3GPP2 standards body sets standards for the following technologies:
– Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
– Evolution-Data Optimized or Evolution-Data only (EV-DO or EVDO)
Supports both FDD and TDD

The LTE specification supports both Frequency Division Duplexing (FDD) and Time
Division Duplexing (TDD). FDD and TDD are multiplexing methods for radio channels.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Applicable to all major wireless standards
LTE defined
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Common design for the future
LTE has become the common targeted destination for the evolution of both 3GPP and
3GPP2 technologies.

For further information about the LTE standards, see “Tips for getting started with LTE
Specifications” (p. B-26).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
How LTE works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How LTE works
Overview
Purpose
To achieve significant breakthroughs in capacity accompanied by significantly reduced
costs, the LTE designers came up with the following key innovations:
• New technologies for increasing throughput between the UE and the Core Network
• A packet-only (IP-only) network
Other LTE innovations include:
• Use of new radio spectrum
• A new high-performance Radio Access Network
• New high-performance Core Network
• Quality improvements
The new LTE Radio Access Network and Core Network components are described
separately, in “New network components defined by LTE” (p. 1-29).
The other innovations are discussed in this section.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
How LTE works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Key LTE innovations
Figure 1-3 Key innovations of LTE
Contents
Increasing throughput between the UE and the Core Network 1-18

All IP packet-based network 1-25
Use of new radio spectrum 1-25
Quality improvements 1-26
Comparing the LTE architecture with pre-existing architectures 1-26
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Increasing throughput between the UE and the Core
How LTE works Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Increasing throughput between the UE and the Core Network

Introduction
A major innovation created by the LTE designers was a very large increase in the amount
of throughout between the UE and the Core Network.
To achieve this goal, the LTE designers came up with three innovations:
• A new modulation scheme on the downlink
• A new modulation scheme on the uplink
• Use of multiple antennas for transmission or reception
Each of these innovations is discussed in this topic.
Innovation for the downlink

The downlink is the communication link from the radios in the eNodeB to the user
equipment (UE).
On the downlink, the radios in the eNodeB transmit to the LTE UE using Orthogonal
Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA). OFDMA is a digital modulation scheme
that provides high peak data rates in high-spectrum bandwidths. OFDMA has been
theoretically possible for many years but modern advantages in technology have now
made it possible to use OFDMA in real-life wireless networks.
Note: OFDMA is used on the downlink for both FDD and TDD radio access
technologies.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-4 Basics of OFDM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure compares OFDM with CDMA.
Figure 1-5 Comparison of OFDM and CDMA
Innovation for the uplink

The uplink is the communication link from the UE to the radios in the eNodeB.
On the uplink, LTE UEs transmit to the eNodeB using Single Carrier Frequency Division
Multiple Access (SC-FDMA). SC-FDMA is a frequency-division multiple access scheme
that offers advantages in Peak-to-Average Power Ratios (PAPR) compared to pure
OFDMA.
Note: SC-FDMA is used on the uplink for both FDD and TDD radio access
technologies.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-6 Basics of SC-FDMA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure summarizes the throughput improvements in the RAN that are
designed in LTE.
Figure 1-7 LTE throughput improvements in the Radio Access Network (RAN)
MIMO techniques
LTE uses new multiple antenna techniques to manage the enlarged stream of data and to
minimize interference with other transmission streams.
MIMO stands for Multiple-input Multiple-Output (MIMO). In an LTE network, multiple
transmit and receive antennas are used at the eNodeB and at the UE. Use of multiple
antennas provides numerous data paths effectively operating in parallel. In LTE there
must be at least two antennas at the UE and two antennas at the eNodeB that are
dedicated to each active UE. For faster transmissions, the LTE standards allow for use of
four or eight antennas at the UE and four or eight antennas at the eNodeB. At present,
however, only two antennas are being used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Types of multiple antenna techniques
The following figure shows the various types of multiple antenna techniques.
Figure 1-8 Multiple antenna techniques
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Comparison of MIMO support in downlink and uplink
As shown in the following figure, more multiple antenna techniques are used on the
downlink than on the uplink in the initial release of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Figure 1-9 MIMO support on the downlink vs MIMO support on the uplink
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) All IP packet-based network
How LTE works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
All IP packet-based network

Introduction
The LTE network is an all-IP, packet-based, flat network that provides scalability and
flexibility while reducing costs.
End-to-End IP
LTE is a "pure packet" network. That is, the entire LTE network, end to end, is all IP and
all packet-based. In addition, all network protocols and interfaces are based on IP. In other
words, all parts of LTE are IP-based, from the UEs through the eNodeBs, through the
Core Network, and throughout the rest of the network.
Benefits
The major benefit of an all-IP network is a significant simplification of the network,
reducing the number of network elements in the network and improving operational
efficiency. This leads to less latency and faster transmission of data.
Having fewer network elements in the network also reduces Operating Expenses (OPEX).
No circuit switched traffic

The LTE network is the first wireless network to have no circuit-switched traffic. In other
words, LTE is a completely packet-based system. Therefore, the LTE designers planned
for the use of the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) platform with LTE when voice is
required. IMS can provide Voice over IP (VoIP) traffic over the packet-based LTE
network.
Use of new radio spectrum

Use of new spectrum
The increased flexibility in LTE's use of spectrum makes it possible to implement LTE in
small portions of radio spectrum that may have been previously unused. For more about
this, see “Increased flexibility in use of spectrum ” (p. 1-43).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Quality improvements
How LTE works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Quality improvements
Introduction
The LTE designers also implemented several quality improvements into the LTE network
standards. This topic discusses those improvements.
Use of SONs
LTE is the first 3GPP technology to include Self-Optimizing Networks (SONs). For more
about SONs in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, see “Use of Self-Organizing
Networks (SONs)” (p. 2-24).
Control over Quality of Service

LTE offers a full end-to-end Quality of Service (QoS) mechanism that is simpler and
more flexible to implement compared to existing 2G and 3G QoS mechanisms. The LTE
QoS mechanism is fully focused on IP delivery and is expected to be much easier for
operators to deploy and manage. The LTE QoS mechanism enables the service provider to
offer new value added, differentiated services per user and between users allowing
increased revenue from these premium services.
New UE state
Another quality improvement in the LTE standards is the new UE state, STANDBY,
which is discussed in “Provides “Efficient Always-On support”” (p. 1-42).
Comparing the LTE architecture with pre-existing

architectures
Introduction
This topic compares the LTE architecture with the architecture of the 2G and 3G wireless
networks that preceded LTE.
One network instead of two

In traditional networks, voice traffic goes to a circuit switched network and data traffic
goes to a packet network. For LTE, there is only one network, the Evolved Packet Core
(EPC) network, which provides both data and packetized voice.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Comparing the LTE architecture with pre-existing
How LTE works architectures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pictorial comparison
The following figure compares the LTE architecture with legacy 2G/3G architecture.
Figure 1-10 Comparison of LTE architecture and a sample CDMA 2G/3G

architecture
Functionally the same

Functionally speaking, an LTE network carries out the same basic tasks as a 2G or 3G
network. However, LTE provides the same functionality using a single network as
opposed to the combination of two networks (circuit-switched and packet-switched) used
in 2G/3G wireless networks.
Because of this movement of functions to different network entities in LTE, the LTE
architecture varies significantly from the architecture of a typical 2G or 3G wireless
network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Comparing the LTE architecture with pre-existing
How LTE works architectures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How functions move to different places in LTE
To achieve an all-IP network and a flatter network, the LTE designers sometimes placed
functions in different entities than in previous wireless networks. The following figure
shows wireless functions that are common to all wireless networks. As shown in the
figure, the same functions are located in different places and sometimes use different
hardware in an LTE wireless network than in a 2G/3G wireless network.
Figure 1-11 Migration of basic telecommunications functions from 2G/3G to LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the two new network components defined for LTE networks:
• Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (eUTRAN)
• Evolved Packet Core (EPC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eUTRAN and EPC
The following graphic shows the eUTRAN and the EPC in a simplified view of an LTE
network.
Figure 1-12 eUTRAN and EPC in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
Contents
Evolved UTRAN (eUTRAN) 1-31

Evolved Packet Core (EPC) 1-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Evolved UTRAN (eUTRAN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Evolved UTRAN (eUTRAN)

What is the eUTRAN?
The evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (eUTRAN) is part of the
improved and simplified LTE Radio Access Network (RAN). The eUTRAN contains
radio frequency transmitters and receivers used to communicate directly with the User
Equipment (UE).
The LTE standards define only one functional entity within the eUTRAN: the eNodeB.
What is a Radio Access Network?

A Radio Access Network is that part of a wireless network that sits between the UE and
the Core Network.
What is the eNodeB?

The eNodeB is a new functional entity in LTE. The eNodeB replaces the base station (BS)
and also takes over some of the functions of the Radio Network Controller (RNC) or Base
Station Controller (BSC). The eNodeB connects the subscriber’s UE (also called mobile
device) to the network.
What is a base station?

A base station (BS) is a transmission and reception station in a fixed location that handles
cellular traffic and consists of one or more antennas, radios, and electronic circuitry. The
base station connects the UE to the Core Network. The base station can also serve as a
bridge between all mobile users in a cell. A base station is called a Base Transceiver
Station (BTS) in the GSM wireless network.
Takes on some RNC functions

In non-LTE networks, radio resource allocation and configuration of base stations are
provided by a separate network entity. In CDMA and UMTS networks this network entity
is called the Radio Network Controller (RNC). In GSM networks this network entity is
called the Base Station Controller (BSC).
To achieve a flatter network and reduce latency, the LTE designers removed the RNC and
BSC from the LTE network. In the LTE network, the eNodeB carries out some of the
functions of the RNC and BSC.
Note: In LTE, not all of the RNC functions are assigned to the eNodeB. Some
functions are assigned to the Mobility Management Entity (MME).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Evolved UTRAN (eUTRAN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General functions of the eNodeB
The eNodeB carries out the following general functions:
• Receives and sends radio signals to/from the antennas
• Performs radio resource management
• Schedules uplink data from and downlink data to the UE
• Provides Ethernet links to the EPC entities and other eNodeBs
Evolved Packet Core (EPC)

What is the EPC?
The Evolved Packet Core (EPC) is the IP-based packet-only Core Network for LTE.
What is the Core Network?

The Core Network (also called Network Core) is a new multiservice IP mobile core
introduced with LTE but also envisaged to become a converged core in the future. The
Core Network functions as the central part of a telecommunications network and provides
high capacity communications facilities that set up and control communications between
UEs and with other Packet Data Networks (PDNs). The major functions of a Core
Network include aggregation, authentication, call control and switching, charging, and the
providing of gateways to other networks.
Unifies previous CS and PS components

As explained in “Comparing the LTE architecture with pre-existing architectures”
(p. 1-26), LTE is the first 3GPP network without a circuit switched (CS) component.
The EPC provides mobile core functionality that, in previous mobile generations (2G and
3G) has been realized through two separate networks: a circuit-switched (CS) network for
voice and a packet-switched (PS) network for data. In LTE, the two former
circuit-switched and packet-switched networks are combined into one packet-based
network.
What does the EPC do?

The EPC carries all kinds of traffic – voice, video, and data (although all traffic is in
packet form). All eNodeB data connections travel through the EPC connecting the UE to
the Packet Data Network (PDN) and the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).
The EPC also supports:
• Mobility with legacy 2G and 3G networks in the packet switch component
• Mobility across different types of networks (3GPP - 3GPP2 network handovers)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Evolved Packet Core (EPC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits of the EPC
As shown in Figure 1-13, “evolved Packet Core (EPC) compared to earlier Core
Networks” (p. 1-33), the EPC gives service providers far greater capacity, the ability to
control end to end Quality of Service (QoS), and the ability to support new business
models and new services.
Figure 1-13 evolved Packet Core (EPC) compared to earlier Core Networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Entities within the EPC
Figure 1-14 Functional entities within the EPC
The EPC is made up of the following four functional entities:

• Mobility Management Entity (MME) - The MME provides mobility and session
control management and authenticates UEs.
• Serving Gateway (SGW) - The SGW routes and forwards user packets and acts as the
mobility anchor for the user plane for LTE handoffs and inter-Radio Access
Technology (RAT) handovers. Examples of inter-RAT handovers include handovers
from LTE to CDMA, or from LTE to W-CDMA.
(For definitions of user plane and control plane, see Appendix E, “Defining and
displaying the user and control plane”.)
• Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW) - The PGW provides UE session connectivity
to external packet data networks. The UE may have more than one session active with
a PGW for accessing multiple PDNs. The PGW also acts as the anchor point for
non-3GPP networks such as First generation Evolution-Data Optimized or
Evolution-Data Only (1xEV-DO) and Worldwide Interoperability of Microwave
Access (WiMAX).
• Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) - The PCRF supports the following
functions:
– Network control of Service Data Flow (SDF) detection, gating, Quality of Service
(QoS) and flow based charging
– Dynamic policy decision on service data flow treatment in the PCRF
(PGW/SGW)
– Authorization of QoS resources.
Note: Some configurations may have additional optional network elements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Logical not physical
The new functional entities defined by the designers of LTE are logical, not physical. In
other words the LTE designers did not assign functions to specific hardware. The LTE
designers also did not specify that each functional entity had to be implemented on a
separate piece of equipment. Thus the LTE designers left the possibility open that the
work of two or more separate LTE functional entities could be performed by the same
physical network element.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how the new LTE network components are combined with
previously existing network components to form a complete LTE network.
Note that the sample LTE network shown here is the simplest of LTE networks. The
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution also supports other types of LTE networks. For
information on the different LTE network deployment options available within the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, see Chapter 4, “Deployment options”.
Contents
Sample LTE network 1-36
Sample LTE network

Introduction
The new network components defined for LTE must be combined with existing network
components to make up a functioning LTE network. This topic lists the six components
required for a functioning LTE network and shows how the two new network components
specially defined for LTE, the eUTRAN and the EPC, fit into a functioning LTE network.
Six components and what they do

A functioning LTE network requires the following six major components:
• The Radio Access Network - that part of a wireless network that sits between the UE
and the Core Network.
In LTE, the Radio Access is called the Evolved UTRAN (eUTRAN) and is provided
by the eNodeB.
• The Backhaul Network - the intermediate links between the Radio Access Network
and the Core Network - and the Transport Network - the backbone network that
connects everything else.
• The Core Network - the central part of a wireless network that provides high capacity
communications facilities that set up and control communications between UEs and
with external networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Sample LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In LTE, the Core Network is called the evolved Packet Core (EPC) and is provided by
four new functional entities: the Mobility Management Entity (MME), the Serving
Gateway (SGW), the Packet Data Network (PDN) Gateway (PGW) and the Policy
and Charging Rules Function (PCRF).
• The Common Core Network - Network made up ot NEs that perform functions
common to both the EPC and the IMS core, for example, HSS.
• IMS and Applications - Network elements that are used by the IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS) platform in interworking with the PSTN and for selected
applications that are IMS-enabled, such as a Short Message Service Center (SMSC).
NOTE: For data-only implementations, IMS is not required. IMS is required for voice
traffic and for other real-time IMS-based services, such as real-time video.
• OAM&P Products - The set of Operations, Administration, Maintenance and
Provisioning products that manage all the network elements in the LTE network.
Figure 1-15 Major components of an LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Sample LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The network elements listed in Figure 1-15, “Major components of an LTE
network” (p. 1-37) within the Common Core Network and within the IMS and
Applications area are there for demonstrative purposes only. Any given
implementation of an LTE network may not have exactly those functions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Benefits of LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits of LTE
Overview
Purpose
This section explains the major benefits of LTE and explains why wireless service
providers are migrating to LTE.
Contents
High capacity and low latency 1-39

High leverage networks - new revenue opportunities 1-40
Efficiency and reduced operating costs 1-41
Provides “Efficient Always-On support” 1-42
Increased flexibility in use of spectrum 1-43
Increased spectral efficiency 1-43
Easy convergence and interworking with other wireless networks 1-44
User-visible benefits 1-44
High capacity and low latency

Introduction
LTE networks have a combination of high capacity and low latency, both of which are
needed for today's broadband networks.
Increased downlink and uplink rates

LTE provides significantly increased downlink and uplink peak data rates.
Typical peak data rates are:
• Uplink: 2.00-2.25 times the current 3G data rates
• Downlink: 100 Mbps which is 3 times the current 3G peak rate
More throughput; less latency

LTE networks offer high peak throughout compared with previous broadband
technologies, and significantly lower latency.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) High capacity and low latency
Benefits of LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is latency?
Latency is a term for the time delay experienced in a system. Latency in wireless
networks has many causes. One cause of latency is the time delay when information is
transferred from one network element to another. Cumulative latency has a negative effect
on the performance of a network.
Benefit of reduced latency

LTE's lower latency rates make it possible for service providers to provide new
applications that require low latency, such as Voice over IP (VoIP) and video phone.
High leverage networks - new revenue opportunities

Introduction
As explained in “The need for high leverage networks” (p. 1-8), service providers need
high leverage networks to survive and thrive in today's challenging marketplace. This
topic contains examples of new revenue-generating applications that can be run on LTE
networks.
Note: High leverage networks can be created using 2G/3G technology. However,
most applications that run on high leverage networks need the additional bandwidth
and speed provided by LTE networks.
Variable payment rates for quality of service

With the extensive control over the network that high leverage networks have, it will be
possible for a wireless service provider to offer a charging mechanism based on Quality
of Service, similar to what wireline service providers already offer.
Cloud computing
Cloud computing is the providing of Internet-based computing to users on demand. In
cloud computing, shared resources, software, and information are provided to user's
computers and other devices on demand, in the same way as electricity is currently
handled. Though cloud computing can be implemented in non-LTE networks, the high
bandwidth supplied by LTE is key for implementing cloud computing on a large scale.
Fixed wireless
A service provider can use an LTE network to provide broadband fixed wireless services.
Such a network could be installed and used even in an area where the service provider is
not a local cellular phone provider.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) High leverage networks - new revenue opportunities
Benefits of LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enterprise applications
Using high leverage networks, service providers could supply enterprise applications for
businesses to use. Enterprise applications are applications used within a single business,
such as order management systems. The high bandwidth supplied by LTE is crucial to
supporting new high bandwidth-requiring enterprise applications.
Vertical applications
Using high leverage networks, service providers could also supply vertical applications
for businesses to use. Vertical applications are applications used within a single type of
business, such as a medical software program used only in the healthcare industry. Again,
the high bandwidth supplied by LTE is crucial to supporting new high bandwidth-
requiring vertical applications.
Location-based services
Location-based services could also be provided. For example, if an end user is walking
down a certain street, an application could send a message to the end user's UE telling
him or her that there is a sale in a store just up the street selling items that he or she often
purchases.

For further information on turning service provider networks into high leverage networks,
see:
http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/application_enablement
Efficiency and reduced operating costs

Reduced cost
LTE is significantly cheaper than other wireless air interfaces for high speed data. For
example, at high utilization levels, LTE costs only 25 to 50 percent of the cost of High
Speed Packet Access Plus (HSPA+).
Reduced CAPEX and OPEX

Because of their flatter structure and fewer network elements, LTE network provides a
significant reduction in CAPEX and OPEX and Total Cost of Ownership (TCO).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Provides “Efficient Always-On support”
Benefits of LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provides “Efficient Always-On support”

Introduction
The LTE standard uses a new UE state to provide what is called “Efficient Always-On
support”. This state was defined in earlier standards but never used until now. This topic
defines the state commonly called “Efficient Always-On support” and explains the new
state and why it is needed.
Note: The material in this topic is drawn from Evolved Packet System (EPS) The LTE
and SAE Evolution of 3G UMTS by Pierre Lescuyer and Thierry Lucidarme.
What is “Efficient Always-On support?”

To support new applications such as instant messaging (IM), in which people exchange
short communications in real time, there is a need for LTE UEs to quickly turn on and off,
to send and receive this bursty data. This state of being able to quickly turn on and off is
called Efficient Always-On support. To the user, the UE appears to be always-on.
However, to save energy and system resources, the UE is not 100% on, but in a new state
introduced by the LTE standard.
The concept of “efficient Always-On support” is also referred to as control plane latency.
Traditional UE states
Until LTE there were only two states for a UE:
• IDLE - In the IDLE state the UE is reachable but dormant.
• ACTIVE - In the ACTIVE state the UE is actively transmitting or receiving data.
New UE state - STANDBY

To meet the need for the UE able to turn on and off quickly, the LTE designers make use
of a third state, halfway between the traditional states, called STANDBY.
How it works
In the STANDBY state, the UE is silent but always connected. When a UE is in the
STANDBY state, it takes only a very short time for the UE to transition to the ACTIVE
state.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Increased flexibility in use of spectrum
Benefits of LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Increased flexibility in use of spectrum

Can use spectrum allotments of varying sizes
LTE designers created LTE to be able to operate in spectrum allocations of different sizes,
including 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz, for both uplink and downlink.
At present the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution only operates on 5, 10 and 10
MHz.
Flexibility in implementation
This increased flexibility in use of spectrum allows flexible deployment of LTE and
variable use of spectrum according to expected traffic, projected need, and spectrum
availability.
Easier to deploy
Since an LTE network can be deployed using a small amount of spectrum, it is now much
easier to deploy an LTE network, even in regions where large chunks of spectrum are
scarce.
Increased spectral efficiency

More bits per Hz
LTE technology is designed for increased spectral efficiency; that is, more bits can be sent
in the same amount of frequency spectrum than with previous radio access technologies.
LTE achieves this better spectral efficiency through the use of OFDMA technology,
advanced MIMO technologies and innovative interference management techniques such
as Frequency selective scheduling (FSS) and/or Inter-Cell Interference Coordination
(ICIC).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Easy convergence and interworking with other wireless
Benefits of LTE networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Easy convergence and interworking with other wireless

networks
Designed to work seamlessly with all wireless networks
The LTE standard has been designed to interwork with all the wireless network standards
supported by both the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) and non-3GPP networks
including the Third Generation Partnership Project CDMA2000 (3GPP2) standards
bodies.
An LTE network can easily be integrated with any of these networks.
User-visible benefits
Introduction
LTE will change the experiences of end users. This topic lists some of the major changes
that different types of users will see when using an LTE network.
Improved user experience

End users will have an improved user experience. Users will be able to have more
bandwidth available, experience faster downloads, and enjoy new applications that can be
provided because of LTE's high-speed throughput and lower latency.
Users will also experience a seamless multimedia environment and see enriched,
personalized services with a guaranteed Quality of Experience (QoE).
Benefits for corporate users

For business subscribers, benefits will be easily seen and felt in applications where data
throughput is important, such as faster email and file uploads, enhanced VPN
connections, and smoother access to the Internet. Business subscribers will also see the
benefit of LTE in interactive applications where latency is crucial, such as IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS)-based Voice over IP (VoIP), mail and file synchronization with an
online server, peer-to-peer applications, SIP multimedia services including video and
voice conferencing over IP, application sharing, and more. Vertical markets where
information accuracy, reliability and immediacy are key will also see benefits. For
example, the health care sector will be able to deploy medical applications that require
low latency and high-resolution imaging.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) User-visible benefits
Benefits of LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits for mass-market users
Mass market users will benefit from improvements delivered by LTE as well, including
smoother and faster photo and video downloading or uploading, better online gaming
experiences, and improved on-the-go access to social networks such as YouTube,
Facebook or MySpace. These users will perceive an "always-on" experience and have a
richer Quality of Experience than is possible with today's wireless networks. On top of
those improvements to existing services, LTE will also enable the introduction of new
services such as high-definition audiovisual content formatted for mobile screens and
Ultra Mobile Devices (UMDs), new multimedia services, geolocalization applications
with graphical and contextual content, and multi-user interactive gaming.
Benefits for service providers

LTE networks offer higher data throughput to UEs than the older wireless networks. As a
result, LTE will allow service providers to deliver new and advanced mobile broadband
services, such as video delivery, on a wide range of frequency bands.
LTE will also give service providers the chance to open new markets and deliver new
applications, creating new revenue sources.
Finally, service providers can make use of LTE to reduce their Total Cost of Ownership
(TCO). The cost per byte of LTE is expected to be significantly less than the cost per byte
of existing networks. The cost reductions will occur because of the network simplification
of LTE's flat all-IP architecture and the enhanced capacity delivered by LTE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Long Term Evolution (LTE) User-visible benefits
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
2 2 he Alcatel-Lucent LTE
T
End-to-End Solution
Overview
Purpose
This chapter gives a high-level overview of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End to End Solution
and describes the following:
• The major components of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
• The advantages and new revenue opportunities brought to the service provider by the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
Contents
About the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution 2-3

What is the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution? 2-3
Parts of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution 2-5
LTE network 2-6
Components of the LTE Network 2-6
About the Radio Access Network 2-8
About the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network 2-8
About the Core Network 2-9
About the Common Core Network 2-10
About the IMS and Applications Area 2-10
About the OAM&P products 2-11
LTE Services 2-13
Summary of services 2-13
For further information 2-15
The ng Connect program 2-16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the ng Connect program 2-16

How the ng Connect program works 2-17
Benefits of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution 2-19
All the benefits of LTE 2-20
A pre-Integrated Solution 2-20
Benefits of not having a multivendor solution 2-21
Ease of evolution 2-22
Preservation of capital 2-23
Use of ng Connect 2-23
Significant cost reductions in Mobile Backhaul 2-24
Use of Self-Organizing Networks (SONs) 2-24
Alcatel-Lucent's “Green Touch” initiative 2-25
Converged RAN approaches 2-26
Converged RAN 2-26
LightRadio ™ 2-28
Summary table 2-30
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution What is the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution?

Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution defined
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is a next-generation wireless broadband
solution that combines an LTE network with converged and upgraded aggregation and
transport nodes, LTE Services and an application enablement program.
Need for the Solution

Wireless service providers are looking for sustainable profitable growth from new
wireless broadband networks and business models while optimizing network scalability
and total cost of ownership with a highly efficient infrastructure. This network
transformation must support an agile, scalable and open approach to service creation and
delivery that enriches the end-user experience and capitalizes on the explosive growth of
new content and media and the capabilities of new consumer and industrial wireless
devices.
For more about the needs of today's service providers, see “The need for LTE” (p. 1-6).
Complete Solution
As shown in Figure 2-1, “Complete view of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution” (p. 2-4), the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution goes beyond LTE radio
access technology and an LTE network to include backhaul, common core, the IP
Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) platform, LTE Services, and the ng Connect program.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution What is the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-1 Complete view of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
Note: The Backhaul Network, Transport Network, and User Equipment are included
in the figure for the sake of completeness but are not discussed in detail in this
document.
About User Equipment

User Equipment (UEs) are not manufactured by Alcatel-Lucent and are thus not discussed
in this chapter. However, Alcatel-Lucent does have an extensive InterOperability Testing
(IOT) program for UEs. For more information on Alcatel-Lucent's IOT program, see
Chapter 6, “UEs and Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Parts of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parts of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution

Three parts
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is made up of the following three parts:
• The all-IP completely packet-based End-to-End LTE network
• LTE Services from Alcatel-Lucent's Services team
• An ecosystem to support the rapid delivery of next generation broadband services and
applications (ng Connect)
Each part is explained in its own section in this chapter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE network
Overview
Purpose
The backbone of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is an all-IP completely
packet-based End-to-End LTE network. The topics in this section describe that network.
Contents
Components of the LTE Network 2-6

About the Radio Access Network 2-8
About the Core Network 2-9
About the Common Core Network 2-10
About the IMS and Applications Area 2-10
About the OAM&P products 2-11
Components of the LTE Network

Major components
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE network is made up of the following major components:
• the Radio Access Network (RAN)
• A Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
• A Core Network
• A Common Core Network
• An IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) platform
• Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P) support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Components of the LTE Network
LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-2 Major components of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE network
Note: There are other minor network elements, such as the 9959 NPO, that provide
additional OA&M support but are not shown in the diagram.
Note: The 8965 C3S is not needed anymore, as the 7750 PGW is now able to address
directly the 8615 IeCCF.
Note: It has to be noted that in LE4.0, we introduce in IMS and Applications domain,
the new OAM&P product 1360 COM that combines the 1310 OMC-P and the 1300
XMC into a single Element Management System. The 1310 OMC-P and 1300 XMC
products remain supported but to simplify the figure only 1360 COM is kept.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution About the Radio Access Network
LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the Radio Access Network

What is the Radio Access Network?
The Radio Access Network (RAN) is that part of a mobile wireless network that sits
between the UE and the Core Network. The Radio Access Network uses one of several
different forms of radio access to transmit communications to the UE and receive
information from the UE.
LTE version
In LTE, the Radio Access Network is called the eUTRAN.
LTE component for the RAN

There is a new component for LTE network part of the RAN, the eNodeB. For
information on the eNodeB and on Alcatel-Lucent's eNodeB offerings, see the following:
• “Evolved UTRAN (eUTRAN) ” (p. 1-31)
• “9412 eNodeB” (p. 16-22)
• “LTE RRH Product Family” (p. 16-31)
• “9926 d2U eNodeB Base Band Unit” (p. 16-39)

For descriptions of all the RAN-related network elements that can be used in the different
deployment options of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, see Chapter 16, “
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network”.

What is the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network?
The Backhaul Part of the Transport Network is the term used for the portion of the overall
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Transport Network that connects the cell site
with the MTSO functionality, which for LTE is made up of the EPC and other network
elements.
What is the Transport Network?

A transport network is a generic term used for the entire network of transmission
equipment from the cell site all the way to the Public Switched Data Network (PSDN)
and the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). The Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution Transport Network is the Transport network used in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution About the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Role
The Backhaul Part of the Transport Network provides connectivity between the eNodeB
and the SGW and the MME in support of the S1 interface and between eNodeBs in
support of the X2 interface.

For information about the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network and the network
elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network, see Chapter 17, “Network
elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network”.
About the Core Network

The Core Network (also called Network Core) is the central part of a wireless network
and provides high capacity communications facilities that set up and control
communications between UEs. The major functions of a Core Network include
aggregation, authentication, call control and switching (which handles mobility),
charging, and the providing of gateways to other networks.
LTE component for the Core Network

The new LTE component for the Core Network is the EPC, which contains several
functional entities. For information on the EPC and the functional entities within it, see
the “Evolved Packet Core (EPC)” (p. 1-32).

For information about the Core Network and the new network elements introduced to
support LTE in the Core Network, see Chapter 18, “Network elements used in the Core
Network”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution About the Common Core Network
LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the Common Core Network

What is the Common Core Network?
The Common Core Network is a set of network elements that perform functions common
to both the Core Network and the IMS, such as the Lawful Intercept Gateway (LIG),
Home Subscriber Server (HSS), Offline Charging Systems (OFCS), Online Charging
Systems (OCS) and DNS/ENUM.
Also used in other networks

The network elements in the Common Core Network are not LTE network elements per
se but are also used in other Alcatel-Lucent networks and products.

For descriptions of all the network elements that can be used in the Common Core
Network in the different deployment options of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution, see Chapter 20, “Network elements used in the Common Core Network”.
About the IMS and Applications Area

introduction
This topic describes the use of the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) platform and
IMS-enabled applications in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
What is IMS?
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is an architectural framework, designed by the 3GPP
standards body, that is a platform for delivering Internet Protocol (IP) packet-based
multimedia services to end users. The IMS platform provides a service delivery
environment (SDE) for IMS-enabled applications. Part of the service delivery
environment provided by IMS is a common set of functions and procedures for access,
session control, bearer control, policy, and charging. IMS is also used for higher level
applications and services such as video services, voice services, call features, and so
forth.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution About the IMS and Applications Area
LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is “IMS-enabled”?
When IMS functions and procedures are used by an application the application is said to
be IMS-enabled. For an application to be IMS-enabled, the UE registers with IMS, and
IMS ensures authentication of the UE. This action allows all SIP traffic to traverse the
S-CSCF, which can perform billing and other services. This action also engages the IMS
applications.
What is the role of IMS in the Solution?

IMS has been added to the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to fill several major
roles:
• Providing and controlling Access Gateways, including firewalls
• Providing a framework for communication services and other applications to be
deployed to end users to enhance revenue
• Enabling and running a variety of IP-based applications, such as Short Message
Services (SMS) and Voice over IP (VoIP)
• Supporting online and offline charging functions enabling billing for IMS applications
and services

For more information about IMS and for descriptions of all the IMS-related network
elements that can be used in the different deployment options of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution, see Chapter 21, “Network elements used for IMS”.
About the OAM&P products

introduction
This topic describes the OAM&P products used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
What is OAM&P?
Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P) is a general term
used to describe the processes, activities, tools, standards, and so forth involved with
operating, administering, managing, maintaining, and provisioning any network.
Converged OA&M for LTE

The 5620 Service Aware Manager (5620 SAM) supports the OA&M for the Backhaul
Network, Transport Network, MME, and eNodeB.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution About the OAM&P products
LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Other OA&M products
Other OA&M products are used to provide OAM&P for the non-LTE portions of the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution. An example of these other products would be
the 1360 COM or the 1300 XMC, which manages the 8650 SDM HSS and the
applications on the 8650 SDM HSS.

For more on the 5620 SAM, see “5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM)” (p. 22-20).
For descriptions of all the other products that are used for OA&M in the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE End-to-End Solution, see Chapter 22, “OAM&P products”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE Services
Overview
Purpose
LTE Services for the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution are provided by the
Alcatel-Lucent Services organization
Contents
Summary of services 2-13

Summary of services
Summary diagram
As shown in the following diagram, the Alcatel-Lucent Services team provides help for
service providers in all aspects of LTE network planning, implementation and support. In
this chapter, LTE support is grouped into the following phases:
• Consulting
• Analysis
• Design
• Deployment
• Operation
The services offered by Alcatel-Lucent in each of these phases are explained this chapter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Summary of services
LTE Services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-3 Five phases of Services LTE support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution For further information
LTE Services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LTE Services chapter
For more information on the LTE Services offered by the Services organization, see
Chapter 3, “LTE Services”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
The ng Connect program was developed in response to the needs of service providers for
increased revenues and new revenue opportunities. The topics in this section describe the
ng Connect program and explain how ng Connect can help service providers.
Contents
About the ng Connect program 2-16

How the ng Connect program works 2-17
About the ng Connect program

What is ng Connect?
ng Connect is an ecosystem of network resources and expertise that enables rapid
delivery of next generation broadband services and applications. ng Connect was started
by Alcatel-Lucent but is made up of partners from both Alcatel-Lucent and a wide variety
of other companies.
Purpose of ng Connect
Members of the ng Connect program work together to do the following:
• Accelerate deployment of new services and devices
• Drive new sources of revenue with new business models
• Expand the connectivity landscape
More than simple applications

The next-generation ecosystem embodied in the ng Connect program goes far beyond just
handsets and specific individual applications. The next-generation ecosystem brings
together content, media, applications and devices in multiple ways over multiple
networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution How the ng Connect program works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How the ng Connect program works

How it works
Members of ng Connect create and deliver Solution Concepts (SC), which are technical
and business cases for 4G LTE applications.
Three key facets

The ng Connect program has three key facets, each of which is a critical element in
delivering an SC:
• SC Development: Member of ng Connect develop Solution Concepts (SCs) and
pre-integrate and test the SCs over real networks. Currently, SCs are developed in the
Alcatel-Lucent Plano, Texas and Ottawa, Canada SC labs.
As of first quarter 2010, fourteen SCs have been developed:
– Mobile Enhanced Reality with Social Sharing
– Next Generation Social Music Experience
– E-Learning
– E-Healthcare
– Interactive Gaming on LTE
– Multi-screen Solution with User-Generated Content
– LTE Connected Car
– LTE Connected Camera
– Digital Signage with dynamic updates over LTE
– Video enhanced interactive Digital Signage
– Celebrity Tracker
– Gaming Storefront and ng Games
– Remote security camera and home control
– Secure Anywhere single sign on
• Primary Research: Members of ng Connect pool primary research from their
respective organizations against the topic SC, giving a much deeper understanding of
end-user desires and willingness to pay. This material is then used both in positioning
a specific SC in service provider trials and as input to the business modelling
exercises.
• Business Modelling: Employing the skills of the Bell Labs Business Modelling group,
specific SCs are assessed for opportunities to develop new business models.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution How the ng Connect program works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Areas of focus
Activities within ng Connect are focused in five areas:
• Consumer media and entertainment
• Enterprise collaboration and e-Healthcare
• Automobile connectivity
• Computing experience
• Digital signage

For further information on the ng Connect program, see the ng Connect web site:
http://www.ngconnect.org/
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End

Solution
Overview
Purpose
Alcatel-Lucent is unique in the industry in providing the following:
• Broad product portfolio covering all aspects of the network
• A complete End-to-End Solution
• Professional expertise to build and operate the Solution
• Help for service providers in developing and implementing innovative plans to
generate new revenue.
The topics in this section expand upon these and other benefits provided by the
Contents
All the benefits of LTE 2-20

A pre-Integrated Solution 2-20
Benefits of not having a multivendor solution 2-21
Ease of evolution 2-22
Preservation of capital 2-23
Use of ng Connect 2-23
Significant cost reductions in Mobile Backhaul 2-24
Use of Self-Organizing Networks (SONs) 2-24
Alcatel-Lucent's “Green Touch” initiative 2-25
Converged RAN approaches 2-26
Converged RAN 2-26
LightRadio ™ 2-28
Summary table 2-30
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution All the benefits of LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
All the benefits of LTE

Benefits of LTE
At the heart of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is an LTE network. Thus the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution gives the service provider all of the benefits of
an LTE network:
• High capacity and low latency
• Efficient Always-On support
• Increased flexibility in use of spectrum
• Easy convergence and interworking with other wireless networks
• A richer Quality of Service (QoS) and Quality of Experience (QoE) for end users
• Greater efficiency and reduced operating costs
For more information on each of these benefits, see “Benefits of LTE” (p. 1-39).
A pre-Integrated Solution
Introduction
The fact that the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is a pre-integrated network
saves a significant amount of time and money for service providers. This topic lists ways
in which not having to perform integration saves time and money for service providers,
and also provides a higher quality network.
No need to perform costly integration

In a multivendor solution, a service provider must spend a significant amount of money
integrating the network and making sure that the all the network elements work together
as planned. With the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, there is no need to
perform costly integration. All the network elements in the Solution are already
integrated.
Network level testing

Each Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is fully tested in the Alcatel-Lucent
Network Level Test (NLT) lab before being delivered. Testing on individual network
elements and on the integration of network elements is also performed. Thus the service
provider can rely on a proven, high-quality, already-integrated solution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution A pre-Integrated Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Flexibility
Since all of the building blocks in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution are from a
single vendor, the network is more flexible. Service providers can grow or reduce parts of
the network much more easily because all the network elements come from
Alcatel-Lucent and have been designed to work together.
Benefits of not having a multivendor solution

Significant savings in deployment and operational costs
Use of the complete Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution instead of a multivendor
solution results in significant savings to a service provider in lowered costs of
deployment, growth, and traffic and capacity management. This is a case in which a
complete network from Alcatel-Lucent is better than the sum of the piece parts in a
multivendor solution.
Other benefits beyond cost savings

Use of the complete Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution gives the service provider
other, additional benefits, beyond cost savings. The most significant of these other
benefits are listed in this topic.
Coordinated product lifecycle

When the entire product is managed by one vendor, you have a common architecture and
requirements and joint release planning. A coordinated product lifecycle also allows the
needs of the service provider's individual network to be taken into account throughout the
lifecycle of the product.
Converged OA&M for LTE

The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution has one OA&M platform for all of the LTE
network elements, starting in LE 3.0. The benefits of converged OA&M include fewer
northbound interface per OSS, common IT functions, simplified processes and faster
problem resolution.
Accelerated time to market

Using the complete Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution also gives accelerated time
to market.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Ease of evolution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ease of evolution
Helping with the migration
This topic explains how the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is set up to help
service providers easily migrate to LTE. The topic also summarizes the ways in which
Alcatel-Lucent can help a service provider migrate to LTE, before, during and after the
migration.
End-to-end services
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Services staff have the products and expertise to design, implement,
integrate and fine-tune the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to meet the service
provider's unique needs. Services provided include the following:
• Market analysis and strategic planning
• Capacity forecasting and planning
• Deployment planning
• Building the solution
• Testing the solution
• Installing solution
• Validating the installed network and performing interoperability tests
Alcatel-Lucent field testing

Each individual Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution for each service provider is
completely tested in Alcatel-Lucent's Network Level Test (NLT) lab before it is
implemented at the service provider's site.
Customized transformations
Members of Alcatel-Lucent LTE Services team can provide customized transformations
for individual service provider networks. There is a great flexibility in the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE End-to-End Solution. Tailoring the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to meet
the needs of an individual service provider increases the ease of the transition and
improves the usability of the final implemented network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Preservation of capital
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Preservation of capital
Upgrade, often using existing equipment
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is built wherever possible from previously
existing Alcatel-Lucent equipment. Thus, the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
protects a service provider's capital equipment by reusing that equipment in the new
network. The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution also can incorporate existing 2G
and 3G wireless networks into the new network. The existing 2G and 3G wireless
networks can continue to work as before for as long as necessary. Continuing to use
existing 2G and 3G technology along with LTE technology within the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE End-to-End Solution keeps service providers from the expenditure of upgrading all
of their network elements at the same time.
Use of ng Connect
ng Connect
Alcatel-Lucent has a corporate initiative to work through the ng Connect program with
other organizations on new applications and on ways for service providers to provide new
services and generate new revenue in their networks.
For more about ng Connect, see “The ng Connect program” (p. 2-16).
Example: the Connected Car

ng Connect recently created a new application that has become very popular: an
LTE-connected car. Web sites for ng Connect and the LTE connected car are listed at the
end of this topic.
Resources
For further information on ng Connect and on the Connected Car, see:
http://www.ngconnect.org/ecosystem/connected-car.htm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Significant cost reductions in Mobile Backhaul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Significant cost reductions in Mobile Backhaul

Mobile Backhaul Solution
Alcatel-Lucent's Mobile Backhaul Solution a product offering that provides both
significant cost savings and increased bandwidth in the transport area. The Mobile
Backhaul Solution integrates multiple mobile transport technologies into a more
cost-effective end-to-end network architecture. For more about the Mobile Backhaul
Solution, see Appendix D, “Mobile Backhaul Solution”.
Use of Self-Organizing Networks (SONs)

What are SONs?
Self-Optimizing Networks (SONs) are networks that perform basic network planning and
optimization tasks for themselves to reduce the amount of human interaction needed. In
SONs, in the event of a cell or site failure, self-healing methods are triggered to resolve
the resulting coverage/capacity gap to the extent possible. If these self-healing methods
do not work, then the problem is reported so that a human being can fix the problem.
Purpose of SONs
The concept of SONs grew out of a common consensus that future radio access networks
needs to be easier to plan, configure, manage, optimize and heal. Obviously, if networks
can fix lower-level problems for themselves, this frees up service provider employees to
work on other tasks.
Standards
The 3GPP Release 8 specifications have a series of standards for SONs, including 36.902.
LTE is the first

LTE is the first 3GPP technology to actually include SONs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Use of Self-Organizing Networks (SONs)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use of SONs
The LTE specifications for SONs are being implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution over several releases. The following are examples of SONs that are
currently implemented in the Solution.
• The 9452 Wireless Provisioning System (WPS) can automatically calculate and assign
a Physical Cell ID (PCI) to an eNodeB.
• From LE3.0 onwards, the ANR feature supports Automatic Neighbor Relations for
LTE eNodeB Cells to LTE eNodeB Cells. Automatic Neighbor Relations means that
an LTE eNodeB will automatically find neighboring LTE eNodeB Cells.
• From LE4.0 onwards, the Inter RAT (IRAT) neighbor exchange between UMTS and
LTE systems is supported to report newly discovered 3G neighbors from the 4G
management system to the 3G management system. In this release, only UTRAN
(FDD) RAT is supported. The feature will be later extended to GERAN and CDMA.
The 3G neighbor cell discovery is based on measurements required from the eNodeB
to UEs to report the strongest cell for a given UTRAN frequency. The discovered
neighboring relationships are provided to the 4G EMS (5620 SAM) by the eNodeB.
The neighboring information can be introduced in the 3G EMS (9353 WMS) via WPS
.
For more details on 5620 SAM documentation, see “5620 Service Aware Manager
(SAM)” (p. 22-20). For more details on 9353 WMS documentation, see “9353 WMS”
(p. 22-37) .
• In addition, the 5620 SAM can perform a Self Config operation. Self Config involves
performing steps to automatically configure an LTE eNodeB; that is, to send down the
work order automatically when the LTE eNodeB is managed. An eNodeB software
load is also pushed down as part of this Self Config.
Alcatel-Lucent's “Green Touch” initiative

Introduction
In response to the urgent need to preserve our natural environment, Alcatel-Lucent and
Bell Labs have created something unique: Green Touch. Green Touch is a consortium of
telecom service providers, manufacturers, universities and nonprofit organizations with a
mission to conceive and demonstrate the effectiveness of this revolutionary low-energy
network, all within the next five years.
Benefits
The benefits of Green Touch to the service provider are significant. One key benefit is
that Green Touch networks will use less electricity by a factor of a thousand, resulting in
significant cost savings. Another key benefit will be the opportunity to reach markets
around the world made up of people who at present cannot afford UEs because they
cannot afford the energy cost to keep UEs charged.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Alcatel-Lucent's “Green Touch” initiative
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more about Green Touch and its possibilities for the future, see the following:
(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/pressroom/multimedia/videos/ALCATEL_
GREENTOUCH.html)
See also the information at the following site: http://www.greentouch.org/
Converged RAN approaches

Two approaches
Alcatel-Lucent's Converged RAN offering has two approaches:
• Converged RAN approach
• LightRadio ™ approach
Each approach can be used separately or in combination with the other approach, as
needed.
The Converged RAN approach is discussed in “Converged RAN” (p. 2-26).
The LightRadio ™ approach is discussed in “LightRadio ™ ” (p. 2-28).
Converged RAN
Two deployment scenarios
The Converged RAN approach has two deployment scenarios:
• integrated
• distributed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Converged RAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows both deployment scenarios.
Figure 2-4 Converged BTS Portfolio
Converged base station components

Alcatel-Lucent is using the following methods to converge base station components:
• Creating software-defined modules in the Remote Radio Head (RRH).
Software-defined modules make it possible for one RRH to support multiple radio
access technologies simultaneously, as long as the different radio access technologies
are in the same band.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Converged RAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note that software defined modules are also being created for Transmitter Receiver
Data Units (TRDUs) and Multi-Carrier Transceiver (MC-TRX) as well.
• Supporting multiple technologies in one Base Band Unit (BBU) so several BBUs can
be combined into one. This is accomplished by having multiple cards in the BBU that
support multiple technologies.
• Integrating multiple hardware components into one integrated frame.
Distributed base station components

In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution the LTE RRH Product Family can be
used as part of a Distributed eNodeB Solution, where RRHs can be placed up to 20km
away from the BBU.
Use of the Distributed eNodeB Solution can save space since the BBU does not have to
be physically located with the RRH. Also, the RRH used with the Distributed eNodeB
Solution does not require a cabinet, which also saves space.
For more about the Distributed eNodeB Solution, see “About the Distributed eNodeB
Solution ” (p. 16-40).
LightRadio ™
Use of LightRadio ™
Use of LightRadio ™ is the ultimate Converged RAN solution, achieving far greater space
and power savings than traditional Converged RAN solutions. LightRadio ™ consists of
Wideband Active Antenna Arrays (WB-AAA), multi-Band RRHs (MB-RRH), System on
a Chip (SoC) based BBUs, innovative transport solutions including CPRI compression,
new ATCA based network controller based on Cloud technology, and a single OA&M
solution supporting all LightRadio ™ nodes, as shown in the following figure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution LightRadio ™
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-5 LightRadio product family
Benefits
One major benefit of the LightRadio ™ solution is that it can support multiple radio access
technologies in multiple different bands, which cannot be done by current RRHs.
LightRadio ™ is also a new architecture developed by Alcatel-Lucent where the base
station can be distributed into RF component elements (that could be located on poles,
sides of buildings, towers, and so forth) and baseband/network control that can be
centralized leveraging Cloud capabilities. CPRI compression techniques are capable of
reducing backhaul requirements by up to a factor of three.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution Summary table
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Summary table
Solutions for customer problems
The following table summarizes how the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
contains solutions to current customer issues and problems.
Table 2-1 Solutions for customer issues and problems
Customer Issue or How Alcatel-Lucent Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent

business problem addresses the issue approach
Minimize network total A highly-scalable, efficient The Alcatel-Lucent solution combines
cost of ownership as data end-to-end network that uses an efficient cell site evolution with
traffic volumes increase all-IP, service-aware packet core multi-standard base stations (2G+3G+LTE), a
and transport, LTE radio access, a flexible all-IP completely packet-based
scalable IMS service delivery wireless/wireline transport solution (Mobile
platform and cost-cutting Backhaul Solution), an all-IP, purpose-built
operation and maintenance LTE evolved packet core (EPC) and a proven
services IMS service delivery platform.
Expensive real estate to LightRadio ™ — a new Solves problem of explosive growth in
support large, bulky cell architecture where the base station demand for Wireless data and also solves the
towers. is broken into its component problem of expensive real estate for cell
elements and distributed through tower location.
the network or ‘carrier cloud.’
Additionally the various cell
tower antennas are combined and
shrunk into a single powerful, Bell
Labs-pioneered multi frequency,
multi standard (2G, 3G, LTE)
device that can be mounted on
poles, sides of buildings or
anywhere else there is power and
a broadband connection.
Boost service agility, A broad ecosystem of Alcatel-Lucent is driving the creation of a
while overcoming risk pre-integrated devices and total LTE ecosystem that includes content,
and complexity of applications applications, advertising and devices. Our
integrating third-party program supports a successful migration to
devices and applications LTE. The program enables new business
models by helping ensure connectivity,
distribution, content and resource
management, QoS, applications and service
integration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-1 Solutions for customer issues and problems (continued)
Customer Issue or How Alcatel-Lucent Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent

business problem addresses the issue approach
Manage total Service-driven transformation While competitors focus on the migration of
transformation of IP program including end-to-end network elements, Alcatel-Lucent helps
wireless networks, business planning, design, service providers address end-to-end
including end-to-end integration, migration and networks, business models,
operations, while implementation to help service services/applications, operations and security.
minimizing time to providers achieve The Alcatel-Lucent end-to-end program
market, disruption and speed-to-market and predictable management approach provides holistic
risk results. management of the complex
interdependencies characteristic of
transformation projects.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
3 LTE Services
3
Overview
Purpose
LTE Services for the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution are provided by the
Alcatel-Lucent Services organization. This chapter describes these services and the
benefits they offer for the LTE service provider.
Contents
Services Portfolio 3-3

About the Services Portfolio 3-3
Advanced Integration Methodology (AIM) 3-5
About AIM 3-5
Consulting 3-6
About Consulting Services 3-6
Consulting Services offered 3-7
Analysis 3-9
Analysis Services offered 3-9
Design 3-13
Design Services offered 3-13
Deployment 3-14
About Deployment Services 3-14
Project Management Services 3-14
Installation Services 3-15
Integration Services 3-16
Field Integration 3-16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Application Integration Solution 3-17

Solution Integration and Validation Service 3-18
OSS/BSS Transformation and Integration 3-18
Security Enabler Integration 3-19
Migration Services 3-19
IP Transformation Centers 3-21
Operation 3-23
About Operation Services 3-23
Maintain 3-23
Optimize 3-24
Operate and manage 3-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services About the Services Portfolio
Services Portfolio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Services Portfolio
About the Services Portfolio

Need for services
LTE has an extensive impact on a service provider's radio network, core, operations,
billing, security, and service delivery components. Given these impacts, service providers
need help to successfully implement, integrate, and operate LTE networks. The
Alcatel-Lucent Services Portfolio has been designed to give expert help to service
providers for all of these components.
Includes existing networks

The LTE Services Portfolio offered by the Services organization is a comprehensive set of
services that includes both new LTE services and enhancements to existing services.
Built on expertise of Alcatel-Lucent

The breadth and depth of the Services Portfolio reflects the expertise of the
Alcatel-Lucent Services organization in multivendor network integration capabilities and
its proven leadership in wireless transformation and migration.
Summary diagram
As shown in the following diagram, the Alcatel-Lucent Services team provides help for
service providers in all aspects of LTE network planning, implementation and support. In
this chapter, LTE Services are grouped into the following phases:
• Consulting
• Analysis
• Design
• Deployment
• Operation
The services offered by Alcatel-Lucent in each of these phases are explained this chapter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services About the Services Portfolio
Services Portfolio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-1 Five phases of Services LTE support
Uses Advanced Integration Methodology (AIM)

The Services organization uses Alcatel-Lucent’s Advanced Integration Methodology
(AIM), a standards based delivery framework used for Solution delivery. AIM is also
described in this chapter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services About AIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About AIM
What is AIM?
The Advanced Integration Methodology (AIM) is the Alcatel-Lucent framework for the
delivery of Systems Integration (SI) type engagements within Alcatel-Lucent. The
methodology is based on the principles of Systems Engineering, which is an industry
proven approach to dealing with high complexity engineering design projects.
Specialized methodology
The AIM methodology has been specialized to address solutions that contain Network
Integration, Telco IT Integration (OSS/BSS/Applications) and/or Migration Services.
AIM can be used in any communications-related Systems Integration engagement,
including those encountered within strategic industries such as energy, transport, and the
public sector.
Scalable
AIM has been designed to be highly scalable and can be used for projects ranging from
small simple projects up to large complex multivendor prime Integrator engagements
incorporating a multi-release program.
Defined lifecycle
AIM has a defined lifecycle that is supported by a set of processes covering both the
Technical (engineering) and Program/Project Management aspects of SI Services
delivery.
Built on experience and best practice standards

AIM represents the cumulative knowledge and experience of a range of senior
practitioners engaged in SI Programs and Projects. AIM draws extensively on the best
practice approaches defined in the ISO/IEC15288, INCOSE, CMMI and PMI standards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services About Consulting Services
Consulting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Consulting
About Consulting Services

Consulting Services
By combining network and IT software-centric views, Consultants in the Services
organization assist service providers with strategic transformation decisions such as
technical feasibility, organizational and network readiness, economic return, support cost
optimization and IT effectiveness. The consultants capture and translate the service
provider’s vision and strategy into an executable plan, from conception to field execution
to service availability.
Figure 3-2 Consulting Services for each part of the LTE evolution path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services Consulting Services offered
Consulting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Consulting Services offered

Types of services offered
This topic lists and describes all of the Consulting Services offered by the Services
organization.
Network Performance and QoS Analysis

Assessing your network’s Quality of Service (QoS) and its impact on business
performance and proposing network performance optimization and customer experience
improvement options.
Site Consolidation
Providing a detailed analysis and set of recommendations to achieve footprint reduction,
site consolidation and real-estate valorization.
Mobile Backhaul Audit and Design

Building the business case for reducing cost per bit and designing backhaul solutions
ready for next generation access technology and services.
Sustainable Energy Audit and Design

Helping operators optimize energy usage and/or implement eco-friendly power and
innovative cooling solutions.
High Leverage Network and IP Transformation

Providing a methodological framework for capturing requirements and priorities, and
designing and planning predictable transformation and migration.
Application Enablement, Service Creation and Monetization

Assessing new business models and designing solutions to monetize service provider
assets and enable new service development and delivery.
Operation and OSS/BSS Transformation

Addressing all aspects of people, process, platform, and metrics that service providers
must consider when preparing an operational transformation to support converged
networks and services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services Consulting Services offered
Consulting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fixed and Mobile Multimedia
Addressing video services delivery technology, network planning and optimization,
end-user experience, differentiation strategies, business models, content mix, player and
partner ecosystems.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services Analysis Services offered
Analysis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Analysis
Analysis Services offered

This topic lists and describes all of the Analysis Services offered by the Services
organization.
SIOP Services
The Alcatel-Lucent Site Implementation solution provides extensive Site Implementation
and Outside Plant (SIOP) services. These services include designing, building and
managing end-to-end deployment of the physical infrastructure for mobile and radio sites,
readying them for equipment installation. Typical examples of infrastructure worked with
include towers, antennas, and concrete pads. The work performed includes concept
development, tendering, design and execution. Services supports the following type of
SIOP Services:
• Deployment Delivery Management
• Site Implementation and Outside Plant (SIOP)
• Architecture and Engineering
• Site Construction
• Site Inspection
Site Survey
Visit customers’ physical locations to survey and assess on-site structural and equipment
conditions, including equipment locations, cabling assignments, power, and related site
information.
Design Engineering
Perform design engineering functions, such as analysis and design of physical plant
components, creation of network order requirements, order preparation, capacity analysis,
and site space planning.
Site Engineering
Help ensure that the correct installation site material is ordered and that the optimal
equipment layout for installation of ordered equipment at the network site is determined.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Analysis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment Engineering
Help ensure that the correct footprint hardware is ordered and that the ordered equipment
is configured for optimal performance in the customer’s network.
Site Records
Perform detailed record keeping to accurately document the configuration of equipment
and physical placement within the network, initially creating site records as well as
performing updates and ongoing maintenance.
Engineering Assessment
Assess equipment and site conditions (that is, power system, batteries, grounding),
including surveys, inspections, tests, problem/issue identification, and make
recommendations for fixes, upgrades, and improvements.
Solution Architecture Advisory Services

Solution Architecture Advisory Services can be tailored to the specific needs of the
service provider, and can include some or all of the following:
• Working directly with the service provider to convert requirements/problem
statements into an end to end solution architecture.
• Acting as the service provider's primary point of contact for solution technical issues.
• Leading the technical delivery of the solution across Alcatel-Lucent in partnership
with PM.
• Communicating and documenting the service provider's architectural and technology
choices across the Alcatel-Lucent technical team.
Radio Network Planning and Audit Service

LTE is adapting Smart Antenna Systems in order to reach the expected throughput and
coverage estimated for 4G systems as defined by the 3GPP standards. LTE will be
implementing multiple antenna techniques (MIMO, beam forming and antenna diversity.
Such sophisticated technology adds new challenges to the network design process for
wireless technology. These new challenges include such new tasks as defining the antenna
system for different clusters based on customer needs/topology and addressing the issues
for co-sites, where an eNB is located with the legacy (2G/3G base station).
Co-sitting needs to be addressed because most LTE technology will be deployed after
former GSM/UMTS systems, and deploying new sites will not be as simple as is was for
early technologies.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Analysis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent Radio Network Planning experts apply special consideration to
aspects that are of high importance for Quality Of Service (QoS), such as interference and
parameters impacting the planning. In addition, planning measures are carried out to keep
the interference between the cells as low as possible.
Finally, this service also deals with the challenges related to RF deployment of LTE
networks, one of which is the evaluation of site candidates that are presented by the site
acquisition teams. These candidates are checked from a technical point of view and
ranked according to their suitability. If required, technical site surveys precede the final
decision whether a site is chosen or rejected. When the sites, their locations, and their
particularities are known, the Radio Network Engineer defines the antenna system,
coverage and capacity requirements as well as interference limitation. With determined
site locations and antenna heights as inputs, service coverage predictions are performed.
Relevant planning parameters such as pilot output power placement of the antenna are
taken into account.
Operations Readiness plan

Total solution processes and products for LTE are tested against a rigorous and extensive
suite of test cases and generic data before becoming generally available to the public. This
service is available in conjunction with the purchase of Integrated Solution Planning
Services from Alcatel-Lucent. Under this service, test cases are developed and executed
based upon critical requirements documents created as part of those Integrated Solution
Planning Services.
OSS/BSS Implementation Planning and Analysis

Alcatel-Lucent’s OSS/BSS Implementation Planning and Analysis (IPA) is an analysis to
discover LTE customer-specific operational needs and to map those needs to specific
requirements. The IPA facilitates the identification of requirements to fully implement the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE/IMS/other Platform and to integrate it into the LTE service provider’s
operational environment.
The IPA process determines appropriate solution strategy and details. The output of the
IPA is a mutually agreed-upon plan that defines the requirements, activities, deliverables,
roles, responsibilities, and timeline for the deployment of the solution. Establishing a
clear roadmap helps the LTE service provider become knowledgeable, comfortable and
self-sufficient with the solution. The IPA process consists of two phases: Requirements
Gathering and Solution Specification.
Tasks performed by this service include the following:
• Assembling a team of specialists to develop the IPA
• Baselining the architecture, the strategy and the implementation plan
• Defining roles, responsibilities, and requirements
• Other activities required for a detailed IPA report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Analysis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Security Organizational Assessment
Alcatel-Lucent’s LTE Security Organizational Assessment Service reviews security
policies and organizational processes to identify threats and security vulnerabilities within
the customer’s LTE environment organization. This leads to recommendations to fill
identified gaps, with a documented analysis, supporting justification and a proposed
remediation plan.
Security Architecture Design

Based on the security requirements that may have been set forth by the customer and an
initial security risk assessment of the LTE solution to deploy, Alcatel-Lucent uses best
practices and security configuration baselines to determine the appropriate high-level and
low-level security designs for the LTE environment, in line with any applicable
Alcatel-Lucent reference architecture.
Architecture Security Assessment

The LTE Architecture Security Assessment is based on existing threat and risk models
developed by Alcatel-Lucent and industry best practices, and results in a prioritized list of
security vulnerabilities, documented analysis, supporting justification, and a proposed
remediation plan. Such an assessment is based on the following two approaches:
• A “black-box” approach is used to cover tests from a vantage point outside the LTE
platform environment.
• A “white-box” approach is taken for internal tests whereby the customer provides in
advance some information on the LTE environment internal network topology.
To achieve the objective, Alcatel-Lucent performs vulnerability scans of the systems that
are part of the LTE delivery platform, complemented by manual vulnerability analysis on
the systems. Tests can be performed from the following vantage points, as applicable and
agreed upon with the customer:
• External scan of hosts of the LTE ePC platform exposed to subscribers.
• Internal scan of a customer network (IS, management, and so forth) from the LTE
platform, aiming at providing the assurance that the LTE platform cannot be used as a
vector to compromise other customer environments.
• Internal vulnerability scan of the LTE platform itself, to provide a mapping of
vulnerability that may be leveraged for infrastructure compromise.
The security assessment phase will be documented in a report that will be presented to
appropriate stakeholders. This report will include a proper description of the
infrastructure exposure and highlight relevant threats to the infrastructure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services Design Services offered
Design
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Design
Design Services offered

This topic lists and describes all of the Design Services offered by the Services
organization.
RF Planning and Design

The RF Planning and Design Service consists of the following three phases:
• Phase 1 - Initial Planning: RF propagation and traffic simulation techniques
• Phase 2 - Final Design: calibration of RF propagation tools, coverage prediction and
QoS analysis, and issuance of search area rings for site locations
• Phase 3 – Implementation: drive test surveys, candidate site surveys and selection,
and close-out site documentation
Pre-Launch RF Optimization
Alcatel-Lucent’s LTE Pre-Launch RF Optimization Service provides fine-tuning of
system parameters and configurations to attain optimum quality of service from the
network. Optimization is achieved by performing RF measurements via drive tests,
analyzing the results, and adjusting system parameter settings to meet system
performance criteria.
ePC and eUTRAN Network Architecture and Design

Alcatel-Lucent network architecture and design experts will analyze and define the
network architecture and evolution scenarios, formulate recommendations and work with
the service provider to identify the effective solution option. Following this, the
Alcatel-Lucent experts will verify the dimensioning and capacity aspects according to the
service provider’s site constraints, following standard processes and verifying the overall
correct application of new features. Throughout the project, Alcatel-Lucent network
architecture and design experts act as trusted advisors, partnering with the service
provider to identify service provider needs and answer service provider questions. The
Alcatel-Lucent network architecture and design experts dedicate special consideration to
aspects that are of high importance for Quality of Service (QoS), such as the control of
end-to-end (E2E) QoS and the network management in general.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services About Deployment Services
Deployment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deployment
About Deployment Services

The Services Organization offers a variety of Deployment Services, including the
following:
• Project Management Services
• Installation Services
• Integration Services
• Migration Services
• IPTC Services
Each type of Deployment Service is explained separately in this section.
Project Management Services

Types of services
Project Management includes the following services:
• Coordinating contracted activities through final delivery of all elements.
• Managing resources, which includes allocating staff and other resources to support the
project schedule.
• Analyzing and tracking project risks, reporting status and executing risk response
plans.
• Escalating and issuing jeopardies as necessary.
• Managing close-out activities before resources are released.
• Verifying that all activities within the scope of work have been completed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services Installation Services
Deployment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Installation Services
Types of services
This topic lists all the Installation Services that are provided during Project Deployment.
Site Preparation
Provide advance preparation of customer sites to enable seamless physical installation of
network element equipment, including installation of equipment mounting structures,
overhead framework, cable racking, power, and so forth.
Equipment Installation
Install multi-technology equipment. Tasks include assembling, cabling and wiring, and
testing hardware components, and verifying that the equipment is functioning as
engineered and specified.
Equipment Removal
Safely and efficiently remove old/unused equipment and cables from network sites for
replacement with newer technology. Oversee disposition of old/unused equipment,
whether for scrap or recycling, resale, or redeployment elsewhere within a network.
Installation Quality Assessment

Provide installation quality analysis, recommendations, and support to help improve the
reliability and interoperability of physical network infrastructure and critical business
quality management processes, including assessment of current network infrastructure
and installed workmanship, standardization of installation practices, and consultation on
quality management systems.
Note: The Installation Quality Assessment Service is available only in North America.
Installation Staging
Perform a full inventory, inspection, assembly, configuration, and testing of network
equipment in a controlled environment at an Alcatel-Lucent or customer facility, remote
from the planned network implementation site, delivering a ready-for-installation system
directly to the customer’s location for on-site implementation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services Integration Services
Deployment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Integration Services
About Integration Services
Alcatel-Lucent Network and System Integration Services supports both service provider
and enterprise customers in their network and business evolution with a focus on these
key transformation services:
• Network Design, Integration, Optimization and Migration expertise to assist our
customers in getting the most out of their network investments through network
planning and design facilitation, network infrastructure optimization, multivendor
network integration, and reliable migration to next generation infrastructure.
• OSS/BSS, Service Delivery Platform (SDP) and Service Oriented Architecture (SOA)
solutions and integration services that include Business and Operational Process
Consulting, Billing and Customer Relationship Management (CRM), Service
Assurance, and Service Fulfillment. These services enable faster time-to-market
(time-to-revenue), increased customer retention, and optimized operational/IT costs.
• Fixed, Mobile and Multi-screen Multimedia Integration Services that include
integrated multivendor solutions (such as IPTV, VoIP, and Mobile TV) that allow
content distribution over various channels (broadband, mobile and Internet). The
practice offers intermediation services between service providers, enterprise
customers and web community services. Additionally, the Alcatel-Lucent portfolio
includes middleware and applications for multiple screens. To help bring it all
together in an innovative multiscreen video and multimedia services offering, our
customers can trust in Alcatel-Lucent global system integration leadership.
Types of services
This topic lists all the Integration Services that are provided during Project Deployment.
Field Integration
Field Integration
Field integration involves configuring and integrating installed products into networks
and verifying that the equipment is fully functional within the overall network, including
translations, validation, and acceptance testing.
Other services that fall within the Field Integration service are explained in this topic.
Product Integration
Alcatel-Lucent's Field Integration services provide the resources, processes, tools and
experience necessary to create network element provisioning data to meet customer
specifications, provision elements, verify interfaces amongst network elements and
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services Field Integration
Deployment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
management systems, perform acceptance testing, coordinate all required network
integration activities, and integrate installed equipment to help ensure it is operational
within the overall network.
Product Capacity Growth

Adds nodes, ports, channels, sectors, carriers, and other resources to a product to increase
capacity of the current operational product.
Product Upgrades
Upgrades product to new releases (pre-launch), adds services or new features, performs
reconfiguration, or modifies capabilities of the product after it has been deployed.
Product Operations Support

Ensures proper product operation within a network by providing general maintenance,
including trouble resolution.
Product Validation
Validates product-level operation against customer requirements within contract for
compliance.
Product Operations Knowledge Transfer

Provides customer’s staff with informal training on product operations, beyond those that
are available in product-level training.
Application Integration Solution

To increase their revenue and competitiveness, Communication Service Providers (CSPs)
are looking at leveraging their network assets to create differentiating applications. CSPs
can develop the applications themselves or work with third party advertisers or
applications and content providers.
To help CSPs reach their goals, Alcatel-Lucent’s Application Integration Solution helps
CSPs develop, market, and provide proof of concept for new applications. This solution
also provides trial facilities as well as guidance that is controlled, secured, and stepwise
so that CSPs are assured of reaching immediate results.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services Solution Integration and Validation Service
Deployment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Solution Integration and Validation Service

Solution Integration and Validation Service
Alcatel-Lucent’s Solution Integration and Validation Service provides a laboratory
environment where the customer can test voice, data and/or video services over specified
technologies, which may include optical, Ethernet, IP, ATM, Wireless/Mobility and/or
Circuit Switching. This service helps ensure the interoperability of the network elements
and associated Element Management Systems and Network Management Systems
according to the requirements of the proposed. Testing areas may include integration,
performance, redundancy, scalability and/or management testing. The Integration Lab
Testing Service is based on requirements developed from network planning and design
documentation. Alcatel-Lucent engineers work with the customer to define test plans that
conform to the customer’s test requirements, perform the testing according to an
agreed-to test plan, and provide the customer with a written report of the test results.
OSS/BSS Transformation and Integration

OSS/BSS Transformation and Integration
Provide service operations consulting, migration services, system integration capabilities
and OSS/BSS and application services solutions including a portfolio of enablers,
applications and products from leading strategic partnerships. Alcatel-Lucent's OSS/BSS,
SDP and SOA solutions and services portfolio is ideally suited to fixed, mobile and
converged carriers who have non-sustainable subscriber growth as well as those facing
fierce competition forcing them into an IP transformation to deliver higher-value, secure
user-centric services faster. Migration and transformation projects can impact so many
areas in a service provider network, such as new services and service delivery
environment, new business models, new partners, new technology, new OSS/BSS
systems and applications, new organizations, new security measures and new skills
needed by service provider personnel. The OSS/BSS Transformation and Integration
Service helps service providers to successfully navigate all of these changes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services Security Enabler Integration
Deployment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Security Enabler Integration

Security Enabler Integration
The LTE Security Architecture Design work item will lead to the selection of a number of
security enablers to be integrated on the LTE deployment to ensure appropriate coverage
of the identified security risks. For the selected enablers, Alcatel-Lucent produces the
following documents:
• Appropriate configuration (databooks) for the security equipment and others relevant
systems for which security-related functions are expected.
• Integration and acceptance tests plans, to enable the validation of the deployed
enablers from a security standpoint, and verify that the security enablers fulfill their
expected functionalities.
Once these documents are approved, Alcatel-Lucent employees perform the
implementation and configuration of the security enablers. Integration tests are then
performed to validate that all systems are correctly deployed and configured from a
security standpoint. Finally, acceptance tests are performed.
Migration Services
Purpose
This topic describes Services' Network Migration services.
Network Migration defined

When a carrier chooses to replace network elements in the converged strategy, a
migration is the process of moving all customers and traffic from the legacy to the new
converged network elements.
Network Migration defined

Network migration is thus the process of moving all customers and traffic from the legacy
to the new converged PS core network.
Challenges and risks

Network migration raises a number of challenges, including the following:
• minimizing the disturbances to the end-users (service outage, performance
degradation) and to the service provider's operation
• minimizing transformation costs and lead-time in a multivendor environment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services Migration Services
Deployment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sample migration activities
The migration process typically starts once the new network elements are deployed and
running as an overlay of the legacy network elements. The process includes multiple
activities, the list of which depends on the service provider environment. The following
list of typical activities is for illustration only; it is neither exhaustive nor mandatory:
• Solution architecture, migration strategy and planning
• Creation and validation of the Methods of Procedures
• Integration of the ePC with the legacy Core Networks
• Architecture and capacity assessment of the networks prior to starting the migration of
subscribers and traffic, and upgrade of capacity in the new core network if needed
• Deployment of the GGSN and SGSN features into the new PS core network and their
integration with the rest of the network (including Applications, OSS/BSS, and
Lawful Interception)
• Migration of subscribers
• Migration of services and traffic from the legacy PS core network to the converged
one
• Re-parenting of the 2G and/or 3G Radio Access Networks from the legacy PS core
network to the converged one
• Performance verification all through the migration process
The importance of Program Management

Program management is fundamental to network migration. The Program Management
provided by Alcatel-Lucent helps to provide consistency and reliability to Network
Migration. The Program Management Alcatel-Lucent provides also includes migration
scheduling for timed projects with given dependencies and constraints, and migration
workflow management for dealing with events required to complete a migration.
Benefits of using Alcatel-Lucent's Migration Services

With its unique products and services portfolio, its multivendor capabilities and its broad
expertise in complex network transformation programs, and in Program Management,
Alcatel-Lucent can mitigate all the risks of Network Migration for the service provider.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services IP Transformation Centers
Deployment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IP Transformation Centers
IP Transformation Centers defined
IP Transformation Centers (IPTC) provide End-to-End 2G/3G/4G/IMS Solution testing
services and capabilities.
The following figure shows the role of an IPTC in providing integration and validation of
the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Figure 3-3 IP Transformation Center (IPTC)
The rest of this topic lists and describes services offered by an IPTC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services IP Transformation Centers
Deployment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E2E LTE Solution Integration and Validation
Systematically configure and integrate the LTE Solution components (HW and SW) to the
specific customer’s Multi-Vendor environment, which includes LTE RAN, IMS, 2G/3G,
PSTN integration, and inter-carrier interconnection. This service also entails integrating
the solutions using the Gold Standard Customer Specific configuration parameters so as
to model the customer’s production network as closely as is feasible.
LTE Solution Readiness

Develop, validate and produce Methods of Procedures (MOPs), including the sequencing
of the MOPs, that are specific to the customer’s network environment so as to produce a
fast and accurate implementation and integration of the network components in the
customer’s field environment.
LTE Network Transformation and Migration Service

Identify risks and issues and recommended migration strategies. Develop, validate, and
produce migration model and MOPs to execute in the field during the migration
processes.
LTE Product Validation and Acceptance Service

Perform product-specific testing to validate features, security, and L2/L3 conformance as
per requirements listed in the Product Specific manuals.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services Overview
Operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operation
About Operation Services

Operation Services
Operation Services provide the expert resources, tools, practices and integrated support
structure to keep service providers’ networks up and running at peak performance around
the clock. Operation Services also include such tasks as network optimization and
management services.
Categories
Wireless Operation Services can be divided into the three categories:
• Maintain
• Optimize
• Operate and Manage
Each of these types of operation services is explained here.
Maintain
About Maintenance Services
Maintenance services provide the expert resources, tools, practices and integrated support
structure to help keep our customers’ networks up and running at peak performance
around the clock.
Technical Support (TS)

Provide integrated remote Technical Support (TS) for complex, multivendor network
applications, enabling rapid response, restoration, and resolution of system issues and
outages.
Repair and Exchange Service (RES)

Provides a service where faulty equipment is sent to Alcatel-Lucent for repair and a
replacement pack is sent in its place. RES is different from Return for Repair (R4R)
where the actual pack is sent back after repair.
Return for Repair (R4R)

Allow for defective parts to be returned to Alcatel-Lucent for repair.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services Maintain
Operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Customer Technical Advocates (CTAs)
Provide expert technical liaisons offering information on hardware/software releases and
features, answering engineering questions, supporting upgrade strategy, and providing
network evolution support.
Resident Engineer
Provide dedicated on-site support at the customer location from a field technician
performing Level 1 site operations and maintenance activities, at the customers’ direction.
Optimize
Post-Launch Optimization
With Post-Launch Optimization, experienced RF Engineers partner for RF Consultation
support for Field Integration Testing (FIT) of RF Self-Optimizing Network (SON)
features and/or staff augmentation. The RF Engineers provide an ePC optimization
service to cover LTE post-launch optimization from end to end.
Operate and manage

About Managing Services
Market and economic conditions require a reinvention of telecommunications network
business models. This radical shift from an emphasis on network-centric services to
customer-centric content, solutions and services raises numerous challenges. Making this
change demands nothing less than business transformation.
Alcatel-Lucent Managing Services helps the service provider to do the following:
• Realize reductions in CAPEX/OPEX
• Deliver operational and financial efficiencies through streamlined operations and new
service delivery
• Reduce network overlays and lower IT costs
• Transform networks and processes for long-term growth by shifting the operational
focus to the end-user experience and by migrating to a services-centric model
• Develop and grow revenue from new sources while investing in people and in skills
transformation
• Provide the framework, through creative partnering and innovative risk sharing
options, for helping to create a next generation-enabled portfolio of services for
consumers and enterprises.
The rest of this topic lists the Managing Services offerings that Alcatel-Lucent provides.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services Operate and manage
Operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Multivendor Maintenance
A solution providing a single point of contact model for maintenance supporting
multivendor products in the network.
Managed Network Operations

A network outsourcing solution that assumes operational fault management responsibility
for the entire network or for a subset of a telecom carrier’s network through a central
NOC (Network Operation Center), applying state-of-the-art operations processes and
tools.
Carrier Network Outsourcing

A strategic business and technology relationship between Alcatel-Lucent and service
providers seeking seamless migration to next-generation network architecture. Emphasis
is on improving efficiency while providing ongoing network operation services.
Build Operate Managed for Mobility

A comprehensive package of services that includes consulting, planning, design,
implementation, and managed services to operate the network.
Managed Infrastructure
An innovative managed service offering which bundles network infrastructure, build-out,
operation and maintenance services and a transformational financing model.
Managed End-to-End Service Operations

A cost-effective, managed end-to-end services operations capability that meets end-user
demand for an improved customer experience.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Services Operate and manage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
4 Deployment options
4
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the deployment options currently available within the
Options
At present the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution contains several deployment
options:
• LTE Network
• LTE Network Overlay with 3GPP2 Network
• LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network
• LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network
Each deployment option is described in this chapter.

This chapter contains only a high-level view of the deployment options. For further
information about a deployment option and about how it can be tailored for the needs of
your network, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive.
Contents
Before you begin 4-3

Terminology 4-3
LTE Network Deployment Option 4-5
About the option 4-5
Diagrams 4-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Deployment options Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works 4-8

Interfaces 4-8
LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option: eHRPD 4-9
1xEVDO
About the Option 4-9
Diagrams 4-10
How it works 4-12
Interfaces 4-13
LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option: GSM and 4-14
W-CDMA
About the Option 4-14
Diagrams 4-15
How it works 4-17
Interfaces 4-17
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Before you begin
Overview
Purpose
This topic gives information you need to know before studying the deployment options.
Contents
Terminology 4-3
Terminology
Introduction
This topic defines terms used throughout this chapter.
Component
Throughout this document the term component is used to mean one of the six “domains”
or major parts of a complete LTE network:
• Radio Access Network
• Backhaul Network and Transport Network
• Core Network
• IMS and Applications
• OAM&P
Each deployment option shown in this chapter is comprised of network elements from
each of these six components. For definitions of these components, see “A sample LTE
network” (p. 1-36) and “LTE network” (p. 2-6).
Network element
Through this document the term network element is used to mean a unique entity within a
network. Often one NE consists of multiple physical and logical resources, which can be
configured and monitored separately, or as a group. The NE and the NE’s physical and
logical resources are recognized as distinct objects by an element or network management
system. An example of a network element would be a single Alcatel-Lucent 9412
eNodeB.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Deployment options Terminology
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each deployment option shown in this chapter is made up of network elements.
Interworking
Most of the LTE deployment options include interworking between the LTE Network and
other non-LTE networks. In the computing world, Interworking is defined as “the ability
to seamlessly communicate between devices supporting dissimilar protocols...by
translating between the protocols, not through encapsulation.” (Newton, Harry, Newton's
Telecom Dictionary: The Official Dictionary of Telecommunications & the Internet, 15th
ed. [New York: Miller Freeman, Inc., 1999.]) For the purposes of this document
interworking is defined as the seamless transmission of an active data session or voice
call from the LTE Network to a 3GPP2 or 3GPP network and vice versa.
Inter Radio Access Technology (IRAT) handoff

Inter Radio Access Technology (IRAT) is used for the handoff of an active data session
from one network to another.
IRAT handovers allow a user with VoIP Services to have a coordinated handover between
the LTE Network and second generation (2G) and Third Generation 1.25 MHZ carrier
(3G1x) networks. When IRAT is used, the VoIP service interruption is minimized through
the transfer of session information between the Radio Access Networks (RANs) and using
a common Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW) for access
to the Packet Data Network (PDN) for the voice services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Deployment options About the option
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the option

Introduction
This topic gives a high-level view of the LTE Network and the LTE Network Deployment
Option.
What is the LTE Network?

The LTE Network is a network that carries only LTE traffic.
What is the LTE Network Deployment Option?

The LTE Network Deployment Option is a mobile network using LTE technology.
Uses
The LTE Network Deployment Option can be used to provide service over a new mobile
network. This stand-alone network in greenfield applications can provide data-only
services or can provide both voice and data services, using Voice over LTE (VoLTE) to
provide the voice.
Note: For more about VoLTE, see Chapter 7, “Approaches for voice with LTE”.
Diagrams
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Deployment options Diagrams
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Data-only implementation
The following diagram shows the data-only configuration of the LTE Network
Deployment Option. The interfaces and how the network connects to the User Equipment
(UE) and the Packet Data Network (PDN) are also shown.
Figure 4-1 LTE Network Deployment Option (data only)
LTE portion does not provide voice but may carry voice
The data-only configuration of the LTE Network Deployment Option does not interwork
with a 2G or 3G network to provide voice services. Also, the data-only configuration of
the LTE Network Deployment Option does not provide IMS and does not link to the
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). Therefore the data-only configuration of
the LTE Network Deployment Option does not itself provide voice traffic.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: However, voice traffic may still be carried by the LTE Network Deployment
Option configuration. Voice over IP (VoIP) traffic may flow through the LTE Network
Deployment Option, as long as the VoIP traffic is generated, sent, and reassembled by
network entities that exist outside of the data-only LTE Network Deployment Option.
Data and voice implementation

The following figure shows the version of the LTE Network Deployment Option that can
handle both data and voice.
Figure 4-2 Major components of the LTE Network Deployment Option
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Only the major OA&M products are shown in this figure.
When the “IMS and applications” layer is added the LTE Network can handle voice,
using Voice over LTE. When the “IMS and applications” layer is absent, the LTE
Network provides only data traffic, although, as explained in “LTE portion does not
provide voice but may carry voice” (p. 4-6), a data-only LTE network may still carry
voice traffic under certain conditions.
Note: For an explanation of Voice over LTE in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution, see Chapter 7, “Approaches for voice with LTE”.
How it works
Explained earlier
For an explanation of how the LTE Network works, refer to Chapter 1, “Long Term
Evolution (LTE)”.
Interfaces
Call flow
In the LTE Network, the UE is connected to the evolved NodeB (eNodeB) in the evolved
UTRAN (eUTRAN) via the Uu interface. The eNodeB uses the S1-MME interface to
convey control message to the MME and uses the S1-U interface for the bearer traffic to
the Serving Gateway (SGW). The Mobility Management Entity (MME) uses the S6a
interface for user authentication and subscriber data in the Home Subscriber Server
(HSS). The SGW interconnects with the Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW) via the S5
interface. The PGW is connected to the Policy Charging Rule Function (PCRF) via the
Gx interface. The PGW is connected to the Packet Data Network via the SGi interface.
Support for local routing

The 7705 SAR supports local routing, so it is a valid option to route X2 traffic directly
between eNodeBs.

For more information about the interfaces used in the LTE Network, see Appendix A,
“LTE interfaces”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Deployment options About the Option
LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option:
eHRPD 1xEVDO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment

Option: eHRPD 1xEVDO
About the Option

Introduction
The LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option uses the LTE Network
and supports interworking with an eHRPD network. This topic gives a high-level view of
the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option.
Wireless networks supported

The LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option supports only 1xEVDO
wireless networks.
Definition
The LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option is a network made up of
an Alcatel-Lucent LTE Network that has been installed and is interworking with a service
provider's 3GPP2 (CDMA and EV-DO) network.
Uses
The LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option is used typically by
service providers who have existing CDMA and/or EV-DO networks to add additional
data services to their networks and to make use of new spectrum.
Both voice and data supported

Both voice and data are supported. Both voice and data handoffs from LTE to CDMA
within the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network are supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
eHRPD 1xEVDO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Diagrams
Implementation
The following diagram shows the basic components of the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2
Network Deployment Option. The interfaces used and network connections are also
shown.
Figure 4-3 LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option
Component-level view
The following figure shows LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option
broken down by components.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
eHRPD 1xEVDO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-4 Major components of the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network
Deployment Option
Types of interworking supported

The LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option currently supports the
following types of interworking:
• Data redirection and reselection
• Active IRAT handover for data
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Deployment options How it works
eHRPD 1xEVDO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
Introduction
This topic describes the eHRPD program and how it is used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution.
What is eHRPD?
eHRPD stands for evolved HPRD (eHRPD). eHRPD is a program developed by
Alcatel-Lucent to make it possible to hand off calls from the LTE Network to a CDMA
network and from a CDMA network back to the LTE Network. The purpose of eHRPD is
to translate LTE calls into the High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) standard.
Why is eHRPD needed?

Because LTE is a packet-only network, LTE handovers to a CDMA network are treated as
data calls. Thus, handovers from LTE to CDMA must go through the protocol used for
EV-DO within CDMA, a standard protocol called High Rate Packet Data (HRPD).
Impacted network elements

To provide handover information and support connectivity between LTE and eHRPD, the
following new or enhanced network elements are used in the LTE Interworking with
3GPP2 Network Deployment Option:
• The Access Terminal (AT) or User Equipment (UE) is enhanced to support both LTE
and eHRPD RF technologies. In other words, this must be a dual-mode UE.
• The LTE and eHRPD systems are enhanced to support the transport of conversational
speech using mobile vocoders.
• The HRPD RNC is enhanced to recognize the dual mode AT/UE and make network
selection decisions based to the AT/UE’s functionality. The enhanced HRPD RNC is
referred to as eRNC.
• The HRPD BTS supporting the dual mode UE contains software that can
automatically work with eHRPD. Though the BTS when used with HRPD is called an
eBTS, no action needs to be taken to turn the BTS into an eBTS. The software on the
BTS automatically adjusts to eHRPD traffic as necessary.
• The LTE eNodeB is enhanced to receive eHRPD pilot measurements from the UE
with SIB8 support, broadcast eHRPD information with configure eHRPD
measurement objects, trigger handover from the LTE system to the eHRPD system
based on the measurement report, and facilitate a special signaling tunnel from the UE
to the eHRPD system
• The HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW) is a new network element that supports
LTE/eHRPD interworking.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
eHRPD 1xEVDO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• The standard LTE network elements, such as the 7750 SR (PGW), are used.
• The 8950 Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) server is not a new
network element, but it is required for the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network
Deployment Option.
Note: Note that the 3G1X Network (not the EV-DO Network) sends the over-the-air
broadcast information that notifies UEs of the presence of LTE coverage. The
broadcast comes from the 3G1X network because some dual-mode UEs only attach to
the 3G1X Network upon power up.
Same transport network

In this deployment option LTE traffic shares the same transport network as the CDMA
traffic.
Interfaces
Additional interfaces
In the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment Option, the following
additional interfaces are supported by the EPC and Common Core:
• S2a between the PGW and the HSGW
• Gxa between the PCRF and the HSGW
• SWx between the HSS and the AAA
• S6b between PGW and AAA
For the Backhaul Network, the switching segment connects the HSGW to LTE network
elements over the S2a interface. An aggregation switch may be used to reduce the number
of interfaces on the PGW.

For more information about the interfaces used in the LTE Interworking with 3GPP2
Network Deployment Option, see Appendix A, “LTE interfaces”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option:
GSM and W-CDMA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment

Option: GSM and W-CDMA
About the Option

Introduction
This topic gives a high-level view of the LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network
Deployment Option.
Wireless networks supported

The LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option supports GSM and
W-CDMA wireless networks.
Definition
The LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option is a network made up of
an Alcatel-Lucent LTE Network that has been installed and is interworking with a service
provider's 3GPP (GSM or W-CDMA) network.
Uses
The LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option is typically used by
service providers who have existing GSM and/or W-CDMA networks to add additional
data services to their networks and to make use of new spectrum.
Both voice and data supported

Both voice and data are supported. Both voice and data handoffs from LTE to GSM
within the LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network are supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
GSM and W-CDMA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Diagrams
Introduction
The following diagram shows the LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment
Option. The interfaces used and network connections are also shown.
Figure 4-5 LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option
Component-level view
The following figure shows a view of the LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network broken
down by component.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
GSM and W-CDMA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-6 Major components of the LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network
Deployment Option
Note: With this configuration, both GSM and W-CDMA can be supported at the same
time with the same physical LTE Network.
Types of interworking supported

The LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option currently supports the
following types of interworking:
• Data redirection and reselection
• blind HO with no measurements (for pre-R8)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
GSM and W-CDMA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
Limited to pre-R8 IRAT
The LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option currently interworks only
with Pre-R8 GSM and W-CDMA network elements.
What is Pre-R8?
There are two methods defined in the 3GPP specifications for interworking with legacy
GSM/UMTS networks: pre-Release 8 (called “Pre-R8”) and Release 8 (called “R8 +”).
For 3.0, the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution only supports the Pre-R8 method.
How it works
Using the Pre-R8 standard as specified in TS 23.401 Annex D, the LTE Network and
GSM or W-CDMA Network use the 3GPP Pre-R8 interfaces (Gn/Gp) as the basis for
interworking. The Gn/Gp interface has both signaling and bearer. The signaling is
directed to the MME and the bearer is directed to the PGW.
PGW is the anchor

In this case the PGW provides the functions of a GGSN for the Serving GPRS Support
Node (SGSN) and acts as the mobility anchor for I-RAT.
Backhaul Network
For the Backhaul Network, the switching segment connects SGSN and RNC to LTE
network elements over the Gn and Gp interfaces.
Interfaces
Additional interfaces
In the LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment Option, the following
additional interfaces are supported by the EPC and Common Core:
• Gn between the MME and SGSN (Pre-R8) – 3GPP 29.060
• Gn (non-roaming) / Gp (roaming) between the PGW and the SGSN – 3GPP 23.060
• Gr between the HSS and the SGSN (Pre-R8) – 3GPP 29.002

For more information about the interfaces used in the LTE Interworking with 3GPP
Network Deployment Option, see Appendix A, “LTE interfaces”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Deployment options Interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5 5 igh-level migration
H
strategy
Overview
Purpose
This chapter discusses evolution of existing service provider networks to LTE. The
chapter shows sample migration paths for different technologies, gives some basic
principles for migration planning and lists sources of further information.
Contents
Migration options 5-1

3GPP2 to LTE evolution high-level summary 5-4
3GPP to LTE evolution high-level summary 5-5
Basic principles 5-6
LTE designed for easy migration 5-7
Migration planning resources 5-8
Migration options
Introduction
There are several different migration paths that service providers can take to migrate to
LTE.
Sample migration paths

Figure 5-1, “Migration paths to LTE” (p. 5-2) shows sample migration paths to LTE.
Note how in each sample, the amount of LTE in the network grows over time, as it is
needed. Note also how most service provider networks retain non-LTE networks to work
in parallel with the LTE Networks.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
High-level migration strategy Migration options
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-1 Migration paths to LTE
Compatibility with all major network types

LTE was purposefully designed to be compatible with all major types of wireless
networks. As shown in Figure 5-2, “Compatibility of the LTE Standard with previous
standards” (p. 5-3), the LTE standards were perceived and written as a natural evolution
of existing wireless networks. Therefore, from a technological standard, migration to LTE
is straightforward. If you look at the dotted lines in Figure 5-2, “Compatibility of the LTE
Standard with previous standards” (p. 5-3), each dotted line shows that it is possible to
move directly from the technology at the left-hand end of the dotted line directly to LTE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
High-level migration strategy Migration options
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-2 Compatibility of the LTE Standard with previous standards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
High-level migration strategy 3GPP2 to LTE evolution high-level summary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3GPP2 to LTE evolution high-level summary

Introduction
This topic shows, at a high level, the major steps involved in evolving a sample 3GPP2
network, in this case, a 1xEV-DO network, into an LTE network.
Table 5-1 1xEV-DO to LTE evolution summary
Portion of Network Tasks

Access devices Deploy new multimode eHRPD/LTE devices
Radio Access Network Evolved High Rate Packet Data (eHRPD)
software upgrade
• BTS -> eBTS (occurs automatically in the
software)
• RNC -> eRNC
• PDSN -> HSGW
• Deploy eNodeB
Transport/IP Backhaul Carry out the following tasks:
• If your network has Time Division
Multiplex (TDM) or Asynchronous
Transfer Mode (ATM) Backhaul, migrate
to LTE-Ready Backhaul
• Add LTE traffic to Ethernet Backhaul
Network
Core/OA&M Deploy new components
• Serving Gateway (SGW)
• PDN Gateway (PGW)
• Mobility Management Entity (MME)
• Policy and Charging Rules Function
(PCRF)
• Home Subscriber Server (HSS)
Add capacity/update OA&M
hardware/software:
• CDMA MS (OMP, OMC-RAN)
• LTE MS (SAM 5620)
Updating the backhaul is critical to success with LTE. For help with this, see Appendix D,
“Mobile Backhaul Solution”.
For additional information about the Mobile Backhaul Solution, see the following url:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
High-level migration strategy 3GPP2 to LTE evolution high-level summary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/wps/portal/!ut/p/kcxml/04_
Sj9SPykssy0xPLMnMz0vM0Y_QjzKLd4w3dnTUL8h2VAQAvhWwcA!!?LMSG_
CABINET=Solution_Product_Catalog&LMSG_CONTENT_FILE=Solutions/Solution2_
Detail_000021.xml)
3GPP to LTE evolution high-level summary

Introduction
This topic shows, at a high level, the major steps involved in evolving a 3GPP network,
such as GSM or W-CDMA, into an LTE network.
Table 5-2 3GPP to LTE evolution summary
Portion of Network Tasks

Access devices Deploy new multimode UMTS/LTE and/or
GSM/LTE devices
Radio Access Network Deploy eNodeB
Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) supports
legacy Gn/Gp interfaces on the MME and
PGW) The Gn interface is used for
interworking the SGSN with the PGW. To
support this interface, the PGW provides the
functional equivalency of the GGSN.
Core/OA&M Deploy new components
• Serving Gateway (SGW)
• PDN Gateway (PGW)
• Mobility Management Entity (MME)
• Policy and Charging Rules Function
(PCRF)
• Home Subscriber Server (HSS)
Add capacity/update OA&M
hardware/software:
• UMTS (OMP, OMC-RAN)
• LTE (SAM 5620)
Updating the backhaul is critical to success with LTE. For help with this, see Appendix D,
For additional information about the Mobile Backhaul Solution, see the following url:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
High-level migration strategy 3GPP to LTE evolution high-level summary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Detail_000021.xml)
Basic principles
Introduction
This topic lists basic principles that Alcatel-Lucent recommends using in migration
planning.
Conservation of existing equipment

Wherever possible, re-use existing network and existing equipment, to save on costs and
save time and energy.
Existing systems that are not interworking with LTE remain unchanged.
Migrate at the right pace

You can evolve one portion of your network to LTE at a time, and at the pace that works
best for you.
Alcatel-Lucent supports multiple approaches that allow graceful introduction of one
technology at a time, with efficient spectrum and subscriber migration to reduce service
provider risk along the way.
Take advantage of LTE's assets

See “LTE designed for easy migration” (p. 5-7) for a list of the characteristics and
functionalities of LTE that make migration to LTE easy. Making use of these natural
benefits of LTE will ease your migration.
Make use of professional help

Alcatel-Lucent's LTE Services organization can help plan your migration and evolve your
network. See “LTE Services” (p. 2-13) for a description of the LTE Services that
Alcatel-Lucent can provide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
High-level migration strategy LTE designed for easy migration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE designed for easy migration

Introduction
The LTE designers planned LTE for easy migration of current 3GPP and 3GPP2 wireless
systems to LTE. This topic lists some of the ways that LTE is designed to make migration
easy.
Spectrum conservation and flexibility

The 3GPP standardization body behind the LTE design understands that radio spectrum is
a scarce resource, and as a result, has allowed LTE to be deployed in a variety of
bandwidths (from 1.4 to 20MHz). In other words, 2G or 3G service providers can, if they
wish, allocate just some of their existing bands to LTE. This flexibility opens the door to
different deployment scenarios, offering tailored solutions fitting service providers'
strategies and market needs.
LTE flexibility
The flexibility of the LTE standard offers many advantages as the service provider plans
the migration:
• LTE wireless networks can be easily integrated into existing wireless networks and
smoothly co-exist with current 2G and 3G wireless networks.
• In the LTE design the EPC can accommodate evolved versions of the GSM,
W-CDMA, and CDMA Radio Access Networks (RANs) in addition to the LTE RAN.
Allowing all these versions of the RAN to communicate with the EPC creates a
smooth migration from GSM, W-CDMA and CDMA to LTE.
• LTE wireless networks can overlay existing 2G or 3G wireless networks without
causing any disruption of service.
• LTE has been designed for graceful migration of current technologies to LTE.
• An LTE network can be implemented as a complete, stand-alone network or LTE can
be implemented one component at a time. LTE components can be used with existing
networks until the service provider migrates more parts of the service provider
network
• LTE can be used with many different radio spectrums and at many different
bandwidths.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
High-level migration strategy Migration planning resources
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Migration planning resources

For more information or for help in planning a migration, contact your Alcatel-Lucent
Account Executive.
For more about LTE and other topics mentioned in this document, see Appendix B,
“Resources”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Part II: LTE Network Provided
Services
Overview
Purpose
This part describes the LTE Network Provided Services in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
Chapter 6, UEs and Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team 6-1

Chapter 7, Approaches for voice with LTE 7-1
Chapter 8, SMS with LTE 8-1
Chapter 9, Cell Broadcast with LTE 9-1
Chapter 10, Approaches for video on LTE 10-1
Chapter 11, Roaming in LTE networks 11-1
Chapter 12, Government-mandated services 12-1
Chapter 13, Public Safety 13-1
Chapter 14, LTE End-to-End Security 14-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary II-1
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE Network Provided Services Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
II-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
6 6 Es and Alcatel-Lucent's
U
Devices and IOT Team
Overview
Purpose
This chapter covers the following topics:
• UEs available in the market today
• InterOperability Testing (IOT)
• Alcatel-Lucent's commitments to IOT
• Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team
• Services that Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team offer
• Network Vendor Interoperability Testing (NVIOT) Forum
• Process followed by the Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT Team
Contents
About UEs 6-2

Explosive growth in LTE 6-3
About InterOperability Testing (IOT) 6-4
Alcatel-Lucent's support for LTE and for IOT 6-4
About the Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT Team 6-5
The NVIOT Forum 6-6
IOT Process 6-7
Achievements of Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team 6-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
UEs and Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team About UEs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About UEs
What is a UE?
User Equipment (UE) is the name used in the 3GPP standards for mobile terminals. In
this document the term UE is used instead of mobile terminal.
What is a mobile terminal?

A mobile terminal is a handheld (portable) device that provides a standardized radio
interface between the end user and the base station in a wireless telecommunications
network.
Other names
UEs are known by many other names, including mobile unit, mobile phone, cell phone,
Access Terminal (AT), mobile, mobile station, and terminal.
Types of UEs
Many different devices now function as UEs. The following are examples of UEs
available in today's wireless networks:
• hand-held cellular telephones, which can include any of the following:
– simple devices that can only access one legacy type of network
– multimode cellular telephones that can access several networks simultaneously
– smart phones, UEs that contain handheld computers that are integrated into the
cellular telephone. Typically the computers have a complete operating system and
are able to host advanced applications. Smart phones combine the functions of a
cellular telephone, a camera, and a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA).
• computers, including
– a laptop computer equipped with mobile broadband adapter
– Personal Digital Assistants (PDAs)
• wireless networking hardware that can be plugged into any computer, such as a
dongle. A dongle is a small piece of hardware that connects to a laptop, desktop or
server computer. Though the term "dongle" was originally used to refer only to
software-protection dongles; now the term can also be used for a small piece of
hardware with a USB flash drive that can serve as a wireless networking device.
How it works
When they are turned on (powered up) UEs maintain radio communication with local
base stations, even when not in use. When in use, the UEs communicate via radio with the
base stations. Through the base stations the UEs are connected to wireless and wireline
telecommunications networks and to the Internet.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
UEs and Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team About UEs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Not manufactured by Alcatel-Lucent
Alcatel-Lucent does not manufacture any UEs. This fact has two benefits for service
providers:
• Our testers and network planners are unbiased and thus can better help the service
provider identify the UEs or set of UEs that are best for that particular service
provider's needs.
• Alcatel-Lucent is free to work with all device vendors in the market without
generating any conflicts of interest. Thus the Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team
has been able to build close working relationships with many different device vendors
and is able to do full interoperability testing with a wide range of the UEs available in
today's markets.
The rest of this chapter describes the InterOperability Testing (IOT) services that the
Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team offers. Service providers can use
Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team for help in choosing and in testing UEs for their
service provider networks.
Explosive growth in LTE

Fastest-developing system ever
As reflected in the June 2011 report of the Global Suppliers Association (GSMA), LTE is
the fastest developing mobile system technology ever. As of June 2011, there were 208
LTE network commitments worldwide and a robust ecosystem in development with 137
LTE UEs in commercial deployment or announced. This number represents a 40%
increase in the number of LTE UEs between March 2011 and June 2011.
For more information

For further information on the explosive growth of LTE, and on the GSMA, see the
GSMA web site at the following address:
(http://www.gsacom.com/)
Need for IOT

With the explosive growth in number of UE devices availability, interoperability testing
(IOT) is more important than ever. The rest of this chapter defines IOT and explains
Alcatel-Lucent's involvement in IOT.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
UEs and Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team About InterOperability Testing (IOT)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About InterOperability Testing (IOT)

What is InterOperability Testing (IOT)?
InterOperability Testing (IOT) is defined as the verification of an interface between two
parties' network elements, on a functional level, in accordance with the relevant 3GPP
standards. For testing purposes, the network elements under test are regarded as black
boxes with well-defined external interfaces.
How it works
IOT verification is achieved by execution of a predetermined set of test cases to ensure
compatibility between the network elements at the interface under test. The aim of
verification is to provide confidence that the two elements can interwork successfully.
Primarily, the correct behavior of an element at its external interface is tested. The
behavior is deemed to be correct if it exactly matches the interworking described in the
test case.
Benefits
Comprehensive and thorough IOT provides several advantages to service providers,
including faster time to market, reduced deployment costs, streamlined integration,
expanded product offerings and lower deployment risk. Reliable interoperability also
means a faster return on investment and a clear competitive advantage in today’s complex
wireless marketplace.
Alcatel-Lucent's support for LTE and for IOT

Commitment to LTE ecosystem
Alcatel-Lucent is fully committed to the development of the LTE ecosystem.
Alcatel-Lucent has been conducting LTE IOT for over 3 years and are currently testing
with over 20 chipset and device vendors including both FDD and TDD. To assist with the
rapid expansion of the ecosystem Alcatel-Lucent has established an open IOT device
program to welcome the large number of OEM vendors.
Testing of UEs and chipsets

Alcatel-Lucent is also committed to working closely with both chipset companies
(including smartphone chipsets) and handset manufacturers to meet service providers'
needs and to accelerate Time To Market of commercial handsets.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
UEs and Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team Alcatel-Lucent's support for LTE and for IOT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Results are confidential
Alcatel-Lucent's IOT programs with UE suppliers are covered by Non-Disclosure
Agreements (NDAs). Therefore, IOT reports and detailed IOT related information cannot
be disclosed without the UE supplier’s written approval. Given such approval,
Alcatel-Lucent is willing to disclose detailed IOT information in a three-party-meeting,
for example, between a service provider, a UE supplier, and members of Alcatel-Lucent's
Devices and IOT Team.
About the Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT Team

Introduction
Because of the importance of interoperability to service providers, Alcatel-Lucent has
dedicated a significant amount of resources across the globe to form the Alcatel-Lucent
Devices and InterOperability Testing (IOT) Team. This topic describes that team and the
services they offer.
What is the Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT Team?

The Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT Team is a team developed to perform
interoperability testing with UE suppliers and chipset makers, and to provide high-quality
and reputable value-added service and support to service providers who need to select
UEs to use in their networks.
Cross-technology support
The Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT Team is a cross-technologies team that covers both
LTE and W-CDMA UEs.
Participation in standards bodies

The team also is a vocal proponent of interoperability in many IOT-related standards
bodies and technology forums.
Benefits of IOT testing

The testing program put on by the Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT Team provides the
following benefits to the service provider:
• An open architecture with Alcatel-Lucent CDMA 1x and EV-DO Rev 0/A, GSM,
GPRS, W-CDMA and LTE (FDD and TDD) platforms
• Consulting services with a skilled engineering team for design and integration ideas
• Integration of third-party products and services with the Alcatel-Lucent platforms
• Compatibility testing in the Alcatel-Lucent Wireless Interoperability Testing Lab
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
UEs and Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team About the Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT Team
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For further information on the device testing and InterOperability Testing services that
Alcatel-Lucent provides, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Customer Team.
The NVIOT Forum

Member of IOT Forum
Alcatel-Lucent is an active member of the Network Vendor Interoperability Testing
(NVIOT) Forum (http://www.nviot-forum.org/), an informal group of leading LTE, 3G
and 2.5G wireless equipment suppliers. The members of the NVIOT Forum are
committed to interoperability testing and open standards. The group’s intent is to ensure
that W-CDMA equipment and solutions produced by group members will interoperate
from the very beginning, and therefore enable rapid establishment of multivendor
W-CDMA networks.
Compliant with standards

All members of the NVIOT produce products that adhere to Third Generation Partnership
Project (3GPP) (http://www.3gpp.org/) specifications.
Work of the IOT Forum

The major work of the NVIOT Forum is to identify a common methodology and
procedures, and includes the following:
• Exchange of interoperability test suites
• Proposal of testing procedures
• Creation of common procedures to facilitate communication on IOT matters to service
providers
Benefit to service providers

Service providers benefit from the work of the NVIOT Forum since the NVIOT Forum
gives the following benefits to its members:
• identification and solution of interoperability issues early on
• improved quality of tests and associated documentation
• teamwork that facilitates the commercial deployment of mobile systems.

A detailed description of the processes defined by the NVIOT Forum is available at
http://www.nviot-forum.org/.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
UEs and Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team IOT Process
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IOT Process
Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team follows the InterOperability Testing (IOT)
process defined by the Network Vendor Interoperability Testing (NVIOT) Forum.
Figure 6-1 NVIOT IOT process
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
UEs and Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team Achievements of Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Achievements of Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team

Experience with many technologies
Members of Alcatel-Lucent's Devices and IOT Team have extensive experience with
interoperability on many technology fronts, including W-CDMA, GSM, GPRS, CDMA,
1xRTT, ATM, and IP. This topic gives several examples of the extensive infrastructure
and UE testing that members of this team have done and can do for a service provider
when needed.
Note: As noted before, specific IOT related information for specific UEs cannot be
disclosed without the UE owner’s written approval. Therefore, the information given
in this topic remains on a generic level
Information can be disclosed if the vendor is willing

Alcatel-Lucent is willing to disclose detailed IOT information in a three-party-meeting
(vendor-vendor-operator) where each vendor presents the status of his IOT activities.
Sample testing of band availability for a set of UEs

The following figure, which represents data from June 2011, shows the results of testing
the bandwidth availability of a set of Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) 3GPP UEs. The
UE names are across the top of the figure. Here the UEs are given numbers prefaced by
“MV” for mobile vendor and “CS” for chipset vendor. The actual names of the UEs are
not given to preserve confidentiality of information. Note the large number of bands and
bandwidths that need to be supported for LTE. Note also the large number of vendors and
the variability in bands each vendor supports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-2 Sample results of band availability testing for a set of FDD UEs
Sample UE testing results

The following figure shows the results of functional testing of a set of FDD LTE UEs.
Again, the UEs are given numbers prefaced by “MV” for mobile vendor and “CS” for
chipset vendor. The actual names of the UEs are not given to preserve confidentiality of
information. As can be seen in the following figure, that is accurate as of June 2011,
Alcatel-Lucent works with a large set of chip set and device vendors.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-3 Sample results of interoperability testing of FDD LTE UEs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7 7 pproaches for voice with
A
LTE
Overview
Purpose
The purpose of this chapter is to describe all the approaches currently offered in or
currently supported by the Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution for handling voice with LTE.
Requirement for SMS

Short Message Service (SMS) is essential to all LTE deployments, both data and voice.
SMS is covered in Chapter 8, “SMS with LTE”.
Governmental requirements
All approaches to voice with LTE in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution fully
meet government-mandated requirements for mandatory services. Government-mandated
services are explained in Chapter 12, “Government-mandated services”.
Contents
About voice with LTE 7-3

Voice with LTE defined 7-3
Approaches for voice with LTE 7-3
The CSFB approach 7-5
About CSFB 7-5
How it works 7-6
Benefits 7-6
Limitations 7-7
Network and UE impacts 7-8
Current implementation 7-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The VoLTE approach 7-9

About VoLTE 7-9
How it works 7-10
Use of IMS network elements 7-11
Use of common core network elements 7-15
The SVLTE approach 7-17
About the SVLTE approach 7-17
How it works 7-18
Benefits 7-18
Limitations 7-19
The SR-VCC approach 7-21
Use of Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SR-VCC) 7-21
The Service Centralization approach 7-22
Service Centralization 7-22
Migration 7-24
Considerations 7-24
Migration path 7-25
Comparison of approaches for voice with LTE 7-27
Summary of approaches 7-27
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section gives general information about voice with LTE.
Contents
Voice with LTE defined 7-3

Approaches for voice with LTE 7-3
Voice with LTE defined

What is “Voice with LTE”?
As used with the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, Voice with LTE refers to any
of several approaches or methods used to enable voice communications within LTE
networks or to provide voice communications as an adjunct to LTE networks.
Note: The term “Voice with LTE” is often confused with the term “VoLTE”. VoLTE
stands for “Voice over IMS over LTE”. VoLTE is one of the approaches used in LTE
networks to provide Voice with LTE.
Approaches for voice with LTE

Introduction
This topic lists all possible approaches for voice with LTE and explains which approaches
are currently implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Two in-network approaches

The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution supports the following two in-network
approaches for providing voice with LTE:
• Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB)
• Voice over IMS
Each of these approaches is described in this chapter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE Approaches for voice with LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
One in-handset approach
Simultaneous Voice and LTE (SVLTE) is a UE-based third approach that works with the
SVLTE is also described in this chapter.
Additional approaches to be supported in the future

The following additional approaches will be supported by the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution in the future:
• Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SR-VCC) - a feature that provides advanced
handoff capabilities when handing off IMS-based voice calls to GSM, W-CDMA and
3G1x networks
• Service Centralization using IMS Centralized Services (ICS) - a feature that is added
to an IMS based voice solution to supply a consistent and possibly personalized
service delivery environment across radio access technologies.
Unsupported approaches
Other approaches to voice with LTE exist. These non-standards based approaches are not
supported in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution but are mentioned here for the
sake of completeness.
• VoLGA - The Voice over LTE using Generic Access (VoLGA) approach transports
circuit-switched (CS) voice transparently through the LTE packet infrastructure,
leveraging the existing Iu or A interface to 2G or 3G MSCs using an interworking
function, the VoLGA Access Network Controller (VANC). VoLGA is a solution used
by a small set of service providers in a small fraction of the market. VoLGA is not
standardized by the 3GPP/3GPP2 standards body; VoLGA standards are published by
the VoLGA Forum.
• Use of a SIP UE with proprietary enhancements to the MSC - The Nokia Siemens
(NSN) “Fast Track VoLTE” is an example of this approach. This approach enhances
an existing MSC with a SIP Gm interface. This approach has not caught on widely
and is currently used by a small set of service providers in a small fraction of the
market.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The CSFB approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The CSFB approach
Overview
Purpose
The information in this section describes the Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) approach
for handling of voice within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About CSFB 7-5

How it works 7-6
Benefits 7-6
Limitations 7-7
About CSFB
What is CSFB?
Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) is an approach where voice coverage is supplied by a
legacy circuit-switched network that has the same geographic coverage area as the LTE
network. To originate or receive a voice call using the CSFB approach, the UE “falls
back” or drops back from LTE to the legacy network and stays on the legacy network
until the completion of the voice call.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE How it works
The CSFB approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
Introduction
This topic briefly describes how voice calls are handled in the LTE network using the
CSFB approach.
Assumptions
The assumption for this scenario is that the LTE network has a dedicated signalling
interface from the MME to the target MSC supporting the same coverage area as the
current LTE cell site.
Both networks register the UE

During the time that a CSFB UE is attached to the LTE network, the CSFB UE registers
with two networks: the LTE network and a legacy network in the same geographic area.
Both register the UE. This is achieved using a dedicated signalling interface between
MME and target MSC with the MME informing the MSC of UE attach, detach and
location area updates.
One network controls the UE

While the UE is active on the LTE network, as specified in this scenario, the UE is under
the control of the LTE network. The legacy network is merely aware of the UE's presence.
Control of the UE is passed to the legacy network during the voice call and returned to
the LTE network when the call is completed.
Benefits
Introduction
The benefits of the CSFB approach are explained in this topic.
Reuse of existing equipment

The major benefit of the CSFB approach is the re-use of the legacy network
infrastructure. Operators can deploy LTE for data-only service and re-use the legacy
network for voice.
Basic service
The CSFB approach gives the service provider basic, transparent voice service to LTE
handsets in networks with parallel coverage by a legacy mobile network adapted to
support CSFB.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE Benefits
The CSFB approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Does not require IMS
The CSFB approach has the benefit of not requiring IMS in the network. Thus the CSFB
approach can be used:
• In cases where the operator wishes to delay Voice over IMS deployment
• With voice handsets in cases where LTE is deployed in advance of IMS
• With LTE roamers whose home network is not IMS capable
• If the IMS client is not loaded in the UE
Can be priced as an “inexpensive alternative”

The CSFB approach can be offered to provide “basic” voice service as an inexpensive
alternative in networks where IMS voice is available as a premium service.
Provides a service that will always be in demand

For the foreseeable future, CSFB will always be needed. CSFB will be needed for a long
time and perhaps forever, to support roamers and to support non IMS-capable UEs.
Limitations
Loss of data session
For UMTS service providers and for GSM service providers the problem with CSFB is
that when the call “falls back” to circuit for voice, the data session is suspended.
Slowing down of data session

Even in cases where the legacy network continues the data session, the data session
operates at a probable reduced capacity and speed.
Increases call setup delay

The CSFB approach causes a delay in call setup that can be noticeable to the user,
especially for calls from LTE to GSM.
However, from LE4.0, the support of enhanced redirection to UTRAN and GERAN, PS
handover enhancement to UTRAN for CS fallback, and the configurable fallback method
precedence reduces the CSFB call set up time and improves the fallback call successful
rate when the handover target is overloaded.
Increased load on the network

CSFB places an increased load on the signalling component of a network because of the
extra signaling required in passing calls over to the other network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE Network and UE impacts
The CSFB approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network and UE impacts

Required interface
The CSFB approach requires that support of the dedicated signalling interface (SGs for
GSM/UMTS networks and S102 for 3G1X networks) be added on the MME towards all
likely target MSCs in the legacy network ( SGs for 3GPP networks and S102 for 3GPP2
networks).
Network impact
All MSC serving zones with LTE coverage need to be upgraded to support CSFB
functionality and dedicated signalling interface towards the MME. There will be
additional load on the network as the result of UE movement back and forth from LTE to
legacy every time a voice call occurs. The load will consist of extra signalling traffic on
both LTE/EPC and legacy networks. Alcatel-Lucent Services can help the service
provider perform modeling to anticipate and design for the additional load on the
network.
UE impacts
The UE for CSFB must be dual-mode, that is, capable of communicating both with LTE
and with a legacy network.
In addition, the CSFB client must be loaded onto the UE.
Current implementation
CSFB GSM/UMTS networks
CSFB is implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution for GSM and
UMTS networks.
Future implementation
CSFB for Third Generation 1.25 MHZ carrier Code Division Multiple Access (3G1x
CDMA) networks will be supported in a future release.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The VoLTE approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The VoLTE approach
Overview
Purpose
The information in this section describes the VoLTE approach as used in the
Contents
About VoLTE 7-9

How it works 7-10
Use of IMS network elements 7-11
Use of common core network elements 7-15
About VoLTE
VoLTE defined
VoLTE stands for Voice over LTE.
Voice over IMS over LTE refers to the option of providing voice service on the LTE
network through the use of IMS.
More than just data service

Voice over LTE (VoLTE) does handle voice as packetized data, but in addition VoLTE
adds performance standards and quality of service considerations, to reach
high-performance voice channel delivery standards.
What is IMS?
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is a powerful architectural framework, designed by the
3GPP standards body, that is a platform for delivering Internet Protocol (IP) packet-based
multimedia “Internet-like” services to end-users. The IMS platform provides a common
set of functions and procedures for session control, bearer control, policy, and charging.
When these functions and procedures are used by an application the application is said to
be IMS-enabled.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE About VoLTE
The VoLTE approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information on IMS, see “About IMS” (p. 21-4).
Most widely accepted

VoLTE is the most widely accepted approach for voice with LTE.
Sensitive to delay and jitter

VoIP being a real-time application has stringent requirements of low latency (delay) and
jitter (variability of delay). Factors that affect the total end-to end bearer delay are the
encoding and packetizing delays at the source, network delays, and buffering,
de-packetizing and decoding delays at the destination endpoint. In order to provide
acceptable delay, jitter, and packet loss for VoIP calls, end to end quality of service (QoS)
support is essential.
Therefore the Solution introduces new QoS controls to manage delay and jitter in VoLTE.
How it works
Summary
Voice over IMS is a specific implementation of a VoIP (Voice over IP) service with the
control and voice traffic streams carried as a pure data call within the LTE and EPC
network. The LTE handset starts the voice call as an LTE call using SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol) messages to establish the VoLTE session. The IMS client in the
communicating UEs codes the voice call and sends the voice call packets through the
LTE network just like other data packets. The call goes through the network as a data call
and is decoded by the LTE handset on the other end back into a voice call.
Can coexist with CSFB

The Voice Over IMS approach can co-exist with the CSFB approach in the same
operator's network, with IMS-based services taking precedence over the CSFB option if
both features are available in both UE and network.
Enhancements needed for VoLTE

The full implementation of VoLTE in the Solution requires several major enhancements.
The first two of these enhancements are provided. The remaining enhancements will be
provided in a future release.
• The LTE eUTRAN and EPC has been enhanced for VoIP delivery.
• An IMS core has been added to provide IMS support, and a Telephony Application
Server (TAS) is used to provide end-user services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The VoLTE approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SR-VCC) will be used to provide handover
capabilities for voice calls to GSM/UMTS and 3G1x networks.
Note that SR-VCC will require enhancements to both LTE/EPC, legacy mobile
networks and will require addition of specific IMS functional entities. This feature
will be provided in a future release of the Solution.
• Service Centralization using IMS Centralized Services (ICS) will be provided to
supply a consistent and possibly personalized service delivery environment across
radio access technologies.
Note that ICS may require enhancements to legacy mobile network and will require
addition of specific IMS functional entities. This feature will be provided in a future
release of the Solution.
• PS handover of Voice over IMS towards UMTS and EVDO networks - Note that PS
handover of calls requires enhancements to the legacy mobile networks. This feature
will be provided in a future release of the Solution.
Use of IMS network elements

New IMS functional entities to support voice calls
VoLTE adds new IMS network elements to the Solution to perform voice-related
functions, and changes some existing IMS functional entities. The following table lists the
IMS network elements used for VoLTE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE Use of IMS network elements
The VoLTE approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 7-1 IMS functional entities added or modified for VoLTE
This IMS functional performs this VoLTE using this Alcatel-Lucent For more
entity function network element information,
see...
Proxy CSCF Session management. 5450 IP Session Controller “5450 ISC
(P-CSCF) The Proxy Call Session Control (ISC) (P/S/I-CSCF)”
Function (P-CSCF) is a SIP (p. 21-26)
server that controls allocated See especially,
bearers within the visited “Providing
network and generates charging Call Session
records. Control
Interrogating CSCF Session management Function
(I-CSCF) (CSCF)
The Interrogating Call Session functions”
Control Function (I-CSCF) is a (p. 21-27)
SIP server that acts as the entry
point for all connections related
to a user
NOTE: This function is
optional. All other functions are
required.
Serving CSCF Session management
(S-CSCF) The Serving Call Session
Control Function (S-CSCF) is a
SIP server that gives the user
access to the Application
Servers.
Breakout Gateway The Breakout Gateway Control
Control Function Function (BGCF) is a required
(BGCF) network element that selects the
appropriate MGCF in which
PSTN/PLMN breakout is to
occur based on the destination
and/or origination of the call.
Telephony Application The Telephony Application 5420 CTS “5420 CTS”
Server (TAS) Server (TAS) is an application (p. 21-23)
server that hosts specified
telephony-related applications.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The VoLTE approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 7-1 IMS functional entities added or modified for VoLTE (continued)
This IMS functional performs this VoLTE using this Alcatel-Lucent For more
entity function network element information,
see...
Media Gateway The Media Gateway Control 5060 MGC-8 “5060
Control Function Function (MGCF) MGCF MGC-8”
(MGCF) provides the signaling (p. 21-9)
interworking functions between
the IMS and the Public
Switched Telephone Network
(PSTN) and CS services on the
Public Land Mobile Network
(PLMN) networks.
Media Gateway The Media Gateway (MGW) 7510 MGW “7510 MGW”
(MGW) provides connectivity to the (p. 21-33)
PSTN and CS services of
PLMN.
MRF The MRF provides media 5900 MRF “5900 MRF”
resource function to support (p. 21-30)
functions such as
announcements and
conferencing capabilities.
DNS/ENUM The DNS/ENUM server is used VitalQIP ENUM/DNS “VitalQIP
to resolve IP addresses and ENUM/DNS”
E.164 addresses. (p. 20-19)
Note that this function could be
shared in small-use settings with
the DNS function already in the
LTE network but a dedicated
DNS/ENUM will be required to
support any significant
deployment.
Note: Some of the material in this table is drawn from Evolved Packet System (EPS)
The LTE and SAE Evolution of 3G UMTS by Pierre Lescuyer and Thierry Lucidarme.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The VoLTE approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IMS-related network elements in the Solution
The following figure shows how the VoLTE network elements that host IMS functional
entities fit into the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution and the primary interfaces
with other components of the LTE network. The IMS-related network elements that
support VoLTE are shown in the red circle.
Figure 7-1 IMS-related network elements that support VoLTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE Use of common core network elements
The VoLTE approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use of common core network elements

Reuse of existing network elements
The VoLTE approach, in addition to adding some new network elements, reuses some
existing network elements that are already being used by LTE. These network elements
do not change for VoLTE and thus are presented separately from those listed in Table 7-1,
“IMS functional entities added or modified for VoLTE” (p. 7-12)
Table 7-2 Previously-existing functional entities and network elements used by
LTE and by VoLTE
This performs this function using this Alcatel-Lucent For more information on
functional network element this network element and
entity its role, see
Home subscriber data 8650 SDM HSS “8650 SDM HSS” (p. 20-13)
Subscriber 8650 Subscriber Data
System (HSS) Manager (SDM) Home
Subscriber Server (HSS)
Offline charging offline charging 8615 Instant Enhanced “8615 IeCCF (OFCS)”
function Charging Collection (p. 20-10)
Function (IeCCF) for Offline
Charging Systems (OFCS)
Online charging online charging 8610 ICC “8610 ICC (OCS)” (p. 20-7)
function
Lawful Intercept mediation requests for 1357 LIG “1357 LIG” (p. 20-3)
Gateway lawful interception
Interception administrative requests 1357 IMC “1357 IMC” (p. 22-16)
Management for lawful interception
Center and OA&M
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE Network and UE impacts
The VoLTE approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network impacts
Network impacts include the following:
• In LE4.0:
– 8650 SDM enhanced to support IMS service data
– 1357 LIG LI enhanced to support interception of VoLTE calls
– 8615 IeCCF and 8610 ICC enhanced to support VoLTE charging
– 5780 DSC (PCRF) enhanced to support VoLTE specific QoS policies
• In a future release:
– 9321 eNodeB, 9351 MME and serving MSCs enhanced and the SCG added to
IMS system to support SRVCC
– Target MSC and the SCG enhanced to support ICS
– UTRAN or EV-DO and SGSN or HSGW enhanced to support PS handover and
potential SRVCC from 3G packet access towards CS legacy access
UE impacts
An IMS client must be loaded onto the UE.
Also, the UE must be IMS-compatible, that is, must be compliant to GSMA IR.92 version
3 or above
Trials
From LE3.0 onwards, VoLTE is implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution with limited trial capabilities.
More functionality in future releases

Single Radio Voice Call Continuity, IMS Centralized Service (ICS), and PS handover of
VoLTE to 3G packet access will be added in future releases.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The SVLTE approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The SVLTE approach
Overview
Purpose
The information in this section describes the SVLTE approach for handling of voice with
Contents
About the SVLTE approach 7-17

How it works 7-18
Benefits 7-18
Limitations 7-19
About the SVLTE approach

What is SVLTE?
Simultaneous Voice and LTE (SVLTE) is an approach that provides “Two phones in one”.
In other words, each SVLTE UE has two complete logical UEs within a common device
sharing a common user interfaces and, in certain configurations, common RF
components. From within the SVLTE UE, one of the embedded UEs communicates with
the legacy network. Also from within the UE, the other embedded UE communicates with
the LTE network.
Provides simultaneous voice and data

Since each SVLTE UE has two UEs within it, an SVLTE UE can provide simultaneous
voice (through a circuit switched legacy network) and LTE data (through an LTE
network) and optionally using packet services over legacy mobile access.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
The SVLTE approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
Simultaneous registration
An SVLTE UE maintains simultaneous registration on the legacy network for voice and
the LTE network for data.
Fall back to legacy access required

With an SVLTE UE there is no handoff or “fall back” to place or receive a voice call. The
legacy network sets up and manages the voice call in the same way the legacy network
sets up and manages other voice calls. The LTE network has no knowledge of the voice
call.
No communication between two networks

With an SVLTE UE the legacy network manages the voice call and the LTE network
manages the data call. The two networks do not communicate with each other at all about
the calls.
Benefits
Provides simultaneous voice and data
The chief benefit of the SVLTE approach is that it provides simultaneous voice and data
using legacy networks for the voice traffic while maintaining data services on LTE access.
Attractive to 3GPP2 service providers

The SVLTE approach is attractive to 3GPP2 service providers as an alternative to CSFB.
CSFB works well for 3GPP service providers because simultaneous voice and data
services for UMTS service providers are available over legacy access, at least in regions
providing UMTS or GSM with DTM coverage. For 3GPP2 service providers, however,
CSFB suspends data connectivity in order to complete the voice call over the 3G1X
access network.
Most 3GPP2 service providers regard SVLTE an interim approach, to be used instead of
CSFB, until Voice over IMS over LTE (VoLTE) is widely available.
No network impact
The SVLTE approach has no impact on the network. In other words, no special
configuration or special equipment is required in the network to make the SVLTE
approach work.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE Limitations
The SVLTE approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Limitations
Negative impacts on the UE
Though the SVLTE approach has no network impact, the SVLTE approach has significant
impacts on the UE. The fact that SVLTE UEs contain two separate UEs (that is, two
separate phones), causes the following negative impacts:
• Higher cost
• Increased power drain
• A need to charge the battery more often
• A more complex UE
• A larger UE
Viewed as a short-term approach

The SVLTE option is often viewed as a short-term approach, because of the battery drain
and other limitations of this option. In the future, after VoLTE is widely available, many
service providers will probably switch from the SVLTE approach to the VoLTE approach.

No network impacts
The SVLTE approach has no network impacts. All the work is done in the UE.
UE impacts
SVLTE requires a special UE that contains two complete logical UEs, one for the legacy
network and one for LTE. For more on the impacts of SVLTE on the UE, see “Negative
impacts on the UE” (p. 7-19).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE Current implementation
The SVLTE approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Works with the Solution
The SVLTE approach has been tested with and works with the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution. Note, however, that the SVLTE approach is independent of the
network and thus cannot be monitored using the OA&M products that are part of the
Dependent upon UEs

The SVLTE approach is dependent upon the availability of SVLTE UEs.
Note: It is recommended that SVLTE UEs are also capable of SVDO (parallel use of
3G1X and EV-DO access) to provide a similar end user service experience while
operating outside regions with LTE coverage.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE Use of Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SR-VCC)
The SR-VCC approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The SR-VCC approach
Use of Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SR-VCC)

A future capability
The Single Radio Voice Call Continuity feature will be used to provide session continuity
for handoffs of voice calls to GSM/UMTS and 3G1X networks for voice calls. SR-VCC
will be supported in a future release of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE Service Centralization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service Centralization
Introduction
An additional benefit of the 3GPP IMS standard is its definition of standards for
providing IMS Centralized Service (ICS) feature to the end user while using CS (Circuit
Switched) voice bearers over legacy mobile access (GSM/UMTS or 3G1X). ICS will
enable service providers to provide IMS-provided rich services to the end user
independent of their location and availability of LTE access.
What is IMS Centralized Service?

IMS Centralized Service (ICS) is the power for the IMS at the home network to control
the call for the life of the call, even if the user roams to a non-LTE network. IMS
Centralized Service will be offered in a future release of the Solution.
What are IMS-provided rich services?

IMS-provided rich services are voice services that are not available to end users in
traditional cellular networks. In traditional cellular networks the set of services that an
end user can get is fixed. The reason the set of services is fixed is so that roaming will
work, as an end user travels from one service provider's network to another.
How it works
In traditional legacy networks, control of the call is passed from network to network as
the end user travels from one geographic region to another.
However, with VoLTE, the IMS on the home network always sets up and maintains
control of the call for the entire length of the call. So when a user roams to a different
network, the IMS on the home network still controls the call. Also, when the user
originates a call from outside the home network, no matter where the user is
geographically located, the IMS on the home network still sets up and maintains control
of the complete call. Therefore, VoLTE can provide additional services to voice users
because the IMS on the home network always manages the call, even if the end user is
halfway around the world from his or her home network.
New services can be invented

The IMS power within VoLTE gives service providers an opportunity of inventing and
providing to their users new voice services. Thus VoLTE can be used to provide
differentiated services to users.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE Service Centralization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In a future release
IMS-supported rich services will be supported in a future release of the Solution, when
IMS Centralized Service is supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Migration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Migration
Overview
Purpose
This section presents information on the migration path to follow when introducing voice
with LTE.
Contents
Considerations 7-24
Migration path 7-25
Considerations
CSFB will be needed for a long time
CSFB will be needed for at least the next ten years and possibly for always, to support
roamers and to support LTE users who do not have IMS-capable handsets.
SVLTE provides simultaneous voice and data

SVLTE provides simultaneous voice and data. Therefore SVLTE is an alternative that
works better than CSFB for most 3GPP2 networks.
CSFB can coexist with IMS

CSFB can co-exist with IMS-based services in the same operator's network, with
IMS-based services taking precedence over the CSFB option.
Typical deployments
Most service providers are choosing to deploy LTE networks first, and planning to deploy
IMS later, after the LTE networks are in place and working.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE Migration path
Migration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Migration path
Introduction
This topic describes the necessary migration path for service providers to follow, based on
the considerations outlined in “Considerations” (p. 7-24).
CSFB first
Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) is the approach that service providers will be adding
first. As stated previously, CSFB will be needed for at least the next ten years and
possibly for always, for the following reasons.
• VoLTE technology may never be used by all networks everywhere, so CSFB will be
needed to support roaming to and from other service providers' 2G and 3G networks.
• Not all end users will have UEs that support VoLTE. CSFB will be needed to support
UEs that are not compatible with VoLTE, including delivery of SMS to wireless data
cards for device management procedures. For information on SMS within the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, see Chapter 8, “SMS with LTE”.
• It will be necessary for most service providers to keep some capability for CSFB in
their networks, to communicate with UEs from with other service providers who may
never move beyond CSFB.
3GPP2 operators will add SVLTE

Because SVLTE provides 3GPP2 legacy networks the chance of providing simultaneous
voice and data to their end users while still using the legacy network equipment, most
3GPP2 service providers will add at least some SVLTE coverage in their networks.
Note: 3GPP2 operators who add SVLTE to their networks will still need to provide
CSFB to support roaming to and from other service providers' networks.
Move to VoLTE
Service providers will gradually move to VoLTE as the following conditions occur:
• VoLTE UEs become widely available
• service providers move more and more of their traffic to LTE networks and can
gradually phase out their legacy networks
Need to maintain CSFB support

Service providers will continue to support CSFB for the foreseeable future, for the
reasons outlined in “CSFB first” (p. 7-25).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE Migration path
Migration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Greenfield may start with VoLTE
The one exception to this migration path is greenfield networks. Service providers
starting up greenfield networks in the future may choose to start with VoLTE if VoLTE
UEs are available at that time.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Summary of approaches
Comparison table
The following table compares and contrasts the approaches for voice with LTE offered by
Table 7-3 Comparison of approaches for voice with LTE in the Solution
Approach Description Advantages Limitations Availability in

the Solution
CS Fallback UE is registered in Reuses the For CDMA 3G1x networks, UMTS, GSM (and
(CSFB) LTE and is paged legacy there is no way to do data at 3G1x in the future),
over LTE but takes 2G/3G the same time as voice.
call in CS (GSM, infrastruc- For GSM networks, DTM is
UMTS, or 1x). ture. required to do data at the
same time as voice.
For UMTS networks, a
separate data session will be
maintained, but at a slower
rate of transmission than with
LTE.
Voice over IMS Provides voice Provides VoLTE can not be used while Trial version
(VoLTE) service on the LTE opportunity roaming onto LTE networks available in 3.0.
network through for enriched not upgraded to support VoIP.
the use of IMS. voice VoLTE is not suitable without
services and SRVCC in regions with a high
other new likelihood of handover
services. towards legacy access that are
Provides not upgraded to support VoIP.
all-IP call
with no need
to fall back
to the legacy
infrastruc-
ture.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for voice with LTE Summary of approaches
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 7-3 Comparison of approaches for voice with LTE in the Solution
(continued)
Approach Description Advantages Limitations Availability in

the Solution
Simultaneous “Two phones in A way for UE has greater complexity Supported with the
Voice and LTE one” to re-use 3GPP2 and shorter battery life. Alcatel-Lucent LTE
(SVLTE) legacy voice service This solution is independent End-to-End
capabilities while providers to of the network and thus Solution in 3.0.
offering provide cannot be monitored using Depends upon
simultaneous LTE simultaneous Solution OA&M products. availability of
for data. voice and handsets.
UE maintains data sessions
simultaneous to the UE.
registration on
LTE network for
data and legacy
network for voice.
UE manages the
voice call (the
Solution does not).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
8 SMS with LTE
8
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the different ways Short Message Service (SMS) is supported
within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About SMS 8-1

The need for SMS 8-3
Ways to deliver SMS in the Solution 8-3
SMS over the SGs/S102 interface 8-4
SMS over IP (IMS-hosted SMS) 8-6
About SMS
SMS defined
Short Message Service (SMS) is the text communication component of phone, web or
mobile communication systems. SMS uses standardized communications protocols that
allow the exchange of short text messages between UEs (handsets), including the
exchange of messages between wireless and wireline phone devices.
Limitation
The major limitation with SMS messages is a length restriction of 160 characters. The
length restriction is a historical requirement that was based on the longest signaling
message allowed by signaling protocols. Even today, however, most providers limit text
messages to around 200 characters or less.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
SMS with LTE About SMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
With SMS, a user types a short message, usually on a simulated keyboard on a UE, SMS
messages can also be sent, however, from a PC to a UE; in that case, the user would type
the message using a real keyboard. After the user finishes typing the message, the user
sends the message. The network then transmits that short message to a Short Message
Service Center (SMSC). The SMSC takes that set of keystroke data and attempts to send
that data to the designated recipient. Usually the designated recipient is a UE, although,
the recipient can also be a PC or an email account. If the information cannot be
transmitted at that time, the SMSC will wait and try to transmit the information later.
No guaranteed transmission
There are no guarantees that the SMS message will get through, although most SMS
messages do get through.
Note: Indeed, because a network tries repeatedly to transfer an SMS message, in cases
of an overloaded network, an SMS message is more likely to get through than a voice
message. That is because the network only tries once to set up a voice communication
path.
Not a dedicated circuit

Another difference between an SMS message and a voice call is that SMS does not set up
a real time dedicated connection between the sender and receiver that stays up from the
time the message it sent to the time it is received. However, as explained in the next
paragraph, most SMS messages are sent over circuit connections.
Transmitted over circuit connections

In all wireline networks, SMS messages are sent over a circuit connection. Therefore
traditional SMS is a actually circuit-based application, even though SMS information is
always made up of short bursts of data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
SMS with LTE The need for SMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The need for SMS

SMS support is required
Support of an SMS solution is required in all networks, including LTE networks, from the
very first day the network is set up.
Use of SMS by end users

SMS is the basis of text messaging and thus is deployed in all wireless networks today to
support the widespread use of text messaging by end users. SMS text messaging is one of
the most widely used data applications in the world today.
SMS as used by service providers

SMS is also critically needed by service providers.
Service providers use SMS to perform the following tasks:
• performing over-the-air activation of a new UE
• sending configuration data to a UE
• sending network and software updates to UEs
• Using voice servers to provide recorded announcements to UEs
SMS required for some dual configurations

SMS is also used in some scenarios to notify a dual-mode 3G/LTE UE that is using one
mode that there is incoming information on or a need to support the other mode.
Ways to deliver SMS in the Solution

Introduction
Two ways to deliver SMS are available for use in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution:
• SMS over the SGs interface - a circuit-based approach
• SMS over IP (IMS-hosted SMS) - an IP packet-based approach
Each of these ways of delivering SMS is explained in this chapter.
Does SMS differ when used in an LTE environment?

No, the SMS application is unchanged when used in an LTE environment. The only thing
that changes is how to deliver and originate circuit-based SMS data in the IP packet-based
world of LTE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
SMS with LTE SMS over the SGs/S102 interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SMS over the SGs/S102 interface

What is SMS over the SGs/S102 interface?
SMS over the SGs/S102 interface is a method of delivering SMS data between a legacy
network and an LTE network using one of the following standard interfaces:
• SGs interface (between LTE and 3GPP networks)
• S102 interface (between LTE and 3GPP2 networks)
It is assumed here that the legacy network and the LTE network are co-located in the
same geographic area.
What is the SGs interface?

The SGs interface is an interface that extends between the LTE MME and a 3GPP
network's Visitor Location Register (VLR) at the MSC of the 3GPP network. In the SGs
interface, Non-Access Stratum (NAS) procedures are used to translate circuit-based SMS
messages from the legacy network into the equivalent packet-based SMS messages for
the LTE network and vice versa.
The SGs interface is similar to the Gs interface. The Gs interface is used between
WCDMA and legacy networks for transmission of SMS messages between WCDMA
networks and CDMA networks.
What is the S102 interface?

The S102 interface is just like the SGs interface except that the S102 interface is used
between LTE Networks and 3GPP2 networks. Just as with the SGs interface, the existing
S102 interface is used for carrying SMS information between the circuit-based 3GPP2
MSC and the packet-based MME.
What about SMS between two LTE UEs?

SMS between two LTE UEs is supported.
What route would an all-LTE SMS take?

SMS messages between two LTE UEs would probably still go through a legacy network
for two reasons:
• At present most Short Message Service Centers (SMSCs) are based in legacy
networks. Therefore the SMS from the first UE would have to pass through an SGs or
S102 interface to reach the SMSC.
• IMS-based SMS is not yet widely used. When sending the SMS to the second LTE
UE the SMSC would not know whether the network the second UE was in supported
IMS_based SMS. Therefore, the SMSC would send the SMS using traditional S102 or
SGs method to make sure that the message can be transmitted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
SMS with LTE SMS over the SGs/S102 interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CSFB not needed
The “SMS over SGs/S102” method of sending SMS messages does not require fall back
to the 2G or 3G network to send or receive SMS messages. Thus the “SMS over
SGs/S102” method can be deployed without deploying CSFB.
In other words, no handover is required from an LTE network in order for the LTE UE to
send or receive SMS data.
Useful for data-only networks

Because the “SMS over SGs/S102” method does not require CSFB, the “SMS over
SGs/S102” method can be used in an LTE data-only network to provide SMS coverage
for LTE UEs.
Can be used with any LTE network

The “SMS over the SGs/S102” method is used with all types of LTE networks, both with
data-only LTE networks and with LTE networks that support both data and voice.
Impact on the legacy network

At least one MSC in the legacy network must be equipped, through a software upgrade, to
use the SGs or S102 interface.
When to equip one MSC

If the legacy network is communicating with an LTE data-only network, and thus only
sending SMS traffic to the LTE data-only network, only one MSC needs to be equipped.
All SMS traffic from the LTE data-only network can be routed through the single
equipped MSC.
When to equip all the MSCs

If CSFB is set up between the legacy network and the LTE network, then all the MSCs in
the legacy network are already set up with the SGs or S102 interface. So you do not need
to do any additional work to support SMS, is CSFB is already set up.
Note: Remember that CSFB is not required to support the “SGs/S102 interface
method”. Communication over the “SGs/S102 interface” does not “fall back” to voice
circuitry as voice calls do.

The SGs interface is defined in the 3GPP TS 29.118 standard. SMS over SGs and over
S102 is defined in the 3GPP TS 23.272.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
SMS with LTE SMS over IP (IMS-hosted SMS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SMS over IP (IMS-hosted SMS)

SMS over IP
SMS over IP is all-IP packet-based SMS that is hosted by IMS. SMS over IP does not
need to go through circuit-based transformation, unless the UE on the other end of the
SMS session is currently hosted by a legacy network.
What is IMS?
multimedia “Internet-like” services to end-users.
IMS is used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to enable and run a variety of
IP-based applications, such as Short Message Services (SMS) and Voice over IP (VoIP).
For more on IMS, see Chapter 21, “Network elements used for IMS”.
From LE3.0 onwards, IMS-based SMS over IP is available for some configurations of the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution. For more information on this, contact your
Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9 Cell Broadcast with LTE
9
Overview
Purpose
The purpose of this chapter is to describe the Cell Broadcast services offered in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution to support the Public Warning System (CMAS designed for
US Market) in Release LE4.0.
Contents
Public Warning System (CMAS) 9-2

What is Public Warning System (PWS) 9-2
What is Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS) 9-3
How it works 9-3
Commercial Mobile Alert System architecture 9-3
LTE Network requirements 9-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Cell Broadcast with LTE Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Public Warning System supported by the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution in the Release LE4.0
Contents
What is Public Warning System (PWS) 9-2

What is Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS) 9-3
How it works 9-3
Commercial Mobile Alert System architecture 9-3
LTE Network requirements 9-5
What is Public Warning System (PWS)

Public Warning System
The Public Warning System (PWS) service defines the requirements for a Warning
Notification delivery to be transmitted to a large numbers of subscribers via their UEs.
The PWS is a generalization of Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Cell Broadcast with LTE What is Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS)

Commercial Mobile Alert System
The Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS) application, specific to the US market,
related to regulatory compliance, is a text-based Public Warning System that delivers
Warning Notifications provided by Warning Notification Providers to CMAS capable
PWS-UEs. CMAS defines three different classes of Warning Notifications (Presidential,
Imminent Threat and Amber Alerts).
The Alcatel-Lucent End-to-End Solution supports the CMAS application in Release
LE4.0.
How it works
Characteristics
The CMAS service has the following characteristics:
• CMAS is a best effort service
• Existing calls should not be preempted due to the processing of CMAS Warning
Notifications
• 3 categories of Warning Notifications are defined: Presidential, Imminent Threat and
Amber Alerts. Presidential alerts must be transmitted and received. Subscribers may
opt-out of other categories of alerts
• Alerts are made of text with a maximum of 90 English characters
Commercial Mobile Alert System architecture
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Cell Broadcast with LTE Commercial Mobile Alert System architecture
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CMAS architecture
The following figure shows the CMAS Architecture. The radio access technology used by
the Commercial Mobile Service Provider (CMSP) can be CDMA, GSM, UMTS or LTE.
Figure 9-1 Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS) architecture
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Cell Broadcast with LTE Commercial Mobile Alert System architecture
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CMAS implementation in LTE
The following figure shows the functional architecture within the LTE network.
Figure 9-2 CMAS implementation in LTE
In the Alcatel-Lucent End-To-End Solution, the 5140 Broadcast Message Center (BMC)
supports the two functional entities: the Commercial Mobile Service Provider (CMSP)
Gateway and the Cell Broadcast Center (CBC).
LTE Network requirements

Requirements
The LTE network is required to support the delivery of CMAS Warning Notifications as
follows:
• Warning Notifications are broadcast to multiple users simultaneously with no
acknowledgment required
• Support for concurrent broadcast of multiple Warning Notifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Cell Broadcast with LTE LTE Network requirements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Warning Notifications are broadcast to a Notification Area based on the geographical
information specified by the Warning Notification Provider (via the Federal Alert
Gateway in CMAS)
• Only Warning Notifications originated from an authenticated authorized source are
broadcast.

Required interface
The CMAS application requires that support of the dedicated signaling interfaced SBc to
be added on MME, while S1-MME/S1-AP is to be enhanced to support CMAS specific
message transfer between the MME and the eNodeB.
Network impacts
Network impacts include the following, in LE4.0:
• 5140 BMC introduction to support the CMSP Gateway function and the CBC
function. The CMSP gateway is responsible to interface to the Federal Alert Gateway.
The CBC is responsible to determine the impacted network elements for CMAS alerts
and managed the transmission and retransmission of the alerts.
• 9471 MME enhanced to support the selection of the appropriate eNodeBs based on
the information provided by the CBC for the distribution of the CMAS alerts and the
forward of these messages to the selected eNodeBs.
• 9412 eNodeB enhanced to support the RRC paging to Alert CMAS-capable UEs of
the presence of CMAS notification broadcast in the eUTRAN. The CMAS
notifications are delivered in System Information messages (in the Block SIB 12).
UE impacts
UEs are required to support text display, distinct vibration cadence and audio attention
signals, as means of distributing the CMAS alert messages to the CMSP’s (Commercial
Mobile Service Provider) subscribers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
10 10
Approaches for video on
LTE
Overview
Purpose
The purpose of this chapter is to describe the approaches offered in the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE Solution for handling video over LTE.
Contents
About video over LTE 10-2

Basic definitions 10-2
Standards for video over LTE 10-5
Summary of approaches for video with Video Communications Service 10-6
The Video Communications Service approach 10-7
About Video Communications Service 10-7
Current capabilities 10-8
Video Communications Service architecture 10-11
SVLTE UEs 10-12
New network elements to host new applications 10-13
Use of IMS core 10-14
How it works 10-16
Limitations 10-17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section gives general information about video over LTE.
Contents
Basic definitions 10-2

Standards for video over LTE 10-5
Summary of approaches for video with Video Communications Service 10-6
Basic definitions
Introduction
This topic presents basic definitions of terms used in this chapter.
Note: Some material in this topic is drawn from Evolved Packet System (EPS) The
LTE and SAE Evolution of 3G UMTS by Pierre Lescuyer and Thierry Lucidarme.
Broadcast video
Broadcast video is unidirectional video that is sent to many users at once. Broadcast video
may be received by any user in the coverage area who has the service enabled on his or
her UE.
Multicast video
Multicast video, like broadcast video, is unidirectional video that is sent to many users at
once. However, unlike broadcast video, multicast video may only be received by
members of a multicast group who have subscribed to the service and who have joined
the multicast group associated with the particular video session. Because it is subject to
subscription, multicast video allows the service provider to set specific user charging
rules for this service.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE Basic definitions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conversational video
Conversational video is video that offers two-way audio and video conversation between
two participants or between a small group of participants.
Conversational video compared to broadcast and multicast video

The major difference between conversational video and broadcast and multicast video is
that conversational video always has the capacity for two-way audio and video
conversation among the participants. Broadcast and multicast video, on the other hand,
are always unidirectional (one-directional).
Conversational video can be changed to one-way

At the user's choice, at any particular time, the video and audio component of
conversational video can by muted. However, this muting is not a limitation of the service
but rather a user's choice as to how to use the service. Muting and un-muting of video and
audio during a conversational video call can be performed at will by the user. However,
the inherent capacity for two-way audio and two-way video remains in the conversational
video call.
A video call with all users sending audio and video is often referred to as "I See You, You
See Me" while a call with all but one user muted can be referred to as "I see what you
see".
Client
A client is a software application running on a UE that enables the UE to access a remote
service. For example, the Video Communications Service client enables the UE to be able
to use Video Communications Service.
Enhanced Address Book

An Enhanced Address Book (EAB) is an application on the user's device that contains
typical subscriber information that would be in an ordinary address book application but
also includes additional Presence information, such as whether a contact in the address
book is in LTE coverage and can answer a video call. This information is conveyed to the
user via a Presence Server. An EAB feature is built into Video Communications Service.
A Video Communications Service subscriber can see this additional contextual
information of other subscribers if the other subscribers have the EAB feature and have
allowed the Video Communications Service subscriber to see this information.
Note: While not a requirement, the EAB application is strongly recommended to
increase user satisfaction with the Video Communications Service.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE Basic definitions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Functional entity
In this book, the term functional entity is defined as a logical entity defined by LTE
designers for the LTE network, such as the eNodeB or the MME.
The new functional entities defined by the designers of LTE are logical, not physical. In
other words the LTE designers did not assign functions to specific hardware. The LTE
designers also did not specify that each functional entity had to be implemented on a
separate piece of equipment. Thus the LTE designers left the possibility open that the
work of two or more separate LTE functional entities could be performed by the same
physical network element. In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution one network
element often performs the role of several functional entities.
Network element
In this book, the term network element is defined as a unique entity within a network,
comprising one or more functional entities. Each NE consists of multiple physical and
logical resources, which can be configured and monitored separately, or as a group. The
NE and the NE’s physical and logical resources are recognized as distinct objects by an
element or network management system. An example of a network element would be a
single Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB.
Video call
A video call is a session that can support a two-way audio stream and a two-way video
stream among two or more devices. When there are more than two-devices, this is
commonly called a video conference. This session is controlled by the 5420 CTS (TAS)
in a way similar to the way sessions for voice calls are controlled. The devices could be
mobile User Equipment (UEs), personal computers (PC)s or any other device supporting
an IMS UE and capable of originating and receiving audio and video streams.

“video over LTE” defined
As used with the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, video over LTE refers to any
of several approaches, or methods, used to enable video communications between UEs
and other devices over LTE networks.
Note: Not all of these approaches are implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE About video over LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Need for video over LTE
Service providers need the ability to provide high-quality video over LTE for many
reasons, including the following:
• To meet the ever-growing expectations of end users
• To help stimulate user demand for LTE devices, build traffic on LTE networks and
create new revenue-generating opportunities for service provider
• To compete with an ever-increasing proliferation of new Internet-based applications
from "Over-the-top providers"
• To differentiate their services in a highly competitive market
Requirement to minimize delay and jitter

Video over LTE, being a real-time application, has stringent requirements of low latency
(delay) and jitter (variability of delay). Factors that affect the total end-to end bearer delay
are the encoding and packetizing delays at the source, network delays, and buffering,
de-packetizing and decoding delays at the destination endpoint. In order to provide
acceptable delay, jitter, and packet loss for video over LTE calls, end to end quality of
service (QoS) support is essential.
Standards for video over LTE

Introduction
This topic lists standards used in the Video Communications Service approach.
What is the MMTel standard?

The 3GPP/NGN IMS Multimedia Telephony Service (MMTel) standard is a global
standard for video based on the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). The standard defines a
range of converged, fixed and mobile real-time multimedia communication options that
use different media capabilities such as voice, real-time video, text, file transfer and
sharing of pictures, audio and video clips.
MMTel standards groups

The MMTel standard is a joint project between the 3GPP and ETSI/TISPAN standards
groups.
Standards for presence information

Standards for presence information are defined in the Presence/XDMS part of the GSMA
RCS 1.0 standard.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE Standards for video over LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Compliance with standards
Video Communications Service complies with the MMTel standard and applicable
GSMA RCS 1.0 standards.
Alcatel-Lucent's commitment
Alcatel-Lucent is a very active participant in the 3GPP, GSMA and ETSI/TISPAN
standards groups, and our products are designed to meet these standards. Also,
Alcatel-Lucent is committed to evolve our products as the standards evolve.
Summary of approaches for video with Video Communications

Service
One approach
From LE3.0 onwards, the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution supports one
approach for video: “LTE Video Communications Service,” which supports point to point
video. Video Communications Service is explained in this chapter, in “The Video
Communications Service approach” (p. 10-7).
Future approach
Alcatel-Lucent's eMBMS is an example of a multicast video service. eMBMS will be
offered in a future release of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
The information in this section describes the LTE Video Communications Service
approach for delivering video over LTE.
Contents
About Video Communications Service 10-7

Current capabilities 10-8
Video Communications Service architecture 10-11
SVLTE UEs 10-12
New network elements to host new applications 10-13
Use of IMS core 10-14
How it works 10-16
Limitations 10-17
About Video Communications Service

What is Video Communications Service?
Alcatel-Lucent's LTE Video Communications Service is a conversational video service
that runs on LTE networks.
Purpose
The purpose of Video Communications Service is to provide a set of rich conversational
video communications services that leverage the increased data bandwidth and greater
total capacity provided by LTE. Video Communications Service gives service providers
the ability to provide new services and generate new revenue in the area of video
communications services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE About Video Communications Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits of Video Communications Service
Video Communications Service is designed to help service providers meet all the video
communication needs previously identified in this chapter. Thus, Video Communications
Service helps service providers provide high-quality video that will help stimulate user
demand for LTE devices, build traffic on LTE networks and create new
revenue-generating opportunities for service providers. Video Communications Service
also helps service providers differentiate their services in the face of competition from
other telecommunications-based and Internet-based service providers.
Non-LTE users can participate

Video Communications Service is designed to allow non-LTE subscribers to participate in
these video services, thus offering video services to more end users.
Part of the Solution

LTE Video Communications Service Solution is part of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Current capabilities
Introduction
In Video Communications Service Release 1.0, the initial release of Video
Communications Service, the following three basic capabilities are supported:
• Video calling
• A presence-enabled Enhanced Address Book (EAB) on the client
Video Calling
Each participant in a Video Communications Service video call sees a large image of the
far end participant and a small image of themselves. The bandwidth provided by LTE will
enable high quality video with Video Graphics Array (VGA) resolution and 30 Frames
Per Second (FPS). Lip-synch is maintained by transmitting both the audio and video
streams over the LTE IP data connection.
IMS control of LTE provides low latency that allows easy conversation between the two
parties. Supplementary services such as caller ID and call waiting are supported. Calls
will be forwarded to a voice mail system when the end user is busy, does not answer, or is
not attached to the wireless network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE Current capabilities
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 10-1 Video calling
Enhanced Address Book (EAB)

Video Communications Service 1.0 also includes an Enhanced Address Book (EAB) on
the client. The Enhanced Address Book (EAB) contains typical subscriber information but
is also presence-enabled. Presence-enabled address books contain additional real-time
information about where the subscriber is located and real-time information about the
present capability of the end user's contacts.
How the EAB works

The EAB leverages the Presence Server (PS) functional entity and the XML Document
Manager (XDM) Server (XDMS) functional entity (both hosted by the 5410 PS/XDMS).
The presence server is responsible for aggregating all service capability information
published by all device and terminal clients, and distributing this information to all
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE Current capabilities
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
authorized watchers. The Shared XDMS is used to store all presence-related lists, for
example the list of subscribed contacts (which in Video Communications Service is called
the “Video Communications Service buddy” list) and the presence authorization lists.
The Video Communications Service clients operate on lists that are stored in the Shared
XDMS. The subscribed contacts who have authorized the end user to receive their
presence information are listed in the EAB and are available on the Video
Communications Service client.
Information in the EAB

Each Video Communications Service subscriber has the ability to do the following in his
or her EAB:
• Select participants and initiate a video call or video share from the EAB
• Manage (create/edit/delete) contacts in the EAB
• Manage social presence indicators in the EAB, such as mood, status message (free
text), and hyper-availability
What is hyper-availability?
Hyper availability is a social presence status defined in the GSMA RCS1.0 Functional
Description 2.1.3.1. Hyper-availability is also called “Need to communicate” or “contact
me” status. This status allows a certain user to inform those contacts with whom a Social
Presence Relationship has been established, that the user is currently in a situation where
it is possible to communicate more freely (for example, in a waiting room), and that the
user is willing to communicate “right now”.
This status has following characteristics:
• This status is temporary: it is set for a short, limited period of time (for example, a
couple of minutes) which is operator configurable on the user's device, after which it
automatically switches off.
• It is a positive status: it does not interfere negatively with the basic mobile status
(such as available anywhere/anytime)
• It is controlled by the user: it can be set manually or be programmed but it is always
initiated by the end user.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE Video Communications Service architecture
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Video Communications Service architecture

Video Communications Service architecture
The following figure shows the Video Communications Service architecture.
Figure 10-2 Video Communications Service architecture
As shown in the figure, Video Communications Service makes use of LTE and enhanced
High Rate Packet Data (eHRPD) radio access networks, Third Generation (3G) Mobile
Switching Center (MSC), and Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning
(OAM&P) systems and IMS Core.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE Video Communications Service architecture
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Components impacted by Video Communications Service
Video Communications Service causes changes and/or new network entities in two of the
components shown in Figure 10-2, “Video Communications Service architecture”
(p. 10-11).
• SVLTE UEs are required.
• Additional IMS Application Servers have been added. The new IMS Application
Servers host applications needed by Video Communications Service.
Each of these impacted components is explained separately, below.
SVLTE UEs
SVLTE UE required
Video Communications Service requires a dual-mode UE that can handle simultaneous
sessions of voice and video. From LE3.0 onwards, the UE chosen to support Video
Communications Service is the Simultaneous Voice and LTE (SVLTE) User Equipment
(UE).
What is an SVLTE UE?

A Simultaneous Voice and LTE (SVLTE) UE is a UE that provides “Two phones in one”.
In other words, each SVLTE UE has two complete UEs within it. From within the SVLTE
UE, one of the embedded UEs communicates with the legacy network. Also from within
the UE, the other embedded UE communicates with the LTE network. The two
communications paths are completely separate.
Note: More information about SVLTE UEs is given in “The SVLTE approach”
(p. 7-17).
UE 1 and UE 2
To avoid confusion on this page, the first UE within the SVLTE UE is called UE 1 and
the second UE is called UE 2.
UE 1 for circuit voice

In the Video Communications Service configuration, one UE within the SVLTE UE (here
called UE 1) is used to handle all circuit-mode voice calls.
As shown in Figure 10-2, “Video Communications Service architecture” (p. 10-11),
traffic from UE 1 (the gold line) connects to the existing 3G MSC in the legacy network.
Using the existing circuit switched infrastructure for voice-only calls eliminates any
dependency on VoLTE and thus allows earlier deployment of Video Communications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE SVLTE UEs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service service. In this scenario, all voice services, including roaming and emergency
calling, are handled by UE 1 and the existing legacy network infrastructure. Any Lawful
Intercept that is requested on voice-only calls is also handled by the 3G MSC.
Note: Voice calls can, of course, be LTE calls, in which case they are packet data
calls, not circuit-based calls. LTE voice calls can go through the LTE network or can
be handled off to eHRPD and then handled by an EV-DO MSC (not shown in Figure
10-2, “Video Communications Service architecture” (p. 10-11)). However, in the
current implementation of Video Communications Service, which is only for 3G1x
CDMA networks, the only UE allowed is the SVLTE UE. By definition, all SVLTE
UEs contain one circuit-mode UEs and one LTE UE.
Second UE for data sessions

In the Video Communications Service configuration, the second UE within the SVLTE
UE (here called UE 2) is used to handle all data calls.
As shown in Figure 10-2, “Video Communications Service architecture” (p. 10-11),
traffic from UE 2 goes to the PCRF and CSCF and on into the LTE network.
Client required
An Video Communications Service client must be loaded on the SVLTE. The Video
Communications Service client enables UE 2 to access the Video Communications
Service service.
New network elements to host new applications

Introduction
Described in this topic are the functional entities that have been added to the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to support Video Communications Service and
the network elements that host these functional entities.
Video Application Server

The Video Application Server (Video AS) functional entity is used to support the basic and
supplementary services associated with video calling and video sharing. The Video AS
complies fully with the 3GPP Multimedia Telephony Service (MMTel) standard.
The Video AS functional entity is hosted by the 5420 CTS. For information on the 5420
CTS, see “5420 CTS” (p. 21-23).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE New network elements to host new applications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PS/XDMS Application Server
The Presence Server (PS)/XDM Server (XDMS) functional entity supports the Enhanced
Address Book (EAB) contact list on the Video Communications Service client. The
implementation of the PS/XDMS in Video Communications Service is fully compliant
with the Presence/XDMS part of the GSMA RCS 1.0 standard.
The PS/XDMS Server functional entity is hosted by the 5410 PS/XMDS. For information
on the 5410 PS/XMDS, see “5410 PS/XDMS” (p. 21-20).
Voice Mail Server

The Voice Mail Server functional entity provides voice mail service for unanswered video
calls and video sharing sessions. Service providers can configure this voice mail server so
it is shared with the voice mail server for normal voice calls, so the user may have a
single mailbox. A subscriber placing an unanswered video call will be offered the ability
to leave a voice mail.
The Voice Mail Server functional entity is hosted by the 5100 CMS. For information on
the 5100 CMS, see “5100 CMS” (p. 21-11).
Use of IMS core

Uses existing IMS core
The Video Communications Service approach does not add any new functionality to the
IMS core, but instead uses existing functional entities and network elements in the IMS
core. This topic explains the role of the IMS core in Video Communications Service and
briefly describes the IMS core functional entities and network elements used by Video
Communications Service.
Use of IMS for QoS

Video Communications Service uses the Alcatel-Lucent IP Multimedia System (IMS) to
provide control latency and jitter, provide excellent Quality of Service (QoS), and to
provide a centralize platform for control and monitoring of many applications.
Need for IMS

While the transition to advanced multimedia services is aided by the growing
deployments of high bandwidth LTE networks, more bandwidth by itself does not ensure
success. Replicating the internet model of bundling random, ad hoc silos of services is not
a formula for sustained success or potentially, even survival for a single company or the
telecom industry. IMS-capable networks enable integration of applications into a single
architecture that results in a more robust, more economical (over the long term) solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE Use of IMS core
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
and enables a better end user experience than can result from bundling of set of silo
applications. Thus IMS is used within Video Communications Service to provide a
platform for hosting a variety of video and voice applications.
IMS core entities used by Video Communications Service

The following functional entities in the IMS core are used by Video Communications
Service. These functional entities are not changed by Video Communications Service, but
merely used by Video Communications Service. These functional entities are described
here for completeness' sake.
• HSS - The Home Subscriber Server (HSS) functional entity stores the subscriber data
for the service subscription including authentication credentials, identification data
including subscriber directory number (DN), Public User Identity (PUID), Private
User Identity (PRID) and details about any supplementary services that are provided
to the subscriber.
The HSS functional entity is hosted by the 8650 Subscriber Data Manager (SDM)
Home Subscriber Server (HSS) . For more information about the 8650 SDM HSS, see
“8650 SDM HSS” (p. 20-13).
• PCRF - The Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) functional entity provides
the interface to the QOS capabilities of the radio network and the packet core. The
PCRF is used by the IMS system to request specific QOS attributes for the bearer
connections for the audio and video parts of video call/share sessions. Signalling is
sent by the CSCF to the PCRF for each time a video call/share session the is
established.
The PCRF functional entity is hosted by the 5780 DSC. For more information about
the 5780 DSC, see “5780 DSC” (p. 18-7).
• Call Session Control Function (CSCF) - The IMS CSCF functional entity registers the
subscriber after performing authentication using the credentials stored in the HSS.
The CSCF functional entity supports the subscriber to originate and receive video
calls and directs SIP messages to the appropriate IMS application server.
The CSCF functional entity is hosted by the 5450 IP Session Controller (ISC). For
more information about the 5450 ISC, see “5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF)” (p. 21-26). See
especially, “Providing Call Session Control Function (CSCF) functions” (p. 21-27).
• Lawful Intercept Gateway (LIG) - To meet regulatory requirements for support of
Lawful Intercept, a Lawful Intercept Gateway (LIG) functional entity is required. The
LIG supports the transmission of communication data and communication content to
the Law Enforcement Agency (LEA) when a court order requires the service provider
to provide that data for a specific subscriber.
The LIG functional entity is hosted by the 1357 LIG and the 1357 IMC. For more
information about the 1357 LIG, see “1357 LIG” (p. 20-3) and “1357 IMC”
(p. 22-16).
Note that LIGs can be used for both data and voice/video. Note also that if the service
provider is using VoLTE then packet switched voice is intercepted in the IMS network
and sent to agencies via LIGs. If circuit switched voice is used, the LIG function is
carried out by the 3G network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
Introduction
This topic gives a high-level description of how the various components of Video
Communications Service make video sessions possible.
User signs up for the service

To receive Video Communications Service, the end user first signs up for the Video
Communications Service video communications service through his or her service
provider. After the end user signs up, a service provider employee will load the Video
Communications Service client onto the end user's UE. If the end user does not have an
SVLTE UE, he or she will have to purchase one at that point and have the Video
Communications Service client loaded onto the SVLTE UE.
Note: At the discretion of the service provider, UE can come with the Video
Communications Service client already installed.
UE client runs the service

The primary focus of the service is the Video Communications Service client. The Video
Communications Service client provides the user interface to a presence enabled contact
list and allows the user to initiate both video calls and video sharing sessions. The end
user can start video calls and video sharing sessions by selecting another Video
Communications Service subscriber using the contact list on the mobile phone or by
dialing the directory number (DN) of the other subscriber.
The client also provides a user interface to supplementary services including caller ID and
call waiting. The client also has a message waiting indication to notify users when they
have voice mail waiting.
End user chooses which call is active

The client on the SVLTE device handles the coordination of normal voice and video
calling/sharing. The end user can place a current voice call on hold to answer an incoming
video call or place a video call on hold to answer an incoming voice call. The client
supports the user interacting with either the voice call or the video call, but not both at the
same time. For example, it is not possible to continue the video part of a video
call/sharing session while at the same time having a voice conversation on a voice call.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use of presence information
The client allows the end user to see presence information from other users who have
included the user in their group for presence information. This will include social
presence or, for other Video Communications Service subscribers, an indication that
video calls and video sharing are supported.
Primary voice service handled by MSC

As explained in “UE 1 for circuit voice” (p. 10-12), support of circuit-switched voice
calls is provided to the circuit-mode UE within the SVLTE UE by the 3G MSC in the
legacy network. The 3G MSC supports all the circuit-switched voice services including
basic calling, supplementary services, roaming and regulatory services including
emergency calling, lawful interception and mobile number portability. There is no direct
interaction between the 3G MSC controlling circuit-mode voice calls and the 5420 CTS.
The 5420 CTS is the Telephony Application Server (TAS) within IMS that controls video
calls and video sharing sessions.
Changing a voice call into a video call

When an Video Communications Service video sharing session is established between the
two parties on a voice only call, the existing voice only circuit switched call is dropped.
As part of establishing the video sharing session, a new two-way voice connection is
established in the data network along with the video share.
Leaving an LTE coverage area

When the UE originating or receiving an Video Communications Service video call or
video sharing session roams out of the LTE network, the call will be dropped.
Limitations
Limitations
Video Communications Service 1.0 supports only one kind of UE, the SVLTE UE. In
later releases Video Communications Service will be expanded to Circuit Switched Fall
Back (CSFB) and VoLTE UEs.
Also, Video Communications Service Release 1.0 is restricted to 3GPP2 service
providers, for 3G1x CDMA and 1xEV-DO Radio Access Networks that interwork with
LTE using eHRPD. In future releases Video Communications Service will be available
for Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) networks and for UMTS
networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Approaches for video on LTE Network and UE impacts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SVLTE UE
The Video Communications Service approach requires an SVLTE UE.
Video Communications Service client

The Video Communications Service client must be loaded onto the SVLTE UE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
11 Roaming in LTE networks
11
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes all the approaches currently supported by the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Solution for handling Inter LTE service provider roaming.
Contents
About inter LTE networks roaming 11-2

Definitions 11-2
Approaches for Inter LTE network roaming 11-3
LTE Roaming approaches 11-4
LTE Roaming with Home routed traffic approach 11-4
LTE Roaming with Local Break Out (LBO) approach (supported in a future 11-6
release)
LTE Mobility requirements needed for Roaming 11-9
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Roaming in LTE networks Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section gives general information about Inter LTE networks roaming.
Contents
Definitions 11-2
Approaches for Inter LTE network roaming 11-3
Definitions
What is Home network ?
The Home network is the location where the service of a particular Mobile end-user was
registered, i.e. network belonging to the Home Service Provider.
What is Visited network ?

When travelling, the Visited network is the network that covers the geographical area
where the Mobile end-user is located in and of course, the Mobile end-user has not
subscribed services to the Visited Service Provider. In case of roaming, roaming
agreements have to be established between the Home Service Provider and the Visited
Service Provider.
What is Roaming ?
Roaming is a general term referring to the extension of connectivity service in a location
that is different from the home location where the service was registered.
The term "Roaming" originally coming from the GSM sphere is also applied to the other
technologies CDMA, W-CDMA and LTE.
Traditional GSM Roaming is defined as the ability for a Mobile customer to
automatically make and receive voice calls, send and receive data, or access other
services, including home data services, when travelling outside the geographical coverage
area of the Home network, by means of using a Visited network. This can be done by
using a communication terminal or else just by using the subscriber identity in the visited
network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Roaming in LTE networks Definitions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is Inter LTE network Roaming ?
This is an LTE end-user belonging to a LTE Home network and roaming to a LTE Visited
network.
What are HPLMN and VPLMN ?

PLMN stands for Public Land Mobile Network. Home PLMN (HPLMN) is the mobile
network the user belongs to. Visited PLMN (VPLMN) is a network the mobile user has
roamed in. Each PLMN is identified by a unique PLMN identifier (ID).
Approaches for Inter LTE network roaming

Introduction
This topic lists all possible approaches for Inter LTE network roaming and explains which
approaches are currently implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Inter PLMN Roaming for LTE end-users with other technologies (WCDMA, CDMA and
GSM) is to be supported in a future release.
Two network approaches

From LE4.0 onwards, the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution supports the
following two network approaches for providing Roaming with LTE that are Roaming
architectures compliant with the TS23.401 standard:
• LTE Roaming with Home routed traffic
• LTE Roaming with Local Break Out (LBO)
Both approaches are described in this chapter.
Benefits
The Roaming Service brings benefits for both LTE Service Providers and LTE
Consumers:
• LTE Service Providers can increase their coverage enhancing the value of their
network by roaming with other operators. The service providers can increase revenue
by accepting roaming subscribers.
• For LTE Consumers, roaming is allowed to have extended coverage and continued
services among service provider networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Roaming in LTE networks Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the LTE Roaming with Home routed traffic architecture for
handling Roaming in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
LTE Roaming with Home routed traffic approach 11-4

LTE Roaming with Local Break Out (LBO) approach (supported in a future 11-6
release)
LTE Mobility requirements needed for Roaming 11-9
LTE Roaming with Home routed traffic approach

Purpose
This section describes the LTE Roaming with Home routed traffic architecture for
handling Roaming in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
About Roaming Architecture with Home routed traffic

Roaming Architecture with Home routed traffic is an architecture where PGW and
Application Function (AF) resources are allocated in the Home PLMN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Roaming in LTE networks LTE Roaming with Home routed traffic approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the Roaming Architecture with home routed traffic:
Figure 11-1 Roaming Architecture with home routed traffic
How it works
This topic describes the key aspects to support LTE Roaming across inter service provider
or PLMN for the home routed traffic architecture.
• PLMN System acquisition: When a roaming UE is switched on, it attempts to make
contact with the Public Land Mobile Network. The UE looks for a suitable cell for the
chosen PLMN and then can register its presence if necessary.
• HSS Discovery: HSS in the HPMLN is discovered by the Visited MME thanks to
DNS (Domain Name Server) query result.
• PGW Selection: PGW selection in the HPMLN is based on provisioning in HSS and
DNS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Roaming in LTE networks LTE Roaming with Home routed traffic approach
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• V-SGW / H-PGW interface: S8 (Roaming) interface is supported between Visited
SGW and Home PGW and it applies for Home routed traffic architecture only.
• QoS Control: The eUTRAN QoS in this architecture is supported in VPLMN and
PCRF QoS in HPLMN.
• Roaming Agreement and Access control: Parameters at HSS level (per
user/group/PLMN) allow defining access restrictions, operator barring.
Note: DNS provisioning becomes a critical task for Roaming with both HSS
Discovery and PGW selection.
LTE Roaming with Local Break Out (LBO) approach (supported

in a future release)
Purpose
This section describes the LTE Roaming with Local Break Out architecture for handling
Roaming in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Two configurations are presented:
• when IP services are triggered in the Home network,
• when IP services are triggered in the Visited network.
Please note that the Local Break Out approach is to be supported in a future release.
About Roaming Architecture with Local Break Out and Home IP services
Roaming Architecture with LBO and Home IP services is an architecture where PGW is
allocated in Visited PLMN and Application Function resources for IP services are
allocated in the Home PLMN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Roaming in LTE networks LTE Roaming with Local Break Out (LBO) approach
LTE Roaming approaches (supported in a future release)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This figure shows the Roaming architecture with Local Break Out and Home IP services
triggering
Figure 11-2 Roaming Architecture with LBO and Home IP services
How it works
This topic describes the main aspects to support LTE Roaming with Local Break Out and
Home IP services triggering compared to the LTE Roaming with Home Routed Traffic
approach.
• PLMN System acquisition and HSS Discovery: see similar processes for Home
Routed Traffic PLMN system acquisition and HSS Discovery
• PGW Selection: PGW selection in the HPMLN is based on provisioning in HSS
(special flag set for “VPLMN allocation allowed”) and visited PGW in DNS.
• V-SGW / V-PGW interface: S5 interface is supported between visited SGW and
visited PGW.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• QoS Control: the eUTRAN QoS in this architecture is supported in VPLMN and
PCRF QoS is supported in both HPLMN and VPLMN via S9 interface.
• Roaming Agreement and Access control: Parameters at HSS level (per IMSI) allow
defining access restrictions.
About Roaming Architecture with Local Break Out and Visited IP services
Roaming Architecture with LBO and Visited IP services is an architecture where PGW is
allocated in Visited PLMN and Application Function resources for IP services are
allocated in the Visited PLMN too.
This figure shows the Roaming architecture with Local Break Out and Visited IP services
triggering
Figure 11-3 Roaming Architecture with LBO and Visited IP services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
This topic describes the key differences between LTE Roaming with Local Break Out and
Visited IP services triggering compared to the Local Break Out and Home IP Services
approach.
• Routing path: the routing path is optimized for real-time applications. Bearer packets
do not need to be routed in the HPLMN (e.g. if terminating destination is in VPLMN
or closely).
• QoS Control: H-PCRF does not make QoS policy based on IMS service.
LTE Mobility requirements needed for Roaming

Roaming Agreement and Access control
Both approaches can’t apply with access restriction per user (IMSI). It is necessary to
choose one of the Roaming architecture.
Mobility
S1 Handover scenario with SGW and MME relocation is supported between two service
providers and PLMNs. No direct X2 interface is supported between border eNodeBs.
Networks impacts
Network impacts include the following:
• DNS use is strongly requested for Inter PLMN Roaming.
• Security between service provider networks: security gateway/firewall with Diameter
Peer/Proxy and implementation of IPSec tunnels (when available in a future release)
are recommended.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Roaming in LTE networks LTE Mobility requirements needed for Roaming
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
12 12
Government-mandated
services
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the government-mandated services supported by the
Contents
1357 Unified Lawful Interception Suite (ULIS) 12-2

About the 1357 ULIS 12-2
How it works 12-3
Lawful interception within different parts of the Solution 12-5
Advantages of the 1357 ULIS 12-5
Emergency Services 12-8
About Emergency Services 12-8
Number Portability 12-9
About Number Portability 12-9
About TTY/TTD Support 12-10
TTY/TTD Support 12-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Government-mandated services Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution fully supports lawful access (often referred
to as legal inception or lawful interception). The ability to support lawful interception is
provided by the Alcatel-Lucent 1357 Unified Lawful Interception Suite (ULIS).
Contents
About the 1357 ULIS 12-2

How it works 12-3
Lawful interception within different parts of the Solution 12-5
Advantages of the 1357 ULIS 12-5
About the 1357 ULIS

What is the 1357 ULIS?
The Alcatel-Lucent 1357 Unified Lawful Interception Suite (1357 ULIS) is a complete
system for supporting real-time lawful interception over virtually any type of network.
LI for the Solution

The 1357 ULIS supplies any lawful interception needed within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
What is lawful interception?

Lawful interception of telecommunications is a capability that allows authorized
organizations or law enforcement agencies (LEAs) to detect and intercept the use of
telecommunications facilities by criminal or terrorist organizations. All
telecommunications operators are obliged to comply with government regulations to
enable the interception of any type of call, and most countries have adopted global lawful
interception requirements and standards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Government-mandated services About the 1357 ULIS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Information provided
For any type of intercepted traffic, the 1357 ULIS allows the monitoring of selected
subscribers in real time inside the telecommunication network, and provides Law
Enforcement Agencies (LEAs) with:
• Intercept-related information (IRI), which is the signaling information (that is the
source and destination of the call), and related information, such as intercepted short
message service (SMS) calls.
• Content of the communication (CC), which includes the voice, fax, data, video or
message contents carried on a speech channel, or information exchanged on a
high-speed Internet access link.
How it works
Main functions
There are several primary functions required within a network to achieve lawful
interception:
• The Intercept Access Point (IAP), which is located within the network nodes. The IAP
is responsible for generating the intercept-related information and content of
communication
• The Mediation function, which clearly delineates the public network from the Law
Enforcement Monitoring Facility (LEMF). The Mediation function communicates
with the IAP using internal network interfaces, which can be proprietary. The
Mediation function also communicates to one or more LEMFs through locally
standardized handover interfaces (that is, HI2 and HI3)
Implementation of functions
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution the functions are implemented in the
following way:
• The IAP function is performed by the HSS, MME and S/P-GW network elements
• The Mediation function is performed by the 1357 ULIS Legal Interception Gateway
(LIG) network element.
The 1357 ULIS LIG is described in “1357 LIG” (p. 20-3).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Government-mandated services How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Integrated LI solution
The following figure shows how Lawful Interception works in the Solution. The case
shown here is a non-roaming case. However, whether the UE is roaming or not, the
procedure is the same: First, to configure an intercept across the network elements, and
secondly, if there is a match the network element will intercept the traffic and send it to
the 1357 which will send it to LEA.
Figure 12-1 Lawful Interception in the Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Government-mandated services Lawful interception within different parts of the Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lawful interception within different parts of the Solution

Required for both voice and data
Lawful interception compliance is required for all voice and data communications. The
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution provides lawful interception support for all LTE
services, whether the services are voice or data services.
Advantages of the 1357 ULIS

Compliance
The 1357 ULIS:
• Provides surveillance of all common telecommunication services: voice, fax, data,
VoIP, high- speed Internet (for web browsing, e-mail, peer-to-peer)
• Complies with regulatory requirements in numerous countries worldwide
• Conforms to all international lawful interception standards developed by ETSI, 3GPP
In addition, Alcatel-Lucent maintains a close cooperation with regulatory authorities,
standardization bodies and LEMF and Monitoring Center (MC) providers ensuring
compliance with the latest standards and technologies.
Cost-efficiency
The Alcatel-Lucent 1357 ULIS:
• Provides central management of all interception activities in the network
• Uses a scalable architecture that enables cost-efficient solutions for small to very large
communications networks
• Integrates into any available network — wire line, wireless or converged
Reliability
The Alcatel-Lucent 1357 ULIS:
• • Monitors and extracts critical intercept-related information/call content with no
impact to the performance or reliability of the telecommunication network and
services
• • Handles Alcatel-Lucent core network evolutions seamlessly with no impact on LEA
interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Government-mandated services Advantages of the 1357 ULIS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reliable partner
Alcatel-Lucent is a reliable partner, bringing more than 10 years of experience in the
deployment of lawful interception solutions to more than 70 fixed and mobile networks
and the knowledge of a global telecommunications equipment, solutions and services
provider.
Need for a centralized solution

With the explosion of voice and data transmissions in today's networks, and the rapid
transformation of operator networks to IP, the lawful interception of voice and data
communications is becoming increasingly challenging for both service providers and
LEAs. In addition, most solutions available today are fragmented and, therefore, do not
provide a complete lawful interception capability across all networking domains,
functions and interfaces.
Provides a centralized solution

The 1357 ULIS consolidates all former Alcatel and Lucent lawful interception functions
under one umbrella. The 1357 ULIS thus provides a centralized solution designed to
provide a single management solution for all of a service provider's lawful interception
needs. This centralized management can be used for multivendor mediation functions and
can allow a network operator or a Law Enforcement Agency (LEA) to centralize lawful
interception management.

Customer documentation
An entire set of customer documentation for the 1357 ULIS is available from the online
customer support (OLCS) web site for customers who have purchased the 1357 ULIS
product. For instructions on using OLCS, see “Accessing and navigating the OLCS web
site” (p. B-9) and other helpful information in Appendix B, “Resources”.
Related standards
For basic standards on Lawful Interception (LI), see ES 201 671: "Telecommunications
security; Lawful Interception (LI); Handover interfaces for the lawful interception of
telecommunications traffic".
4th Generation (4G) standards for LI are given in the following documents:
• 3GPP TS 33.106, Lawful interception requirements, Stage 1
• 3GPP TS 33.107, Lawful interception architecture and functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Government-mandated services For further information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• 3GPP TS 33.108, Handover interface for lawful interception
• ATIS TI.678 LAES for Voice over Packet Technologies in Wireline
Telecommunications Networks
For more about the 1357 LIG

The 1357 LIG is described in “1357 LIG” (p. 20-3).
For more about the 1357 IMC

The 1357 IMC is described in “1357 IMC” (p. 22-16).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Government-mandated services About Emergency Services
Emergency Services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Emergency Services
About Emergency Services

Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution supports emergency services via CSFB.
What are Emergency Services?

Emergency Services is a term used to cover national requirements to handle (and route)
emergency calls to a Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP) and be able to report
locations from which the emergency calls come.
How it works
For CSFB voice calls the handling of Emergency Service calls reverts to the legacy
network to which the voice call has “fallen back”.
For VoLTE calls emergency calls are handled using CSFB to 2G/3G as defined in 3GPP
23.272, Section 4.6.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Government-mandated services About Number Portability
Number Portability
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Number Portability
About Number Portability

Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution fully supports Number Portability.
What is Number Portability?

Number Portability (NP) is the ability to switch service providers and maintain the same
wireless phone number. Number portability is required by law in many countries.
How Number Portability is provided

The following table shows how Number Portability is provided within different parts of
the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, including within all the approaches for
voice.
Table 12-1 How Number Portability is provided
Option Number Portability is provided by

CS Fallback (CSFB) Current NP solutions in place in Alcatel-Lucent's legacy networks.
Voice over IMS Current NP solutions in use in Alcatel-Lucent's IMS based network.
(VoLTE)
SVLTE Current NP solutions in place in Alcatel-Lucent's legacy networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Government-mandated services Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TTY/TTD Support
Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution fully supports Teletypewriter
(TTY)/Telecommunications Devices for the Deaf (TTD) (TTY/TDD) Support (often
shortened TTY/TTD Support).
What is TTY/TTD Support?

Teletypewriter (TTY)/Telecommunications Devices for the Deaf (TTD) (TTY/TDD)
support (TTY/TTD Support) is support for alphanumeric UEs that provide translation of
circuit-mode calls into digitized text.
TTY/TTD Support required for voice and data

Support is required for all TTY/TTD devices to be able to communicate with each other,
regardless of the underlying radio access network technology. The Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution provides full TTY/TTD Support.
How TTY/TTD Support is provided

The following table shows how TTY/TTD Support is provided within different parts of
the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, including within all the approaches for
voice.
Table 12-2 How TTY/TTD Support is provided
Option TTY/TTD Support is provided by

CS Fallback (CSFB) The MSC on the legacy network to which the voice call has fallen back
Voice over IMS Transcoding between V.18 and GTT-IP (text/RTP) in the MGCF and
(VoLTE) MGW.
SVLTE For the legacy network call, the MSC in the legacy network handling the
call. (like CSFB)
data-only not relevant.
transmissions in the
LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
13 Public Safety
13
Overview
Purpose
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Public Safety Solution supports key value points.
The ability to support Public Safety is provided by the Alcatel-Lucent End-to-End
Solutions network equipments. The solution allows Public Safety users to use dedicated
Public Safety networks and Public Safety operators to manage their own networks
(portion of network) or to share network elements.
Contents
About Public Safety 13-2

Definitions 13-2
Public Safety Expectations with LTE 13-3
How it works 13-4
No specific Network Equipment required for PS 13-4
Public Safety configurations, devices and frequency spectrum 13-5
Sharing Network Elements 13-7
Hosted Core Model 13-9
Priority Access 13-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Public Safety Overview
About Public Safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About Public Safety
Overview
Purpose
This section presents basic definitions or terms used in this chapter and the Public Safety
expectations.
Contents
Definitions 13-2
Public Safety Expectations with LTE 13-3
Definitions
Public Safety (PS)
Public Safety (PS) involves the prevention of and protection from events that could
endanger the safety of the general public from significant danger, injury/harm, and
damage such as crimes or such as natural or man-made disasters.
To meet the increasing challenges in the public safety area, responsible public institutions
and organizations (national, regional, local) can tap into their own intelligence to
successfully address possible threats in advance. They optimize their internal structures,
use synergies, and carefully balance costs and benefits of their measures.
Public Safety Users

Public Safety Users are subscribers belonging to Public safety organization with a LTE
mobile device to access Public Safety networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Public Safety Public Safety Expectations with LTE
About Public Safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Public Safety Expectations with LTE

Purpose
In the situation of events in remote office, more and more real-time life-saving
information is needed (Video, Images, Messaging e.g. medical telemetry). Due to
multiplicity of Public Safety organizations (Multi-Agency, Multi-Jurisdiction), a full
inter-operability is required for the team coordination and by consequence a full
inter-operability in the networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Public Safety Overview
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how the Public Safety works with the Alcatel-Lucent LTE solution
Network Elements.
Contents
No specific Network Equipment required for PS 13-4

Public Safety configurations, devices and frequency spectrum 13-5
Sharing Network Elements 13-7
Hosted Core Model 13-9
Priority Access 13-10
No specific Network Equipment required for PS

No specific network equipment required
There is no specific network equipment for the Public Safety solution, the only
requirement is to have eNodeB supporting frequency band dedicated to public safety. The
already available LTE solution Networks Elements are used for Public Safety. The
differentiation with commercial LTE solutions can be highlighted with key features and
concepts for Public Safety.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Public Safety Public Safety configurations, devices and frequency
How it works spectrum
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Public Safety configurations, devices and frequency spectrum

Public Safety configurations
The Alcatel-Lucent Solution for Public Safety is flexible and allows several
configurations from full private network to shared networks according to the customer
needs and inter PS network operator agreements (e.g. roaming).
Public Safety devices

The Public Safety devices are required to follow the LTE standards and to comply with
the 3GPP frequency spectrums (USB modems, Trunk modems and routers, smart phones
and PDAs from multi vendors).
Public Safety frequency spectrum

The Alcatel-Lucent Public Safety Solution operates in the frequency spectrum defined by
the legislation, e.g. Band 14 in the US 700 MHz frequency spectrum and supports both
2x5 MHz operation (Public Safety Broadband Block) and 2x10 MHz (D block and Public
Safety Broadband Block). Note that other commercial bands could be used (800 MHz, 2.3
GHz…) and other LTE bands where public safety does no have access to spectrum (400
MHz).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Public Safety Public Safety configurations, devices and frequency
How it works spectrum
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This following figure shows the Public Safety used in the US:
Figure 13-1 Public Safety Upper 700 MHz Band
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Public Safety Sharing Network Elements
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sharing Network Elements

Sharing Subscriber dependent Network elements
The Alcatel-Lucent Public Safety Solution allows Public Safety network operators to
share network elements and manage their own data thanks to partitioned capabilities with
role based access controls.
• The basic shared ePC configuration concerns the following equipments: 8950 SAM, ,
8650 SDM, 5780 DSC.
• The network operating model consists of one centralized NOC (Network Operations
Centre) responsible for end-to-end management and maintenance of the shared
network elements. The NOC is represented by the SAM 8950 application for the
subscribers provisioning.
• Ability for partitioned subscriber management and for tenants to securely manage
their own subscriber groups on an HSS: 8950 SAM allows the definition of one or
more operators for each partition who have the permission to add, modify and delete
subscribers associated with that partition. These operators are not able to view
information associated with any other partition. Subscriber partitioning is performed
by IMSI range.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Public Safety Sharing Network Elements
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the 8950 SAM use for Public Safety:
Figure 13-2 8950 SAM (Subscriber Activation Manager) for Public Safety Networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Public Safety Hosted Core Model
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hosted Core Model

Introduction
Deploying an entirely new Public Safety network with 4G LTE infrastructure is
cost-prohibitive; this is why a “Hosted Core” is an attractive choice. An ePC Service
provider (e.g. Alcatel-Lucent) deploys, operates and maintains the Alcatel-Lucent core for
Public Safety agencies.
The following figure shows the Alcatel-Lucent LTE hosted solution for Public Safety:
Figure 13-3 Alcatel-Lucent LTE hosted solution for Public Safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Public Safety Hosted Core Model
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hosted Model Scope
This section explains the key facets of the Alcatel-lucent hosted model:
• ALU owns the ePC (Multitenant core) and Local entities own gateways, backhaul,
RAN and devices
• High system availability is obtained with the geographic redundancy
• Confidentiality is kept thanks to secure partitioning (separate management database,
no cross visibility)
• All bearer traffic stays local, signaling traffic comes to the ePC (some applications
may require bearer traffic to traverse the hosting facility).
Benefits of the Hosted Model

This section explains the major benefits of the hosted model:
• Avoiding need for large capital outlay and creation of knowledgeable experience base
• Predictable, consistent cost structure
• Flexible management solution:
– Varied levels of shared management based on needs/requirements of each entity
– From full Alcatel-Lucent management through complete jurisdiction involvement
or anywhere in between
• For future release, a common Portal will present dynamic alarming, ticketing and
reporting content to Alcatel-Lucent and public entities.
Priority Access
Principles
In order to reflect the command chain in the PS agency, priorities are given on the
concurrent services within a given jurisdiction with for example higher priority users
moving at the head of the line. Therefore it is possible to define priority per user and per
bearer.
15 priority access levels can be assigned to Public Safety users. In cases where a user can
have multiple bearers (some default bearers, others dedicated) the priority of each bearer
can be specified. The administrator defines the bearers and their priorities for a group of
users and then assigns particular users to that group.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Public Safety Priority Access
How it works
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each Radio Bearer request, using provisioned rules, the PCRF decides on the QoS
attributes and retrieves in particular to the eNodeB those three Allocation Retention
Priority (ARP) attributes:
• Priority Level - A Radio Bearer priority for resource allocation used for admission.
• Pre-emption Capability - Specifies whether this Radio Bearer can trigger pre-emption
(to free up resources) of other Radio Bearers
• Pre-emption Vulnerability - Specifies whether this Radio Bearer can be pre-empted by
other Radio Bearers.
The operator can provision the ARP range that is considered high priority in the eNB.
At every Radio Bearer setup request the eNB will evaluate the current eNB resources. If
key eNB limits are reached, the eNodeB will determine whether to pre-empt existing
Radio Bearers for those considered high priority per the ARP attributes listed above.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Public Safety Priority Access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
14 LTE End-to-End Security
14
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes common security risks in an LTE network and gives
recommendations for providing security in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Two areas
There are two main areas of security that are necessary for any LTE network:
• Air Interface Security
• Network Security
Both types of security are described in this chapter.
Contents
Air Interface Security 14-2

About Air Interface Security 14-2
Common security threats to the air interface 14-4
Control plane security 14-4
User plane security 14-6
Network Access Security 14-8
About network security 14-8
Common security threats to the network 14-10
Recommendations for providing network security 14-11
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE End-to-End Security Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes common security risks for the air interface in an LTE network and
describes the security provisions that must be made to provide security on the air
interface.
Contents
About Air Interface Security 14-2

Common security threats to the air interface 14-4
Control plane security 14-4
User plane security 14-6
About Air Interface Security

Introduction
Air interface security involves protecting the LTE air interface from over the air attacks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE End-to-End Security About Air Interface Security
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 14-1 LTE Standards Reference Model Architecture for security
What is the LTE air interface?

The LTE air interface is that portion of the network that exists between the UEs and the
eNodeBs.
Purpose
The purpose of air interface security is to do the following:
• Protect the UE users and equipment and the LTE network from threats and
vulnerabilities generated in the air interface
• Protect UE user/equipment and traffic from over-the-air interface threats
• Protect LTE network (eNB, MME, SGN, SGSN, HSS) from over-the-air Interface
threats
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE End-to-End Security About Air Interface Security
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Two planes to be protected
To protect the air interface, two types of security protection must be applied: security on
the control plane and security on the user plane.
Common security threats to the air interface

Air interface is vulnerable
By its nature the air interface is vulnerable open to interception. Radio waves travel in all
directions. The service provider cannot control the scope of the transmission. Anyone
with the proper equipment can listen to the transmission, interrupt the transmission, or
inject data into the transmission.
Control plane security

Introduction
Air interface security on the control plane is provided by the use of encryption.
What is encryption?
Encryption involves the encoding messages or packets before they are transmitted over
the network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE End-to-End Security Control plane security
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 14-2 Air Interface Security: Control Plane Security
Two types of signaling protected

Encryption is required for both Radio Resource Control (RRC) and Network Access
Server (NAS) signaling.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE End-to-End Security User plane security
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User plane security

Introduction
As shown in the following figure, air interface security on the user plane is also provided
by the use of encryption.
Figure 14-3 Air Interface Security: User Plane Security
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE End-to-End Security For further information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Further information about LTE air interface security can be found in the 3GPP TS 23.401
standard.
For help with network security

For assistance from Alcatel-Lucent with network security for your network, contact your
Account Executive.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE End-to-End Security Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes common security risks for the network portion of an LTE Solution
and describes the security precautions that must be taken to provide network access
security.
Contents
About network security 14-8

Common security threats to the network 14-10
Recommendations for providing network security 14-11
About network security

Introduction
Network security involves protecting LTE interfaces and traffic from wireline attacks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE End-to-End Security About network security
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 14-4 LTE Standards Reference Model Architecture for security
What part of the network does network security protect?

As shown in the figure, Network Security protects the following portions of the Solution:
• the eUTRAN.
• the ePC
• service provider OA&M networks
• all wireline networks owned by the service provider and connected to the LTE
network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE End-to-End Security About network security
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The purpose of network security is to do the following:
• Protect user subscriber identity, user location and traceability
• Perform entity authentication (UE and LTE network
• Maintain data integrity (mandatory for RRC and NAS signaling)
• Preserve confidentiality of the information (optional for RRC/NAS signaling and
radio bearer)
• Perform mobile equipment identification (for example, to identify unauthorized and
stolen UEs)
Common security threats to the network

Threats to the eUTRAN
The eUTRAN typically covers long backhaul distances between eNodeBs and the central
offices. Also, fifty percent or more of backhaul networks are leased by service providers
from third party vendors. Thus, for security purposes, the eUTRAN must be considered a
hostile network and strict security must be applied.
Common threats to the Ethernet Access Transport Network (EATN) include the
following:
• EATN users create DoS attacks from EATN on the eNBs, SEG, EPC, OAM and EMS
systems, call processing systems, and any other host exposed to the EATN.
• Intrusion and unauthorized access to backhaul systems, including OAM, EMS and
call processing systems and resources.
• Eavesdropping and tampering with the traffic traversing the EATN (OAM, signaling
and radio bearer traffic).
Threats to the ePC

The ePC must be carefully protected in case of an attack through the eUTRAN, or from a
wireline network not owned by the service provider.
Threats to the OA&M network

Since the OA&M network is typically within the service provider network and kept
private by the service, the risk to the OA&M network is less than the risk to the
eUTRAN. However, the OA&M networks still need to be protected. If a hacker can reach
the OA&M network, a hacker can perform service-interrupting procedures like rebooting
and bringing down key equipment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE End-to-End Security Common security threats to the network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Threats to all service provider wireline networks
Standard security practices for service provider wireline networks must be followed. For
security purposes, any wireline network not owned by the service provider must be
considered a hostile network.
Recommendations for providing network security

Use of authentication and key agreements
Network security can provided by the use of authentication and key agreements between
adjoining network elements.
In addition, the use of the IPSec package for leased backhaul and between LTE nodes is
strongly recommended (though optional).
What is authentication?
Authentication is the process of checking all incoming packets to see if they are from a
valid source. If the packets are not from a valid source, they are discarded. Packets are
considered legitimate if they contain predefined keys. Keys are predefined sets of digits
known to both network elements that are exchanging sets of information.
What is IPSec?
IPSec is a software package that creates encrypted tunnels between individual users.
Communication passes through these encrypted tunnels and therefore cannot be read by
hackers.
Threats that IPSec can protect from

IPsec will protect the LTE traffic and LTE network element (eNodeB, MME, SGW,
PGW) interfaces from the following threats:
• Masquerading/spoofing legitimate subscribers, system, serving network, as a home
environment, cloning, spoof IP address of eNB, SEG, MME, SGW, and PDNGW.
• Loss or Compromise of information in transit: manipulation of data, integrity of data,
unauthorized deletion, insertion modification, reordering, replay or delay, spam,
traffic injection.
• Denial of Service (DoS): packet flood, traffic flood, magnification/amplification
attacks, and other types of flooding and attacks.
• Eavesdropping: wiretapping, packet sniffing, packet capture, traffic analysis,
unauthorized recording or capture of information being transmitted, port mirroring.
• Unauthorized System Access: bypass authentication, or access control, password
cracking, privilege escalation, shared accounts, physical intrusion into eNB.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE End-to-End Security Recommendations for providing network security
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Theft of Service: Masquerade as legitimate user during authentication process,
repudiation of a service charge.
• Repudiation: of traffic origin, of traffic delivery, of administrative action, of
occurrence of system event.

Further information about LTE network security can be found in the 3GPP TS 33.401
standard.
For help with network security

For assistance from Alcatel-Lucent with network security for your network, contact your
Account Executive.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Part III: Network Elements
Overview
Overview
Purpose
This part gives an overview of the Network Elements of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
Chapter 15, About the network element descriptions 15-1

Chapter 16, Network elements used in the Radio Access Network 16-1
Chapter 17, Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Transport 17-1
Network
Chapter 18, Network elements used in the Core Network 18-1
Chapter 19, Radio/core (hybrid) network elements 19-1
Chapter 20, Network elements used in the Common Core Network 20-1
Chapter 21, Network elements used for IMS 21-1
Chapter 22, OAM&P products 22-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary III-1
Issue 1 March 2012
Network Elements Overview Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
III-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
15 15
About the network
element descriptions
Overview
Purpose
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is made up of a variety of network elements
representing many different types of radio access networks. Each of these network
elements has a separate network element description in this document.
This chapter describes how to find the network element description in this document for a
particular network element.
Contents
Complete list of Network Elements in the Solution 15-1

Components of the Solution 15-4
How the network element descriptions are organized 15-4
Complete list of Network Elements in the Solution

Comprehensive view
A complete list of all the network elements that can be used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution in the current release is given in Figure 15-1, “Network elements
and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution” (p. 15-3).
Color coding is used in the diagram to identify which component a network element
belongs to. See the key at the bottom left of the diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
About the network element descriptions Complete list of Network Elements in the Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For reference only
Figure 15-1, “Network elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution” (p. 15-3), which is for reference purposes only, lists all Alcatel-Lucent network
elements, representing many different types of radio access networks, that can be used
with the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution. These network elements will never all
be used in any single instance of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Comprehensive diagram
The following diagram lists all network elements in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution and the interfaces that connect them.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 15-1 Network elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Components of the Solution

Six major components
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is made up of the following six major
components:
• Radio Access Network (RAN)
• Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
• Core Network
• IMS delivery environment
• Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P) support
How the network element descriptions are organized

Listed by component
Network elements used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution are listed by
component in Figure 15-1, “Network elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution” (p. 15-3) and in this document.
Therefore the network element descriptions in this document are grouped into the
following chapters:
• Radio Access Network - These network elements are explained in Chapter 16, “
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network” and are shown as blue-green in
Solution” (p. 15-3).
• Backhaul and Transport Networks - It is beyond the scope of this document to list
network elements for Backhaul. However, information about LTE backhaul is given
in Chapter 17, “Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Transport
Network”. Backhaul-related network elements are shown as grey in Figure 15-1,
“Network elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution”
(p. 15-3).
• Core Network - These network elements are explained in Chapter 18, “Network
elements used in the Core Network”and are shown as light green in Figure 15-1,
(p. 15-3).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
About the network element descriptions How the network element descriptions are organized
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Radio/core hybrid network elements from older radio access technologies. (This
special chapter describes older network elements that do not neatly fit into the
component hierarchy.) These network elements are explained in Chapter 19,
“Radio/core (hybrid) network elements” and are shown as mixed green and
blue-green in Figure 15-1, “Network elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE End-to-End Solution” (p. 15-3).
• Common Core Network - These network elements are explained in Chapter 20,
“Network elements used in the Common Core Network” and are shown as gold in
• IMS and Access Gateways - These network elements are explained in orange in Figure
15-1, “Network elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution” (p. 15-3) and are described in Chapter 21, “Network elements used for
IMS”.
• IMS and Session Control - These network elements are explained in Chapter 21,
“Network elements used for IMS” and are shown as yellow in Figure 15-1, “Network
elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution” (p. 15-3).
• IMS and Applications - These network elements are explained in Chapter 21,
“Network elements used for IMS” and are shown as blue-green in Figure 15-1,
(p. 15-3).
• OAM&P Network - These network elements are explained in Chapter 22, “OAM&P
products” and are shown as red in Figure 15-1, “Network elements and interfaces in
the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution” (p. 15-3).
Scope
LTE-only network elements are fully described in this document. Network elements that
are reused from other networks are sometimes described more briefly. However, all
network element descriptions refer the reader to other Alcatel-Lucent customer
documents for further information on the network element.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
About the network element descriptions How the network element descriptions are organized
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
16 16
Network elements used in
the Radio Access Network
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent Radio Access Network (RAN) and the network
elements used for Radio Access in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
What is the Radio Access Network?

The Radio Access Network (RAN) is that part of a mobile wireless network that sits
between the UE and the Core Network. The Radio Access Network uses one of several
different forms of radio access to transmit communications to the UE and receive
information from the UE.
Can contain NEs from different wireless networks

The Radio Access Network (RAN) in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution can
contain second generation (2G), third-generation (3G) and LTE network elements.
Network Elements from 2G and 3G wireless networks are used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution when the Alcatel-Lucent LTE Network at a service provider location
is integrated with other non-LTE service provider wireless networks.
Two categories
The network elements used for Radio Access in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution can be divided into the following two categories:
• Network elements that are used only for LTE
• Network elements that are used both in support of LTE and in other Alcatel-Lucent
networks
LTE-only
The Alcatel-Lucent eNodeB is used only in the LTE portion of the network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Contents
9100 MBI/O (BTS) 16-4

About the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) 16-4
Changes in the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) to support LTE 16-5
9125 TC 16-7
About the 9125 TC 16-7
9130 BSC/MFS 16-10
About the 9130 BSC/MFS 16-10
Changes in the 9130 BSC/MFS to support LTE 16-11
922x 1xEVDO Base Station (BS) 16-13
About the 922x 1xEVDO Base Station (BS) 16-13
Changes in the 922x 1xEVDO BS to support LTE 16-14
9326 NodeB 16-16
About the 9326 NodeB 16-16
Changes in the 9326 NodeB to support LTE 16-17
9370 RNC 16-19
About the 9370 RNC 16-19
Changes in the 9370 RNC to support LTE 16-21
9412 eNodeB 16-22
About the eNodeB 16-22
About the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB 16-23
How it works 16-23
Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB 16-23
Hardware 16-24
Support of FDD 16-29
Software 16-29
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connections to other network elements 16-29

User interfaces 16-30
LTE RRH Product Family 16-31
About the LTE RRH Product Family 16-31
Advantages 16-33
Hardware 16-35
Support of both FDD and TDD 16-36
Software 16-38
9926 d2U eNodeB Base Band Unit 16-39
About the Distributed eNodeB Solution 16-40
About the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU 16-43
Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU 16-43
Hardware 16-44
Software 16-47
Support for the R-OCM 16-47
User interface 16-49
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9100 MBI/O (BTS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9100 MBI/O (BTS)
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9100 Multi-Standard Base Transceiver Station (BTS)
Indoor/Outdoor (MBI/O) (BTS) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) 16-4

Changes in the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) to support LTE 16-5
About the 9100 MBI/O (BTS)

What is the 9100 MBI/O (BTS)?
The 9100 MBI/O (BTS) is a network element that fills the role of the base transceiver
station (BTS) in Global System for Mobile communications (GSM) networks.
Role of the 9100 MBI/O (BTS)

The 9100 MBI/O (BTS) sends data to and receives data from the GSM User equipment
(UE). The 9100 MBI/O (BTS) provides the physical radio link between the UE and the
rest of the Alcatel-Lucent GSM network.
Advantages of the 9100 MBI/O (BTS)

Advantages of the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) include the following:
• The 9100 MBI/O (BTS) is a true Multi-Standard BTS able to support all the different
3GPP technologies.
– GSM and all evolutions (GPRS, EDGE, etc.)
– WCDMA and all evolutions (HSPA, HSPA+, etc.)
– LTE, LTE advanced, etc.
• Different versions of the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) exist to answer operator needs, in terms
of size, capacity, and site constraints:
– Macro Indoor BTS: MBI5
– Macro Outdoor BTS: MBO2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network About the 9100 MBI/O (BTS)
9100 MBI/O (BTS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– Mid Indoor BTS: MBI3
– Mid Outdoor BTS: MBO1
– Compact Outdoor BTS Evolution: CBO
• The main advantage of the 9100 MBI/O (BTS), versus our competitors, is that:
– The 9100 MBI/O (BTS) multi-standard, multi-version range was introduced in
1999 to all our GSM customers.
– Customers can easily evolve their installed base towards WCDMA or LTE
through maximum reuse of their past investment.
– Customers avoid site constraints/site-renegotiations for all new technical
introductions.
– 9100 MBI/O (BTS) cabinets are full-backward compatible - new generations of
modules are able to co-exist with previous generations of modules. For example,
new generations of SDR modules, able to support GSM/LTE simultaneously
within the same module, are able to co-exist in the cabinet with older generations
supporting GSM only.
• Cabinets are fully TCO optimized - IP ready, with minimum power consumption.
Use of the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) in a combined GSM and LTE network
When an Alcatel-Lucent LTE network is integrated with an Alcatel-Lucent GSM wireless
network, the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) continues to be used as the base transceiver station for
GSM user equipment (UE). The modules in the BTS are able to support GSM or LTE
independently. The GSM TRX is connected to the GSM BSS Architecture (BSC, Core
Network) and same is true the LTE network.
Changes in the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) to support LTE

Support of dual-mode handsets
There are no changes in the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) to support LTE unless the service
provider wishes to use the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) to support dual-mode LTE and GSM User
Equipment (UE). Alcatel-Lucent can add software to the 9100 MBI/O (BTS) to support
dual-mode LTE and GSM UE if necessary.
The Multi-Standard BTS is ready to evolve from GSM towards LTE by:
• Plug-in modules supporting LTE or GSM+LTE
• Software Upgrade (SU)
The 9100 MBI/O (BTS) is not designed to support 3GPP2 (CDMA) networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network For further information
9100 MBI/O (BTS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent GSM base station, go to the following url and
search for “9100”.
https://support.alcatel-lucent.com
Note: All Alcatel-Lucent GSM customer documentation starts with the number
“9100”.
Then click on “Alcatel-Lucent - Customer Support - Product Content-Evolium™ 9100
BTS (Base Transceiver Station)”.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9100 MBI/O (BTS). For a listing of these classes, go
to Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url: https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/
Saba/Web/Main and search on the keyword “9100”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9125 TC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9125 TC
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9125 Compact Transcoder (TC) as used in the
Contents
About the 9125 TC 16-7

About the 9125 TC

What is the 9125 TC?
The 9125 TC is a network element that is in charge of voice transcoding between
compressed codecs used on the Global System for Mobile (GSM) radio and G711 used in
the core network.
The 9125 TC is the latest transcoding equipment of the field-proven and widely
successful Alcatel-Lucent family. It has been designed in a modular way, permitting
flexible extensions. Investment can therefore be optimized by purchasing and deploying
the configuration, best suited to the network topology.
The 9125 TC provides speech transcoding between GSM and 64-kbit/s PCM coding laws,
and data-rate adaptation in the BSS. Sub-multiplexing on the Ater interface between TC
and BSC is standard in all configurations and reduces transmission needs or requirements
on the Ater interface by up to 75%. The 9125 TC contains powerful digital
signal-processing devices, sufficient to handle all the different available speech coding
algorithms and several rate adaptation techniques.
Role of the 9125 TC

The functions performed by the 9125 TC are speech transcoding and rate adaptation
together with related OA&M functions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network About the 9125 TC
9125 TC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The basic functions are:
• Speech-service functions -
– Conversion of vocoder blocks (TRAU frames 320 bits) into 160 A-law PCM
samples of eight bits and vice versa
– Framing and synchronization of vocoder blocks
– Adjustment of the phase of blocks in the downlink direction for minimum delay
– Discontinuous-Transmission (DTX) functions: Voice-Activity Detection (VAD)
downlink, Comfort-noise measurement downlink, Comfort-noise insertion uplink,
Speech extrapolation uplink
• Data-services functions -
– Data-rate adaptation for V.110 formats with intermediate rates of 8 kbit/s or 16
kbit/s
– Framing and synchronization of the data blocks
• Tandem Free Operation -
Tandem Free Operation (TFO) provides a better voice quality by avoiding
unnecessary successive coding and decoding operations in the case of
mobile-to-mobile calls -
– Management of TRAU and TFO frames
– Construction of TFO messages
– In-band TFO negotiation
– Rate control, time alignment, DTX
• Operations and Maintenance (OA&M) functions
– Self-test and alarm handling
– Setting test loops
– Supervision on 16-kbit/s and 64-kbit/s links
– Testing 16-kbit/s and 64-kbit/s links with test frame
Advantages of the 9125 TC

Advantages of the 9125 TC include the following:
• Capacity
– Sized to your current need with support for more capacity as your network grows
– 192 A interfaces capacity, that is, up to 5600 Erlang
– A large choice of codecs (HR, FR, EFR, AMR, WB-AMR) is supported
• Compactness
– Compact equipment practice: 19” standard rack - only 2m height
– Unrivalled compactness with only 3.75 liters per A interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network About the 9125 TC
9125 TC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Flexibility
– Multi-BSC/ multi-MSC feature simplifies your network design
– Alcatel-Lucent 9125 Transcoder product range covers all connectivity
requirements up to 24 BSCs and up to 192 A interfaces
• Minimizing your operating costs
– Only two board types simplify your logistic
– “Narrow-band” transcoding boards and “wide-band” capable boards can be mixed
in the same cabinet
– Remote software downloading and remote TC management minimize on-site
intervention
– The use of state-of-art DSPs permits unrivalled low power consumption
– Availability of STM-1 connectivity reduces transmission costs
• Future proof
– The 9125 TC enables a smooth migration towards 3G networks
– Ready for full IP architecture
– Evolution towards ultra compact TC (doubled capacity per cabinet)

For more information on the Alcatel-Lucent 9125 TC, see the following: Alcatel-Lucent
9125 Compact Transcoder Product Description, 3DC 210 16 0007 TQZZA.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9125 TC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url: https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/
Web/Main and search on the keyword “9125”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9130 BSC/MFS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9130 BSC/MFS
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9130 Base Station Controller/Multi-BSS Fast Packet
(BSC/MFS) Evolution as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the 9130 BSC/MFS 16-10

Changes in the 9130 BSC/MFS to support LTE 16-11
About the 9130 BSC/MFS

What is the 9130 BSC/MFS?
The 9130 BSC/MFS is a network element that fills the role of the Base Station Controller
(BSC) and the Packet Control Unit (PCU) in Global System for Mobile Communications
(GSM) networks. In the current ALU GSM architecture, the Controller is divided into 2
parts: the BSC for Voice and the MFS (Multi-BSS Fast Packet Server) for the Data
(GPRS, EDGE). The MFS is the PCU (Packet Control Unit). So in terms of architecture,
the 9130 BSC/MFS are connected on one side to the BTSs and on the other side to the
Core Network.
Role of the 9130 BSC/MFS

The 9130 BSC/MFS sends data to and receives data from the GSM User equipment (UE).
The 9130 BSC/MFS provides the physical radio link between the UE and the rest of the
Alcatel-Lucent GSM network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network About the 9130 BSC/MFS
9130 BSC/MFS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 9130 BSC/MFS
Advantages of the 9130 BSC/MFS include:
• Scalability / Flexibility with rack sharing - possibility to support 2 BSCs in the same
rack or mix BSC/PCU
• TCO optimized:
– Minimum footprint and power consumption
– IP readiness
– Reduced maintenance and spare costs (only 5 different boards)
Use of the 9130 BSC/MFS in a combined GSM and LTE network

network, the 9130 BSC/MFS continues to be used as a base transceiver station for GSM
user equipment (UE).
Changes in the 9130 BSC/MFS to support LTE

Purpose
This section describes any changes in the 9130 BSC/MFS when it is used in the
9130 BSC/MFS in LTE

Nothing about the 9130 BSC/MFS changes when the GSM network is integrated with the
LTE network, because the 9130 BSC/MFS only manages the GSM/GPRS/EDGE part of
the network.

For documentation
For documentation on the GSM/WCDMA Tendering Portal, go to the following url:
https://all1.us.alcatel-lucent.com/teams/TechDB/Portalpages/portal.aspx
For documentation on the Wireless Marketing Toolbox, go to the following url:
http://wireless.app.alcatel-lucent.com/marketing_toolbox/gsm/products_solutions.htm#
BSC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9130 BSC/MFS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9130 BSC, on the 9130 MFS and on GSM. For a
listing of these classes, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url:
https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and search on the keyword “9130
BSC,” “9130 MFS,” or “GSM”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 922x 1xEVDO Base Station (BS) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the 922x 1xEVDO Base Station (BS) 16-13

Changes in the 922x 1xEVDO BS to support LTE 16-14
About the 922x 1xEVDO Base Station (BS)

What is the 922x 1xEVDO BS?
The 922x 1xEVDO BS is the network element that fills the role of the base station (BS) in
the Alcatel-Lucent Evolution-Data Optimized or Evolution-Data Only (1xEV-DO)
network.
What is a 1xEV-DO BS?

An Alcatel-Lucent 1xEVDO Base Station is a Base Station (BS) that has been configured
to support 1xEV-DO.
A Base Station (BS) is a transmission and reception station in a fixed location that is used
to handle cellular traffic and consists of one or more receive/transmit antenna, microwave
dish, and electronic circuitry. The base station serves as a bridge between UEs and the
EPC.
Role of the 922x 1xEVDO BS

The 922x 1xEVDO BS sends data to and receives data from the 1xEV-DO User
equipment (UE). The 922x 1xEVDO Base Station provides the physical radio link
between the UE and the rest of the Alcatel-Lucent 1xEV-DO network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network About the 922x 1xEVDO Base Station (BS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use of the 922x 1xEVDO BS in a combined CDMA and LTE network
When an Alcatel-Lucent LTE network is integrated with an Alcatel-Lucent CDMA
wireless network, the 922x 1xEVDO BS continues to be used as the base station for
CDMA user equipment (UE).
Connections to other network elements

The BS is connected to the 9271 EV-DO RNC via T1/E1/Ethernet lines that support
maintenance and call processing messages. The T1/E1/Ethernet lines go to a router and
then from the router to the DO-RNC application processors via an Ethernet connection.
These dedicated T1/E1/Ethernet facilities also carry the traffic for each UE.
Changes in the 922x 1xEVDO BS to support LTE

Purpose
The 922x 1xEVDO BS can also be upgraded into a evolved BS. This upgraded product is
called the eBTS.
What is the eBTS?

The Alcatel-Lucent evolved Base Transceiver Station (eBTS), or Converged BTS, is a
software-enhanced EV-DO BS that supports dual mode user equipment. The dual mode
user equipment UE in this scenario supports both EV-DO and LTE. The eBTS supporting
the dual mode UE contains software that can automatically work with eHRPD.
Note: Though the BTS when used with HRPD is called an eBTS, no action needs to
be taken to turn the BS into an eBTS. The software on the BS automatically adjusts to
eHRPD traffic as necessary. .
Advantages
The 922x 1xEVDO BS requires no additional footprint, is easy to converge, and
inexpensive.
No hardware upgrade needed

There are no changes to the BS hardware to support the dual mode user equipment. Any
Alcatel-Lucent EV-DO base station that supports EV-DO Rev A can support the
dual-mode user equipment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network Changes in the 922x 1xEVDO BS to support LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software description
It is beyond the scope of this document to describe the software hosted by the eBTS.
Refer to the customer documentation listed at the end of this chapter for descriptions of
the software applications hosted by the eBTS.

For a list of recommended documentation on the BTS and the eBTS, see Table B-13,
“Documentation Library for CDMA – eBTS, eRNC ” (p. B-22).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 922 1xEVDO. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “922” or “1xEVDO”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9326 NodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9326 NodeB
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9326 NodeB network element as used in the Alcatel-Lucent
Contents
About the 9326 NodeB 16-16

Changes in the 9326 NodeB to support LTE 16-17
About the 9326 NodeB

What is the 9326 NodeB?
The 9326 NodeB is one of many alternate Node B products that fill the 3GPP-defined role
of the NodeB in the Alcatel-Lucent Wide band Code Division Multiple Access
(W-CDMA) network.
Role of the 9326 NodeB

The 9326 NodeB acts as a base transceiver station in the W-CDMA network, carrying out
the following functions:
• Network interface management
• Radio access
• Call processing
• Configuration and supervision
• Synchronization
• Performance monitoring
Hardware
The Node B products come in a variety of indoor and outdoor models with a wide range
in capacity. For more information on the hardware of the 9326 NodeB, see the
documentation listed at the end of this section.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network About the 9326 NodeB
9326 NodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
For information about the software on the 9326 NodeB, consult the documentation listed
at the end of this section.
Connections to the network

The 9326 NodeB provides the following interfaces
• Iub interface towards an RNC
• Uu interface towards a User Equipment (UE)
User Interfaces
The 9326 NodeB is managed by the 9353 Wireless Management System (WMS).
Use of the 9326 NodeB in a combined W-CDMA and LTE network

When an Alcatel-Lucent LTE network is integrated with an Alcatel-Lucent W-CDMA
wireless network, the 9326 NodeB continues to be used as an eNodeB, or base transceiver
station, for W-CDMA user equipment (UE).
Changes in the 9326 NodeB to support LTE

Purpose
This section describes any changes in the 9326 NodeB product when it is used in the
Support of dual-mode handsets

There are no changes in the 9326 NodeB to support LTE unless the service provider
wishes to use the 9326 NodeB to support dual-mode LTE and W-CDMA User Equipment
(UE). Alcatel-Lucent can add software to the 9326 NodeB to support dual-mode LTE and
W-CDMA UE if necessary.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9326 NodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation
For documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 9326 NodeB, go to the following url:
Note: All Alcatel-Lucent W-CDMA customer documentation starts with the numbers
“93”.
Under “Support” on the page, click on the arrow next to “Jump to Content Page” and
select “Documentation”
Click on the range “9000 - 9999”.
Search for “9326”.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9326 NodeB. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “9326 Node B".
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9370 RNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9370 RNC
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9370 RNC as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
About the 9370 RNC 16-19

Changes in the 9370 RNC to support LTE 16-21
About the 9370 RNC

What is the 9370 RNC?
The 9370 Radio Network Controller (RNC) is the Radio Network Controller for the
Alcatel-Lucent UTRAN. The 9370 RNC supports mobility within a W-CDMA network
and between W-CDMA and GSM networks.
What is the Alcatel-Lucent UTRAN?

The Alcatel-Lucent UTRAN is the Radio Access Network part of the Alcatel-Lucent
W-CDMA wireless network, and contains the following components:
• 9370 RNC
• 939x NodeB
• 9353 WMS
Role of the 9370 RNC

The main functions of the RNC are to control and manage the following:
• Radio Access Network (RAN)
• Signaling between Core Network (CN) parts and the Radio Network System (RNS)
• NodeBs and their corresponding radio resources
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network About the 9370 RNC
9370 RNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 9370 RNC
Advantages of the 9370 RNC include its world-class quality and ease of operation:
• All modules have the same visual indicators
• Most reliable RNC on the market, field proven 5-9's
• No single point of failure, all critical components are 1+1 spared
• The only software defined RNC in the market. New technology evolution introduction
(for example, HSPA+) is done through software only directly on existing hardware
(no new hardware required)
• Simple and compact, requires half the cabinet space. Only four different modules are
required for the RNC functionality.
Hardware
The 9370 RNC is based on a multiservice data platform called the Multiservice Switch
15000. This is a single-shelf, single-platform in-cabinet product.
Software
For information on the software of the 9370 RNC, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9370 Radio
Network Controller Technical Description, NN-20500-021.

The 9370 RNC has the following interfaces:
• Iu interfaces: toward the Core Network
• Iub interface: toward the NodeB
• Iur interface: toward another RNC
• Iupc interface: toward the SAS
• OAM&P interface: toward the network management platform (9353 WMS)
• IuBC interface: toward Cell Broadcast Center (CBC)
User Interfaces
The 9370 RNC is managed by the 9353 Wireless Management System (WMS).
The 9353 WMS is the OAM interface . Also, the 9370 RNC can be directly connected to.
It supports a text-based user interface which allows provisioning and query requests.
Use of the 9370 RNC in a combined W-CDMA and LTE network

When an Alcatel-Lucent LTE network is integrated with an Alcatel-Lucent W-CDMA
wireless network, there is no impact to the 9370 RNC. The 9370 RNC continues to be
used as an RNC in the W-CDMA UTRAN portion of the network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network Changes in the 9370 RNC to support LTE
9370 RNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes in the 9370 RNC to support LTE

Purpose
This section describes any changes in the 9370 RNC when it is used in the Alcatel-Lucent
9370 RNC in LTE

No changes are required in the 9370 RNC when it is used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution as the 9370 RNC does not interact with the LTE network.

For documentation
For documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 9370 RNC, go to the following url:
“93”. To find all the documentation for the W-CDMA Solution, look under
“UMTS/W-CDMA Solutions”.
Select the Product Index and then search for “9370 RNC”.
See especially, the Alcatel-Lucent 9370 Radio Network Controller Technical Description,
NN-20500-021.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9370 RNC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “9370 RNC".
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9412 eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9412 eNodeB
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
About the eNodeB 16-22

About the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB 16-23
How it works 16-23
Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB 16-23
Hardware 16-24
Support of FDD 16-29
Software 16-29
About the eNodeB

What is the eNodeB?
The eNodeB is a term created for the LTE reference architecture to denote a more
powerful base transceiver station (BTS) that has been designed to fit into the flatter LTE
network.
For more about the LTE specifications for the eUTRAN and the eNodeB, see “Evolved
UTRAN (eUTRAN) ” (p. 1-31).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network About the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB
9412 eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB

What is the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB?
The 9412 eNodeB is a compact network element that fills the LTE role of eNodeB in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution. The 9412 eNodeB is a self-contained solution
that is designed to fit easily into small physical spaces and be extremely easy to install.
The 9412 eNodeB is often called the “LTE cube”or the “9412 eNodeB Compact”.
What does the 9412 eNodeB do?

The 9412 eNodeB is a network element that sends data to and receives data from the User
Equipment (UE). The 9412 eNodeB provides the physical radio link between the UE and
the evolved Packet Core (EPC) network, thus performing the base station function of the
Radio Access Network (RAN).
How it works
Transmission-related tasks
The 9412 eNodeB carries out the following transmission tasks during the life of a call:
• Receives and sends radio signals to and from the antennas
• Schedules uplink data from the UE and downlink data to the UE
• Provides Ethernet links to the EPC elements and other eNodeBs
• Communicates with both the user equipment (UE) and the Evolved Packet Core
(EPC)
• Connects the subscriber’s UE to the network.
Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB

Benefits
This topic lists the advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB.
PCMD
Both of the Alcatel-Lucent eNodeB offerings are able to supply Per Call (or Connection)
Measurement Data (PCMD).
Per Call (or Connection) Measurement Data (PCMD) is a set of detailed data collected
on the major events associated with the processing of each connection within a session.
This data is typically collected from the eNodeB and the MME via count mechanisms in
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB
9412 eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the session/connection management software. The data is forwarded to static store on the
network node, and then ultimately forwarded to a northbound interface, where it can be
analyzed by a service provider postprocessor. In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution, the 9959 NPO performs post-processing on PCMD data.
For further information on the 9959 NPO and PCMD processing, see “9959 NPO”
(p. 22-46).
Advantages of the 9412 eNodeB cube

The Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB cube has the following advantages:
• Ultra-compact size - The ultra-compact 9412 eNodeB cube is designed to fit in small
spaces and be extremely easy to install, and is a fully-integrated version of the
eNodeB. Thus the 9412 eNodeB contains all required equipment, including the radios,
in one compact frame, which increases ease of installation.
Hardware
Purpose
This topic explains the hardware for the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB.
eNodeB parts
All Alcatel-Lucent eNodeB models share the following parts:
• eNodeB radios, which send signals to/from the antennas
• eNodeB Base Band Unit (BBU), which performs the following functions:
– Sends Tx/Rx signals to and from the radio through CPRI link
– Provides Ethernet interface to the network
Hardware for the 9412 eNodeB cube

As a fully integrated system, the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB cube houses all required
parts of the eNodeB in one unit. Within this unit, the baseband functions are done in the
base band unit (BBU) and the radio functions are performed in the built-in Transmit
Receive Duplex Units (TRDUs) or in MultiCarrier Transceivers (MC-TRXs).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network Hardware
9412 eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 16-1 Hardware for the 9412 eNodeB Compact or LTE Cube
The Base Band Units are Controller units and Modem units.
The 9412 eNodeB can be installed in an indoor or outdoor cabinet.
The 9412 eNodeB can share antennas with co-located CDMA wireless networks.
The 9412 eNodeB can be housed in a cabinet dedicated to LTE RAN equipments or in a
cabinet supporting GSM, W-CDMA or CDMA RAN equipments (such as MBI, MBO,
PSU or CDMA cabinets).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9412 eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Controller unit
The following table gives the list of eCCM-U (enhanced Core Controller Module)
hardware versions supported in LE4.0:
Table 16-1 9412 eNodeB Compact Controllers in LE4.0
Controller naming Hardware variant

eCCM-U_(enhanc.synch)_GE P0bis
eCCM-U_(enhanc.synch)_GE P2
Modem unit
The following table gives the list of the eCEM (enhanced Channel Element Module)
Table 16-2 9412 eNodeB Compact Modems in LE4.0
Modem naming Hardware variant

eCEM-U (LTE only) —
Transmit Receive Duplex unit (TRDU)

The following table gives the list of the TRDUs (Transmit Receive Duplex Units)
Table 16-3 9412 eNodeB Compact TRDUs in LE4.0
TRDU Naming Hardware Frequency Band Carrier Output RF

Variant Bandwith Power
TRDU2x40-07U - Band XIII (700 MHz 10 MHz 2 x 40W
Upper)
TRDU2x40- - Band XIV (700 MHz) 5 MHz 2 x 40W
07PS
TRDU2x40-08L - EDD band (800 MHz 5 and 10 MHz 2 x 40W
Lower)
TRDU2x40-08U - EDD band (800 MHz 5 and 10 MHz 2 x 40W
Upper)
TRDU2x60-26 - Band VII (2600 MHz) 10 and 20 MHz 2 x 60W
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9412 eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Multi-Carrier Transceiver (MC-TRX)
The multi-technology MC-TRX (Multi-carrier transceiver) is used to support LTE + GSM
on single RF path. The same MC-TRX is connected to the GSM controller (SUM-X) and
to the LTE BBU Module.
The following figure shows the eNodeB architecture with MC-TRXs.
Figure 16-2 e-NodeB architecture with MC-TRXs
Note: Any mixture of TRDUs, MC-TRXs or RRHs modules within the same eNodeB
is not allowed.
The 9412 eNodeB with MC-TRXs is housed in the MBI5 or MBO2 GSM cabinets.
The following picture shows the MC-TRX module.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9412 eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 16-3 Hardware for the MC-TRX module
The following table gives the list of the MultiCarrier TRXs (MC-TRXs) hardware
versions supported in LE4.0:
Table 16-4 9412 eNodeB Compact MC-TRXs in LE4.0
MC-TRX HW Hardware Frequency Band Carrier Output RF

variant Bandwith Power
SU-TMXA18 - 3GPP Band III (1800 MHz 5 and 10 MHz 60W total
DCS band)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network Support of FDD
9412 eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Support of FDD
What are FDD and TDD
Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) and Time Division Duplex (TDD) are different
multiplexing schemes that can be used to separate the uplink and downlink signals in a
wireless network. Both FDD and TDD can be used with LTE.
Supports FDD
The 9412 eNodeB Compact supports FDD.
Software
Software
Describing the software on the Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB is outside the scope of this
document. For information on the Alcatel-Lucent eNodeB software, see the documents
listed at the end of this chapter.

Three connections
The Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeB has three connections to other network elements within
the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution:
• S1-MME interface between the 9412 eNodeB and the 9471 MME
• S1-U interface between the 9412 eNodeB and the serving gateway 7750 SGW
• X2 interface between the 9412 eNodeB and other 9412 eNodeBs Note that the X2
interface is a logical interface and does not have to be a physical one. In the service
provider's network, 9412 eNodeBs are typically not physically connected to each
other.
Table 16-5 9412 eNodeB connections to other network elements
Interface Network Element Purpose

S1-U to 7750 SR-SGW User and control traffic, to establish the user
plane
S1-MME to 9471 MME User traffic, for signaling and authentication
X2 other eNodeBs There are two X2 interfaces that link the
eNodeBs together and are used for handovers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network User interfaces
9412 eNodeB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User interfaces
Managed by the 5620 SAM
Alcatel-Lucent 9412 eNodeBs are managed by the 5620 SAM.
100BaseT interface
Additionally, the eNodeB has a 100BaseT interface allowing connection to a laptop
computer for diagnosing improper system operation.

For information on the 9412 eNodeB
For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel–Lucent 9412 eNodeB, see Table
B-9, “Documentation Library for LTE RAN Access” (p. B-18).
For more on the user interfaces

For more information on the user interfaces and OAM&P for the 9412 eNodeB, see the
Long Term Evolution (LTE) Solution Operations, Administration, and Maintenance
(OA&M), 418-111-001.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9412 eNodeB. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “eNodeB".
For a list of recommended classes, see also the “Recommended classes for LTE”
(p. B-24).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the LTE RRH Product Family as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Part of a distributed eNodeB solution

In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution the LTE RRH Product Family is used as
part of a Distributed eNodeB Solution. For a description of the Distributed eNodeB
Solution, see “About the Distributed eNodeB Solution ” (p. 16-40).
Contents
About the LTE RRH Product Family 16-31

Advantages 16-33
Hardware 16-35
Software 16-38
About the LTE RRH Product Family

What is the LTE RRH Product Family?
The LTE Remote Radio Head (RRH) Product Family (formerly called 9442 Remote Radio
Head [RRH] 2x) is a set of radio product offerings built to provide simultaneous support
for both 3G and LTE networks.
The RRH product family is designed for macro-cellular applications, and is an alternative
to conventional Macro BTS.
Note: LTE RRH 2x here means “two transmit paths”.
Note: LTE RRH 8x here means “eight transmit paths”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network About the LTE RRH Product Family
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Role of the LTE RRH Product Family
The Alcatel-Lucent LTE RRH Product Family is designed to provide service providers
with the means to achieve high quality and maximum capacity coverage with minimum
site requirements. Members of the LTE RRH Product Family provide a zero footprint
solution and noise-free modules, which minimizes the impact on the environment and
makes placement far easier.
Characteristics
Characteristics of the LTE RRH Product Family include the following:
• Highly Integrated RF (radio, amplifier, filter) components
• Small size – resulting in significant reduction in eNodeB size and footprint
• High Efficiency - utilizing state of the art amplifier technology resulting in significant
reduction in power consumption
• Optimized for advanced antenna technologies demanded by LTE, with scalability in
mind
• Simultaneous LTE and 3G operation up to 20 MHz
– 2 x 40W or 8 x 5W transmit power to enable 2x2 MIMO
– Noise figure below 2 dB (AWS)
– CPRI based interface
• Low power consumption 280 W = Lower OPEX
• Compact and Lightweight
– Approximately height 620 mm x width 270 mm x depth 170 mm (24.4 x 10.63 x
6.7 inches)
– Approximately less than 20 kg (44 lb) (w/o mounting kit)
– Operating Range -40 C to +50 C
• Flexibility
– Daisy Chaining to existing RRH
– Modular extension for 4x Rx support
Note: For precise characteristics of the equipments, please refer to the LTE RRH
datasheets.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network Advantages
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages
Advantages of the Distributed eNodeB Solution
One significant benefit of the Alcatel-Lucent Distributed eNodeB Solution (described in
“About the Distributed eNodeB Solution ” (p. 16-40)) is that service providers can
position the LTE RRH Product Family radios close to the antennas and have the LTE
RRH Product Family radios connect to the base station unit. The intention behind the
Distributed eNodeB Solution is to push the radio as close to the antenna as possible.
Flexibility in radio installation

The radio used in the Distributed eNodeB Solution, the LTE RRH, is a zero footprint,
noise-free module that does not require a cabinet and minimizes the impact on the
environment.
For example, the RRH2x40 can be either floor, pole or wall mounted.
Flexibility in placement
The RRH can be placed at a significant distance away from the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU.
The LTE RRH can be placed remotely, such as on the roof of a building, while the base
band unit part can be placed a significant distance away, such as in the basement of the
building. Thus the distributed architecture of the 9926 DBS allows service providers to
work around space limitations.
Faster and cheaper installations

Installation of the LTE RRH components can be done more quickly and more cheaply
than before.
• Due to its small size and weight, operators can locate the LTE RRH where RF
engineering deems ideal, trade-offs between available sites and RF optimum sites are
minimized
• The LTE RRH is a zero footprint solution and a noise-free module: this allows for
simpler negotiation with site landlords and minimizes the impact on the environment
and neighborhood. Thus fewer civil works are required.
• There is no need for reinforcing steel frames to support heavy outdoor Macro BTS
cabinet (around 300Kg). RRH2x40 weighs less than 20kg, while RRH8x5 is around
25 kg.
• The LTE RRH is an easy-to-install product: the installation can be done by a single
person; no cranes are needed to hoist the BTS cabinet to the rooftop.
• A site can be in operation in less than one day, a fraction of the time required for a
traditional Macro BTS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Smaller installation footprint
The LTE RRH Product Family has a smaller installation footprint, resulting in the
following benefits:
• Less rental area: The footprint of a cluster of LTE RRH is much less than the footprint
of a traditional Macro BTS cabinet (in some cases also transmission cabinet, battery
cabinet and power distribution cabinet) therefore the monthly rental fees are
considerably reduced (less footprint and weight).
• Less equipment on site:
– The digital LTE Module does not need to be installed on the rooftop and can be
placed in the basement (with fiber running to LTE RRH in rooftop) or in
centralized base band “hotels” (if dark fiber is available between sites).
– No need for TMAs due to the fact that the feeder losses are dramatically reduced
(when the LTE RRH is mounted close to antennas)
• Improved RF performance (over the Macro BTS): Compared to a conventional Macro
BTS (equipped with MCPA 60W) that delivers about 20W at the antenna level
(assuming 3dB feeder + TMA losses), LTE RRH (assuming 0.8 dB jumper loss)
delivers 65% more RF power while consuming half the power.
Reduced CAPEX
The LTE RRH Product Family reduces a service provider's CAPEX in the following
ways:
• Where dark fiber is available, Node Bs can be centralized (base band hotels), thus
further reducing the site construction and acquisition cost, normally higher in urban
areas: cost is further decreased by the use of one single fiber (thanks to single-mode
CWDM feature) per remote site (assuming daisy-chain), leading to a dark fiber lease
cost reduction factor of up to 6.
• A digital LTE Module can serve several remote sites and Channel Element pooling
amongst them further reduces equipment costs.
Reduced OPEX
The LTE RRH Product Family reduces a service provider's OPEX in the following ways:
• Up to 50% reduction in power consumption.
• 20% less site visits: as the Channel Element cards are in the digital LTE Module
cabinet, there is no need to visit the remote site for capacity upgrades.
• The LTE RRH has a high MTBF and uses natural convection cooling to produce a
zero noise high reliability fan-less solution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Operation and management is simplified as number of eNodeBs that need to be
managed is reduced (one digital LTE Module can serve several remote sites) and they
are in the same location.
• Transmission costs are reduced as no leased E1/T1 is needed, instead owned and/or
leased optical fiber between the LTE RRH site and a centralized base station.
Hardware
Product description
The LTE RRH Product Family products are all self-contained radio modules.
Figure 16-4 Hardware for the Sample RRH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Support for 2X2 MIMO configurations
While the LTE RRH Product Family does contain models that support either lesser or
greater output power per path, all products in the LTE RRH family are design to support
2X2 MIMO configurations.
Supports up to four-way Rx diversity

All products in the LTE RRH Product Family also support up to 4-way Rx diversity.
Note: 4-way Rx here means “four receive paths”.
Variable bandwidth support

RRH modules are available to support a variety of frequencies to support both LTE and
non-LTE networks.
Support of both FDD and TDD

What are FDD and TDD?
Supports FDD and TDD

The LTE RRH Product Family supports both FDD and TDD.
Naming convention
TD-RRHx products support TDD.
FD-RRHx products support FDD.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network Support of both FDD and TDD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Differences
TDD radio products differ from FDD radio products because of the underlying technical
differences. The following table gives the list of RRH hardware versions supported in
LE4.0:
Table 16-6 LTE RRH Product Family that support FDD vs TDD in LE4.0
RRH Naming Hardware Frequency Band Output Supported

Variant RF Power multiplexing
scheme
RRH2x40-AWS P1.1, P2, Band IV AWS (2100/1700 2 x 40W FDD
without RDEM AM1 MHz)
RRH2x40-AWS with AM1 Band IV AWS (2100/1700 2 x 40W FDD
RDEM MHz)
RRH2x40-07L P1.1, P2, Band XII, XVII (700 MHz 2 x 40W FDD
AM1 Lower)
RRH2x40-07U Band XIII (700 MHz Upper) 2 x 40W FDD
RRH2x40-08L P1.1, P2 EDD band (800 MHz Lower) 2 x 40W FDD
RRH2x40-08U P1.1, P2 EDD band (800 MHz Upper) 2 x 40W FDD
RRH2x40-26 without NG3 Band VII (2600 MHz) 2 x 40W FDD
RDEM
RRH2x40-26 with NG3 Band VII (2600 MHz) 2 x 40W FDD
RDEM
TD-RRH2x20-23 G1 (former Band 40 (2300-2400 MHz) 2 x 20W TDD
P2)
TD-RRH2x20-2350 G1.1 Band 40 (2320-2370 MHz) 2 x 20W TDD
TD-RRH2x20-23–4R G2 Band 40 (2300-2400 MHz) 2 x 20W TDD
TD-RRH2x20-26 Band 38 (2570-2620 MHz) 2 x 20W TDD
TD-RRH8x5-26 P2.1 Band 38 (2575-2615 MHz) 8 x 5W TDD
Note: RDEM is for Receive Diversity Expansion Module.

For more information on the differences, consult the documentation listed at the end of
this section, or contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
Software
LTE RRH products are configured, controlled and monitored from the OMC through the
digital LTE Module and optical link. SW and firmware downloading is supported. for
each RRH product.

To find RRH customer documentation
To access documentation on the LTE RRH, carry out the following steps:
• Go to the following url:
(https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/ lte/)
• Choose an LTE release and click on it.
• Click on LTE LEx Manuals and Guides where x stands for the software release
• Click on Documents/Manuals
• Choose a release
• Click on the subsystem that the network element belongs to: for example, IMS or
LTE.
Result: A list of customer documentation appears.
• Go to the box called “Model/Subgroup” and from the drop-down select “LTE RRH”.
Result: A list appears of customer documentation for the network element you
selected.
For more information on navigating through the OLCS site, see “Accessing and
navigating the OLCS web site” (p. B-9).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the LTE RRH Product Family. For a listing of these
classes, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url: https://training.alcatel-
lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and search on the keyword “eNodeB".
(p. B-24).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9926 d2U eNodeB Base Band Unit as used in the
Part of a Distributed eNodeB Solution

In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution the 9926 digital 2U eNodeB Base Band
Unit or 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU is used as part of a Distributed eNodeB Solution (9926
Distributed Base Station or 9926 DBS), which is also described in this section.
Simultaneous LTE and non-LTE on the same radios

This section also discusses the use of the R-OCM module in the 9226 d2U BBU. The
R-OCM module gives a service provider the opportunity to use the same radios for LTE
and non-LTE transmissions simultaneously.
Contents
About the Distributed eNodeB Solution 16-40

About the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU 16-43
Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU 16-43
Hardware 16-44
Software 16-47
Support for the R-OCM 16-47
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network About the Distributed eNodeB Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the Distributed eNodeB Solution

Logical, not physical architecture
The LTE reference architecture requirements for the eNodeB are logical, not physical.
Alcatel-Lucent designers have taken advantage of the flexibility of the LTE reference
architecture requirements to provide a distributed solution for an eNodeB. This topic
explains the Alcatel-Lucent Distributed eNodeB Solution.
What is the Distributed eNodeB Solution?

This Distributed eNodeB Solution is an eNodeB in which two major components are
geographically separated. The components can be placed hundreds of feet apart and still
work together as a fully functioning eNodeB.
The Distributed eNodeB Solution is designed to provide operators with the means to
achieve a high quality and maximum capacity coverage with minimum site requirements.
Components
The Distributed eNodeB Solution is comprised of the following:
• Antennas
• 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU, the Base Band Unit (BBU)
• LTE RRH, the radio component
Architecture
The following figure shows the architecture of the Distributed eNodeB Solution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 16-5 Architecture of the Distributed eNodeB Solution
Linked by optical fibers

The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU and the LTE RRH radios are linked by optical fibers,
carrying downlink and uplink base band digital signals along with OAM information.
Flexibility in placement
Obviously the Distributed eNodeB Solution offers greater flexibility in placement for an
eNodeB. For example, the radios in the distributed eNodeB Solution can be placed
remotely, such as on the roof of a building, while the base band unit component can be
placed at quite a distance, such as in the basement of the same building. Thus the
distributed architecture of the Distributed eNodeB Solution allows service providers to
work around problems of limited space.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example: rooftop installations
The advantages of using Alcatel-Lucent LTE RRH to replace a traditional Macro BTS are
most evident in rooftop installations. In fact, the limited space available in some sites may
either prevent the installation of traditional Macro BTS equipment or require costly
cranes to be employed, thus coverage holes may appear. These sites can however host
LTE RRH installation providing more flexible site selection and therefore improved
network quality. In addition installation time and costs are greatly reduced.
Flexibility in radio installation

The radio used in the distributed eNodeB Solution, the LTE RRH, is a zero footprint,
noise-free module that does not require a cabinet and can be placed at a significant
distance away from the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU.
Low power consumption

The LTE RRH Product Family used in the Distributed eNodeB Solution has low power
consumption, which helps the service provider work around power constraints.
Shared use of cabinets and RF assets

The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU is a very compact 2U (88mm) unit and takes up little space.
The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU, along with TRDUs and an MC-TRX RF Module, can be
installed in free space in existing Alcatel-Lucent macro cabinets, compact cabinets, and
multi-standard base station cabinets. Shared use of existing cabinet space allows LTE to
share the same RF assets (radio, amplifier, filter, antennas, power equipment) as CDMA,
GSM or WCDMA and maintains the existing footprint.
Support of PCMD
The Distributed eNodeB Solution, like all Alcatel-Lucent eNodeBs is able to supply Per
Call (or Connection) Measurement Data (PCMD).
Per Call (or Connection) Measurement Data (PCMD) is a set of detailed data collected
on the major events associated with the processing of each connection within a session.
This data is typically collected from the eNodeB and the MME via count mechanisms in
the session/connection management software. The data is forwarded to static store on the
network node, and then ultimately forwarded to a northbound interface, where it can be
analyzed by a service provider postprocessor. In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution, the 9959 NPO performs post-processing on PCMD data.
For further information on the 9959 NPO and PCMD processing, see “9959 NPO”
(p. 22-46).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network About the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU

What is the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU?
The 9926 d2U (digital 2U) Base Band Unit (BBU) is the part of the 9926 DBS that
includes the eNodeB controller and the baseband processing boards (modems) in a very
compact 2U (88mm) unit. The d2U eNodeB can be installed in free space of existing
Alcatel-Lucent macro cabinets, compact cabinets, and multi-standard base station
cabinets. This method allows LTE to share the same radio frequency (RF) assets (radio,
amplifier, filter, antennas, power equipment) as a non-LTE wireless network and maintain
the existing CDMA, GSM or WCDMA footprint.
Role of the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU

The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU performs the following functions:
• Sends Tx/Rx signals to and from the radio through CPRI link
• Provides Ethernet interface to the network
Advantages of the Alcatel-Lucent 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU

Advantages
The benefits of the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU include the following:
• The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU is a very compact 2U (88mm) unit that takes up little
space and can be installed in existing cabinets.
• The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU is easy to install; it is so lightweight that it can be
carried by one person.
• The modem and controller in the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU are field replaceable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware
9926 d2U eNodeB BBU hardware
The following figure shows the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU hardware.
Figure 16-6 Hardware for the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU
The 9926 d2U consists of four types of hardware boards:

• The controller unit, or eCCM-U, controls OA&M management, transport,
external/internal alarm connectivity and external synchronization reference interfaces.
• The modem unit, or eCEM-U, is the main call processing engine performing base
band transmit/receive digital signal processing. A d2U eNodeB supports one to three
CEMs.
• The Rack Back Plane, or RBP, supports all internal links between the CCM and CEM
modules.
• The Rack User Commissioning, or RUC, provides for the commissioning of
nonvolatile memory and fan alarms.
The Transmit Receive Duplex Units (TRDUs) perform the RF processing for the LTE base
station. A TRDU includes a radio with two transmitters and two receivers, two TX power
amplifiers, and double duplex filter in a single shelf-mounted module.
Figure 16-7 Transmit Receive Duplex Unit (TRDU) hardware
Compact size
The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU has a compact design (2U height) and a minimal weight
(<12Kg).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cards used for LTE
LTE use of the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU relies on the following digital modules, each on a
separate card:
• CCM (Core Controller Module); BTS controller (modem to radio communication, I/F
to backhaul)
• CEM (Channel Element Module); Modem
Support of both FDD and TDD

What are FDD and TDD?
Supports FDD and TDD

The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU supports both FDD and TDD.
Sub-racks
Some sub-racks in the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU are individualized to support either FDD
or TDD. The following table gives the list of the BBU shelf hardware versions supported
in LE4.0:
Table 16-7 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU sub-racks that support FDD vs TDD in LE4.0
In LE4.0, this component supports this multiplexing scheme

d2UV3 (9926 BBUv1) FDD
d2UV5 (9926 BBUv2) Both FDD and TDD
Note: The component d2UV4 (9926 BBUv1+) is no more supported in LE4.0.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network Support of both FDD and TDD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Controller unit
The eCCM-U (enhanced Core Controller Module) supports both FDD and TDD, (but
different variants of it). The following table lists the hardware versions supported in
LE4.0:
Table 16-8 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU Controllers that support FDD vs TDD in LE4.0
Controller naming Hardware Supported

Variant multiplexing
scheme
eCCM-U_(enhanc.synch)_GE (former eCCM-U) P0bis FDD
eCCM-U_(enhanc.synch)_GE (former eCCM-U) P2 FDD
eCCM-U_(high CPRI rate)_GE - TDD
Modem unit
The eCEM (enhanced Channel Element Module) supports FDD and the bCEM
(High-capacity Channel Element Module) supports both FDD and TDD. The following
table lists the hardware versions supported in LE4.0:
Table 16-9 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU Modems that support FDD vs TDD in LE4.0
Modem naming Hardware Variant Supported multiplexing

scheme
eCEM-U (LTE only) - FDD
bCEM (-48VDC) P1.0 TDD
bCEM (wide range) P1.1 TDD
Note: The modem bCEM P0.1 (TDD) is no more supported in LE4.0.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
Software-defined load
The 9926 LTE Digital Module is common between LTE and W-CDMA (9926 d2U). This
means that the same digital rack can be configured by Software to operate in WCDMA or
LTE technology.
Software changes to support LTE

To support LTE instead of W-CDMA, a different software load on 9926 d2U is required.
Both software loads are loaded on to each 9926 d2U and the switching between loads
occurs automatically, as needed.
Support for the R-OCM

What is the R-OCM?
The Reverse Optical Communication Module (R-OCM) is an optional circuit pack that
acts as an interface module to connect the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU to the existing
OneBTS Digital Shelf. The R-OCM converts the optical Common Public Radio Interface
(CPRI) from the BBU and connects to the OneBTS backplane to facilitate use of OneBTS
RF assets. The R-OCM gets its name because the R-OCM has the inverse functionality of
the existing OneBTS CPRI Module (OCM) available on OneBTS (to support CPRI
connection out to remote radio equipment).
Use with both CDMA and 1xEV-DO

The R-OCM module is used with the 92xx series of base stations that are currently
supporting 3G1X and/or EVDO radio access technologies.
R-OCM connections
Customers who have deployed Alcatel-Lucent systems can add LTE capability to that
system by inserting a Reverse OneBTS CPRI Module (R-OCM) in the OneBTS digital
shelf and cabling the R-OCM to the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU that is part of the LTE
Distributed eNodeB Solution. The new R-OCM module replaces a slot of a CCU (CDMA
modem) and connects on one side with the LTE 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU through CPRI
links, and on the other side with the CDMA BTS backplane that itself connects to the
radio modules. Thus, the R-OCM provides a cross connection between the LTE eNodeB
and CDMA (3G1x/EV-DO) base stations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network Support for the R-OCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The purpose of the R-OCM is to enable Modcell 4.0B and Compact 4.0B base stations to
simultaneously support both CDMA and LTE in the same RF chain in the same base
station.
How it works
The R-OCM can be situated in any of the channel unit slots in the Modcell 4.0b digital
shelf (DS) and can support up to 6 MCRB radios. All downlink signals sent over the
CPRI link interface from the eNB will be de-serialized by the R-OCM and sent over the
ModCell 4.0b backplane to the MCRB assets. Conversely, all uplink signals will be
serialized by the R-OCM and sent over the CPRI link to the LTE eNB. Thus the R-OCM
hardware will facilitate the IQ and C&M data exchange common among ALU remote
radio equipment (RE) assets. As a result, the LTE eNB views the R-OCM as a set of
pseudo or virtual Remote Radio Heads (vRRHs).
Benefits
Use of the R-OCM provides the following benefits:
• Simultaneous reuse of radios - After the R-OCM is installed, the same radio can be
used for CDMA and LTE.
• Asset protection - OneBTS RF assets can be used for LTE upgrade instead of
scrapped.
• Smooth transition to LTE - Use of R-OCMs gives CDMA service providers who
currently have the OneBTS platform a smooth transition to simultaneous support for
CDMA and LTE.
• Internal combining - Use of R-OCMs gives the ability to provide internal combining.
Internal combining allows use of same antenna paths without needing external
combiners/duplexers. Use on internal combining eliminates the dB loss on the cables
that is caused by external combiners/duplexers.
Ease of migration to LTE

As mentioned, introduction of the R-OCM allows a smooth migration path to LTE for our
existing 3G1x customers who have the OneBTS platform. When 4G technology is added,
the customer simply adds a R-OCM to an available channel card slot inside the OneBTS
shelf and an LTE BBU, RF assets (including radio, amplifier and filter panel) can be
reused as long as there is sufficient RF power available at the amplifier. If more RF power
or an additional transmit path is required, additional amplifiers can be added in the same
way that a CDMA carrier is added. This migration strategy allows significant asset
protection by reusing the RF assets. Another benefit is that this upgrade strategy requires
a relatively simple installation/upgrade effort.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Radio Access Network Support for the R-OCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unique in the industry
Alcatel-Lucent's R-OCM is unique in the industry. No other competitor offers this
opportunity to use radios for LTE and non-LTE transmissions simultaneously.
User interface
Managed by the 5060 SAM
The 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU is managed by the 5620 SAM.

To find 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU documentation
To access documentation on the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU, carry out the following steps:
(https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/ lte/)
• Click on Documents/Manuals
• Choose a release
• Click on the subsystem that the network element belongs to: for example, IMS or
LTE.
• Go to the box called “Model/Subgroup” and from the drop-down select “9926 D2U
BBU”.
selected.
For more information on navigating through the OLCS site, see “Accessing and
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU. For a listing of these
classes, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url: https://training.alcatel-
lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and search on the keyword “eNodeB”.
(p. B-24).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
17 17
the Backhaul Part of the
Transport Network
Overview
Purpose
• how LTE backhaul differs from other types of backhaul
• the impact of LTE on the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
• help that is available with designing and optimizing your LTE transport network
• Sources of further information
• The network elements used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to support
the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
Contents

Segments of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network 17-3
Connectivity models 17-5
Security 17-5
Changes caused by LTE 17-6
Challenges for the customer 17-6
Solution 17-7
7705 SAR 17-9
About the 7705 SAR 17-9
How it works 17-10
Hardware 17-10
Software 17-12
User Interfaces 17-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Overview
Transport Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7750 SR 17-14
About the 7750 SR 17-14
How it works 17-15
Advantages 17-15
Hardware 17-17
Software 17-18
Use of the 7750 SR in LTE Network 17-18
Changes in the 7750 SR to support LTE 17-20
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Transport Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network used within the
Contents
Segments of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network 17-3

Connectivity models 17-5
Security 17-5
Changes caused by LTE 17-6
Challenges for the customer 17-6
Solution 17-7
Segments of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network

Introduction
The Backhaul Part of the Transport Network can be viewed as a multi-segment
architecture with function and scale dividing the network into three separate segments.
These segments are explained in this topic.
Cell site segment

The cell site segment of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network carries out the
following functions:
• aggregator
• multiservice support (TDM, ATM, IP, ETH over packet)
• Ingress SLA enforcement in upstream, that is, to make sure that the upstream traffic is
in line with the agreed Service Level Agreement (SLA)
• Network Clock delivery to base stations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Segments of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
Transport Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The recommended solution for the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network will vary
depending on the access technology. Potential solutions include the following:
• a point to point (tree, chain) or a ring topology, for example:
– point to point (PTP) fiber: tree or ring
– Packet MicroWave (MW): ring, chain, tree, or mesh
– Residential tree topology
The cell site solution can be based if necessary on leased backhaul.
Note that ring networks provide a higher availability than point to point networks.
Aggregation segment
The function of the aggregation segment is to reduce the number of lower speed
interfaces in the MLS front-ending the PGW or the MLS.
The aggregation segment of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network carries out the
• aggregation of MBH traffic
• connectivity of the X2 interface (a new interface for LTE)
• Network Clock distribution (plus optimizations to deal with network clock quality and
scalability)
Technologies used in the aggregation segment include the following:
• Fiber
• MW
• SDH leased links
• Access multiplexer
Topologies used in the aggregation segment include the following:
• ptp
• rings
• mesh
Note: The closer you are to the network controllers, the higher the relevance of ring or
mesh networks.
Mobile gateways segment

The function of the switching segment is to connect the Backhaul Part of the Transport
Network with the RAN Controllers such as SGWs and MMEs for LTE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Segments of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
Transport Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The mobile gateways segment of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network carries out
• Providing aggregator and multiservice support (TDM, ATM, ETH, IP)
• Dealing with following:
– Scalability of network controllers VLAN, ARP
– Redundancy of network controllers
– Simpler operations
– Connectivity with mobile core
• Ingress SLA enforcement in downstream, that is, to make sure that the downstream
traffic is in line with the agreed-upon Service Level Agreement (SLA)
Note: The Mobile Gateways can be redundant.
Connectivity models
Multiple models
On top of physical infrastructure of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network described
in “Segments of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network” (p. 17-3), multiple logical
connectivity models can be supported, including the following:
• Virtual Private Wire Service (VPWS) (TDM, ATM or ETH) containing Layer 2 point
to point service with possibly an optimization to improve scalability
• Multipoint layer 2 with E-LAN or E-Tree for IP or Ethernet base stations
• Multipoint layer 3, with IP only and a mixture of IP and layer 2 multi-point
Security
Security
From a security standpoint, either the underlying delivery network is trusted, or the
packet delivery network must enforce security with special mechanisms. One of the ways
of ensuring that data (user or control) is not corrupted and not tampered with is by the use
of IPsec which uses encryption to tunnel packets securely through the network ensuring
data integrity and privacy.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Changes caused by LTE
Transport Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes caused by LTE

Carries more traffic
LTE networks carry significantly more traffic in the backhaul between the UE and the
Core Network than in other non-LTE Radio Access Networks. As fourth generation cell
sites are rolled out in support of Long Term Evolution (LTE) services, and the increase in
mobile data services continues unabated, it is expected that average bandwidth
requirements will increase to tens of Mb/s per site.
Changes
LTE traffic brings the following changes to the network:
• More bandwidth
• Capacity for base station to base station communication (X2 protocol)
• Flex architecture
• IP-only base stations
• Use of IPsec tunnels within the network, for example, to protect data being sent over a
leased network segment
• More QOS classes
• Need for synchronization solution over packet data
• IP traffic only
• Flatter architecture
• Simpler architecture, with a reduced number of network elements
Challenges for the customer

New problems
LTE brings new problems and challenges for service provider backhaul networks. To
successfully implement LTE, a service provider must do the following:
• Reduce and control network costs
• Maintain competitiveness while still meeting end-user demand for new multimedia
services
• Manage increased traffic driven by new broadband services
• Transport traffic efficiently
TDM backhaul too costly

The price of TDM backhaul to cover the greatly increased demands of LTE traffic are
prohibitive.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Challenges for the customer
Transport Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Need to switch to packet-based transmissions
Packet-based technologies offer the only competitive solution. Packet-based technologies
can be used over a variety of currently-existing physical media, without incurring the
expense of purchasing additional TDM backhaul.
Solution
Solution
Alcatel-Lucent's solution for the transport problems faced by service providers migrating
to LTE is the Mobile Backhaul Solution.
What is the Mobile Backhaul Solution?

The Mobile Backhaul Solution is a product offering developed by Alcatel-Lucent that
provides the industry's first and most comprehensive framework for mobile transport
evolution to all-IP.
Completely packet-based
The Mobile Backhaul Solution is made up of completely packet-based technologies that
can be used to increase the capacity of any wireless technology.
Key network elements

Described in the rest of this chapter are two key building blocks for a Mobile Backhaul
Solution:
• 7705 SAR
• 7750 SR
There are, however, many other network elements that are be used to make up a complete
Mobile Backhaul Solution, which are commonly represented in diagrams in this
document by the MT/BT function and the MG/BG function.
MT/BT function
The MSP Termination Device (MT) is a cell site device providing aggregation of base
station (BS) traffic and termination of Mobile Backhaul (MBH) network at the cell site.
The BTP Termination Device (BT) is a cell site device providing backhaul network
termination in a backhaul transport provider application and aggregation of base station
traffic from multiple mobile operators at the cell site.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Solution
Transport Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MG/BG function
The MSP Aggregation Gateway (MG) is a device at the MTSO site providing aggregation
and grooming of traffic from multiple cell sites and interfaces to any relevant Network
Controller (NC).
The BTP Aggregation Gateway (BG) is a device at the MTSO providing aggregation of
traffic from multiple cell sites and demarcation/handoff to the MSP MG in a backhaul
transport provider application.

For more about the Mobile Backhaul Solution, its network elements, and documentation
and training for the Mobile Backhaul Solution, see Appendix D, “Mobile Backhaul
Solution”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Transport Network
7705 SAR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7705 SAR
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 7705 SAR as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 7705 SAR 17-9

How it works 17-10
Hardware 17-10
Software 17-12
User Interfaces 17-12
About the 7705 SAR

What is the 7705 SAR?
As used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the Alcatel-Lucent 7705 Service
Aggregation Router (SAR) is a cell site edge aggregation platform providing Ethernet
Backhaul transport for the eNodeB.
What is Ethernet Backhaul?

Ethernet Backhaul (EBH) is a solution that allows both LTE and CDMA applications to
be transported using Internet Protocol (IP) over Ethernet facilities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the How it works
Transport Network
7705 SAR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
What does the 7705 SAR do?
The primary function of the 7705 SAR is to aggregate LTE and CDMA 1x and EVDO
traffic from macro cell sites and provide backhaul transport of this traffic to the Mobile
Switching Office (MSO). At the MSO the traffic is typically terminated at the IP/MPLS
layers on the 7750 SR.
Provides for routing

In an LTE network, the 7705 SAR provides a demarcation point between the eNodeB and
the User-to-Network Interface (UNI) of the Ethernet Access Transport Network (EATN).
(The UNI is the EATN interface facing toward the cell site. UNI stands for User-Network
Interface.)
In combination with the 7750 SR that functions as an MLS, the 7705 SAR provides for
routing between the eNodeB and the various LTE and OAM&P elements.
Hardware
Hardware description
Industry-leading scalability and density is provided in the 7705 SAR-8, a two rack unit (2
RU) version of the 7705 SAR that supports up to 96 T1/E1 Any Service, Any Port
(ASAP) ports. The platform can be optionally configured with a redundant control and
switch module and uplinks. The Alcatel-Lucent 7705 SAR-8 has eight slots; two are
allocated for control and switch modules (CSMs), with the remaining six being available
for user traffic adapter cards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Hardware
Transport Network
7705 SAR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 17-1 Hardware for the 7705 SAR-8
Fixed configuration version

The 7705 SAR-F is a fixed configuration version of the Service Aggregation Router. The
7705 SAR-F is packaged in a one rack unit (1 RU) high form factor that supports up to 16
T1/E1 any service any port (ASAP) ports. The ASAP ports can be configured to support
ATM, inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA), TDM and MLPPP. Six 10/100 Base-T
auto-sensing Ethernet ports are provided, plus two further ports supporting 10/100/1000
Base TX with small form factor pluggable optics (SFPs).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Software
Transport Network
7705 SAR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
The Alcatel-Lucent 7705 SAR owes much of its development heritage to the
Alcatel-Lucent Service Router (SR) product line. Sharing much of the market-leading
Service Router Operating System (SR OS) feature set, the Alcatel-Lucent 7705 SAR
brings a powerful, service-oriented capability to the RAN.
User Interfaces
5620 SAM
The Alcatel-Lucent 7705 SAR greatly augments the IP/MPLS RAN transport solution
with end-to-end LTE IP service management under the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM. The
Alcatel-Lucent 7705 SAR has a full set of operations, administration and maintenance
(OAM) features. These features, when under the control of the Alcatel-Lucent 5620
management portfolio, ensure rapid fault detection as well as efficient backhaul
troubleshooting.

For more information on the 7705 SAR, see the following documents and class.
Table 17-1 Documentation on the 7705 SAR
Document Number Document Title

3HE 05967 AAAA TQZZA 7705 SAR Basic System Configuration Guide
3HE 05969 AAAA TQZZA 7705 SAR Interface Configuration Guide
3HE 05971 AAAA TQZZA 7705 SAR MPLS Guide
3HE 05975 AAAA TQZZA 7705 SAR OAM and Diagnostics Guide
3HE 05973 AAAA TQZZA Quality of Service Guide
3HE 05970 AAAA TQZZA Router Configuration Guide
3HE 05974 AAAA TQZZA Routing Protocols Guide
3HE 05972 AAAA TQZZA Services Guide
3HE 05968 AAAA TQZZA System Management Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the For further information
Transport Network
7705 SAR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 7705 SAR. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “7705 SAR”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Transport Network
7750 SR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7750 SR
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 7750 Service Router (SR) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
About the 7750 SR 17-14

How it works 17-15
Advantages 17-15
Hardware 17-17
Software 17-18
Use of the 7750 SR in LTE Network 17-18
About the 7750 SR

What is the 7750 SR?
The Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Router (SR) product family is a suite of multiservice
edge routers designed to deliver high-performance, high availability routing with
service-aware operations, administration, management, and provisioning. The 7750 SR
also serves as a host for other key LTE network elements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the How it works
Transport Network
7750 SR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
Role of the 7750 SR
The main function of the 7750 SR router is to provide combined IP/MPLS service-aware
aggregation in the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network and between MSOs within the
Core Network and other parts of the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network.
Provides converged network infrastructure

The 7750 SR integrates the scalability, resiliency, and predictability of MPLS along with
the bandwidth and economics of Ethernet and a broad selection of legacy interfaces to
enable a converged network infrastructure for the delivery of next-generation services.
Multiple deployment options

The 7750 SR has an advanced and comprehensive feature set that enables the 7750 SR to
be deployed as an aggregation router in mobile backhaul applications, or as a mobile
gateway (MGW) for wireless networks. The 7750 SR can also be used as a Broadband
Network Gateway (BNG) for residential services, as a Multiservice Edge for Carrier
Ethernet and IP VPN business services. With support for service enabled high density
10GigE and 100GigE interfaces, the 7750 SR is also well suited for core routing
applications. Available in five chassis variants, the 7750 SR scales from 40 Gb/s to 2 Tb/s
of capacity, providing cost-effective solutions to address the smallest to the largest
network locations.
Advantages
Benefits
The 7750 SR offers the service provider the following benefits:
• High-bandwidth, high- performance user plane processing
The 7750 SR has a unique product architecture with inhouse advanced packet
processing technology (FP2) . The 7750 SR has a wireline performance of up to 25
Gbps bidirectional (per slot). With advanced packet processing turned on (for
example, security and deep packet inspection [DPI]), the performance is up to 10
Gbps.
• Fully redundant hardware and software with advanced high reliability features
The 7750 SR has availability levels of 99.9999%, which are needed to achieve or
improve QoE for voice and data customers.
• Increased revenues with innovative, differentiated services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Advantages
Transport Network
7750 SR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Support for advanced networking services allows service providers to capitalize on
information embedded in the network to provide subscriber-centric Internet and
connectivity services. Subscriber, service, and application awareness can be used to
provide differential QoS treatment of higher-value traffic streams and manage the
online experience.
• Service Awareness
The advanced gateway product architecture of the 7750 allows wirespeed
performance with high-scale, dynamic in-band processing of L4-L7 traffic in millions
of IP flows The 7750 SR also has application awareness of connections, traffic flows
and their mapping to network services. This awareness is essential for introducing
new service models and is fully aligned with wireless broadband service
requirements. Service awareness is also important for advanced packet processing
such as DPI.
• Reduced operational expense
By combining wireline and wireless services on a 7750 SR-based converged provider
edge, network operations are simplified because all services run over a platform with
consistent feature set, operational model, and management, while supporting the
service scalability required to combine services. As legacy services are migrated to
the new converged service network, the legacy networks that carried the service can
be decommissioned, further simplifying overall network operations and expenditure.
In addition, the 7750 SR has numerous features for automated provisioning of
subscribers. Services, based on service templates and interacting with other
operational systems for authentication and authorization, continually evolve in step
with customer requirements providing an unprecedented level of investment
protection.
• Investment protection
From its introduction, the 7750 SR family has evolved with customer feature and
scaling requirements. The 7750 SR sophisticated and flexible hardware has a track
record of allowing new features and enhancements to be introduced “in-place” in
software, rather than through a rapid series of ever-changing hardware iterations. The
award-winning FP2 network processing silicon ensures 7750 SR platform capacity
and service scale can continually evolve in step with customer requirements providing
an unprecedented level of investment protection.
• Environmentally friendly
Pioneering advances in power efficiency are incorporated into each member of the
Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR family, reducing the expense of both powering and cooling
when comparing products with less advanced silicon technology. Combined with
environmentally sensitive manufacturing processes, careful materials selection, and a
view to sustainable product life cycle management, the 7750 SR family assists service
providers in reducing their environmental impact.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Hardware
Transport Network
7750 SR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware
Diagram
The following diagram shows the basic hardware of the 7750 SR as used in the LTE
Network.
Figure 17-2 Hardware for the 7750 SR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Software
Transport Network
7750 SR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
Own software release
The 7750 gateway release is delivered on its own software release, in addition to the
standard 7750 SR-OS release.

For further information on the software on the 7750 SR-12, see the documentation and
classes listed at the end of this section.
Use of the 7750 SR in LTE Network

Aggregation
Typically located in a hub or mobile switching office (MSO), the 7750 SR is the
multiservice edge aggregation router within the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network
that terminates all of the Ethernet IP/MPLS traffic coming from the eNodeBs and routes it
to the Evolved Packet Core. This same 7750 SR can perform the aggregation routing and
multi-layer switching functions within a CDMA Backhaul Network and forward this
traffic to the appropriate CDMA 1X voice or EVDO network. The 7750 SR is able to
provide this service differentiation of both LTE and CDMA traffic using its advanced
IP/MPLS and QoS capabilities. The 7750 SR is also a high-performance, scalable,
service-aware core router with 2 Terabits capacity and high-density FE/GE, 10GE and
100GE interfaces.
Example
The following figure shows how the 7750 SR is used in a sample LTE and CDMA
Network. This network uses T1 and Ethernet Backhaul.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Use of the 7750 SR in LTE Network
Transport Network
7750 SR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 17-3 Use of the 7750 SR in LTE Network
Host for key network elements

The 7750 SR is used as host for several LTE core network elements, including the 7750
PGW/7750 GGSN and 7750 SGW. The 7750 SR is also used in the Backhaul Part of the
Transport Network portion of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution. For further
information about uses of the 7750 SR in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution,
see the following topics:
• “7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)” (p. 18-25)
• “7750 SR (SGW)” (p. 18-37)
• “About the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network” (p. 17-3)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Backhaul Part of the Changes in the 7750 SR to support LTE
Transport Network
7750 SR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes in the 7750 SR to support LTE

For supporting Mobile Backhaul
There are no specific changes to the 7750 SR hardware to support the LTE Backhaul Part
of the Transport Network. However, software updates and configuration changes to the
existing 7750 SR supporting the 2G/3G Backhaul Network provide additional features
and network capabilities.
For hosting Core Network Elements

The 7750 SR becomes a Mobile Gateway in the LTE Core Network with the addition of
the Mobile Gateway-Integrated Service Module (MG-ISM) and the SR-OS-MG software.
The 7750 SR becomes either a Serving Gateway (SGW) or a combined Packet Date
Network/Gateway GPRS Support Node (PGW/GGSN). The MG-ISM used for all these
functions is identical. The SR-OS-MG software and licensing determine if the 7750 SR
functions as either an SGW or a combined PGW/GGSN.
Note that the 7750 SR can also host a stand-alone PGW or stand-alone GGSN if
necessary.

For documentation
For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR when the 7750
SR is used as an aggregation router/Ethernet Switch, see Table B-7, “Documentation
Library for ePC – 7750 SR (Backhaul and PGW/GGSN/SGW support)” (p. B-17).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 7750 SR. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “7750 SR”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
18 18
the Core Network
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent network elements used in the Core Network in
Not included in this document

The Core Network in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution contains 2nd and 3rd
generation and LTE network elements.

The Core Network (also called Network Core) is the central part of a wireless network
that provides services to the customers who are connected by the access network. One of
the main functions of the Core Network is to route calls across the Public Switched
Telephone Network (PSTN). A Core Network is usually made up of high capacity
communication facilities that connect primary nodes.
Can contain NEs from different wireless networks

The Core Network in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution can contain second
generation (2G), third-generation (3G) and LTE network elements. Network Elements
from 2G and 3G wireless networks are used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution when the Alcatel-Lucent LTE Network at a service provider location is
integrated with other non-LTE service provider wireless networks.
Contents
5060 WCS 18-4

About the 5060 WCS 18-4
Ready to support evolution to LTE 18-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5780 DSC 18-7
About the 5780 DSC 18-7
How it works 18-8
Advantages 18-9
Benefits 18-9
Hardware 18-10
Software 18-13
Connections to the network 18-14
7549 MGW 18-17
About the 7549 MGW 18-17
7500 SGSN 18-20
About the 7500 SGSN 18-20
Changes in the 7500 SGSN to support LTE 18-23
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN) 18-25
About the 7750 SR PGW and GGSN functions 18-26
How the functions work 18-27
Advantages 18-29
Hardware 18-30
Software 18-34
7750 SR (SGW) 18-37
About the 7750 SR (SGW) 18-37
How it works 18-38
Advantages 18-38
Hardware 18-39
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software 18-43
9380 3G MSC 18-46
About the 9380 3G MSC 18-46
9471 Mobility Management Entity (MME) 18-52
About the 9471 Mobility Management Entity (MME) 18-52
Advantages 18-53
Hardware 18-54
Software 18-57
9471 Wireless Mobility Manager 18-60
About the 9471 WMM 18-60
How it works 18-61
Advantages of the 9471 WMM 18-61
Hardware 18-61
Changes in the 9471 WMM to support LTE 18-63
HSGW 18-64
About the HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW) 18-64
Hardware 18-65
Software 18-65
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5060 WCS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5060 WCS
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel–Lucent 5060 Wireless Call Server (5060 WCS) as used
in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the 5060 WCS 18-4

Ready to support evolution to LTE 18-6
About the 5060 WCS

What is the 5060 WCS?
By offering flexible scalability, simplified efficient operations, all-IP interfaces, and
evolution to IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) and Long Term Evolution (LTE), the
Alcatel-Lucent 5060 Wireless Call Server (5060 WCS) effectively meets today’s mobile
service providers’ needs for cost-effective Global System for Mobile Communications
(GSM) and Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) service introduction
and capacity expansion, voice core renovation, IP network transformation, and long-term
investment protection.
Role of the 5060 WCS

The Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS provides the call-control and signaling functionality that is
central to the Alcatel-Lucent distributed-switching solution for mobile networks.
Designed specifically for Third-Generation Partnership Project (3GPP)
R4/R5/R6-compliant architectures, the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS significantly improves
network capacity, simplicity and operational efficiency.
Advantages of the 5060 WCS

The 5060 WCS:
• Offers flexible scalability for cost-effective service introduction or capacity expansion
• Offers Carrier-grade 99.999 percent availability and reliability
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network About the 5060 WCS
5060 WCS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Enables all-IP network transformation with all-IP interfaces
• Delivers optimal network performance with rapid detection, isolation, and alerting of
network issues
• Provides investment protection with evolution to IMS and LTE
Together with the Alcatel-Lucent 7549 Media Gateway and integrated Wireless Element
Manager (WEM), the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS is at the center of the Alcatel-Lucent
Mobile Next Generation Network (NGN) solution. Built on the second-generation of the
Alcatel-Lucent Advanced Telecommunications Computing Architecture (ATCA®) — the
selected technology for all Alcatel-Lucent common call and session-control platforms —
the ATCA High Capacity (HC) Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS delivers dramatic capacity
improvements and cost savings compared to the previous generation of ATCA platforms.
Use of the 5060 WCS

The main functions provided by the 5060 WCS include the following:
• Fully redundant architecture
with:
– Hardware/software fault tolerance
– Overload controls
– Automatic self-recovery
• Support for up to 128 MGWs
• Mobile Switching Center (MSC) pooling and geographical redundancy
• High scalability
with:
– Support for up to 10 million subscribers on a single cabinet
• Reduced power and cooling requirements Optimized IP with internal Ethernet switch
and IP interfaces
• Integrated WEM (unified OA&M)
with:
– Simplified configuration, fault and performance management of the
Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS, all subtending MGWs and MSC pools
• Configures as any combination
of:
– Visited MSC (VMSC)
– Gateway MSC (GMSC)
– MGCF
• Mobile NGN proactive monitoring and analysis capabilities
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network Ready to support evolution to LTE
5060 WCS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ready to support evolution to LTE

Ready to support evolution to LTE
With its unique approach to building a massively scalable call-processing system, the
carrier-grade, field-proven Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS architecture supports an
industry-leading “capacity per footprint” density ratio and can directly support up to 128
media gateways (MGWs). Available for deployment in today’s Second Generation and
Third-Generation mobile networks (2G/2.5G/3G), the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS supports
evolution to the all-IP network, IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) as a Media Gateway
Control Function (MGCF) and to Long Term Evolution (LTE).

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS, see Alcatel-Lucent 5060
WCS Product Description.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5060 WCS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “5060 WCS”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5780 DSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5780 DSC
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 5780 Dynamic Services Controller (DSC) as used in the
Contents
About the 5780 DSC 18-7

How it works 18-8
Advantages 18-9
Benefits 18-9
Hardware 18-10
Software 18-13
About the 5780 DSC

What is the 5780 DSC?
The Alcatel-Lucent 5780 Dynamic Services Controller (DSC) is a carrier-grade platform
that provides the Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) for 3G packet core and 4G
evolved packet core networks according to the 3GPP Release 7, 8 and 9 specifications.
Thus the 5780 DSC is the network element that provides centralized policy control in
both the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution and in the Alcatel-Lucent 3G1x
Ultimate Wireless Packet Core (UWPC).
What is policy control?

Policy control is the process whereby service providers dynamically instantiate business
rules into their network. Such rules include access to resources, kinds of services, Quality
of Service (QoS), charging, and amount of usage. The rules can be widespread or tailored
to an individual user. Policy controls can also be used to utilize network resources more
effectively.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network About the 5780 DSC
5780 DSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is the Subscriber Profile Repository (SPR)?
The Subscriber Profile Repository (SPR) is a database that stores subscriber profiles,
including all the details required for determining the appropriate QoS for a session.
Purpose of the 5780 DSC

The 5780 DSC allows service providers to manage and control network behavior based
on their business rules, application requirements, network status, and subscriber
entitlement and preferences. After these decisions are implemented, the decisions are
instantiated and enforced in the network as a set of network policies.
RADIUS support
In addition the 5780 DSC offers the ability to provide RADIUS support in an existing
AAA environment and acts as a converged policy manager operating in both a wireless
and wireline environment.
3GPP-compliant
The 5780 DSC implements the Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) function as
defined in the 3GPP standard, in Technical Specification 23.203.
Need for the 5780 DSC

Faced with rapidly increasing mobile data traffic and growing subscriber expectations,
mobile service providers are looking for ways to grow revenue and profitability while
enhancing the subscriber experience. The Alcatel-Lucent 5780 Dynamic Services
Controller (DSC) enables service providers to monetize and optimize network resources
while offering personalized choice for the subscriber in both a 3G and 4G environment.
How it works
Role of the 5780 DSC
The 5780 DSC is the decision-making engine that allows the authorization of network
resources based on application requests and network conditions. Network resource
authorization consists of gating packets from a specific service data flow (SDF) as per
application request, QoS control for specific SDFs, and flow-based per SDF charging.
What does the 5780 DSC do?

The Alcatel-Lucent 5780 Dynamic Service Controller (DSC) ensures adherence to
predefined QoS in both the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution and in the
Alcatel-Lucent 3G1x Ultimate Wireless Packet Core (UWPC) via network-wide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network How it works
5780 DSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
management and control of policy and charging. By coordinating and exchanging the
information with the PGW, the 5780 DSC sets a policy including a predefined set of
allowed policies and/or charging status, and generates corresponding Policy Control and
Charging (PCC) actions such as gating, QoS control, and charging.
The 5780 DSC also hosts the Subscriber Profile Repository (SPR). An example of
information that would be stored in the SPR is a subscriber's permitted services.
Operates throughout the life cycle of the call

The 5780 DSC operates throughout the life cycle of the user interaction with the network.
For example, the 5780 DSC is used during initial User Equipment (UE) attachment, and
during the establishment of additional resources to support the establishment of an
application session.
Advantages
Advantages of the 5780 DSC
Key advantages of the 5780 DSC include the following:
• The 5780 DSC is a purpose-built, flexible platform that provides scalable
performance against a wide range of complicated use cases.
• The 5780 DSC has a carrier-grade, NEBS-certified platform.
• ALU has a long history in policy management, stemming from being a leader in
TPSDA and having over 25 customers worldwide for wireline policy management.
• Flexible rules engine allowing operators to easily update and modify policies.
• A platform that is, in general, easy to install and get up and running.
Benefits
Benefits to the service provider
Benefits of the 5780 DSC to the service provider include the following:
• Provides the tools to allow operators to personalize their service offerings with scale
and velocity to attract new subscribers while more efficiently monetizing each bit
delivered
• Provides concurrent support for wireline access models, thus providing massive
operational benefits while future-proofing the operator’s network
• Supports Alcatel-Lucent Application Assurance (AA) functionality in legacy PPPoE
BRAS environments and allows easy migration to 7750 Service Router (SR)-based
subscriber management with minimal additional investment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network Benefits
5780 DSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Empowers mobile operators to monetize their network assets and build new business
models, allowing them to enter into the value chain with ACP partners
• Leverages Wireless Network Intelligence to dynamically protect subscriber QoE
while maintaining the integrity of the network
• Experience to integrate seamlessly into existing OSS environments with flexible
ability to access subscriber records distributed across multiple sources (horizontal) or
ability to stitch together subscriber records across multiple rows (vertical)
• Provides seamless charging flexibility with support for pre-paid/post-paid models
while providing application-specific treatment such as zero rating for some traffic
flows
• Provides support for a complete IMS solution
• With Gx session correlation, allows operators to seamlessly leverage the L7 packet
inspection techniques offered by a DPI enforcement point with existing bearer-plane
enforcement points to further enhance the breadth of policy-controlled in-line data
plane capabilities
• Demonstrates capability to interoperate with a leading DPI vendor through the Gx
interface
• Provides exceptional reliability, scalability and performance to support a vast number
of subscribers, services and applications
• Provides flexible hardware deployment options
• Provides easy, simple-to-understand and simple-to-build pricing models that scale
with wireless and wireline sessions
Hardware
The Alcatel-Lucent 5780 DSC is built on the NEBS certified, carrier-grade
Alcatel-Lucent ATCA 14-slot blade server platform.
The 5780 DSC uses a common ATCA v2 shelf that is used for several Alcatel-Lucent
products including the 5780 DSC, the 8650 SDM HSS, the 9471 MME, and IMS
platforms enhancing operational support and sparing.
The 5780 DSC platform is carrier grade, NEBS certified, and compliant with the ATCA
standard (PICMG 3.0 and PICMG 3.1 standards). The 5780 DSC is an Integrated
solution, encompassing housing, switching, computing/IO blades and storage in one
cabinet.
The 5780 DSC platform employs 1+1 hot-redundancy on all cards with no single point of
failure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network Hardware
5780 DSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-1 Hardware for the 5780 DSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5780 DSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware configuration
The following figure shows the hardware configuration of the 5780 DSC:
Figure 18-2 Hardware configuration of the 5780 DSC
Blades
The Alcatel-Lucent 5780 DSC uses two main processing blades: the Common Services
blade and the PCRF Services blade.
The Common Services blade is configured in a 1+1 pair for redundancy, and a single pair
is required per ATCA shelf.
The PCRF Services blade is configured in 1+1 pair for redundancy and up to five pairs
can be deployed in a single ATCA shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5780 DSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In addition to the processing blades, the 5780 DSC includes the Switching Hub blades.
The Switching Hub blades are housed in the 2 central chassis slots and are configured in a
1+1 redundancy pair.
Software
Software on the Common Services blade
The main software on the Common Services blade is the OAM Service Module. The
OAM Service Module provides a centralized interface with the PCRF instance using the
web-based GUI console or the northbound interface for integration with the OSS/BSS and
the 5620 SAM management capabilities. The OAM Service Module is the single point of
contact to administer and distribute the policy rules to the PCRF services, load-balance
requests to the PCRF Services blades, and to report the overall system status and
management.
DPA
The main software in the Common Services module is called the DPA Service Module.
The DPA Service Module provides the interface with the external entities (that is, SGW,
PGW, SPR, and the PCRF processing modules), and dispatches and performs load
balancing on requests among the external entities.
Software on the PCRF Services blade

The main software on the PCRF Services blade is the PCRF Services Blades Module. The
core function of the PCRF Services Blades Module is the policy decision engine that
maintains service data flow states, creates application session bindings, and provides
event forwarding.
Software on the Switching Hub blades

The Switching Hub Blades provide internal communication between processing blades.
The switching hub blades are housed in the middle two slots in the chassis and are
configured in a 1+1 redundancy pair.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network Connections to the network
5780 DSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following figure show the network connections of the 5780 DSC.
Figure 18-3 5780 DSC logical design and connections to other network elements
Note: The SPR is shown twice in the diagram, because the 5780 DSC can handle the
SPR in two ways. The 5780 DSC can interact with an external SPR, as shown at
number 1 in the figure. Or the 5780 DSC can host the SPR internally, as shown in
number 2 in the figure. In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the 5780
DSC supports both internal and external (on the SDM) SPR.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5780 DSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Gx interface allows interaction with the mobile network, which includes a direct
connection to the Policy and Charging Enforcement Function (PCEF) on the Packet Data
Network Gateway (PGW) and an indirect connection to the Online Charging System
(OCS) and the Offline Charging System (OFCS).
The Sh/Sp interface allows interaction with the Service Profile Repository (SPR), which
provides information about the profile of the subscriber that requests the session,
including data such as subscription information.
The Rx, WS, and RESTful interfaces are used to interact with the application domain to
intercept application requests and understand application specific network requirements.
The Gxa interface allows interaction with the HSGW, and is used to transfer QoS policy
information from the PCRF to the HSGW (Trusted Non-3GPP access).
The S9 interface allows interactions in between a PCRF in the HPLMN (H-PCRF) and a
PCRF in the VPLMN (V-PCRF).
User interfaces
User interfaces
The 5780 DSC is supported by the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager (5620
SAM).
The 5780 DSC provides a web-based GUI to configure PCRF rules to meet network
requirements.

For online information
For online information about the 5780 DSC, see the Alcatel-Lucent customer product
page for this document: www.alcatel-lucent.com/5780dsc.
Data sheet
See especially the data sheet at the following link:
&& (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/wps/portal/!ut/p/kcxml/04_
Sj9SPykssy0xPLMnMz0vM0Y_QjzKLd4w3dnTRL8h2VAQADYR9IA!!?LMSG_
CABINET=Solution_Product_Catalog&ampLMSG_CONTENT_FILE=Products/
Product_Detail_001131.xml#tabAnchor4)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network For further information
5780 DSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5780 DSC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “5780 DSC”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7549 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7549 MGW
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel–Lucent 7549 Media Gateway (7549 MGW) as used in
Contents

About the 7549 MGW

What is the 7549 MGW?
The Alcatel-Lucent 7549 Media Gateway (7549 MGW) is a gateway network element
that provides the media gateway function with voice and data bearer interfaces (TDM, IP,
ATM). The 7549 MGW is capable of performing any-to-any switching, including
TDM-to-TDM, native Packet-Packet and TDM-to-Packet.
The 7549 MGW is one key component of many which make up the Alcatel-Lucent Next
Generation Network (NGN) wireless solutions architecture. The 7549 MGW meets
today’s mobile service providers’ needs for cost-effective Global System for Mobile
Communications (GSM) and Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS)
service introduction, capacity expansion, and voice core renovation. It also provides
long-term investment protection by evolving to the all-IP network, IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS), and Long Term Evolution (LTE).
Role of the 7549 MGW

The Alcatel-Lucent 7549 MGW provides packetized and channelized interfaces for
interconnecting service provider’s Mobile Switching Centers as well as interfaces that
enable connection to external public telephone systems.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network About the 7549 MGW
7549 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 7549 MGW
The 7549 MGW:
• Is scalable to 96,000 ports with a small footprint for significant cost, facilities, and
power savings
• Enables advanced media processing at TDM-to-TDM, TDM-to-packet, and
packet-to-packet network borders for maximum flexibility and cost-effectiveness
• Requires fewer network elements and simplifies network management with many
integrated features
• Is optimized for IP, enabling all-IP network transformation
The 7549 MGW is paired with the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS as a next-generation mobile
switching product that bridges the voice and data signaling protocols of 2nd and 3rd
generation mobile networks with intelligent networking.
The 7549 MGW also shares the same integrated Wireless Element Manager (WEM) used
by the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 Wireless Call Server (5060 WCS), simplifying network
configuration, provisioning, and management.
Use of the 7549 MGW

The main functions provided by the 7549 MGW include the following:
• Built on leading-edge technology with state-of-the-art DSP, computing, and media
processing components
• All-in-one voice server cards, with integrated DSPs and echo cancellers
• Integrated features: media server, signaling gateway (SGW), interworking function
(IWF), internal signaling relay function (SRF)
• Offers IP and TDM switch fabrics for high quality, native interworking at
TDM-to-TDM, TDM-to-packet, and packet-to-packet network borders
• Advanced VQEs for Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) and TDM, including
Automatic Level Control, Adaptive Noise Reduction, Voice Activity Detection,
Silence Insertion/Detection, Comfort Noise, Generation, Packet Loss Concealment,
Adaptive Jitter Buffer, and WB-AMR
• Powerful IP-to-IP processing capabilities with IP Transcoding, multi-path Open
Shortest Path First (OSPF) for Layer 3+ routing and control, and Multi-Protocol Label
Switching (MPLS) Resource Reservation Protocol - Traffic Engineering (RSVP-TE)
for Quality of Service (QoS)
As used in the Solution

The 7549 MGW is used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to support the
5060 WCS, while the 7520 MGW is used to support the 9380 3G MSC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7549 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 7540 MGW, see Alcatel-Lucent 7549
MGW Product Description.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 7549 MGW. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “7549 MGW”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7500 SGSN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7500 SGSN
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 7500 SGSN as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 7500 SGSN 18-20

Changes in the 7500 SGSN to support LTE 18-23
About the 7500 SGSN

What is the 7500 SGSN?
The Alcatel-Lucent 7500 Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) is the network element
used in an Alcatel-Lucent end-to-end GPRS/W-CDMA packet core network to provide
the mobility and IP packet management functions for mobile broadband end-users. Built
upon a scalable, high-performance industry standard platform, the 7500 SGSN provides
the flexibility to support GPRS/EDGE, HSPA/HSPA+ or combined services all from a
single rack.
Alternate: 9471 WMM

The 9471 Wireless Mobility Manager (WMM) network element can also be used as an
SGSN. For more about the 9471 WMM, see “9471 Wireless Mobility Manager”
(p. 18-60).
Role of the 7500 SGSN

The Alcatel-Lucent 7500 SGSN is a powerful, versatile, all-IP, 2G/3G SGSN that
supervises the mobility events in a Packet Core and provides the following functions:
• Mobility management
• Session management
• Packet relaying, transfer and routing of user packets
• Legacy 2G/3G and IP Radio Access interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network About the 7500 SGSN
7500 SGSN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Security and access control
• Management of subscription data
• Packet Core Operations and Maintenance
Advantages of the 7500 SGSN

The Alcatel-Lucent 7500 SGSN is essential for delivering the bandwidth and mobility
management needed to deliver EDGE/HSPA mobile broadband services both in packet
core network renovations and expansions.
Alcatel-Lucent 7500 SGSN is a key component of Alcatel-Lucent 3GPP mobile packet
core and the Wireless Broadband Network.
The Alcatel-Lucent 7500 SGSN provides:
• High capacity and scalability - all in a compact cabinet. Based on industry standard
ATCA design providing state of the art architecture and capacity.
• Platform homogeneity:
Thanks to a common ATCA platform, the 7500 SGSN provides the same look and feel
as the other Alcatel-Lucent mobile core elements.
• Configuration Flexibility:
2G and 3G capabilities in one product allowing smooth evolution from 2G or 3G to
combined 2G/3G operation.
• Interface Variety:
Legacy ATM , Frame Relay, SS7 interfaces, and all-IP interfaces are supported
simultaneously for a smooth network evolution.
• Reliability:
Full redundancy ensuring service continuity with geo-redundancy, load-sharing and
security mechanisms.
• Cost optimization:
Supports mobile operators IP network transformation, reducing capacity expansion
costs and sharing of radio access network infrastructure with other service providers,
and delivery of multimedia services (mobile TV, radio) over existing network
infrastructure.
• Easy and fast integration:
Multivendor-tested for seamless integration into any 2G/3G radio and core network
environment.
• Supported by the industry’s leading all-IP network and service aware management
portfolio.
Hardware
The following figure shows a 7500 SGSN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7500 SGSN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-4 Hardware for the 7500 SGSN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7500 SGSN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use of the 7500 SGSN in LTE Network

The 7500 SGSN is a key network element in the interworking and handover procedures
between an existing GSM/W-CDMA network and an LTE network.
In this role, the 7500 SGSN supports Inter Radio Access Technology (IRAT) handovers
between 2G GERAN or 3G UTRAN and LTE eUTRAN, including:
• User (data) plane traffic forwarding between BSC or RNC and LTE SGW
• Control plane traffic between BSC or RNC and LTE MME
• Roaming between Home and Visited networks
• Charging and billing statistics collection
Changes in the 7500 SGSN to support LTE

No changes
No changes are required on the 7500 SGSN to support LTE interworking because the LTE
EPC provides the 3GPP pre-release 8 Gn/Gp control and user interfaces.

For information
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 7500 SGSN go to the following site:
(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/wps/portal/Products)
For documentation
For documentation on the 7500 SGSN go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
(OLCS) web site (https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/lte/).
For information on navigating through the OLCS site, see “Accessing and navigating the
OLCS web site” (p. B-9).
Table 18-1 Documentation on the 7500 SGSN
Document Title Document Number

Access Control Management 3CM59857FGAAPCZZA
Alarm Management 3CM59853FECEPCZZA
Batch Management 3CM76912FECFPCZZA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7500 SGSN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 18-1 Documentation on the 7500 SGSN (continued)
Document Title Document Number

Log Management 3CM61979FECFPCZZA
OAM CLI User Guide 3BL40725HABAPCZZA
Performance Management 3CM40555FECFPCZZA
SGSN Alarms Dictionary 3BL28368HABADTZZA
SGSN Configuration Guide 3BL40706HABAPCZZA
SGSN Hardware Management Guide 3BL65028HABAPCZZA
SGSN Maintenance Guide 3BL65033HABAPCZZA
SGSN Observation Counters Dictionary 3BL40723HABADTZZA
SGSN Parameters dictionary 3BL40724HABADTZZA
Signaling Management 3CM77602FGAAPCZZA
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 7500 SGSN. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “7500 SGSN”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
Overview
Purpose
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Router
(SR) is used to perform the LTE Packet Data Network Gateway (PDN gateway or PGW)
function and the Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN) functions. This configuration is
described in this section.
Special case
Note: For LE3.0, the eHRPD IW was validated using a 3rd Party PGW.
Contents
About the 7750 SR PGW and GGSN functions 18-26

How the functions work 18-27
Advantages 18-29
Hardware 18-30
Software 18-34
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network About the 7750 SR PGW and GGSN functions
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the 7750 SR PGW and GGSN functions

Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent delivers mobile gateway functionality via the industry-leading, all-IP
service-aware platform, the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Router. With the addition of a
Mobile Gateway Integrated Services Module (MG-ISM), the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service
Router extends its broad applicability to the mobile environment, supporting the
following applications:
• Evolved Packet Core (EPC) gateways:
– Serving Gateway (SGW)
– Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW)
• GPRS Gateway Support Node (GGSN) applications
The 7750 SR is used in the role of PDN Gateway (PGW) in LTE environments, and in the
role of the GGSN in GPRS/WCDMA environments (that is, a gateway in
2G/2.5G/3G/2.5G/3G/3G+). A single 7750 SR system can be configured to perform the
roles of PGW and GGSN simultaneously.
What is the 7750 SR (PGW)?

The 7750 SR (Packet Data Network [PDN] Gateway) is the IP-anchor core element, in
charge of management of IP address domains in LTE, that connects to external data
networks and provides connectivity between UEs and between a UE and external IP
domains.
What is the 7750 SR (GGSN)?

The Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR (Gateway GPRS Support Node [GGSN]) is the
GPRS/WCDMA mobile core gateway that provides connectivity with external networks
by defining and managing access to Access Point Names (APNs). APNs are IP addresses
of external Packet Data Networks (PDNs).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network How the functions work
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How the functions work

What does the 7750 SR (PGW) do?
Like the 7750 SR (SGW), the 7750 SR (PGW) is the termination point of the packet data
interface towards external Packet Data Networks. As an IP anchor point for subscriber
bearers within the LTE network, the PGW carries out the following functions:
• Provides the UE with an IP address (IPv4, IPv6 or both)
• Facilitates flow based charging under control of the PCRF, such as the following:
– Providing Uplink and Downlink service level charging (for example, based on
Service Data Flows (SDFs) defined by the PCRF
– Serving as enforcement point for policy decisions coming from the PCRF
• Connects user to PDNs (packet data networks, or external IP networks)
• Serves as the cross-technology mobility anchor by supporting mobility between 3GPP
access and non-3GPP access, and between different non-3GPP accesses
• Provides per-user based packet filtering
• Provides additional traffic inspection and processing in order to achieve better control
of network resources and better performance of network applications. This
functionality, L4-L7 packet inspection and processing, is called Application
Assurance and is performed “inline”, on the 7750 SR.
Characteristics of the 7750 SR (GGSN)

The Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR (GGSN) has the following characteristics:
• Highly scalable in terms of sessions, PDP contexts and throughput
• Facilitates content-based charging: by application (that is, different pricing for MMS,
e-mail, WAP access) and combined bearer-level and application-level charging (that
is, by time, volume and service value with different pricing for on-portal, off-portal,
roaming, GPRS, WLAN)
• Fully supports prepaid solution: standards-based real-time date prepaid solution by
supporting a variety of the protocols that are used to contact billing and mediation
device systems including Radius and Diameter
• Flexible management of Access Point Names: APN aliasing concept and single APN
facility on Gn & APN differentiation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network How the functions work
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits of the 7750 SR (GGSN)
The Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR (GGSN) has the following benefits for the service provider:
• Increases ARPU of prepaid subscribers when roaming.
• Offers a powerful next-generation GGSN that is built with full focus on the user plane
requirements for the evolved mobile broadband and that is scalable, future-proof and
easy to integrate in a network
• Provides a flexible charging solution by adding content-based charging function into
the operator's network.
Changes in the 7750 SR to support LTE

No change needed when used for LTE
The 7750 SR supports LTE gateway functionality (PGW and SGW) on the same platform
as which the 7750 SR supports the GGSN functionality. When introduced as the LTE
PGW, the 7750 SR allows converged gateway capabilities and extending its role to
perform the GGSN functionality for GPRS/WCDMA. The 7750 SR can also act as a
common IP anchor for LTE and previous generations of 3GPP (WCDMA, HSPA, and
HSPA+, for example). As such, the 7750 SR facilitates seamless interconnectivity of LTE
with previous generations of 3GPP networks and facilitates handover between these
networks.
The 7750 SR performs the functions of the PGW or GGSN (or a combined functionality
of PGW and GGSN). There are no changes required to the product.
Mobile Gateway Integrated Services Module (MG-ISM)

No additional hardware is required to support LTE. Additional hardware in the form of
the Mobile Gateway Integrated Services Module (MG-ISM) is needed for higher mobile
gateway capacity and scalability of data connections.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network Advantages
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages
Purpose
This topic describes the advantages of the 7750 SR that provides both the LTE PGW and
GPRS/WCDMA GGSN functionality.
Benefits of the 7750 SR

The Serving Gateway functionality is implemented on the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR. The
key advantage to use of the 7750 SR is the ability to use the same high-performance,
highly scalable platform to perform a number of functions in the LTE network, including
the Serving Gateway function. Other benefits include the following:
• Wireline performance of up to 25 Gb/s bidirectional (per slot). With advanced packet
processing turned on (security, DPI), the performance is up to 10 Gbps.
• Availability levels of above 99.999%, providing the availability that service providers
need to achieve or improve QoE goals for voice and data customers
• Minimize service and business risks when introducing LTE
• Ability to grow subscriber base and services for years to come without having to
physically replace the equipment
• Application awareness of connections, traffic flows and the mapping of connections
and traffic flows to network services. This awareness is essential for introducing new
service models and is fully aligned with wireless broadband service requirements. The
awareness is also important for advanced packet processing (DPI).
• Ability to enforce end-to-end QoS with per-service/application, per-user granularity
and increase the overall Quality of Experience (QoE) for wireless broadband services
• High performance, high capacity user plane processing for 2G/2.5G/3G/3G+ and
LTE.
• Field-proven as fixed edge/core with high availability and with nonstop services
• Full redundancy of critical user plane functions (routing and forwarding). The
distributed and isolated mobile gateway functionality allows independent scaling of
control plane for mobility-based functions and L3 routing functions.
• Full set of IPv4/IPv6 routing capabilities to tie directly to IP aggregation and
backbone
• Integrated and virtualized L2 and L3 services to manage mobile network overlays
• The functionality is added to a proven platform, that has more than 48,000 units
deployed in more than 350 customer networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Benefits of the Mobile Packet Gateway
The Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR Mobile Gateway won the CTIA 2010 Emerging Technology
Award for Network Infrastructure and Wide Area Network. The MPG provides
• Inhouse 100 Gbit/s network processors
• Hierarchical IP Quality of Service (H-QoS)
• Wirespeed, best-in-class performance resulting in Mobile Gateway user plane
processing over 100 Gbps per platform
• Integrated advanced packet processing (Application Assurance) for up to 10 Gbps
L4-L7 traffic processing.
Hardware
To perform PGW and GGSN functionality, the 7750 SR-7 and the 7750 SR-12 platforms
can be used. The following section shows examples of the mobile gateway functionality
based on the 7750 SR-12.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-5 Hardware for the 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
About the MG-ISM

A single blade - the Mobile Gateway-Integrated Services Module (MG-ISM) - is added in
one of the 10 available slots of the 7750 SR to allow the Mobile Gateway functionality.
The MG-ISM is a full-height, hot-swappable module that fits into any of the Input/Output
(I/O) slots of the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Router to provide the SGW or PGW
functionality for LTE or the GGSN functionality for 2G/3G. User plane (LTE bearers or
Packet Data Protocol [PDP] contexts) traffic is directed to the module via the router’s
backplane and switching fabric, thus eliminating the need for directly supporting external
connections by the module and maximizing its packet processing performance. The
MG-ISM ensures service continuity at the user/data plane for Service Data Flows (SDFs)
— which are carried over virtual containers — bearers and PDP contexts. The MG-ISM
supports flow detection and communicates with the PCRF. As instructed by the PCRF, the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MG-ISM performs the Policy Charging Enforcement Function (PCEF). The MG-ISM
also facilitates flow-based charging through interfaces toward offline and online billing
and charging systems.
Sub-elements of the MG-ISM

The MG-ISM comes as factory-installed and is preconfigured. The MG-ISM is composed
of the following sub-elements:
• 1 Input/Output Module 3-XP (IOM3-XP). The Input Output Module (IOM)3-XP
contains bays for two ISAs and makes the routing decisions and performs QoS
enforcement. The IOM3-XP also communicates with the CPM for management
purposes via the 7750 SR’s backplane.
• 2 Integrated Service Adapters (ISAs). Each Integrated Services Adapter (ISA)
provides the key functionality and performs identification of applications to enable
dynamic per-user, per-application, per-IP flow QoS policy control.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-6 MG-ISM configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network Software
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
Determines function
The SR-OS-MG software and licensing determine if the MG-ISM performs as a PGW, as
a Serving Gateway (SGW), as a GGSN, or, as described in this topic, a combined PGW
and GGSN.

The 7750 gateway release is delivered on its own software release, in addition to the
standard 7750 SR-OS release.
SR Operating System
The Alcatel-Lucent Service Router Operating System (SR OS) is a carrier-grade, highly
fault-tolerant, and feature-rich operating system that provides the mobile gateway
functions with an LTE or GPRS/W-CDMA network. The software enables the following
functions:
• Basic Mobile Gateway System Configuration and operations
• System security and access as well as event logging and accounting logs
• IOM, Media Dependent Adapter (MDA), and port level provisioning
• IP Routing and associated attributes such as an IP addressing, port, link aggregation
group (LAG) as well as IP and MAC-based filtering
• Routing Protocols
• Mobile Gateway Multi-protocol Label Switching (MPLS) and Label Distribution
Protocol (LDP).
• Configuration of service parameters such as GTP, subscriber information, and user
bearer services
• Operations, Administration and Maintenance (OA&M) and Diagnostics
• Quality of Service (QoS) and policy management.

For further information on the software on the 7750 SR-12, see the documentation
available from the Alcatel-Lucent On-Line Customer Support Documentation Service
(OLCS).
For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR-12, used as
PGW/GGSN, see Table B-8, “Documentation Library for ePC – 7750 SR
(PGW/GGSN/SGW)” (p. B-18).
For information on accessing OLCS, see “Accessing and navigating the OLCS web site”
(p. B-9).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The 7750 SR (PGW) provides the following interfaces to the LTE and external network:
• Gn/Gp
• S5/S8
• SGi, Gi
• S2a
• S6b (Diameter)
• Ga
• Gy/Ro (OCS)
• Rf (OFCS)
• Gx
User interfaces
5620 SAM
The 7750 SR mobile gateways are managed by the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware
Manager (SAM) for assured, simplified and integrated operations across both network
and service management domains. The 5620 SAM is designed to manage services and
provide service level visibility into the LTE network.

For more on the 7750 SR
For further information on the 7750 SR, see “7750 SR” (p. 17-14).
Documentation
For a list of customer documentation on the Alcatel–Lucent 7750 SR, see Table B-7,
“Documentation Library for ePC – 7750 SR (Backhaul and PGW/GGSN/SGW support)”
(p. B-17).
For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR-12, used as
PGW/GGSN, see Table B-8, “Documentation Library for ePC – 7750 SR
(PGW/GGSN/SGW)” (p. B-18).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Training on the 7750 SR (PGW)
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 7750 SR (PGW). For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “7750 PGW”.
(p. B-24).
Training on the 7750 SR (GGSN)

Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 7750 SR (GGSN). For a listing of these classes, go to
the following url: https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and search on the
keyword “7750 GGSN”.
(p. B-24).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7750 SR (SGW)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7750 SR (SGW)
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the 7750 SR (SGW).
Contents
About the 7750 SR (SGW) 18-37

How it works 18-38
Advantages 18-38
Hardware 18-39
Software 18-43
About the 7750 SR (SGW)

What is the 7750 SR (SGW)?
Alcatel-Lucent delivers mobile gateway functionality via the industry-leading, all-IP
service-aware platform, the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Router (SR). With the addition
of a Mobile Gateway Integrated Services Module (MG-ISM), the Alcatel-Lucent 7750
Service Router extends its broad applicability to the mobile environment, supporting the
following applications:
• Evolved Packet Core (EPC) gateways:
– Serving Gateway (SGW)
– Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW)
• GPRS Gateway Support Node (GGSN) applications
In the role of the SGW, the 7750 SR 7750 Service Router (SR) (Serving Gateway [7750
SR SGW]) is the network element that provides IP connectivity between the eUTRAN and
the EPC. The 7750 SR (SGW) also connects to a number of eNodeB network elements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7750 SR (SGW)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
What does the 7750 SR (SGW) do?
The 7750 SR (SGW) performs the following functions:
• Serves as the local mobility anchor for UE by terminating the packet data network
interface towards the eUTRAN and the UE
• Manages user-plane mobility by performing IP routing and forwarding functions and
maintaining data paths between eNodeBs and the PGW
• Serves as the local mobility anchor point for inter-eNodeB and inter-3GPP handovers
• Performs session supervision for the eNodeB
• Performs mobility anchoring for mobility with other 3GPP technologies, such as
2G/GSM and 3G/W-CDMA
• Performs the IDLE mode downlink packet buffering and initiation of network
triggered service request procedure
• Performs packet routing and forwarding
• Performs accounting on user and QoS Class Identifier (QCI) granularity for
inter-service provider charging
• Performs Uplink and Downlink charging per UE and per PGW
Advantages
Purpose
This section describes the advantages of the 7750 SR that provides the SGW
functionality.
Benefits of the 7750 SR

The Serving Gateway functionality is implemented on the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR. The
key advantage to use of the 7750 SR is the ability to use the same high-performance,
highly scalable platform to perform a number of functions in the LTE network, including
the Serving Gateway function. Other benefits include the following:
• Wireline performance of up to 25 Gb/s bidirectional (per slot). With advanced packet
processing turned on (security, DPI), the performance is up to 10 Gbps.
• Availability levels of above 99.999%, providing the availability that service providers
need to achieve or improve QoE goals for voice and data customers
• Minimize service and business risks when introducing LTE
• Ability to grow subscriber base and services for years to come without having to
physically replace the equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7750 SR (SGW)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Application awareness of connections, traffic flows and the mapping of connections
and traffic flows to network services. This awareness is essential for introducing new
service models and is fully aligned with wireless broadband service requirements. The
awareness is also important for advanced packet processing (DPI).
• Ability to enforce end-to-end QoS with per-service/application, per-user granularity
and increase the overall Quality of Experience (QoE) for wireless broadband services
• High performance, high capacity user plane processing for 2G/2.5G/3G/3G+ and LTE
• Field-proven as fixed edge/core with high availability and with nonstop services
• Full redundancy of critical user plane functions (routing and forwarding). The
distributed and isolated mobile gateway functionality allows independent scaling of
control plane for mobility-based functions and L3 routing functions.
• Full set of IPv4/IPv6 routing capabilities to tie directly to IP aggregation and
backbone
• Integrated and virtualized L2 and L3 services to manage mobile network overlays
• The functionality is added to a proven platform, that has more than 48,000 units
deployed in more than 350 customer networks.
Hardware
The Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR (SGW) is based on the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Router
(SR-12) (12-slot) service router.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7750 SR (SGW)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-7 Hardware for the 7750 SR (SGW)
About the MG-ISM

A single blade - the Mobile Gateway-Integrated Services Module (MG-ISM) - is added in
one of the 10 available slots of the 7750 SR to allow the Mobile Gateway functionality.
The MG-ISM is a full-height, hot-swappable module that fits into any of the Input/Output
(I/O) slots of the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Router to provide the SGW or PGW
functionality for LTE or the GGSN functionality for 2G/3G. User plane (LTE bearers or
Packet Data Protocol [PDP] contexts) traffic is directed to the module via the router’s
backplane and switching fabric, thus eliminating the need for directly supporting external
connections by the module and maximizing its packet processing performance. The
MG-ISM ensures service continuity at the user/data plane for Service Data Flows (SDFs)
— which are carried over virtual containers — bearers and PDP contexts. The MG-ISM
supports flow detection and communicates with the PCRF. As instructed by the PCRF, the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7750 SR (SGW)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MG-ISM performs the Policy Charging Enforcement Function (PCEF). The MG-ISM
also facilitates flow-based charging through interfaces toward offline and online billing
and charging systems.
Sub-elements of the MG-ISM

The MG-ISM comes as factory-installed and is preconfigured. The MG-ISM is composed
of the following sub-elements:
• 1 Input/Output Module 3-XP (IOM3-XP). The Input Output Module (IOM)3-XP
contains bays for two ISAs and makes the routing decisions and performs QoS
enforcement. The IOM3-XP also communicates with the CPM for management
purposes via the 7750 SR’s backplane.
• 2 Integrated Service Adapters (ISAs). Each Integrated Services Adapter (ISA)
provides the key functionality and performs identification of applications to enable
dynamic per-user, per-application, per-IP flow QoS policy control.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7750 SR (SGW)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-8 MG-ISM configuration
The MG-ISM is placed in one of 10 available slot on the 7750 SR-12. Multiple MG-ISMs
may be installed to allow greater capacity. MG-ISMs can be configured as 1:1 redundant
pair(s).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network Software
7750 SR (SGW)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
Determines function
The SR-OS-MG software and licensing determine if the MG-ISM performs as an SGW or
a PGW.
About the SR-OS-MG software

Mobile gateway functionality on the 7750 SR is enabled by the SR-OS-MG software
(operating system). SR-MG-OS is a special variant of the Alcatel-Lucent Service Router
Operating System (SR-OS), a carrier-grade, highly fault-tolerant, and feature-rich
operating system that provides the mobile gateway functions with an LTE or
GPRS/W-CDMA network. The software enables the following functions:
• Basic Mobile Gateway System Configuration and operations
• System security and access as well as event logging and accounting logs
• IOM, Media Dependent Adapter (MDA), and port level provisioning
• IP Routing and associated attributes such as IP addressing, port, link aggregation
group (LAG) as well as IP and MAC-based filtering
• Routing Protocols
• Mobile Gateway Multi-protocol Label Switching (MPLS) and Label Distribution
Protocol (LDP)
• Configuration of service parameters such as GTP, subscriber information, and user
bearer services
• Operations, Administration and Management (OA&M) and Diagnostics
• Quality of Service (QoS) and policy management.

The 7750 SR Mobile Gateway release will be delivered via the SR-OS-MG software
release, separate from the standard 7750 SR-OS release.

For further information on the software on the 7750 SR-12, see the documentation
available from the Alcatel-Lucent On-Line Customer Support Documentation Service
(OLCS).
For a list of recommended documentation on the 7750 SR-12, used as SGW, see Table
B-8, “Documentation Library for ePC – 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN/SGW)” (p. B-18).
For information on accessing OLCS, see “Accessing and navigating the OLCS web site”
(p. B-9).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7750 SR (SGW)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 18-9 7750 SR (SGW) connections to other network elements
Table 18-2 7750 SR (SGW) connections to other network elements

S5/S8 From the PGW User and control traffic
S11 To the MME Control traffic
S1-U To the eNodeB User traffic
Rf To the OFCS Offline charging traffic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network User interfaces
7750 SR (SGW)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User interfaces
5620 SAM
The 7750 SR mobile gateways are managed by the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware
Manager (SAM) for assured, simplified and integrated operations across both network
and service management domains. The 5620 SAM is designed to manage services and
provides service level visibility into the LTE network.

For more on the 7750 SR
For further information on the 7750 SR, see “7750 SR” (p. 17-14).
For documentation
For documentation on the 7750 SR go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
(OLCS) web site (https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/lte/)
For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR, used as SGW,
see Table B-8, “Documentation Library for ePC – 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN/SGW)”
(p. B-18).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 7750 SR (SGW). For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “7750 SGW”.
(p. B-24).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9380 3G MSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9380 3G MSC
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC as used in the Alcatel-Lucent
Contents
About the 9380 3G MSC 18-46

About the 9380 3G MSC

What is the 9380 3G MSC?
The Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC is the 3rd Generation Mobile Switching Center portion
of the UMTS circuit core network. The primary function of the Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G
MSC is UMTS/GSM wireless mobility management and voice call control for UMTS
mobile subscribers.
Figure 18-10, “Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC in the UMTS Circuit Core Network”
(p. 18-47) shows the Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC in the UMTS circuit core network.
The Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC interfaces to the UMTS radio access network via the
3GPP Standards defined Iu-cs interface and the GSM A interface for 2G services. The
Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC also interfaces to a Network Management System (NMS),
GSM Service Control Function (gsmSCF), Gateway Mobile Location Centre (GMLC),
Equipment Identification Register (EIR), Home Location Register (HLR), another MSC,
PSTN and other PLMNs for full support of mobile-to-land and mobile-to-mobile voice
calls.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network About the 9380 3G MSC
9380 3G MSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-10 Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC in the UMTS Circuit Core Network
Alcatel-Lucent has based its complete Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC offer on a

softswitch-based architecture that seamlessly evolves through software upgrade. With
architecture ready for the circuit-switched and packet-switched domain voice offers,
Alcatel-Lucent can provide total assurance to the network operator of investment
protection in circuit-switched infrastructure.
Alcatel-Lucent’s 9380 3G MSC offer consists of the following elements:
• MSC Server on the Alcatel-Lucent Control Platform (CP)
• Alcatel-Lucent Network Gateway (NG)
• Alcatel-Lucent 8688 Media Resource Server
The Alcatel-Lucent MSC Server is built on the Alcatel-Lucent Control Platform (LCP).
The Alcatel-Lucent Control Platform is a highly scalable platform based on proven
technology with an extremely flexible software architecture that enables rapid
development of new protocols, variants and service applications. The MSC Server
performs mobility management and call processing, terminates signalling protocols and
controls bearer gateways, and performs to OAM&P and billing functions. The Release 99
UMTS circuit-switched domain is shown in Figure 18-11, “Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC
within R4 UMTS Network” (p. 18-48).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9380 3G MSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent Control Platform controls Alcatel-Lucent Network Gateways and
Alcatel-Lucent LMRS. Alcatel-Lucent uses a flexible and scalable carrier-class media
gateway. The Alcatel-Lucent LNG provides open, standards-based interfaces for
softswitch control.
The Alcatel-Lucent LMRS enables tight integration between the components and
provides specialized resources for announcements, tones and conference bridges.
Figure 18-11 Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC within R4 UMTS Network
Role of the 9380 3G MSC

The Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC is the circuit-core network component that provides
circuit switched mobility services. The initial architecture is based on the 3GPP Release 4
architectures in which the control and bearer planes are separated, and is designed to
evolve to the future 3GPP Releases.
Advantages of the 9380 3G MSC

Advantages of the 9380 3G MSC include the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9380 3G MSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reduced Cost
Alcatel-Lucent’s spread-spectrum experience and unrivalled deployment expertise
coupled with a unique portfolio of network tools and technical solutions pioneered by
Bell Labs, enable operators to reduce capital and operating expenditures (CAPEX and
OPEX).
The introduction of UMTS gives operators the opportunity to select new hardware
elements in the UMTS network. This enables operators to introduce solutions that are
designed to give maximum return on investment. The Alcatel-Lucent solution supports
3GPP Release 99, Release 4, Release 5 and beyond with software only upgrades, thus
providing:
• Cost effective, reliable platforms that in the unlikely event of equipment failure
guarantee maximum possible operation with little or no service degradation for end
users.
• Cost-effective ways to integrate enhanced services.
• The extensive use of carrier class, industry standard hardware and the use of open,
flexible interfaces that will enable the fast deployment of new and exciting, revenue
generating services.
Alcatel-Lucent’s 9380 3G MSC has been designed around these principles, offering
maximum investment protection and OPEX reduction.
Reduced Time to Market
Rapid deployment of enhanced services is one of the most critical components in
maximizing revenue. When it comes to being the first to market with new services,
operators need to prevent long lead times for enhanced services development and be able
to customize and differentiate once the services are available.
The Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC’s modular software components are implemented
within a powerful finite state machine environment. The Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC
Server uses a patented Programmable Protocol Language (PPL) software tool set for
software implementation. Using a Graphical User Interface (GUI), Alcatel-Lucent
developers can create or modify state machines by editing standard templates using
graphical technology. State machine flow charts are automatically converted into a state
table configuration that can be downloaded and activated in the switch. Alcatel-Lucent’s
PPL allows service providers to enable differentiating services faster than it is possible on
traditional second generation switching platforms.
Investment Protection
The Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC network elements evolve their functionality as packet
networks evolve to provide a wireless end-to-end VoIP solution. Deployment of
Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSCs in a service provider's network provides investment
protection for providing today's wireless services and also sets the stage for the upcoming
VoIP evolution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9380 3G MSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Scalability
Scalability is one of the most important factors in minimizing initial deployment costs.
The scalability of the Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC allows operators to grow with
subscriber demand (pay as you grow). Increased capacity is realized by adding cards to
the Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC.
Progressive increments of growth are made possible through modular components with
high port density, allowing operators to maintain the most efficient port provisioning
based on subscriber population, while ensuring sufficient capacity at all times.
Standard Interoperability
As wireless networks grow worldwide, it will be extremely important for switch
platforms to support a variety of protocols and interfaces. The Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G
MSC operates with a multitude of control protocols such as Bearer Independent Call
Control (BICC), Session Initiation Protocol (SIP-I), Integrated Services Digital Network
User Part (ISUP), Mobile Application Part (MAP), Radio Access Network Application
Part (RANAP), BSS Application Part (BSSAP), Radio Interface Layer 3 (RIL3) and
transport technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) and Internet Protocol
(IP). Numerous ISUP variants are available within the protocol library, including
adaptations suitable for major North American Region/EMEA/CALA and APAC
networks.
H.248 support allows Lucent’s softswitch-based MSC Server to be able to control media
gateways that comply with the 3GPP standards.
Future proof
As customers build out UMTS networks, they also must consider the evolution of these
networks to 3GPP Release 5 and beyond. The traditional MSC solutions do not easily
support the IMS architecture defined in 3GPP Release 5. Consequently, customers are
seeking solutions that can evolve to IMS. The Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC is designed
to support 3GPP Release 99 networks with softswitch technology that evolves to 3GPP
Release 5 architecture and beyond.
A core network solution must provide a high quality of service to the end customers,
irrespective of packet or circuit domain. The highly successful Internet model is evolved
to provide telecommunications and multimedia services in Release 5. Reuse of core
network elements during evolution from Release 99 through Release 5 minimizes
expenditures and allows upgrades to be made without service interruption.
Flexibility and reliability
The heart of the Alcatel-Lucent 9380 3G MSC Server is the Alcatel-Lucent Network
Controller, on the Alcatel-Lucent Control Platform. This platform provides the flexibility
of a softswitch with the reliability of a more traditional switching architecture using the
knowledge and expertise that made Lucent’s 5ESS the only switch meeting six nines
reliability.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9380 3G MSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use of the 9380 3G MSC in LTE Network
The 9380 3G MSC's role in the LTE Network is to leverage the 3G network for voice,
that is, re-use of the existing Circuit Switch.
User interface
Managed by OMC-CN
All functions of the 9380 3G MSC can be managed via the OMC-CN.

For information on the OMC-CN
For information on the OMC-CN, see “OMC-CN” (p. 22-52).
For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 9380 MSC, see the 3G-MSC/9380
Wireless Call Server Application User Guide: (http://webint.cic.lucent.com/pdfdocs1/
pristore205/448426.pdf).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9380 3G MSC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “3G MSC”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9471 Mobility Management Entity (MME) as used in the
Contents
About the 9471 Mobility Management Entity (MME) 18-52

Advantages 18-53
Hardware 18-54
Software 18-57
About the 9471 Mobility Management Entity (MME)

What is the 9471 MME?
The Alcatel-Lucent 9471 Mobility Management Entity (MME) is the network element that
provides mobility and session control management and authentication for user equipment
(UE).
What does the 9471 MME do?

The 9471 MME performs the signaling and control functions to manage UE access to
network connections, and the assignment of network resources and the management of
the mobility states to support tracking, paging, roaming, and handovers.
The 9471 MME supports the following functions:
• Security procedures: End-user authentication as well as initiation and negotiation of
ciphering and integrity protection algorithms.
• UE-to-network session handling: All the signaling procedures used to set up packet
data context and negotiate associated parameters like QoS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network About the 9471 Mobility Management Entity (MME)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Idle UE location management: The tracking area update process used to enable the
network to join terminals for incoming sessions.
• CMAS handling: Select the appropriate eNodeBs to forward the Alerts notifications.
Manages control plane

The 9471 MME also controls all control plane functions related to subscriber and session
management.
Sets up bearer plane

The 9471 MME also performs the bearer management control functions to establish the
bearer paths that the UE uses.
Gateway selection
The 9471 MME is the key element for gateway selection within the EPC (Serving and
PDN). The 9471 MME also performs signaling and selection of legacy gateways for
handovers for other 2G/3G networks.
Can manage thousands of eNodeBs

The 9471 MME can manage from one to thousands of eNodeB elements, which is one of
the key differences from requirements previously seen on Serving GPRS Support Node
(SGSN) platforms.
Advantages
Advantages
The major advantages of the 9471 MME include the following:
• Platform technology designed for telecommunications companies' call processing
• High capacity, highly scalable architecture optimized for flexibility and scalability
• Inhouse design and manufacturing which maximizes performance, lifecycle, and
sparing, since the platform is common across multiple products
• The 9471 MME uses mature, field proven hardware and software assets, which makes
for carrier grade functionality and reliability
• Independent and seamless scaling of signaling and bearer throughput
• Advanced paging techniques to minimize user equipment location attempts and
reduce power usage
• PCMD: sophisticated analysis tools to optimize cell and device performance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware
The Alcatel-Lucent 9471 MME is built on the Alcatel-Lucent 5400 Linux Control
Platform (LCP). The 5400 LCP is an Advanced Telecommunications Computing
Architecture (ATCA) based platform and is a common platform for many other
Alcatel-Lucent products, such as the 5450 IMS Session Manager/Application server and
the 5780 DSC which is the PCRF in the EPC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-12 Hardware for the 9471 MME
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware configuration
The following figure shows the hardware configuration of the 9471 MME.
Figure 18-13 Hardware configuration of the 9471 MME
The 9471 MME contains the following blades (in left to right order):
• 1 pair of OAM Server blades, to provide provisioning, shelf management, and
software administration
• 1 pair of MME Interface Function (MIF) blades, to provide control functionality and
load balancing
• 1 pair of MME Application Function (MAF) blades, to handle mobility and the SGW
interface application and HSS queries and responses
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• 1 pair of Ethernet Hubs, to provide the switching function
• 1 pair of Shelf Management Controller (ShMC) blades, to provide shelf management
functions
Software
The Alcatel-Lucent 9471 MME software architecture consists of three functional blocks:
• MPH – The MME Packet Handling Function. This function provides the interface to
the external entities (eNodeB, SGW, HSS, another MME, SGSN) over SCTP, UDP.
This function also provides the IPsec function for MME interfaces.
• MIF - The MME Interface Function. This function provides Load Balance and
Interface Service including paging broadcast, link management, and load balancing of
UE attaches across MME application service boards.
• MAF - The MME Application Function. This function provides the MME
functionality: Mobility, SGW interface application handling. This function also
handles the query/responses to HSS at the protocol level - S1-MME, S6a, S11, S10,
S13 and SBc.

The 9471 MME has the following interfaces to other network elements:
• S1-MME (eNB) (subset = NAS to UE)
• S10 (MME)
• S11 (SGW)
• S6a (HSS)
• Gn (pre-rel8 SGSN)
• SGs (3GPP Rel8 MSC)
• x1 MME to LIG Admin Function
• x2 MME to LIG Mediation Function
• S3 interface to Rel8 SGSN
• S13 interface to EIR (Equipment Identity Register)
In LM4.0, the 9471 MME adds the following interfaces:
• SBc between the MME and the BMC for CMAS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-14 9471 MME connections to other network elements
User interfaces
User interfaces
The 9471 MME is supported by the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager (5620
SAM), a single management platform that provides common OA&M across the entire
Alcatel-Lucent LTE EPC including the SGW, PGW, and PCRF.
From the SAM GUI client, you can perform configuration management for the 9471
MME by launching and using the MI-Agent GUI and the MME Provisioning GUI.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For a list of recommended documentation on theAlcatel-Lucent 9471 MME, see Table
B-6, “Documentation Library for ePC – 9471 MME” (p. B-16) .
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9471 MME. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “9471 MME”.
(p. B-24).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9471 Wireless Mobility Manager (9471 WMM)
as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the 9471 WMM 18-60

How it works 18-61
Advantages of the 9471 WMM 18-61
Hardware 18-61
Changes in the 9471 WMM to support LTE 18-63
About the 9471 WMM

9471 Wireless Mobility Manager (WMM)
The 9471 Wireless Mobility Manager (9471 WMM) is a network element that functions as
a scalable, high-performance Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) within the
Alternate: 7500 SGSN

The 7500 SGSN also can be used as the SGSN within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution. For more information on the 7500 SGSN, see the “7500 SGSN”
(p. 18-20).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
Role of the 9471 WMM
The 9471 WMM when used as an SGSN supervises the mobility events in a Packet Core
and provides the following functions:
• Mobility management
• Session management
• Packet relaying, transfer and routing of user packets
• Legacy 2G/3G and IP Radio Access interfaces
• Security and access control
• Management of subscription data
• Packet Core Operations and Maintenance
Advantages of the 9471 WMM

Future merging with the 9471 MME
The 9471 WMM will, in a future release, be able to support combined SGSN/MME
functionality in the same system. This combined functionality will enable service
providers to converge their existing GSM/W-CDMA GRPS packet core and LTE EPC.
This convergence will simplify the network design and reduce cost.
Hardware
ATCA platform
The Alcatel-Lucent 9471 WMM is built on the Alcatel-Lucent 5400 Linux Control
Platform (LCP). The 5400 LCP is an Advanced Telecommunications Computing
Architecture (ATCA) based platform and is a common platform for many other
Alcatel-Lucent products, such as the 5780 DSC. The 5400 LCP is shown in Figure 18-12,
“Hardware for the 9471 MME” (p. 18-55).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Core Network Connections to other network elements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The 9471 WMM (labelled as SGSN in the diagram below) has the following interfaces to
other network elements:
• Gn/Gp (to the GGSN and PDN GW)
• S4 (to the SGW)
• S10 (MME)
• S6a (HSS)
• Gn S3 (pre-rel8 to the MME)
• S3 interface (Rel8 to the MME)
• Iu ps (to the RNC)
Figure 18-15 9471 WMM interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User interfaces
User interfaces
The 9471 WMM is supported by the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager (5620
SAM), a single management platform that provides common OA&M across the entire
Alcatel-Lucent LTE EPC including the MME, SGW, PGW, and PCRF.
Changes in the 9471 WMM to support LTE

No changes
No changes are required on the 9471 WMM to support LTE interworking because the
LTE EPC provides the 3GPP pre-release 8 Gn/Gp control and user interfaces.

For information
For a detailed description of the 9471 WMM go to the following site:
(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/wps/portal/Products)
For information on the 5620 SAM

For information on the 5620 SAM, see “5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM)” (p. 22-20),
For documentation
For documentation on the 9471 WMM go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
(OLCS) Product Index (https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/portal/productIndex.do?path=
Documentation) and search for “9471 WMM”.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9471 WMM. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “9471 WMM”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
HSGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HSGW
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent
Contents
About the HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW) 18-64

Hardware 18-65
Software 18-65
About the HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW)

What is the HSGW?
The HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW) is a network element that functions as a gateway to
support 3GPP to 3GPP2 (that is, LTE to eHRPD) interworking.
What is eHRPD?
evolved High Rate Packet Data (eHRPD) is an application that integrates existing
1xEV-DO wireless networks with LTE wireless networks, using the HRPD Serving
Gateway (HSGW).
For more information on eHRPD, see “About the HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW) ”
(p. 18-64).
What does the HSGW do?

The HRPD Serving Gateway provides the binding between the HRPD interfaces
(A10/A11+) and the PGW (PMIPv6).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
HSGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware
Hardware
For a description of the HSGW hardware, see the HSGW vendor documentation.
Software
Software
For a description of the HSGW software, see the HSGW vendor documentation.

Table 18-3 HSGW Interconnections

A10/A11 To the eHRPD User (A11) and control (A10)
traffic
H1/H2 To other HSGWs User and control traffic
S2a To the PGW Control and mobility support
to the bearer plane
Gxa To the PCRF Signalling interface for the
transfer of policy control
information (QoS)
S103 To the SGW Bearer plane interface
forwards DL data that
minimizes packet losses
during mobility
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
HSGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User interfaces
User interfaces
For information on the user interfaces for the HSGW consult the vendor documentation.

For further information on the HSGW consult the vendor documentation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
19 19
Radio/core (hybrid)
network elements
Overview
Purpose
This chapter is for network elements that combine the functions of several of the
component areas and thus are called “hybrid” network elements. The hybrid status of
these network elements is indicated by their dual colors (mixed green and blue-green) in
What is a hybrid network element?

A hyhrid network element is an older network element that fills two functions: for
example, both Radio Access Network and Core Network functions. The reason we have
this “radio/Core” classification is a combining of functions differently in older
technologies. LTE makes a clean break between eNodeB and Core. and has strict
mapping and clear delineation of roles. LTE also splits up the RNC between NEs and the
MME and then gets rid of the RNC. But in older technology the functions of the Core and
functions of the eUTRAN are combined in various NEs. So these NEs have the box that
is half radio and half core, and half green and half blue-green, to show network elements
where the functionality is divided up differently in older technologies.
Changes made by LTE in network element functions

LTE makes a clean break between the eNodeB (Radio Access Network) and the evolved
Packet Core (Core Network). The LTE designers made a strict mapping of the functions
of the eNodeB and the EPC and a clear delineation of the roles of each. Also, the LTE
designers split the functions of the Radio Network Controller (RNC) between other
network elements and then removed the RNC from the LTE network. Thus the 9271
eRNC is defined as a hybrid network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Radio/core (hybrid) network elements Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Why are there hybrid network elements?
Hyhrid network elements exist because older network architectures still use a Radio
Network Controller (RNC) network element. Also, these older network architectures have
network elements that fill both Radio Access Network and Core Network functions.

Hybrid network elements are standard Alcatel-Lucent NEs that are used in connecting the
LTE network with other networks. These network elements also used in other
Alcatel-Lucent networks and products.
Contents
9271 eRNC 19-3

About the 9271 Evolved Radio Network Controller (eRNC) 19-3
How it works 19-4
Hardware 19-4
Software 19-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Radio/core (hybrid) network elements Overview
9271 eRNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9271 eRNC
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9271 evolved Radio Network Controller
(eRNC) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the 9271 Evolved Radio Network Controller (eRNC) 19-3

How it works 19-4
Hardware 19-4
Software 19-5
About the 9271 Evolved Radio Network Controller (eRNC)

What is the 9271 eRNC?
The Alcatel-Lucent 9271 evolved Radio Network Controller (eRNC) is a network element
that supports access to the LTE network from an existing EV-DO network. The 9271
eRNC is a software enhancement of the existing 9271 DO-RNC. The 9271 DO RNC also
provides a wireless interface into the Packet Data Service Network (PDSN).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Radio/core (hybrid) network elements How it works
9271 eRNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
What does the 9271 eRNC do?
The eRNC adds to the basic 9271 EV-DO RNC functionality the ability to select the
HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW) for the network interface. The eRNC also supports
LTE-to-HRPD handover. The LTE-to-HRPD handover is done via a new interface from
the eRNC to the MME, called the S101.
Hardware
Supported frame types
The Alcatel-Lucent 9271 eRNC is available on the following frame types:
• Alcatel-Lucent Release 1 Satellite Ready (R1SR) frame
• Alcatel-Lucent Universal Network Cabinet (UNC)
• Alcatel-Lucent Advanced Telecom Computing Architecture (ATCA) frame
The 9271 eRNC hardware is identical to the 9271 RNC hardware for all frame types.
Server components
Each 410S drawer in the diagram represents a 9271 eRNC server. Each 9271 EV-DO
RNC server contains:
• Application processors (APs), to perform Overhead Channel Management, signaling
processing, and OAM&P control functions
• Traffic processors (TPs), to perform bearer functions
• A disk for persistent storage of configuration data
• Alarm card, to monitor the health of the cards within the drawer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Radio/core (hybrid) network elements Software
9271 eRNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
The 9271 eRNC contains its own set of System Management services, Call Control
functions, and Traffic Plane functions.
These functions include:
• Session establishment and release
Performed by a functional entity called:
– Overhead Manager (OHM)
• Frame selection and Radio Link Protocol (RLP) processing
Performed by functional entities called:
– Selector Function Main (SFM)
– RLP and Signaling Manager (RSM)
These are collectively referred to as 9271 EV-DO RNC functions.
The 9271 EV-DO RNC also provides signaling and traffic processing control for each
session.
The basic eRNC functionality is a SW feature (FID 39111.10) on the RNC.
Non-optimized LTE to eHRPD handoff is supported, but it is not functionally provided by
the eRNC. Non-optimized handoff is supported by the PDN Gateway and the HSGW.
Note: FID 39111.10 is controlled by a license.

Table 19-1 9271 eRNC connections to other network elements

A10/11 to HSGW The A10 interface provides
the bearer path between the
EVDO RAN and the core
network.
The A11 interface provides
the control interface between
the EVDO RAN and the core
network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Radio/core (hybrid) network elements Connections to other network elements
9271 eRNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 19-1 9271 eRNC connections to other network elements (continued)

S101 to MME Supports the LTE to HRPD
Handover.
Note that for LE4.0 the S101
interface has not yet been
developed.
User interfaces
User interfaces
Just like the existing 9271 DO RNC, the 9271 eRNC is managed through the OMC-RAN.
The 9271 eRNC also uses the 9256 Operations and Management Platform for OAM&P
purposes.
The LMT user interface terminal can also be used for the 9271 eRNC.

For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 9271 eRNC, see Table
B-13, “Documentation Library for CDMA – eBTS, eRNC ” (p. B-22).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9271 eRNC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “EV-DO RNC”.
For a list of recommended classes, see also the “Recommended classes for 1xEV-DO”
(p. B-25).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
20 20
the Common Core
Network
Overview
Purpose
The topics on this chapter describe network elements that fill the role of the LTE-defined
common core network elements in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
What is the common core?

The Common Core is a set of network elements that perform functions common to both
LTE and IMS core, including HSS, and Offline Charging systems (OFCS) and Online
Charging systems (OCS).

The network elements described in this chapter are standard ALU NEs that are used in
connecting the stand-alone LTE Solution with other networks. Thus the network elements
described in this chapter are not LTE network elements per se but are also used in other
Alcatel-Lucent networks and products.
Contents
1357 LIG 20-3

About the 1357 LIG 20-3
Advantages of the 1357 LIG 20-4
Hardware 20-4
Software 20-4
Changes in the 1357 LIG to support LTE 20-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Common Core Network Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8610 ICC (OCS) 20-7

About 8810 ICC 20-7
Connection to the network 20-9
8615 IeCCF (OFCS) 20-10
About the 8615 IeCCF 20-10
8650 SDM HSS 20-13
The 8650 SDM HSS 20-13
How it works 20-14
Advantages of the 8650 SDM HSS 20-14
Hardware 20-15
Software 20-17
VitalQIP ENUM/DNS 20-19
About the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS 20-19
Changes in the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS to support LTE 20-22
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
1357 LIG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1357 LIG
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 1357 Lawful Interception Gateway (1357 LIG) network
element as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the 1357 LIG 20-3

Advantages of the 1357 LIG 20-4
Hardware 20-4
Software 20-4
Changes in the 1357 LIG to support LTE 20-6
About the 1357 LIG

What is the 1357 LIG?
The 1357 Lawful Interception Gateway (LIG) is the network element that provides the
mediation function within the Alcatel-Lucent complete lawful interception solution, the
1357 ULIS.
For more on the 1357 ULIS

For an explanation of the mediation function and an overview of the complete 1357 ULIS
solution, see Chapter 12, “Government-mandated services”.
Multiple 1357 LIGs

Multiple LIGs may be needed per network, depending on size and traffic constraints in
the network to be intercepted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Common Core Network Advantages of the 1357 LIG
1357 LIG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 1357 LIG

Centralized solution
The 1357 ULIS (of which the 1357 LIG is a part) provides a centralized solution for all of
a service provider's lawful interception needs. This centralized management can be used
for multivendor mediation functions and can allow a network operator or a Law
Enforcement Agency (LEA) to centralize lawful interception management.
Other advantages of the 1357 ULIS are listed in “Advantages of the 1357 ULIS”
(p. 12-5).
Hardware
HP ProLiant DL380
The 1357 LIG runs on a generic platform HP ProLiant DL380.
Two configurations
Two configurations are available:
• The normal configuration, which is 230V AC powered
• A Network Equipment Building System (NEBS)-compliant configuration, which is
48V DC powered and is equipped with a NEBS kit
Software
Common software architecture
The 1357 ULIS applications share a common software architecture that has optimized
flexibility and modularity to quickly introduce new “HIx” interface standards and
associated protocols.
Lawful Interception platform

The 1357 ULIS applications run on top of a Lawful Interception platform that is
composed of:
• 1357 customized Linux Redhat enterprise distribution
• WALI (Web Applications for Lawful Interception) that is the Alcatel-Lucent LI
product middleware
• a database framework
• installation and maintenance services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Common Core Network Software
1357 LIG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• pre-hardening and HA services
• server configuration services based on XML

Handover Interface 3 (HI 3)
The Handover Interface 3 (HI3) interface is used by the 1357 LIG to transmit the
intercepted call content to the Law Enforcement Monitoring Facility (LEMF). For LTE
HI3 is defined according to 3GPP 33108, as ASN1 encoding over TCP or UDP.

The 1357 LIG uses the following interfaces:
• HI 1 — the provisioning interface. The HI 1 interface can be local to the 1357 LIG
using the GUI or direct from the LEA to the 1357 LIG using an electronic interface.
• HI 2 — the interface that is used to provide IRI to the LEA
• HI 3 — the interface that is used to provide content to the LEA.
• X1 — the target marking interface from the 1357 to the NE. This is a proprietary
interface.
• X2 — used by the NE to provide information related to the call to the 1357 LIG. This
is a proprietary interface.
• X3 — used by the NE to provide content of communication to the 1357 LIG. This is a
proprietary interface.
User interfaces
1357 IMC
The 1357 LIG is managed by the 1357 IMC.
1357 ULIS Graphical User Interface

A graphical user interface called the 1357 ULIS Graphical User Interface exists on the
1357 LIG and is used for system administration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Common Core Network Changes in the 1357 LIG to support LTE
1357 LIG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes in the 1357 LIG to support LTE

Minor changes
Minor change were done to the LIG-PS to support 4G nodes.

For details on the hardware
For detailed specifications on the HP ProLiant DL380 hardware, see the following link:
(http://h18004.www1.hp.com/products/quickspecs/13234_div/13234_div.html).
For information on the 1357 IMC

For information on the 1357 IMC, see “1357 IMC” (p. 22-16).
How to access customer documentation

For instructions on how to access customer documentation at OLCS, see “Accessing and
Training on the 1357 ULIS

Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 1357 ULIS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url: https://training alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/
Web/Main and search on the keyword “1357 ULIS”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
8610 ICC (OCS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8610 ICC (OCS)
Overview
Purpose
This section describes 8610 ICC as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About 8810 ICC 20-7

Connection to the network 20-9
About 8810 ICC

What is 8610 ICC?
The Instant Convergent Charging Suite (8610 ICC) enables flexible and configurable
centralized real-time rating, charging and mediation for multiple networks and services.
8610 ICC allows operators to simultaneously offer prepaid, postpaid and hybrid rating
and charging for voice, data, video and content and commerce services.
8610 ICC allows users to manage and personalize their connected experience with
real-time dashboards and smart charging plans, With 8610 ICC, users can access their
personal dashboard anytime, anywhere on any device. They can proactively choose the
best price plan for their current needs and upgrade to a larger data bucket or new price
plan as needed.
8610 ICC provides an open suite of payment capabilities including a “design-tree” GUI,
centralized product catalog and community rating features. 8610 ICC empowers operators
to offer innovative, flexible, content-specific charging models, providing easy and
immediate payment options. 8610 ICC also enables cost controls for prepaid and postpaid
subscribers to help operators reduce bad debt. It also allows service providers to define
customized loyalty programs in order to reduce churn and increase average revenue per
user.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Common Core Network About 8810 ICC
8610 ICC (OCS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Role of 8610 ICC
8610 ICC offers:
• A convergent solution with a real-time rating engine for prepaid, postpaid and hybrid
accounts supporting multiple networks, including CDMA, GSM, GPRS, UMTS, LTE,
IMS and Wireline
• Rating and charging service packages for voice (circuit and VoIP), data, video packet,
session, events, content, SMS, MMS, and eCommerce
• A full mobile virtual network operator (MVNO) and mobile virtual network enabler
(MVNE) support
• A proven solution, deployed in over 200 service providers with an estimated 400
million subscribers
• A high scalable solution to support the smallest to largest of networks with high
availability
• A zone-based discount charging option to promote attractive tariff package based on
the location of the subscriber and key zones, such as, home zones, office zones,
campus and yield zone
Advantages of 8610 ICC

Advantages of 8610 ICC are as follows:
• An intuitive interface and easy-to-use configuration tools with the pricing center
capability allow service providers to rapidly launch and manage innovative new
service packages with attractive tariff plans
• Flexibility to mix and match offers, service programs, discounts and bonus strategies
to uniquely service individual market segments in order to reduce churn with
advanced real-time loyalty
• Capability to give end users the ability to control spending in real-time and keep their
budget under control
• Deployment acceleration with a set of open APIs to smoothly integrate with any
billing and customer-management system, as well as external applications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Common Core Network Connection to the network
8610 ICC (OCS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connection to the network

Connection to other network elements
The following figure shows how the 8610 ICC is connected to the LTE network elements:
Figure 20-1 8610 ICC connections to the LTE network elements

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 8610 ICC, see Alcatel-Lucent 8610 ICC
Product Description.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 8610 ICC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “8610 ICC”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
8615 IeCCF (OFCS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8615 IeCCF (OFCS)
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 8615 Instant Enhanced Charging Collection
Function (IeCCF) for Offline Charging Systems (OFCS) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent
Contents
About the 8615 IeCCF 20-10

About the 8615 IeCCF

What is the 8615 IeCCF?
The Alcatel-Lucent 8615 Instant enhanced Charging Collection Function (IeCCF), a key
product within the Converged Payment solution, enables offline charging for multiple
applications in IMS, LTE and WiMax networks. The system supports CDR generation,
aggregation and correlation and readily integrates with real-time rating and charging
solutions and billing systems.
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution the 8615 IeCCF supports Offline
Charging Systems (OFCS), in close cooperation with the S-GW and the P-GW.
Role of the 8615 IeCCF (OFCS)

The 8615 IeCCF is a mandatory building block for IMS/LTE/UMTS/WiMAX Offline
charging. In contrast to legacy networks, where each node may generate their own CDRs,
in IMS core there is no tracking of the network resource usage without IeCCF. It retrieves
Offline events, collects charging information from access network, IMS core and
application nodes, correlates these events, and transfers them to the convergent billing
system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Common Core Network About the 8615 IeCCF
8615 IeCCF (OFCS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 8615 IeCCF
The 8615 IeCCF provides the following advantages:
• Fully integrated and tested with each LTE E2E solution release
• Complement to 8610 ICC charging
• Flexible, configurable to customer needs
• Globally deployed, extensive customer base
• Supports LTE, IMS and legacy elements
Use of the 8615 IeCCF in LTE

The IeCCF acts as a CCF collecting accounting information from the SGW and PGW
nodes via the Diameter based Rf interface. The IeCCF can also interface to these nodes
using the GTP’ based Ga interface in which case the CDF (Charging Data Function) is
integrated with the network nodes.
Use of the 8615 IeCCF in IMS

The IP Multimedia Core Network Subsystem (IMS) has introduced new convergence
network elements based on IP based signaling protocols and bearer connections. The goal
is to create a harmonized wireless and wireline IP based control network for
telecommunications.
The new nodes include the following:
• Proxy-Call Session Control Function (P-CSCF)
• Interrogating-CSCF (I-CSCF)
• Serving-CSCF (S-CSCF)
• Media Gateway Control Function (MGCF)
• Breakout Gateway Control Function (BGCF)
• Media Resource Function Controller (MRFC)
• external Application Servers (ASs)
These nodes use the SIP call control protocol for signaling and are described in detail in
both 3GPP and 3GPP2 standards. Each network element generates charging information.
To perform charging functions in the converged IMS network, each new element has a
defined interface to a new node called the Instant Enhanced Charging Collection Function
(IeCCF).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Common Core Network For further information
8615 IeCCF (OFCS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 8615 IeCCF, see 8615 Instant Enhanced
Charging Collection Function (IeCCF) 28.0 Operations, Administration, and
Maintenance, 270-725-058R28.0.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 8615 IeCCF. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “8615 IeCCF”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
8650 SDM HSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8650 SDM HSS
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 8650 Subscriber Data Manager (SDM) HSS as used in the
Contents
The 8650 SDM HSS 20-13

How it works 20-14
Advantages of the 8650 SDM HSS 20-14
Hardware 20-15
Software 20-17
The 8650 SDM HSS

What is the 8650 SDM HSS?
The 8650 Subscriber Data Manager (SDM) HSS is a powerful and versatile database
management platform. The 8650 SDM HSS is a required part of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution because of the capabilities of the 8650 SDM HSS to support
application enablement and data mining.
What is the HSS?

The Home Subscriber Server (HSS) is a master user database that supports the network
entities that handle the network connections. The HSS contains subscription-related
information about each user, which is also called a user profile.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Common Core Network How it works
8650 SDM HSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How it works
What does the 8650 SDM HSS do?
The 8650 SDM HSS performs the following functions:
• Maintains the unique service profile (user profiles) for each end user including 2G/3G
(HLR), LTE and IMS service data
• Provides all standardized subscription related data needed to setup multimedia
sessions.
• Performs authentication and authorization of the user.
• Provides information about the user's physical location.
• Supports authentication at LTE registration and at IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)
registration.
• Using the S6a interface, enables the transfer of subscription and authentication data to
the MME for verifying and allowing user access to the EPC.
Advantages of the 8650 SDM HSS

Distributed architecture
The unique distributed architecture of the 8650 SDM HSS differentiates the 8650 SDM
HSS from other market offerings. With the 8650 SDM HSS, front ends and/or back ends
can be easily added depending on traffic patterns and database growth.
Central to application enablement

The 8650 SDM HSS is a central part of Alcatel-Lucent's application enablement strategy.
The 8650 SDM has the ability to drive new applications and also provides the information
and capability that can give service providers ways of making money from their extensive
collection of information about subscriber usage patterns and preferences.
Benefits
The 8650 SDM HSS also provides the following benefits:
• Easily scales to support the smallest to largest of networks.
• Evolves networks toward All-IP (HSS, WiMAX, and SIGTRAN) while preserving
initial investment and integration costs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Common Core Network Hardware
8650 SDM HSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware
The 8650 SDM HSS is an Advanced Telecommunications Computing Architecture
(ATCA) based platform.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
8650 SDM HSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 20-2 Hardware for the 8650 SDM HSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
8650 SDM HSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
Applications suite
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the 8650 SDM supports in a single
network element all the following applications:
• HLR (for GSM/W-CDMA networks)
• LTE-HSS (for LTE network)
• IM-HSS (for IMS network
• MNP (Mobile Number Portability)
• EIR (Equipment Identity Register)
LDAP interface
The 8650 SDM also provides LDAP interface for storage of 3rd party application's data,
such as AAA, PCRF, or any other application.
Support of AAA server

Another major application on the 8650 SDM HSS supports an interface with the 8950
AAA server over LDAP for 3GPP2 access.

The 8650 SDM HSS uses the S6a interface to connect to the 9471 MME and, through the
9471 MME, to the other network elements within the EPC.
The 8650 SDM HSS also supports other interfaces:
• Cx/Sh interfaces towards IMS Core equipment (I/S-CSCF, TAS/MMTEL
• MAP Interfaces to 2G/3G Core network
• SWx interface towards the AAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Common Core Network User interfaces
8650 SDM HSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User interfaces
Managed by 1360 COM or 1300 XMC
The 8650 SDM HSS and the applications on the 8650 SM HSS are managed via the 1360
COM or the 1300 XMC.
For information on 1360 COM, see .“1360 COM” (p. 22-6)
For information on 1300 XMC, see “1300 XMC” (p. 22-10).

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 8650 SDM HSS, see Alcatel-Lucent 8650
SDM Product Description.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 8650 SDM HSS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “8650 SDM HSS”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS product as used in the Alcatel-Lucent
Contents
About the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS 20-19

Changes in the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS to support LTE 20-22
About the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS

What is the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS?
VitalQIP is an IP address management system used by over 800 customers worldwide,
including several service providers. In brief, it maintains an inventory of allocated IP
addresses and address ranges, as well as associated networks, subnets, and domains
(www.example.com, etc.) in a database. VitalQIP generates configuration and data files
from this database, and distributes them to downstream DNS (and DHCP) servers.
Additionally, VitalQIP provides many related functions, including data validation checks,
automation aids, templates, threshold warnings, permission-based administrative roles,
audit trails, and reports.
The VitalQIP ENUM Manager Module is a module available for VitalQIP, and is used by
several service providers worldwide. The primary purpose of ENUM Manager is to
support the administration of ENUM domains (for example, 1.e164.arpa) and the Naming
Authority Pointer (NAPTR) records in them. Usually for a subscriber there are one or
more NAPTR records.
Role of the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS

Key Aspects of VitalQIP Technology include the following:
• Innovative Profiling Capabilities
• Flexible Subnet Management
• Customizable User Interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Common Core Network About the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Ability to Change DNS Options on Multiple Domains Simultaneously
• VitalQIP software continues its market-leading support of Microsoft Windows
DNS/DHCP servers with support of sites, subnets, and secure zones in Active
Directory
• VitalQIP supports BIND-compliant DNS servers. The Alcatel-Lucent DHCP Server
can update both primary and secondary DNS servers with resource record information
as DHCP leases are granted and deleted
• End-to-end Feature Rich VitalQIP Appliance Solution. In the Appliance, VitalQIP
software is pre-installed on Alcatel-Lucent hardware, and this combination is
delivered as a unit.
• Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Module provides visibility into the
network services engines running your DNS and DHCP protocols and helps you
maximize the overall uptime performance of these services
• ENUM Manager provides the ability to administrate ENUM records in the VitalQIP®
database and manage and update Alcatel-Lucent DNS servers
Advantages of the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS

Advantages of the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS include:
• Reduce infrastructure support costs - less support staff
• Reduce address assignment process and departmental costs
• Reduce disaster recovery time and cost
• Improve the availability of network infrastructure
• Reduce operator effort and misconfigurations
• Reduce troubleshooting time and support costs due to inaccurate configuration
• Improve overall network operational efficiencies
• Maintain consistent and accurate IP inventory
• Control operating expenses through automation
• Provide high availability for clients/subscribers
• VitalQIP is performance proven in the most demanding networks
• Rapidly provision address space and reliably deliver critical IP name and service In
step with new technology and services: VoIP, ENUM, RFID, IPv6, Mobile HSD and
IP Video, etc.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Common Core Network About the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use of the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS in IMS
DNS translates URLs and domain names into IP addresses.
In IMS, DNS is used to resolve the following IP addresses:
• IP addresses of IMS network elements for communication between IMS network
elements
• IP addresses of servers that are requested by users
IMS network elements rely on the DNS to find each other. For example, a P-CSCF
receives messages that contain domain names for further routing to a S-CSCF. The
domain name cannot be used to route a message, so a DNS query must be performed to
find the IP address that is related to the domain name.
This type of DNS is performed by on-board Alcatel-Lucent CP functionality and is only
used internally in the IMS core network. Once a translation from domain name to IP
address is performed, the translation is stored in on-board cache memory. On-board
storage reduces the number of queries that are needed and speeds up processing.
IMS subscribers that use the Internet rely on the DNS to translate the URL into IP
addresses, to find the servers that are offering services and applications. This type of DNS
uses external DNS servers. DNS servers are common resources and are used by many
applications and services.
In IMS, the VitalQIP ENUM manager supports the administration of ENUM domains (for
example, 1.e164.arpa.) and the Naming Authority Pointer (NAPTR) records in the ENUM
domains. Usually for a subscriber there are one or more NAPTR records. A NAPTR
record maps an E.164 number (basically, a phone number) to a URI. For example, a
NAPTR record maps an E.164 number to a URI for an I-CSCF that’s used to reach a
subscriber’s home network, and during call or session setup a SIP Invite message is sent
to this I-CSCF.
In the ENUM Manager GUI, an administrator can split and merge ENUM domains to
manage the size of ENUM zone files that are used in DNS servers. The GUI also allows
an administrator to create, update, delete, and search the NAPTR records.
Additionally, the VitalQIP ENUM supports an electronic interface for upstream
provisioning systems to create, update, delete, and search NAPTR records in the VitalQIP
ENUM. The NAPTR records are stored in the ENUM database, which is shared with
VitalQIP. VitalQIP accesses this database, and uses the data in it to update DNS servers,
either through zone file pushes or in near-real time with Dynamic DNS Updates.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used in the Common Core Network Changes in the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS to support LTE
VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes in the VitalQIP ENUM/DNS to support LTE

VitalQIP ENUM/DNS in LTE
The VitalQIP ENUM/DNS product itself doesn't change. In IMS, DNS is used to resolve
the IP addresses of IMS network elements for communication between IMS network
elements - this still basically applies, except now it's for LTE network elements instead of
IMS network elements. However, the purpose of the NAPTR records change. They are no
longer associated with subscribers. Instead, as per 3GPP specifications like TS 29.303 on
DNS procedures in LTE networks, LTE network elements use NAPTR records to find
other network elements that are topologically close by matching the maximum number of
labels in domain name suffixes.
The recommended DNS solution is to use separate DNS servers for:
• Public DNS (end user’s Internet access),
• IMS ENUM server,
• IMS ENUM server Network DNS (APN, TAI, GUTI resolution).
VitalQIP can be used to provide Public DNS and ENUM functions. An Open source such
as Bind 9 server is recommended to provide Network DNS functions.

For documentation
For details on VitalQIP DNS/DHCP and IP, refer to: System Planning in VitalQIP
Administrator Reference Manual, 190-409-042.
For details on the VitalQIP ENUM, refer to: VitalQIP Add-On ENUM Manager - User's
Guide, 190-409-067.
How to access IMS documentation

For instructions on how to access IMS documentation, see “Accessing and navigating
IMS documentation on the OLCS web site” (p. B-11).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the VitalQIP. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “VitalQIP”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
21 21
Network elements used
for IMS
Overview
Purpose
• The IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) platform and Alcatel-Lucent's IMS product
• The IMS functions used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
• The network elements used to support IMS in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution
Contents
About IMS 21-4

What is IMS? 21-4
What does IMS do? 21-5
The Alcatel-Lucent IMS Solution 21-6
IMS functions implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution 21-7
5060 MGC-8 21-9
About the 5060 MGC-8 21-9
5100 CMS 21-11
About the 5100 Converged Messaging System 21-11
Changes in the 5100 CMS to support LTE 21-12
5110 SMSC 21-13
About the 5110 SMSC 21-13
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5140 BMC 21-16

About the 5140 BMC 21-16
Hardware 21-18
Changes in the 5140 BMC to support LTE 21-18
5410 PS/XDMS 21-20
About the 5410 PS/XDMS 21-20
Changes in the 5410 PS/XDMS to support LTE 21-21
5420 CTS 21-23
The 5420 CTS 21-23
Changes in the 5420 CTS to support LTE 21-24
5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF) 21-26
About the 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF) 21-26
Providing Call Session Control Function (CSCF) functions 21-27
5900 MRF 21-30
The 5900 MRF 21-30
Changes in the 5900 MRF to support LTE 21-31
7510 MGW 21-33
Type of LTE/IMS function 21-34
Advantages of the 7510 MGW 21-35
Hardware 21-35
Software 21-38
Changes in the 7510 MGW to support LTE 21-41
7520 MGW 21-42
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 7520 MGW 21-42

Hardware 21-43
Software 21-44
8950 AAA 21-45
About the 8950 AAA 21-45
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
About IMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About IMS
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) platform in general and
Alcatel-Lucent's IMS Solution.
Note that although the master diagram subdivides IMS into three categories (access
gateway, session control and applications), all of the IMS network elements are covered
here in this one chapter,
Contents
What is IMS? 21-4

What does IMS do? 21-5
The Alcatel-Lucent IMS Solution 21-6
IMS functions implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution 21-7
What is IMS?
What is IMS?
multimedia “Internet-like” services to end-users. The IMS platform provides a common
set of functions and procedures for session control, bearer control, policy, and charging.
When these functions and procedures are used by an application the application is said to
be IMS-enabled.
Developed separately from LTE

IMS was developed separately, before LTE, and is currently used in 3GPP-based wireline
and wireless networks throughout the world.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS What is IMS?
About IMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Specifications
The 3GPP and Telecoms and TISPAN Next Generation Networking (NGN) architecture
specifications for IMS are documented in the following standards:
• 3GPP TS 23.002 – Network architecture
• 3GPP TS 23.228 – IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS), Stage 2
• 3GPP TS 24.229 – IP Multimedia Call Control Protocol based on SIP and SDP; Stage
3
• European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) ES 282 001 – TISPAN
NGN Functional Architecture
• ETSI ES 282 007 – TISPAN IMS Functional Architecture
What does IMS do?

Role of IMS
IMS provides communication services such as video communications, Instant Messaging,
and Voice over IP (VoIP).
Support for other applications

IMS provides the UE user the ability to simultaneously support web browsing, File
Transfer Protocol (FTP), streaming video, and other data applications.
Key supported applications include:
• IMS Applications, such as VoIP and Video Telephony
• Non-IMS Applications. for example, as Streaming Video, Transmission Control
Protocol / Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Applications, Web browsing, FTP, and
Corporate IP Security (IPsec) Virtual Private Network (VPN)
Functions supported in the Solution

For an explanation of the main functions IMS supports in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution, see “IMS functions implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution” (p. 21-7).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS The Alcatel-Lucent IMS Solution
About IMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent IMS Solution

Alcatel-Lucent IMS
Alcatel-Lucent has an IMS Solution that can be deployed to complement the LTE offer.
The EPS (LTE) provides a bearer path of a certain Quality of Service (QoS). Control of
multimedia applications such as VoIP is provided by the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS).
IMS and VoIP functionality can be introduced together with other high-value applications
to support voice and data service.
Call scenarios
Call scenarios supported by the Alcatel-Lucent IMS include the following:
• Voice over IP (VoIP) calls from UE to UE. The calls can use the same or different
codecs.
• SMS
• PSTN access, including
– UE to Landline
– Landline to UE
Technical description document

For a detailed description the Alcatel-Lucent IMS Solution, see Alcatel-Lucent IP
Multimedia Subsystem Solution Technical Description, 275-100-000.
For information on how to access IMS documentation

For information on how to access IMS documentation, see “Accessing and navigating
For training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on IMS. For a listing of these classes, go to Alcatel-Lucent
University at the following url: https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and
search on the keyword “IMS”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS IMS functions implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
About IMS End-to-End Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IMS functions implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE

End-to-End Solution
Introduction
The IMS Solution used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution supports three
general categories of functions. This topic describes the IMS functions supported in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution and where to find the network elements for
each.
Functional areas
IMS specifications provide functions and common procedures in three functional areas:
• Bearer control/Access Gateway control
• Session control
• IMS-enabled applications
Bearer Control/Access Gateway

The transport and endpoint layer initiate and terminate SIP signaling to set up sessions
and provide bearer services such as conversion of voice from analog or digital formats to
IP packets using Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP). This layer provides the media
gateways for converting the VoIP bearer streams to the PSTN TDM format. The media
server provides many media-related services.
Grouped in with the bearer control functions are the gateway functions that provide
secure access to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) and access to other IP
networks.
An example of a gateway network element in the IMS Solution is the 5450 ISC.
Network elements used for Bearer Control are indicated in orange and labelled “Access
Gateway” in Figure 15-1, “Network elements and interfaces in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution” (p. 15-3). NEs used for Bearer Control/Access Gateway are
designated “Access Gateway” under “IMS function” in the network element description.
Session control
The session control layer contains the Call Session Control Function (CSCF), which
provides the registration of the endpoints and routing of the SIP signaling messages to the
appropriate application server. The CSCF interworks with the access and transport layer
to guarantee QoS across all services. The call session control layer includes the Home
Subscriber Server (HSS) database that maintains the unique service profile for each end
user.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS IMS functions implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
About IMS End-to-End Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An example of a session control network element in the IMS Solution is the 5060 Media
Gateway Control Function (MGCF), which is used to interwork with the Public Switched
Telephone Network (PSTN).
Network elements used for Session Control are indicated in yellow in Figure 15-1,
(p. 15-3) and are designated “Session Control” under “IMS function” in the network
element description.
IMS-enabled applications
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the Alcatel-Lucent IMS Solution is used
to host selected applications that are IMS-enabled.
This hosting of selected applications is performed by what is known as the Application
Layer in the IMS architecture. The Application Layer contains the application servers that
provide the end-user service logic. The IMS architecture and SIP signaling is flexible
enough to support a variety of telephony and non-telephony application servers. For
example, SIP standards have been developed for telephony services and IM services (and
other multimedia and presence applications).
An example of an application hosted by the IMS Application Layer is the 5110 Short
Message Service Center (SMSC).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5060 MGC-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5060 MGC-8
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 Media Gateway Controller-8 (MGC-8) as
used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the 5060 MGC-8 21-9

About the 5060 MGC-8

What is the 5060 MGC-8?
The Alcatel-Lucent 5060 Media Gateway Controller-8 (MGC-8) enables service
providers to seamlessly migrate from legacy TDM to VoIP to converged IMS on a single
platform. The Alcatel-Lucent 5060 MGC-8 provides the classic media gateway controller
function for both TDM and VoIP networks with any-to-any switching, including
TDM-to-TDM, TDM-to-IP, and IP-to-IP, while delivering a full range of
access/toll-tandem services and protocols. The Alcatel-Lucent MGC-8 uses the Advanced
Telecommunications Computing Architecture (ATCA) standards-based platform.
Role of the 5060 MGC-8

The 5060 MGC-8 allows service providers to integrate the signaling gateway
functionality in the same chassis.
The 5060 MGC-8 supports several applications that are key for LTE:
• IMS Media Gateway Control Function (MGCF)
• Interconnection Border Control (IBCF)
Advantages of the MGC-8

Advantages of the 5060 MGC-8 include:
• ATCA-based platform simplifies operations through a shared management system and
hardware platform with other Alcatel-Lucent IMS components
• Single, easy-to-manage, self-contained package
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS About the 5060 MGC-8
5060 MGC-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Seamless migration from legacy TDM through VoIP to converged IMS on the same
platform
• Offers superior flexibility and cost efficiencies for both network renovation and
IP-network transformation
• Supports legacy revenue streams while enabling the growth of next-generation
services
• Reduces CAPEX and OPEX while providing carrier-class reliability, scalability, and
performance

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent MGC-8, see (http://www.alcatel-lucent.
com/wps/DocumentStreamerServlet?LMSG_CABINET=Docs_and_Resource_Ctr&
LMSG_CONTENT_FILE=Brochures/May_2010_5060_MGC-8_R8__Product_
Description.pdf).

For instructions on how to access IMS documentation, including documentation on the
5060 MGC-8, see “Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web site”
(p. B-11).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the MGC-8. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “MGC-8”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5100 CMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5100 CMS
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 5100 CMS as it is used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 5100 Converged Messaging System 21-11

Changes in the 5100 CMS to support LTE 21-12
About the 5100 Converged Messaging System

What is the 5100 CMS?
The 5100 Converged Messaging System (5100 CMS) is an IMS network element that is
used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to host the voice mail server
function for LTE.
What is a Voice Mail Server?

The Voice Mail Server functional entity provides voice mail service for unanswered video
calls and video sharing sessions. This voice mail server should be shared with the video
mail server for normal voice calls so the user may have a single mailbox. A subscriber
placing an unanswered video call will be offered the ability to leave a voice mail. The
ability to leave a video message will be supported in a later release.
How it works
The 5100 CMS supports mixed-media messaging applications. End users have the
flexibility to use Terminal User Interface (TUI) or Messaging Application Broker (MAB)
enabled devices via an Integrated Maintenance Administration Panel (IMAP) or HTTP, as
well SMS, Email, and video mail. End users can receive and print faxes and email that is
sent to their account.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS About the 5100 Converged Messaging System
5100 CMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Components
The 5100 CMS consists of Telephony Access Servers and a centralized Message Center
that contains the message servers, directory servers, and Administration and Control
Server (ACS). Standard Internet mail protocols are used for communication between the
major components.
Interfaces
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) and Internet message application protocol 4
(IMAP4) are the standard e-mail interfaces, and Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) is the standard directory interface, used across the Wide Area Network (WAN) in
a distributed configuration.
Changes in the 5100 CMS to support LTE

No changes
There are no changes to the functionality of the 5100 CMS when the 5100 CMS is used to
support LTE.

For documentation
For documentation on the 5100 CMS go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
(OLCS) web site (http://support.alcatel-lucent.com) and search on “5100 CMS”.

Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5100 CMS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “5100 CMS”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5110 SMSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5110 SMSC
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 5110 SMSC as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 5110 SMSC 21-13

About the 5110 SMSC

What is the 5110 SMSC?
The Alcatel-Lucent 5110 Short Message Service Center (SMSC) is an IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS)- and long term evolution (LTE)-ready messaging solution that enables
mobile subscribers to send and receive short messages using a mobile device in
multinetwork, multiprotocol environments. The 5110 SMSC helps service providers
differentiate their data messaging services by offering enhanced applications to increase
customer satisfaction and subscriber loyalty. Support for both traditional 3GPP/3GPP2
networks and new IMS and LTE networks helps to minimize operating costs.
The 5110 SMSC is interoperability proven-successfully integrated with
• SHLR,
• HSS,
• ICC,
• and 5100 CMS.
The 5110 SMSC is extremely reliable with Active/Active Mated Pair available with
geo-diverse deployment. The 5110 SMSC provides automatic failover detection and
guaranteed message delivery.
Capacity and performance

The 5110 SMSC supports SMS delivery over IMS and LTE Next Generation Networks.
Key details for capacity and performance include the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS About the 5110 SMSC
5110 SMSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Some of the features of the 5110 SMSC include:
• High capacity on a single server
• One cabinet supports up to four servers delivering 120 million busy hour message
delivery attempts
Note that the 5110 SMSC supports both the Sun N1290 and the Sun T5440. However,
the Sun N1290 is DA and no longer orderable.
• High availability with mated-pair architecture
• Replication of pending messages across redundant sites, for timely delivery of
pending messages in case of site failure
• Delivery at maximum SMS capacity without outages
• No down time required for system upgrades
Advantages of the 5110 SMSC

Some advantages of the 5110 SMSC are:
• Complete end-to-end next generation SMSC solution (SMS, FDA, and Voting)
• Multiple technologies (CDMA, GSM, UMTS, IMS, and TDMA)
• Highly scalable, modular, and flexible carrier grade messaging platform that supports
up to four servers delivering 120 million busy hour message delivery attempts
• Solid network reliability and elimination of any single point of failure - providing
99.999% availability with geo-diverse deployment
• Operational and deployment flexibility to support individual/multiple regions or the
entire network
• Seamless migration of traffic from legacy to new SMSC
• Proven migration and integration team with the expertise to transition your network
with minimal impact to subscribers
• Operational ease of use with real time monitoring and configuration management
tools
TSIS
Troubleshooting, monitoring, and provisioning the 5110 SMSC is done by the
Troubleshooting and Statistical Interface (TSIS) tool. For more about TSIS, see “TSIS”
(p. 22-57).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS For further information
5110 SMSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5110 SMSC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “5110 SMSC”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5140 BMC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5140 BMC
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 5140 BMC product as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
About the 5140 BMC 21-16

Hardware 21-18
Changes in the 5140 BMC to support LTE 21-18
About the 5140 BMC

What is the 5140 BMC
The Alcatel-Lucent 5140 Broadcast Message Center (5140 BMC) enables
emergency-alert and commercial-message broadcasts to mobile devices in a specified
geographic areas. BMC-based service satisfies government emergency-alerting
requirements (such as CMAS requirements) as well as various commercial message
broadcasts.
The 5140 BMC receives emergency alerts from a government-alert gateway. The 5140
BMC performs alert mapping, manages message-delivery priorities and interfaces with
the network elements responsible for message broadcasts.
The 5140 BMC supports four delivery technologies:
• Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) networks with interfaces to Mobile
Switching Centers (MSCs)
• Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) networks with interfaces to
Radio Network Controllers (RNCs)
• Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) networks with interfaces to Base
Station Controllers (BSCs)
• Long Term Evolution (LTE) networks with interface to mobility Management Entities
(MMEs)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS About the 5140 BMC
5140 BMC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Role of the 5140 BMC
The role of the 5140 BMC in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is to support
the Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS) capability for the US market, within the
two functional entities introduced in the LTE network: the Commercial Mobile Service
Provider (CMSP) and the Cell Broadcast Center (CBC).
Advantages of the 5140 BMC

The 5140 BMC has many advantages for the service provider including the following:
• The 5140 BMC is a proven end-to-end solution certified in Alcatel-Lucent
laboratories
• The 5140 BMC is a standardized platform that offers a scalable solution for multiple
applications and future growth
with:
– Carrier-grade reliability
– Improved manageability and serviceability
– Lower power consumption
– Reduced equipment footprint
– Remote management and support
• The 5140 BMC is designed to support all future cell broadcast-based and
multimedia-based commercial broadcast services
• The 5140 BMC supports the delivery of broadcast messages to a large geographical
area
• The 5140 BMC enables delivery of alerts based on static (pre-populated) or dynamic
(using circles and polygons) alerting
• The 5140 BMC translates geo-target areas to network nodes or elements, including
MSCs, RNCs, BSCs, MMEs, and cell, sector and broadcast zones
• The 5140 BMC retransmits, updates and cancels alerts
• The 5140 BMC displays status of active alerts on the dynamic web portal
• The 5140 BMC complies with major standards: CDMA (IS41/IS824:IS637), UMTS
(3GPP 25.419), GSM (3GPP 23.041) and LTE (3GPP 29.168)
• The 5140 BMS is built on the NEBS-compliant Common Alcatel-lucent application
server (MCAS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS Hardware
5140 BMC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware
5140 BMC Hardware
The 5140 BMC product is available on two different hardware platforms. The first is the
standards-compliant PICMG 3.0 ATCA hardware from Alcatel-Lucent, designed to
provide a platform based on the needs of services providers. The second is the rack mount
server (RMS) technology (380 G6) server from Hewlett Packard.
Changes in the 5140 BMC to support LTE

Changes
For CMAS application, the CMSP Gateway is responsible to interface to the Federal Alert
Gateway for applications-dependent functions and to interface with the carrier network
for technology-dependent functions.
The CBC is responsible to determine the impacted network elements for a CMAS alerts
and manages the transmission and retransmission of the alerts to MMEs. The SBc is a
new interface to be developed on the 5140 BMC to support LTE CMAS.

Three categories of traffic use external networks for transport:
• OAM&P
• Communication with alert gateways in the government domain
• Communication with Mobile Switching Network infrastructure such as BSC, RNC,
MSC and MMEs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5140 BMC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Standards
The relevant standard specifications and interfaces for LE4.0 are:
• Overview:
with
– ATIS-0700010 CMAS via EPS Public Warning System Specification
– TS 23.401 General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) enhancements for Evolved
Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) access
• C interface: J-STD-101, Joint ATIS/TIA CMAS Federal Alert Gateway to CMSP
Gateway Interface Specification
• SBc interface: TS 29.168 Cell Broadcast Centre interfaces with the Evolved Packet
Core; Stage 3.
Product description
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 5410 BMC, see Alcatel-Lucent 5140
Broadcast Message Center (BMC) Technical Product Description.
For documentation
For documentation on the 5140 BMC go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
Documentation) and search for “5140 BMC”.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5140 BMC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “5140 BMC”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5410 PS/XDMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5410 PS/XDMS
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 5410 PS/XDMS as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 5410 PS/XDMS 21-20

Changes in the 5410 PS/XDMS to support LTE 21-21
About the 5410 PS/XDMS

What is the 5410 PS/XDMS?
The 5410 Presence Server (PS)/XDM Server (XDMS) is the IMS network element that
supports the Enhanced Address Book (EAB) contact list on the Video Communications
Service client.
Compliant with standards

The implementation of the PS/XDMS in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is
fully compliant with the Presence/XDMS part of the GSMA RCS 1.0 standard.
What is the Enhanced Address Book?

Video Communications Service 1.0 also includes an Enhanced Address Book (EAB) on
the client. The Enhanced Address Book (EAB) is address book software that contains
typical subscriber information but is also presence-enabled. Presence-enabled address
books contain additional real-time information about where the subscriber is located and
real-time information about the present capability of the end user's contacts.
How the EAB works

The EAB uses the Presence Server (PS) functional entity and the XDM Server (XDMS)
functional entity (both hosted by the 5410 PS/XDMS).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS About the 5410 PS/XDMS
5410 PS/XDMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Video Communications Service clients operate on lists that are stored in the Shared
XDMS. The subscribed contacts who have authorized the end user to receive their
presence information are listed in the EAB and are available on the Video
Communications Service client.
Role of the Presence Server

The presence server (PS) is responsible for aggregating all service capability information
published by all device and terminal clients, and distributing this information to all
authorized watchers.
Role of the XDM Server functional entity

The XDMS server is used to store all presence-related lists, for example the list of
subscribed contacts (which in Video Communications Service is called the Video
Communications Service buddy list) and the presence authorization lists.
HP ProLiant DL380
The 5410 PS/XDMS runs on a generic platform HP ProLiant DL380 Generation.
Two configurations
Changes in the 5410 PS/XDMS to support LTE

No changes
There are no changes to the functionality of the 5410 PS/XDMS when the 5410
PS/XDMS is used to support LTE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5410 PS/XDMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For information on Video Communications Service
For information on Video Communications Service and on use of the 5410 PS/XDMS in
Video Communications Service, see “The Video Communications Service approach”
(p. 10-7).

5410 PS and 5410 XDMS functions, “Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on
the OLCS web site” (p. B-11).

Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5410 PS/XDMS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “5410 PS/XDMS”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5420 CTS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5420 CTS
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 5420 CTS as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
The 5420 CTS 21-23

Changes in the 5420 CTS to support LTE 21-24
The 5420 CTS

What is the 5420 CTS?
The 5420 Converged Telephony Server (5420 CTS) is an IMS Telephony Application
Server (TAS) that supports a comprehensive set of voice and video supplementary
services for consumer and business endpoints. The 5420 CTS, as an IMS Telephony
Application Server, provides services to all types of fixed and mobile TDM and IP
endpoints through access network conversion methods.
What is a Telephony Application Server (TAS)?

A Telephony Application Server (TAS) is a network element that acts as a back to back
user agent and provides call processing supplementary services. Examples of TAS
functions include in-network call forwarding, call transfer, and multi-way conferencing.
Role of the 5420 CTS

The role of the 5420 CTS in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is to provide
voice and video supplementary services.
Advantages of the 5420 CTS

The 5420 CTS has many advantages for the service provider, including the following:
• The 5420 CTS supports both voice and video in a single application server.
• The 5420 CTS is highly scalable, supporting both consumer and residential services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS The 5420 CTS
5420 CTS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• The 5420 CTS was designed and built to support IMS networks and IMS interfaces
and also supports subscriber data storage in the HSS.
• The 5420 CTS is fully pre-integrated into the IMS solution with common OAM&P to
speed deployment and reduce IT integration expense.
• The 5420 CTS is compliant with all key standards (3GPP, GSMA, and so forth).
• The 5420 CTS has open Application Program Interfaces (APIs), enabling service
creation and new use cases, which can lead to new revenue and subscriber growth for
the service provider.
• The 5420 CTS provides 99.999% reliability through local 1+1 redundancy. Additional
geo-redundancy is supported.
The 5420 CTS is commercially deployed throughout the world with deployments
exceeding 2M live subscribers.
How it works
Within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the 5420 CTS contains the service
logic that provides all types of endpoints with both basic and advanced call processing
services.
ATCA platform
The Alcatel-Lucent 5420 CTS is built on the Alcatel-Lucent 5400 Linux Control Platform
(LCP). The 5400 LCP is an Advanced Telecommunications Computing Architecture
(ATCA) based platform and is a common platform for many other Alcatel-Lucent
products, such as the 5780 DSC.
Changes in the 5420 CTS to support LTE

No changes
There are no changes to the functionality of the 5420 CTS when the 5420 CTS is used to
support LTE.
The 5420 CTS is compliant with relevant IMS and GSMA standards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5420 CTS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Product description
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 5420 CTS TAS, see Alcatel-Lucent 5420
Converged Telephony Server (CTS) Product Description, 275-900-367.
For documentation
For documentation on the 5420 CTS TAS go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer
Support (OLCS) Product Index (https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/portal/productIndex.
do?path=Documentation) and search for “5420 CTS”.

5420 CTS, “Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web site”
(p. B-11).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5420 CTS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “5420 CTS”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
About the 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF) 21-26

Providing Call Session Control Function (CSCF) functions 21-27
About the 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF)

What is the 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF)?
The Alcatel-Lucent 5450 IP Session Controller (ISC) is the session control engine at the
heart of several Alcatel-Lucent solutions. It manages SIP-based sessions for voice, video,
and data communications over any SIP-based wireline or wireless device, as well as
traditional access devices. The 5450 ISC also provides functions ensuring the control of
access network IP boundaries.
Role of the 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF)

The 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF) includes the following features:
• All IMS standards-based session control functionalities are provided from one single
product, e.g. Proxy Call Session Control Function (P-CSCF), Interrogating CSCF
(I-CSCF), Serving CSCF (S-CSCF) and Emergency CSCF (E-CSCF)
• Support of Breakout Gateway Control Function (BGCF) for selection of the
appropriate MGCF to provoke PSTN/PLMN breakout.
• Supported on Advanced Telecommunications Computing Architecture (ATCA) and
Compact Packet Switching Backplane (cPSB) hardware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS About the 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF)
Advantages of the 5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF) include:
• Multiple IMS functions, combined in a single product, reduce the number of elements
in the network resulting in capital expenditure (CAPEX) savings.
• Common session-control functionalities for any type of wireline and wireless access
devices enable converged service providers to simplify network operation, resulting in
OPEX reduction
• Functional scalability allows service providers to increase their capacity as they need
by adding blades and chassis
• Flexible hardware and software architecture allow various deployment types from
large scale for large networks to cost-effective and scaled-down variants for smaller
networks or trials
• Support of geographical redundancy for carrier-grade reliability
Providing Call Session Control Function (CSCF) functions

Introduction
The 5450 ISC in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution carries out all the Call
Session Control Function (CSCF) roles defined in the 3GPP IMS standard. These roles
are the following: the Proxy CSCF (P-CSCF), Interrogating CSCF (I-CSCF), and Serving
CSCF (S-CSCF). The 5450 ISC also serves the Breakout Gateway Control Function
(BGCF).
This topic defines these roles.
What is CSCF?
Call Session Control Function (CSCF) functions provide session management for
IP-based calls. The standard breaks down the session management functions into four
groups and assigns each group to one of four logical entities. Like all entities defined in
the standards, these entities are logical and not physical. Therefore when these entities are
implemented, these entities do not require each require a separate physical network
element. In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, these four logical entities are
implemented on one physical platform the 5450 ISC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS Providing Call Session Control Function (CSCF) functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Proxy CSCF (P-CSCF)
The Proxy CSCF (P-CSCF) is the first contact for a SIP endpoint such as an LTE mobile
to gain access to the IMS from the access packet network domain. The P-CSCF carries
out the following tasks:
• Provides the necessary SIP routing capability between SIP mobiles and the IMS
• executes the policy control enforced by operators
• Coordinates with the PCRF to authorize the resources and Quality-of-Service (QoS)
control using the Rx interface as defined in 3GPP 23.203, Section 5.1 (stage 2), and
3GPP 29.214 Section 4.4 and 5.
Note that in LE4.0 roaming for voice is supported, but the P-CSCF is always in the
home network.
Interrogating CSCF (I-CSCF)

The Interrogating CSCF (I-CSCF) is the contact point within an operator’s network for
all connections destined to a subscriber of that network operator, or a roaming subscriber
currently located within that network operator’s service area. The I-CSCF performs the
• Assigning a S-CSCF to a user performing SIP registration
• Routing a SIP request received from another network towards the S-CSCF.
• Obtaining from the HSS the Address of the S-CSCF.
• Forwarding the SIP request or response to the S-CSCF determined by the previous
step
Serving CSCF (S-CSCF)

The Serving CSCF (S-CSCF) manages SIP sessions and coordinates with other network
elements for call/session control. The S-CSCF is responsible for the following functions:
• SIP Registration - process SIP REGISTER requests and maintains subscriber data and
states information for the duration of the registration session
• Session Control – performs call/session setup, modification, and termination
• Service Control – Interaction with Application Services platforms for the support of
features and services
• Call monitoring and recording for billing, etc
• Lawful intercept functionality
• Provide security for the session
The Serving CSCF (S-CSCF) supports the SIP ISC interface to the application servers
such as TAS. This interface is defined in 3GPP 23.228, section 4.2.4.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS Providing Call Session Control Function (CSCF) functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Breakout Gateway Control Function (BGCF).
The Breakout Gateway Control Function (BGCF) selects the appropriate MGCF in which
PSTN/PLMN breakout is to occur based on the destination and/or origination of the call.
The MGCF will be responsible for the actual interworking with the PSTN/PLMN
network.
Emergency CSCF
The Emergency CSCF (E-CSCF) is responsible for routing emergency call requests to an
appropriate PSAP. It interacts with an LRF (Location Retrieval Function) to obtain the
PSAP routing information prior to routing the call.
This important application is handled by IMS in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution is the CSCF.
The 5450 ISC also provides the Emergency CSCF used to route emergency 112 or 911
calls. From LE3.0 onwards, emergency calls are also handled using CSFB to 2G/3G as
defined in 3GPP 23.272, Section 4.6.
For more information on CSCF

CSCF servers are defined in the 3GPP IMS standard. Specific references to the standard
are mentioned previously in this topic.

5450 ISC, “Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web site”
(p. B-11).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5450 ISC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “5450 ISC”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5900 MRF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5900 MRF
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 5900 Media Resource Function (5900 MRF) as it is used in the
Contents
The 5900 MRF 21-30

Changes in the 5900 MRF to support LTE 21-31
The 5900 MRF

What is the 5900 MRF?
The 5900 Media Resource Function (5900 MRF) is the network element that provides the
Media Resource Function (MRF) in Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
What is the media resource function?

The media resource function is defined in the IMS standards as a function used for
conferencing, for playing of tones and announcements and for providing media related
functions such as media manipulation (for example, voice stream mixing).
Role
The role of the 5900 MRF in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is to provide
multimedia processing and necessary service related to user interaction features.
Services provided
In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution the 5900 MRF provides the following
services:
• Play back of fixed and variable audio announcements
• Conferencing
• Multilingual announcements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS The 5900 MRF
5900 MRF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• “Intelligent Network”-type variable parts including prices, phone numbers, dates,
time, duration, integer numbers
• Play back of video announcements
• Support of various codecs (both audio and video)
• Recording of audio and video announcements, particularly those announcements that
are suitable for messaging-type applications.
Support for lawful interception

The 5900 MRF is also used to do media replication for calls that require lawful
interception (LI).
What is media replication?

Media replication is a process performed by the 5900 MRF while legal interception is
going on. During legal interception the 5900 MRF intercepts and replicates the flow of
information between the selected user device and other user devices. The original flow of
information is carried without interruption between the selected user device and other
user devices. However, at the same time, the 5900 MRF replicates the original flow of
information and sends the replicated flow of information to a recording room where the
information can be preserved for law enforcement officials.
Changes in the 5900 MRF to support LTE

No changes
There are no changes to the functionality of the 5900 MRF when the 5900 MRF is used
as part of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.

For documentation
For documentation on the 5900 MRF go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
Documentation) and search for “5900 MRF”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
5900 MRF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IMS documentation web site
5900 MRF, see “Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web site”
(p. B-11).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5900 MRF. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “5900 MRF”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7510 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7510 MGW
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 7510 Media Gateway (7510 MGW) as used in
Contents

Type of LTE/IMS function 21-34
Hardware 21-35
Software 21-38
Changes in the 7510 MGW to support LTE 21-41
About the 7510 MGW

The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 Media Gateway (MGW) is a network element that provides a
gateway between disparate networks such as Public Switch Telephone Networks
(PSTNs), Next Generation Networks (NGNs), and Public Branch eXchanges (PBXs). The
7510 MGW provides the media gateway function for both TDM and VoIP networks with
any-to-any switching, including TDM-to-TDM, TDM-to-IP, and IP-to-IP.
Flexibility
The flexibility of the 7510 MGW enables service providers to seamlessly migrate from
legacy TDM to VoIP to converged IMS on a single platform. In addition, the 7510 MGW
can interconnect several VoIP; IMS or LTE/IMS networks using the Interconnect Border
Gateway Function (IBGF) capability directly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS About the 7510 MGW
7510 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is a Media Gateway?
A Media Gateway (MGW) is a network element that transforms media from one
transmission format, usually Public Switched Telephone Network Time Division
Multiplexed (PSTN TDM) circuits, to another format, such as Voice over Packet (VoP).

The 7510 MGW functions as a virtual MGW to support many functions on a single
chassis, including the following:
• IMS media gateway (IMS-MGW)
• Trunking media gateway function (T-MGF)
• Interconnect Border Gateway Function (IBGF)
• SIP Signaling Firewall (SIP-FW)
• Centralized Access Border Gateway (C-BGF)
• Signalling gateway for M3UA, M2UA, IUA (SGW)
• Centralized Access Gateway (C-AGW)
• Virtual Media Gateway (VMG)
Type of LTE/IMS function

Functions
The 7510 MGW supports the following LTE/IMS functions:
• IMS - Media Gateway (IMS-GW)
• Interconnect Border Gateway Function (IBGF)
• Centralized Access Border Gateway (C-BGF)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS Advantages of the 7510 MGW
7510 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Market leader
The 7510 MGW is used in many customer networks today and is the leading MGW in the
high density MGW market segment.
Advantages
The 7510 MGW offers many advantages to the service provider, including the following:
• Reduced CAPEX and OPEX and minimizes the cost of ownership.
• Delivery of critical end-user services with high quality and high reliability.
• Because of the 7510 MGW's Virtual Media Gateway concept, allows the splitting of a
single physical MGW chassis into several logical Media Gateways. Each Virtual
MGW can support different functions simultaneously. The Virtual Media Gateway
concept offers flexibility and cost efficiencies for both network renovation and
IP-network transformation.
• Support of multiple functions, which allows the operator a flexible network migration
and evolution including CAPEX protection.
• Proven reliability in a multivendor network architecture.
Hardware
A single Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW consists of the following components:
• One NEBS Level 3 compliant chassis, designed to meet international power,
grounding, and shielding requirements, and which is mounted in a standard
telecommunication rack
• A high-speed midplane that interconnects all Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW modules
• Three fan trays
• One air filter
• Up 16 application-specific modules
• System modules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7510 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the modules
The following application--specific modules provide interface or media processing
services:
• Circuit Interface Module (CIM)
• Media Conversion Module (MCM)
• Packet Interface Module (PIM)
The following system modules provide management and switching services:
• System Control Module (SCM)
• Switch Fabric Module (SFM)
About the chassis

The chassis is fitted with 20 vertical slots, which are divided by the midplane. Each
application-specific module consists of a processor board that is installed from the front
of the chassis, and an I/O board that is installed from the rear of the chassis.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7510 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 21-1 Hardware for the 7510 MGW
Of the 20 slots available, four slots are dedicated to hold two Switch Fabric Modules, and
two System Control Modules. To maximize the Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW port density,
the remaining 16 generic slots can be filled using Media Conversion Modules, Packet
Interface Modules, or Circuit Interface Modules.
Each board that is inserted into the Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW chassis has a fully
redundant Ethernet MAC connection. Connections to the System Control Module switch
fabrics (the c-PSFs) allow communication with the control plane, while connections to
the packet switch fabrics on the Switch Fabric Modules (the d-PSF) provide the packet
switch used to transfer data in the data plane; these connections are made at the midplane.
Each module has its own power circuit and distribution, supplied, for example, by the
distributed -48 V or -60 V DC exchange power sources.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS Software
7510 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
7510 MGW software
The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW contains a distributed software system that uses a
layered, modular software architecture. The 7510 MGW architecture is based on an open,
programmable call control model that performs call processing independent of other
functions such as resource management, routing, or forwarding.
The Software inside of the 7510 MGW is structured into Kernel Software, Network Layer
Software; Application Layer Software, Voice Processing, Software Redundancy

Interfaces
Because of its rich feature set, the 7510 MGW can support many types of network
connections. Typical 7510 MGW interfaces are shown in the following figure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS Connections to other network elements
7510 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 21-2 7510 MGW interfaces
Supported gateways
The Virtual Media Concept on the 7510 allows multiple gateways to be supported at once,
including the following:
Trunking Gateway (TGW) The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW offers high port density in
VoIP trunking on a true carrier grade platform, thereby enabling reliable and
cost-efficient utilization of IP network for transit voice traffic. By supporting TDM
hairpinning (native TDM switching) and avoiding burdening IP network with local
calls, the Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW enables efficient treatment of local calls while
the service provider is migrating to an NGN Class 4 solution.
Centralized Access Gateway (C-AGW), The Centralized Access Gateway (C-AGW),
under the control of the signalling-compatible MGC-like Alcatel-Lucent 5020 MGC,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS Connections to other network elements
7510 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
supports Private Branch Exchange (PBX) Access. By allowing direct PBX access to
IP-based NGN platforms, bypassing TDM local exchanges, the Alcatel-Lucent 7510
MGW provides cost-efficient Primary Rate Access (PRA) lines for connecting
corporate PBX systems.
Interconnection Border Gateway (IBGF) The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW interworks
with the Alcatel-Lucent 5020 MGC as the Alcatel-Lucent Border Gateway. The
Alcatel-Lucent 7510 Border Gateway Function (BGF) adapts, polices and switches
media streams. The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 integrated SIP Firewall adapts, polices and
switches the SIP control stream to the Interconnection Border Control Function
(IBCF), provided by the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 MGC-8.
Centralized Access Border Gateway (C-BGF) The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW
interworks with the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 ICS / 5450 ISC as Centralized Access Border
Gateway. The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 Centralized Accesses Border Gateway Function
(C-BGF) adapts, polices and switches media streams. The C-BGF can be connected to
any IMS access network, IP-PBX and LTE evolved packet core network. The C-BGF
supports voice call transcoding to interconnect different type of IMS access networks,
such as CDMA EVDO; GPRS; HSPDA; FIX access and LTE EPC networks.
User interfaces
Managed by 1360 COM or 1310 OMC-P
All functions of the 7510 MGW can be managed via the 1360 COM or the 1310 OMC-P.
For information on the 1360 COM, see“1360 COM” (p. 22-6) .
For information on the 1310 OMC-P, see “1310 OMC-P” (p. 22-13).
Functions supported
The following functions are supported:
• Chassis Management — The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW contains a high-level chassis
management system that operates from the active System Control Module.
• Configuration Management — The configuration database, which is stored in files in
the Flash Memory of the System Control Module, maintains all Alcatel-Lucent 7510
MGW configuration information.
• Fault Management — Fault management concerns detection, isolation, and correction
of abnormal operations in an Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW.
• Diagnostic Test - Bit Error Rate test (BERT) — The BERT generates and evaluates bit
patterns to verify the proper functioning of all equipped modules.
• System Logging and Debugging — In addition to monitoring extensive statistical
data, the Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW supports a complete set of diagnostic features.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS User interfaces
7510 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Performance Management — The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW assesses its ability to
carry out all activities by continuously collecting and analyzing statistical data related
to key functions.
• Security Management — The Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGW contains transport layer and
user account security mechanisms.
Other OA&M interfaces

Alternatively, the 7510 MGW can be managed using the text-based CLI , the GUI-based
Alcatel-Lucent 7510 MGEM on the system or via the 1360 COM or the 1300 XMC.
Changes in the 7510 MGW to support LTE

No changes
There are no changes to the functionality of the 7510 MGW when the 7510 MGW is used
as part of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.

For documentation
For documentation on the 7510 MGW go to the following Alcatel-Lucent Online
Customer Support (OLCS) web site product index url (https://infoproducts.alcatel-lucent.
com/aces/cgi-bin/dbaccessproddoc.cgi.edit?entryId=1-0000000002649&doctype=DOC)”.
See especially the Product Description, 3FZ 08014 AAAx DEZZA.

For instructions on how to access IMS documentation, of which the 7510 MGW is a part,
see “Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web site” (p. B-11).
Training
Web/Main and search on the keywords “7510 MGW”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
7520 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7520 MGW
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 7520 Media Gateway (7520 MGW) as used in
Contents
The 7520 MGW 21-42

Hardware 21-43
Software 21-44
The 7520 MGW

The 7510 Media Gateway (7520 MGW) is a gateway network element that provides the
media gateway function for both TDM and VoIP networks with any-to-any switching,
including TDM-to-TDM, TDM-to-IP, and IP-to-IP. The 7520 MGW enables service
providers to seamlessly migrate from legacy TDM to VoIP to converged IMS on a single
platform.
What is a Media Gateway?

A Media Gateway (MGW) is a network element that transforms media from one
transmission format, usually Public Switched Telephone Network Time Division
Multiplexed (PSTN TDM) circuits, to another format, such as Voice over Packet (VoP).

The 7520 MGW functions as a virtual MGW to support many functions on a single
chassis, including the following:
• IMS media gateway (IMS-MGW)
• Trunking media gateway function (T-MGF)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS The 7520 MGW
7520 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Signalling gateway for M2UA, IUA (SGW)
• Virtual Media Gateway (VMG)
As used in the Solution

The 7520 MGW is used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution to support the
9380 3G MSC. The 7520 MGW is the only gateway supported by the 9380 3G MSC.

Advantages
The 7520 MGW offers many advantages to the service provider, such as the following:
• The MGW delivers reduced CAPEX and OPEX and minimizes the cost of ownership.
• The 7520 MGW delivers critical end-user services with high quality and high
reliability.
• The Virtual Media gateway concept allows the splitting of a single physical MGW
chassis into several logical Media Gateways. Each Virtual MGW can support different
functions at the same time. The Virtual Media gateway concept offers flexibility and
cost efficiencies for both network renovation and IP-network transformation.
• The 7520 MGW's support of multiple functions allows the operator a flexible network
migration and evolution including CAPEX protection.
• The 7520 MGW has been proven to be reliable in a multivendor network architecture.
Hardware
The 7520 MGW shares the same chassis as the 5020 MGC-8, that is, the 23–inch wide
Alcatel-Lucent Gateway Platform (LGP), The Gateway Platform is 14RU. For a summary
of the hardware, see the 275-100-000, IMS Solution Technical Description.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS Software
7520 MGW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
7520 MGW software
The Alcatel-Lucent 7520 MGW contains a distributed software system that uses a
layered, modular software architecture. The 7520 MGW architecture is based on an open,
programmable call control model that performs call processing independent of other
functions such as resource management, routing, or forwarding.
User interfaces
Managed by 1360 COM or 1310 OMC-P
Most functions of the 7520 MGW can be managed via the 1360 COM or the 1310
OMC-P.
For information on the 1360 COM, see “1360 COM” (p. 22-6).
For information on the 1310 OMC-P, see “1310 OMC-P” (p. 22-13).

For documentation
For documentation on the 7520 MGW go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
Documentation) and search for “7520 MGW”.

Training
Web/Main and search on the keywords “7520 MGW”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
8950 AAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8950 AAA
Overview
Purpose
This section describes 8950 Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) as used
in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the 8950 AAA 21-45

About the 8950 AAA

What is the 8950 AAA?
The Alcatel-Lucent 8950 AAA is the Authentication, Authorization and Accounting
(AAA) server of choice for major service providers, ISPs, and Enterprises, due to its
proven performance and its flexible, extensible architecture built on Java ™-based
programming language. 8950 AAA provides the tools needed to support the technologies
of today as well as the technologies and services of tomorrow, including fixed-mobile
roaming and blended multimedia services.
Based on a powerful multi-threaded engine and a robust core request queue processor, the
8950 AAA server offers the most extensive set of AAA features available today for
wireline, broadband, and wireless networks. Extensive support for IETF RFCs (AAA,
RADIUS, Diameter, and EAP), TIA (IS-835), 3GPP, and 3GPP2 standards means the
8950 AAA server is equipped to support a wide array of access technologies including:
CDMA, GSM/GPRS, UMTS, Broadband, LTE, WiMAX, Femto, and VPN/tunnelling.
While most AAA servers provide limited flexibility, the Alcatel-Lucent 8950 AAA server
offers a built-in programming language, known as PolicyFlow, for writing complex
authentication and accounting policies. The 8950 AAA policy flow language is easy to
learn and can easily be used to implement new policies or maintain existing policies as
service offerings evolve. The flexibility afforded by PolicyFlow helps service providers
reduce the time to market for new and innovative services, allowing them to stay ahead of
the competition and increase their revenues.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Network elements used for IMS About the 8950 AAA
8950 AAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 8950 AAA can easily be integrated into a customer’s existing network architecture.
The 8950 AAA server can interface seamlessly with existing RADIUS and DIAMETER
systems, and back-end storage technologies accessible via LDAP and SQL. Support for
translation between RADIUS and DIAMETER facilitates communication between next
generation technologies and existing RADIUS based clients.
Alcatel-Lucent 8950 AAA delivers an extensive suite of features:
• PolicyFlow AAA programming language
• Server monitoring and statistics tools
• SNMP MIB and Trap support
• Easy SQL database integration
• Read/write from LDAP directories
• Strong authentication (based on token cards)
• Flexible retry/alternate data source logic
• Complete support for Proxy RADIUS and DIAMETER
• Fully configurable handling of RADIUS accounting packets
• Extensive logging capabilities with multiple output options (Syslog, SNMP, SQL, file,
etc.)
• Available for most popular platforms (Windows, Sun, and Linux)
Role of the 8950 AAA

The 8950 AAA is required when interworking with a CDMA (eHRPD) network, or
whenever interoperability with a non-3GPP network is required. In a 3GPP architecture,
8950 AAA serves as the “3GPP-AAA”. It can also act as the standard 3GPP2 1xEVDO
AAA if needed.
In an LTE network with eHRPD interworking, 8950 AAA acts as interface between the
HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW) and the Home Subscriber Server (HSS), and also
between the PDN Gateway (PGW) and the HSS. The 3GPP interface to HSGW is
referred to as STa; for PGW the interface supported is S6b, and to HSS the interface
supported is SWx.
8950 AAA provides EAP-AKA authentication via STa to eHRPD UEs requiring access to
the EPC. It obtains subscriber authentication vectors from the HSS via SWx to do so.
8950 AAA also supports the S6b functions for access authorization, and for forwarding of
location updates from the PGW to the HSS.
8950 AAA maintains an in-core database of active LTE-eHRPD sessions, and this can be
accessed by a operator/administrator to monitor network usage. It can also process
requests from the HSS to update or terminate selected sessions.
8950 AAA provides an out-of-the-box solution for basic LTE-eHRPD interworking, but it
can be extended or customized for more complex needs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
8950 AAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upon installing 8950 AAA, an operator/administrator will need to configure Diameter
interfaces to HSGW, PGW, and HSS. Some configuration activity in all those nodes will
be required. No end-user provisioning is normally performed in the 3GPP-AAA (all LTE
user data resides in the HSS), but 8950 AAA can support locally provisioned data for
specialized customizations.
Advantages of the 8950 AAA

The Alcatel-Lucent 8950 AAA is designed with a modular architecture to provide the
highest levels of flexibility, performance and availability, and the broadest ranges of
scalability. Advantages of the 8950 AAA include:
Flexibility and performance
• Extensibility
– PolicyFlow AAA programming language for flexible service definition to provide
extreme configurability
– Strong authentication based on token cards
– Fully configurable accounting record creation
• Multiple configurations to support all environments, including:
– Standalone AAA server capability
– AAA with a pre-integrated LDAP directory server: Alcatel-Lucent 8661 DS
– AAA integration with the Alcatel-Lucent 8650 SDM for complete centralization
of subscriber profiles
– Available for the most popular platforms: Sun Solaris ™, Linux, and Microsoft®
Windows
• Highly flexible policy-management capabilities and a broad toolset of capabilities
enable personalized services, making the 8950 AAA the most flexible AAA server on
the market
• Competitive performance advantage
– Intelligent transaction processing of requests, including flexible retry/alternate
data source logic
– Software optimized for performance: fully multi-threaded application with
processor thread tuning to take full advantage of multiprocessor systems
• Server monitoring and statistics tools, including extensive logging capabilities such as
Syslog and SNMP
• Complete support for Proxy RADIUS and Diameter, including support for 3GPP
standards-defined Diameter interface to provide interoperability with IMS core
network components
• Support for both local and geographical redundancy for high availability and
improved resilience
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
8950 AAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Scalability and capacity
• Virtually unlimited capacity architecture that capitalizes on major IT innovations in
hardware and architecture
• Scalable to support the smallest to largest of networks
• Support for virtually unlimited number of subscribers, enabling service providers to
maximize one-time investments in network equipment while growing their customer
base

For documentation
To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, contact your local sales representative or use Online
Customer Support (OLCS): (http://support.alcatel-lucent.com)
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 8950 AAA, refer to the 8950 AAA Quick
Start Guide, 365-360-007.

Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 8950 AAA. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “8950 AAA”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
22 OAM&P products
22
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent Operations, Administration, Maintenance and
Provisioning (OAM&P) products that are used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
Layers of OAM&P support 22-4

About the Network Management Layer (NML) 22-4
About the Element Management Layer 22-5
About the Network Element Layer 22-5
1360 COM 22-6
About the 1360 COM 22-6
Changes in the 1360 COM to support the LTE 22-9
1300 XMC 22-10
About the 1300 XMC 22-10
Changes in the 1300 XMC to support LTE 22-11
1310 OMC-P 22-13
About the 1310 OMC-P 22-13
Changes in the 1310 OMC-P to support LTE 22-15
1357 IMC 22-16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the 1357 IMC 22-16

Advantages of the 1357 IMC 22-17
Hardware 22-17
Software 22-17
Changes in the 1357 IMC to support LTE 22-18
5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM) 22-20
Hardware 22-21
8950 SAM 22-23
About the 8950 SAM 22-23
Changes in the 8950 SAM to support LTE 22-25
9153 Operations and Maintenance Center For Radio (OMC-R) 22-27
About the OMC-R 22-27
Advantages 22-28
9253/9254 OMC-RAN 22-30
About the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN 22-31
Hardware description 22-31
Software 22-32
9256 OMP 22-34
About the 9256 OMP 22-34
9353 WMS 22-37
About the 9353 WMS 22-37
Changes in the 9353 WMS to support LTE 22-38
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9452 WPS 22-40

About the 9452 WPS 22-40
9958 WTA 22-43
About the 9958 WTA 22-43
Changes in the 9958 WTA to support LTE 22-45
9959 NPO 22-46
About the 9959 NPO 22-46
Hardware 22-48
Software 22-48
Changes in the 9959 NPO to support LTE 22-48
NEM 22-50
About the NEM 22-50
Changes in the NEM to support LTE 22-51
OMC-CN 22-52
About the OMC-CN 22-52
Changes in OMC-CN to support LTE 22-54
SMT 22-55
The SMT 22-55
How it works 22-55
Changes in the SMT to support LTE 22-56
TSIS 22-57
About TSIS 22-57
Changes in the TSIS to support LTE 22-59
WEM 22-61
About the WEM 22-61
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
The Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Performance management support for
the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution falls into the three logical TMN layers
defined in ITU-T Recommendation M.3010:
• Network Management Layer (NML)
• Element Management Layer (EML)
• Network Element Layer (NEL)
The topics in this section describe the three logical TMN layers of OAM&P support
available within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the Network Management Layer (NML) 22-4

About the Element Management Layer 22-5
About the Network Element Layer 22-5
About the Network Management Layer (NML)

What is the Network Management Layer?
The Network Management Layer (NML) manages the interactions between network
elements, without knowing the internal details of each network element. A Network
Management Server (NMS) provides oversight services to aid in managing major sections
of the network. According to the standards, there may be several NMSs within a network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the Element Management Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the Element Management Layer

What is the Element Management Layer?
The Element Management Layer (EML) manages individual network elements and sub
networks and hides vendor-specific management functions from layers above. An
Element Management Server (EMS) provides oversight and coordination of services from
groups of network elements.
About the Network Element Layer

What is the Network Element Layer
The Network Element Layer (NEL) provides agent services, mapping of physical aspects
of the equipment into logical representations. The network elements themselves
implement the NEL.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
1360 COM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1360 COM
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 1360 COM as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 1360 COM 22-6

Changes in the 1360 COM to support the LTE 22-9
About the 1360 COM

What is the 1360 COM
The Alcatel-Lucent 1360 Centralized Operations Manager (1360 COM) is a fully
featured, highly robust element management system (EMS) for central management of
the Alcatel-Lucent End-to-End IMS Solution. The Alcatel-Lucent 1360 COM features
several best-in-class attributes, including the number of supported network element (NE)
types, flexible deployment options, value-added vertical modules, and mass data
migration (MDM) tools for moving from previous Alcatel-Lucent EMSs.
The 1360 COM is a single and centralized EMS, combining the 1310 OMC-P and 1300
XMC functions into a single EMS.
Role of the 1360 COM

The 1360 COM provides an easy-to-use interface where all critical operational tasks, such
as performance monitoring, provisioning, security and fault management can be
performed.
In addition, the EMS can provide the following northbound interfaces that allow for
OSS/BSS integration with services providers: x
• An SNMPv2c interface is provided for the delivery of fault management information
• An SFTP interface is provided for the delivery of performance management
information in XML format A high speed machine to machine SOAP/XML interface
is provided for the delivery of high volume provisioning messages
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the 1360 COM
1360 COM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 1360 COM
The 1360 COM:
• Offers a single management platform, significantly simplifying IMS management and
utilizing a single login to manage all elements
• Delivers detailed, effective management reports and analyses
• Pro-actively manages the network, solving problems before they occur and reducing
down time and impact to end users
• Increases speed and accuracy for new subscriber deployments
• Decreases the operational expenses associated with managed networks
• Allows for further analysis and provides sophisticated network management tools
The 1360 COM is also flexible and scalable, managing all network sizes.
The 1360 COM EMS fits into the Telecommunications Management Network (TMN)
architecture at the element management layer. The EMS provides an integrated solution
for Fault Management (FM), Configuration Management (CM), Performance
Management (PM) and security functions.
The 1360 COM client provides an Oracle®Java™-based GUI that runs on a standard PC
equipped with Microsoft® Windows® platforms (Windows XP).
Use of the 1360 COM

The main functions provided by the 1360 COM include the following:
• Management of network elements
• A view of the network topology that covers all the network and provides an animated
tree / view of the network
• Alarm collection and centralized alarm management
• Customizable, centralized collection of performance-related information
• Centralized configuration management
• Centralized operations and profile management
• Northbound interface for OSS access
• Optional Northbound interface for SOAP/XML access
• Optional Centralized NE software download and backup/restore
• Optional Advanced Reporting System (ARS), customizable, flexible web-based
reporting tool (inventory data, traffic reporting, PM analysis)
• Log management
• 1360 COM platform management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the 1360 COM
1360 COM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 1360 COM consolidates operations management for the following NE architectures:
• Alcatel-Lucent IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) reference architecture: distributed or
integrated configurations using the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 IP Call Server (ICS)
• Decomposed access and peering (Alcatel-Lucent IP Access Border solution and
Alcatel-Lucent IP Peering Border solution) and the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 IP Border
Controller - 4 (IBC-4)
• Alcatel-Lucent Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) gateway solutions and
tandem switch solutions, featuring the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 Media Gateway
Controller - 8 (MGC-8)
• Alcatel-Lucent IP-based applications (5410 Presence Server [PS], 5410 XML
Document Management Server [XDMS], 5430 Multimedia Instant Messaging
[MMIM], and so on)
• Other IMS-based components, such as the Alcatel-Lucent 8650 Subscriber Data
Manager (SDM)
In addition, the 1360 COM is the element manager for the:
• Alcatel-Lucent 5420 Converged Telephony Server (CTS),
• Alcatel-Lucent 5420 Service Continuity Gateway (SCG),
• Alcatel-Lucent 5060 MGC-8,
• Alcatel-Lucent 5450 IP Session Controller (ISC),
• Alcatel-Lucent 5060 ICS,
• Alcatel-Lucent 7510/7515/7520 Media Gateway (MGW),
• Alcatel-Lucent 5900 Media resource Function (5900 MRF),
• Alcatel-Lucent 8650 SDM,
• Alcatel-Lucent 5060 IBC-4,
• Alcatel-Lucent 5410 PS,
• Alcatel-Lucent 5430 MMIM,
• Alcatel-Lucent 5400 IMS Application Server (IAS),
• Alcatel-Lucent 5060 Wireless Call Server (WCS),
• Alcatel-Lucent 7500 Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN),
• and Alcatel-Lucent 8615 IeCCF.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products Changes in the 1360 COM to support the LTE
1360 COM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes in the 1360 COM to support the LTE

Purpose
This section describes any changes in the 1360 COM when it is used in the
1360 COM in LTE

The 1360 COM is one product that covers IMS and may cover LTE as well, if the
Network Elements part of an LTE network is covered by the XMC. There is no change
between COM in an IMS context and COM in an LTE context.

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 1360 COM, see Alcatel-Lucent 1360
COM Product Description.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 1360 COM. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “1360 COM”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
1300 XMC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1300 XMC
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 1300 XMC as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 1300 XMC 22-10

Changes in the 1300 XMC to support LTE 22-11
About the 1300 XMC

What is the 1300 XMC?
The Alcatel-Lucent 1300 Cross-Domain Management Center (XMC) integrates
management of Next Generation Network and IP Multimedia Subsystem (NGN/IMS)
products, including fixed and mobile access, Packet Switching Network, and Unlicensed
Mobile Access (UMA).
Role of the 1300 XMC

Thanks to its portal architecture, the 1300 XMC is well suited to support the migration of
legacy networks. It acts as an umbrella on top of the installed base, allowing supervision
and navigation of the:
• Alcatel-Lucent 1300 CMC,
• Alcatel-Lucent 1300 OMC-CS,
• Alcatel-Lucent 1300 OMC-PS,
• Alcatel-Lucent 1310 OMC-P.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1300 XMC also provides the corresponding Operations Support
System (OSS) Application Programming Interfaces (APIs), such as SNMP interfaces for
Fault Management and 3GPP R6 interfaces (Fault Management and Performance
Management). Deployed on both HP UX and HP Linux baseline, 1300 XMC covers all
Tier 1, 2, and 3 scalability requirements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the 1300 XMC
1300 XMC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 1300 XMC
The 1300 XMC is the management system of the both Fixed Networks and Mobile
Networks, covering both Circuit and Packet Switched. The 1300 XMC encompasses the
centralized element management of these NEs and some network management functions
• Unified platform administration mechanisms
• Single platform login and common security management mechanisms;
• Common alarm management for all the managed elements
• Common performance management for all the managed elements
• Common network hierarchical system view for the managed network
Uses of the 1300 XMC

The main functions provided by the 1300 XMC include the following:
• Management of network elements
• A view of the network topology that covers all the network and provides an animated
tree / view of the network
• Alarm collection and centralized alarm management
• Customizable, centralized collection of performance-related information
• Seamless navigation between integrated and non integrated (distributed) applications
• Centralized operations and profile management
• Northbound interface for OSS access
• Optional Northbound interface for SOAP/XML access
• Centralized NE software download and backup/restore
• Log management
• XMC platform management
Changes in the 1300 XMC to support LTE

Purpose
This section describes any changes in the 1300 XMC when it is used in the
1300 XMC in LTE

The 1300 XMC is one product that covers IMS and may cover LTE as well, if the
Network Elements part of an LTE network are covered by the XMC. There is no change
between XMC in an IMS context and XMC in an LTE context.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products For further information
1300 XMC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 1300 XMC, see Alcatel-Lucent 1300
XMC Product description, 3DN 00801 ABAA DEZZA.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 1300 XMC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “1300 XMC”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
1310 OMC-P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1310 OMC-P
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 1310 OMC-P as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 1310 OMC-P 22-13

Changes in the 1310 OMC-P to support LTE 22-15
About the 1310 OMC-P

What is the 1310 OMC-P?
The Alcatel-Lucent 1310 Operations and Management Console – Plus (OMC-P) is an
Operations and Maintenance Center used to support the Control Platforms (1000 and
1800 Models), the Gateway Platform (Formerly the Plexus™ 9000), Compact Switch,
Network Controller, Network Gateway, Signaling Gateway, and related platforms,
regardless of applications and nodal configurations.
Role of the 1310 OMC-P

The 1310 OMC-P provides an easy-to-use interface where all critical operations tasks,
such as performance monitoring, provisioning, security, and fault management, can be
performed.
In addition, the EMS can provide the following northbound interfaces that allow for
OSS/BSS integration with services providers:
• An SNMPv2c interface is provided for the delivery of fault management information
• An SFTP interface is provided for the delivery of performance management
information in XML format
• A high speed machine to machine XML/SOAP interface is provided for the delivery
of high volume provisioning messages
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the 1310 OMC-P
1310 OMC-P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 1310 OMC-P
The 1310 OMC-P:
• Offers a single management platform, significantly simplifying IMS management and
using a single login to manage all elements
• Delivers detailed, effective management reports and analysis, proactively managing
the network, solving problems before they occur and reducing downtime and impact
on end users
• Increases speed and accuracy for new subscriber deployments
• Lowers operational expenses associated with managed networks
• Allows for further analysis and detailed network-management tools
The 1310 OMC-P is also flexible and scalable, managing all network sizes and running
on multiple system platforms, including Sun Solaris and Microsoft® Windows™
platforms.
Use of the 1310 OMC-P in IMS

The 1310 OMC-P is a full-featured, highly robust element management system (EMS)
that provides fault management, configuration, performance and security (FCAPS)
support and value-added maintenance features to the Alcatel-Lucent IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS) core.
It is also the management system for all Alcatel-Lucent IMS-based and border-gateway
(IP-peering) solutions, the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 IP Call Server (ICS)-based integrated
IMS configuration, and the Alcatel-Lucent 5060 Media Gateway Controller - 8
(MGC-8)-based tandem-switch solutions.
In addition, the 1310 OMC-P is the element manager for the:
• Alcatel-Lucent 5060 ICS,
• Alcatel-Lucent 5450 IP Session Controller (ISC),
• Alcatel-Lucent 5450 IP Resource Controller (IRC),
• 7510/7515/7520 Media Gateway (MGW),
• Alcatel-Lucent 5060 MGC-8,
• and Alcatel-Lucent 5420 Converged Telephony Server (CTS).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products Changes in the 1310 OMC-P to support LTE
1310 OMC-P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes in the 1310 OMC-P to support LTE

Purpose
This section describes any changes in the 1310 OMC-P when it is used in the
1310 OMC-P in LTE

The 1310 OMC-P does not manage any more or less when LTE is used. Instead, the 5620
SAM is used to manage the LTE components while the 1310 OMC-P/1360 COM is used
to manage the IMS components.
The 1310 OMC-P and the 1300 XMC work together to manage the IMS core
environment. Starting with IMS 10.1, the IMS core will be managed by a single,
consolidated EMS called the 1360 Centralized Operations Manager (COM). The 1300
XMC is the only asset managing the PS/XDMS/MMIM, CMS, and SDM assets today.
The 1310 OMC-P does not manage these assets. The 1360 COM will bring the 1300
XMC and 1310 OMC-P together in a single EMS and manage all of the elements that the
1300 XMC and 1310 OMC-P manage today. The 1360 COM is introduced in LE4.0. For
more information on 1360 COM, see “1360 COM” (p. 22-6).

For documentation
For a detailed description of the 1310 OMC-P, go to: (https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/
portal/productContent.do?productId=null&entryId=1-0000000001749).
Click on the documentation available.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 1310 OMC-P. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “OMC-P”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
1357 IMC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1357 IMC
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 1357 Interception Management Center (1357 IMC) network
element as it is used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the 1357 IMC 22-16

Advantages of the 1357 IMC 22-17
Hardware 22-17
Software 22-17
Changes in the 1357 IMC to support LTE 22-18
About the 1357 IMC

What is the 1357 IMC?
The 1357 Interception Management Center (IMC) is the network element that provides
the administration function and OA&M support for the 1357 LIG(s) in the Alcatel-Lucent
complete lawful interception solution, the 1357 ULIS.
For more on the 1357 ULIS

For an explanation of the 1357 ULIS solution, see “1357 Unified Lawful Interception
Suite (ULIS)” (p. 12-2).
One IMC for all the intercepted networks

One IMC can handle multiple LIGs in multiple networks (Mobile-PS, Mobile CS, IMS,
IP broadband and so forth). Therefore one IMC is able to manage all the requests from the
Law Enforcement Agencies (LEAs) for all the networks of a service provider.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products Advantages of the 1357 IMC
1357 IMC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the 1357 IMC

Centralized solution
The 1357 ULIS (of which the 1357 IMC is a part) provides a centralized solution for all
of a service provider's lawful interception needs. This centralized management can be
used for multivendor mediation functions and can allow a network operator or a Law
Enforcement Agency (LEA) to centralize lawful interception management.
Other advantages of the 1357 ULIS are listed in “Advantages of the 1357 ULIS”
(p. 12-5).
Hardware
HP ProLiant DL380
The 1357 IMC runs on a generic platform HP ProLiant DL380.
Two configurations
Software
Common software architecture
1357 ULIS applications share a common software architecture that has optimized
flexibility and modularity to quickly introduce new “HIx” standards and associated
protocols.
Lawful Interception platform

1357 ULIS applications run on top of a Lawful Interception platform that is composed of:
• 1357 customized Linux Redhat enterprise distribution
• WALI (Web Applications for Lawful Interception) that is the Alcatel-Lucent LI
product middleware
• a database framework
• installation and maintenance services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products Software
1357 IMC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• pre-hardening and HA services
• server configuration services based on XML

Handoff Interface 1 (HI 1)
The Handover Interface 1 (HI 1) is a manual or electronic interface between the LEA and
the IMC. Through this interface, the LEA provides the warrant to intercept subscribers.
Handoff Interface 2 (HI 2)

The IMC uses Handoff Interface 2 (HI 2) to send the interception-related information
(IRI) to the Law Enforcement Monitoring Facility (LEMF).

The 1357 IMC uses the following interfaces:
• HI 1 — the provisioning interface. The HI 1 interface can be local to the 1357 LIG
using the GUI or direct from the LEA to the 1357 LIG using an electronic interface.
• HI 2 — the interface that is used to provide IRI to the LEA
• X1 — the target marking interface from the 1357 to the NE. This is a proprietary
interface.
• X2 — used by the NE to provide information related to the call to the 1357 LIG. This
is a proprietary interface.
• X3 — used by the NE to provide content of communication to the 1357 LIG. This is a
proprietary interface.
Changes in the 1357 IMC to support LTE

Minor changes
Minor changes to the 1357 IMC were required to include support for the new nodes
(HSS, MME and S/P-GW).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
1357 IMC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Customer documentation
An entire set of customer documentation for the 1357 IMC is available from the online
customer support (OLCS) web site for customers who have purchased the 1357 ULIS
product. For instructions on using OLCS, see “Accessing and navigating the OLCS web
site” (p. B-9) and other helpful information in Appendix B, “Resources”.
1357 LIG
The 1357 LIG is explained in “1357 LIG” (p. 20-3).
Training on the 1357 ULIS

Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 1357 IMC. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “1357 ULIS”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM) as used in the
Contents

Hardware 22-21

What is the 5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM)?
The 5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM) provides operators with a single, integrated
network management solution for EPC, mobile backhaul and the eNodeBs. The 5620
SAM enables end-to-end management of the supported network elements (NEs), the
mobile layer and the IP routing layer within the eUTRAN, Backhaul and Core Networks.
The 5620 SAM also provides flexible configuration and provisioning tools with
automation capabilities that reduce the possibility of human error for both network
elements and IP routing. Combined with powerful, standards-based OSS interfaces, the
5620 SAM provides operators with an advanced management solution that easily adapts
to their existing OSS environment for faster and more cost-effective integration.
5620 SAM overview

The Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM provides a comprehensive set of element, end-to-end
network and IP management capabilities for the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution
(7750 SR [SGW], 7750 SR [PGW], 9471 MME and 5780 DSC). The 5620 SAM
service-aware management solution provides the following key capabilities for the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution:
• Configuration management – allowing coordinated deployment of configuration data
across network elements operating at both the mobile and transport layers.
• Management of Solution eNodeBs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products 5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Multi-layer performance management - enabling aspects of self-optimization for the
EPC and transport layer.
• The fault isolation and recovery process is significantly simplified through multi-layer
fault correlation and root cause analysis (RCA).
• Visualization of the inter-domain relationships (between the mobile service and
underlying IP/MPLS transport layer) provides the operator with the ability to
understand the interactions between the layers and easily isolate/resolve network
issues.
• A comprehensive Service Level Agreement (SLA) monitoring capability that can
proactively detect and isolate SLA violations that can occur within any layer of the
network.
• End-to-end assurance capabilities which operate in a coordinated fashion across all
layers of the network, further easing the process of fault isolation and resolution.
• Management of multiple backhaul strategies employed in both LTE and 2/3G mobile
environments.
• Coordinated security infrastructure providing operator scope and span of control.
• Single GUI, which simplifies introduction and eases training requirements.
• 3GPP-based northbound interfaces that allows easier integration into higher level
OSS/BSS systems.
Capabilities provided
For more details on the capabilities of the 5620 SAM for LTE, refer to the "Service-aware
IP management for the Ultimate Wireless Packet Core" Application Note on
www.alcatel-lucent.com/5620sam.
Hardware
The 5620 SAM is supported on a number of different industry standard computing
platforms. The sizing of the computing platform is based upon network sizing and
operational requirements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM, related to the
Core documentation, see Table B-4, “Documentation Library for ePC and RAN - 5620
SAM Core” (p. B-15).
For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM, related to the
LTE documentation, see Table B-5, “Documentation Library for ePC and RAN - 5620
SAM LTE” (p. B-16).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 5620 SAM. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “5620 SAM”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
8950 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8950 SAM
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 8950 Services Activation Manager (SAM) as used in the
Contents
About the 8950 SAM 22-23

Changes in the 8950 SAM to support LTE 22-25
About the 8950 SAM

What is the 8950 SAM?
The Alcatel-Lucent 8950 Services Activation Manager (SAM) software is a
workflow-enabled provisioning OSS that provides automated flow-through service
activation and provisions services quickly and cost-effectively over multivendor,
multi-domain networks (IMS, wireless, DSL).
8950 SAM software lowers provisioning costs while enabling quick and flexible
introduction of revenue-generating new services such as DSL, 2G, 3G, IMS subscriber
and infrastructure provisioning, voicemail, SMS, etc. The flow-through provisioning
process enables services management for multiple systems and subscribers accurately and
without human intervention.
Role of the 8950 SAM

The 8950 SAM provides the features needed to automate and streamline service
provisioning within service provider networks. The intuitive user interface and innovative
workflow manger of the 8950 SAM make it possible to implement customized business
logic and manage the provisioning process end-to-end.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the 8950 SAM
8950 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Features provided by the 8950 SAM include the following:
• Single point of entry via open, published northbound SOAP/XML API. This interface
validates each request and selects an appropriate workflow using a set of configurable
rules.
• User friendly, web-based graphical user interface (GUI). This allows service
representatives to create orders, view details, search orders, manage manual tasks, and
run reports.
• Well-proven workflow manager. This coordinates provisioning steps and provides the
ability to retry and time-out requests, sets and tracks milestones, supports multiple
element provisioning, and manages fallout.
• A library of preconfigured reference workflows. These can be used ‘as is’ or
customized using SAM’s configuration tools to support additional services. The flows
support multiple element provisioning, rollback, fallout, and milestone tracking.
• Workflows that can incorporate both automated and manual tasks – executed either
sequentially or in parallel.
• Partitioned or structured service activation environment to manage Service Partners,
Resellers or special security requirements.
• A Configurable Southbound Interface (CSI). This takes care of communicating with
downstream systems to provisioning a broad array of services (multivendor,
multi-technology). These interfaces are based on standard CORBA, LDAP, and SOAP
mechanisms, and can be configured as necessary. SAM also contains a Software
Development Kit (SDK) for use in integrating new interfaces between SAM and
external systems to support a Service Provider’s activation needs.
• Provides field-proven scalability, able to handle millions of orders per month.
• Alcatel-Lucent can structure custom Implementation Services, Integration Services,
and Training Services to best meet your needs.
Advantages of the 8950 SAM

The 8950 SAM offers service providers a flexible software solution to activate
subscribers and provision infrastructure faster, better, and less expensively. It supports
service activation needs by integrating and controlling complex business and operations
processes for service provisioning, activation, and confirmation.
8950 SAM business benefits include:
• Increased profitability with cost-effective provisioning of advanced services across
your multivendor, multi-technology network.
• The ability to rapidly introduce new applications and service bundles to maximize
revenue and respond to competitive offerings.
• The ability to provision services faster and more economically, reducing OPEX.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the 8950 SAM
8950 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Improved customer satisfaction with accurate and on-time activation.
• Reduced costs by leveraging your existing operations systems with automated service
creation and activation for advanced services.
8950 SAM operational benefits include:
• Minimizes OSS duplication and complexity with a single Service Creation solution;
integrates with order management and billing functions for complete provisioning
flow-through.
• Reduces staff hourly costs by replacing manual provisioning with automation.
• Reduces provisioning errors with more automation, fallout management, better
processes and procedures, and tighter order management and control.
• Standardizes end-to-end provisioning around a well defined set of workflows,
business models, and service models. Create orders, track progress, alert on
exceptions, run reports, intervene manually if needed, or rollback if problems arise.
• Protects your investments by extending your existing OSS applications to provision
and deliver new services.
Use of the 8950 SAM in IMS

The 8950 SAM supports provisioning for IMS services.
The 8950 SAM:
• Creates work items that coordinate the information and resources to provision
services.
• Triggers workflows that contain the appropriate sequence of manual and automated
steps to provision new services.
• Tracks the progress of each work item through its workflows.
Changes in the 8950 SAM to support LTE

Purpose
This section describes any changes in the 8950 SAM when it is used in the IMS in the
8950 SAM in LTE

The 8950 SAM can coordinate provisioning for LTE subscribers by communicating with
8650 SDM/HSS, 5780 DSC (PCRF function) and optionally, a device management
system to perform various actions for the subscription in the network, such as Add,
Delete, Modify and Verify. One input stream to 8950 SAM can be configured to send the
appropriate messages to the downstream elements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products Changes in the 8950 SAM to support LTE
8950 SAM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 8950 SAM is available today for LTE provisioning as part of the overall ALU IMS
solution for LTE. However 8950 SAM does not have any specific workflows yet to
support LTE provisioning. Until the requirements for an LTE reference solution
provisioning scenario are available, Alcatel-Lucent will quote customization for each
customer.

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 8950 SAM, refer to the 8950 SAM
(Services Activation Manager) User’s Guide, 190-418-001.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on IMS. For a listing of these classes, go to Alcatel-Lucent
University at the following url: https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and
search on the keyword “IMS”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9153 Operations and Maintenance Center For Radio
(OMC-R)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9153 Operations and Maintenance Center For

Radio (OMC-R)
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9153 Operations and Maintenance Center For
Radio (OMC-R) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
About the OMC-R 22-27

Advantages 22-28
About the OMC-R

What is the 9153 OMC-R?
In the GSM world, the OMC or Operation and Maintenance Center is defined as a system
responsible for operation and maintenance of a given set of network equipment.
In compliance with the GSM specifications, the Alcatel-Lucent 9153 Operation &
Maintenance Center for Radio Part (OMC-R) is the product used to perform Element
Management and Sub-Network Management on the following BSS network subsystems:
• The whole set of BSSs, that is, BSCs, BTSs, TCs, and transmission systems
• GPRS Multi-BSS Fast packet Server (MFS), that is, the BSS part of the GPRS
equipment
The 9153 OMC-R is a management system based on one or several UNIX servers
connected with a number of user terminals via Ethernet-LAN or WAN (depending on the
network configuration) and with a number of BSCs and MFSs that have to be managed.
Role of the 9153 OMC-R

A single 9153 OMC-R configuration can supervise multiple BSSs (the BSCs with all
related BTSs), BSSs connected to different MSCs depending on the chosen configuration,
and multiple GPRS MFSs. Moreover, the OMC-R provides the capability to be connected
to a Regional or Network Management Center (NMC) via a vendor independent Q3 BSS
mediation interface or via any available external interfaces.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the OMC-R
(OMC-R)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Features of the 9153 OMC-R include:
• Hardware plug-and-play capability
• Wide choice of transmission options, including X.25, LAN, WAN, and others;
distance and transmission support are not an issue
• Access to network information with data on all network nodes displayed through
hierarchical views
• Powerful online documentation, using hypertext links and navigation technology
• Fault, configuration, performance, and security management
• Open architecture, in line with TMN principles and standards recommendations
(M.3,100, X.7xx and GSM 12.20), means easy interfaces to network management
centers and other systems via a comprehensive set of interfaces, including Q3
• In addition to these interfaces, Alcatel-Lucent offers a complete set of postprocessing
tools for network optimization
• You can run an entire region made up of 30,000 TRXs or 6,000 cells
Advantages
Advantages of the 9153 OMC-R
Advantages of the 9153 OMC-R include:
• Advantages of the 9153 OMC-R include:
• Various management features provide clear, comprehensive, customized, and
real-time information on network faults, performance, configuration, and security
• Manages an entire region composed of thousands of cells
• Operators save time and money on network monitoring
• Detection: graphic synthesis view, Fault localization, Alarm counters, and Alarm
severity assignment
• Tracking: alarm views with sort and filter, alarm reservation, and events/alarms
logging
• Resolution: alarm acknowledgment, contextual access to maintenance actions, and
fault correction
• Post Analysis: alarm history, evolution of events, and alarm metrics
• Real-time diagnosis of resources: usage state on demand
• Radio configuration management: online change of radio parameters from the
supervised configuration view, Offline tuning session of radio parameters
(Provisioning Radio Configuration), massive logical configuration update, cell
templates, GPRS/EDGE service handling, and radio configuration import/export
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products Advantages
(OMC-R)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Equipment management: hardware online extension via simple action in the
topological network view and equipment configuration export
• Software management: centralized management of BSS software packages from the
OMC-R and rapid rollout of new software with minimum impact on traffic

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent OMC-R, see 9153 OMC R Product
Description, 3DC 21076 0005 TQZZA.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9153 OMC-R. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “9153 OMC-R”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9253/9254 OMC-RAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9253/9254 OMC-RAN
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Two configurations
Two configurations of the OMC-RAN are available: 9253 OMC-RAN and 9254
OMC-RAN. There are capacity differences between the 9253 OMC-RAN and the 9254
OMC-RAN. However, there is no difference in functionality between the two
configurations.
Both can be used

Both the 9253 OMC-RAN and the 9254 OMC-RAN can be used with the Alcatel-Lucent
LTE End-to-End Solution. To indicate that, the term “9253/9254 OMC-RAN” is used
throughout this document, to represent both configurations.
Contents
About the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN 22-31

Hardware description 22-31
Software 22-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN
9253/9254 OMC-RAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN

What is the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN?
The 9253 Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Access Network (9253/9254
OMC-RAN) is a comprehensive graphical user interface (GUI)-based Operations,
Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning (OAM&P) platform that provides
enhanced, state-of-the-art OAM&P capabilities for Alcatel-Lucent 3G1X and EV-DO
networks.
Role of the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN

In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN carries out
• Provides the Graphic User Interface (GUI) used to manage the CDMA BTS in 3G
networks
• Provides the fault, configuration, and performance management interfaces for other
EV-DO components in the 3G network
• Provides 3G network elements' fault, configuration, and state information to SAM
overviews and allows access to OMC-RAN from those views
• Provides 3G Networks fault management information via North Bound Interface to
SAM for consolidation of all alarms in single stream
The OMC-RAN Solution is available as either a 9253 OMC-RAN or a 9254 OMC-RAN
Compact.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products Software
9253/9254 OMC-RAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
The OMC-RAN server runs the Solaris operating system and the OMC-RAN application.
For CDMA applications, a new OMC-RAN release is required along with each new
eHRPD release.

Use of IP operations network
The 9253/9254 OMC-RAN uses the service provider’s existing Internet Protocol (IP)
operations network to communicate with monitoring entities such as the Network
Operations Center (NOC), client terminals such as PCs and workstations, and the 9271
EV-DO RNC APs.
User interfaces
User interfaces
The primary user interface on the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN is a point and click GUI
interface known as the OMC-RAN GUI. The 9253/9254 OMC-RAN also supports a rich
variety of other interfaces. For more information on the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN see the
documentation listed at the end of this topic.

For more information on the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN, see the following documents and
classes.
Table 22-1 Documentation on the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN

401-380-086 OMC-RAN System Installation
401-380-091 OMC-RAN Object Description
401-380-092 OMC-RAN Command Line Interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9253/9254 OMC-RAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 22-1 Documentation on the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN (continued)

401-380-835 OMC-RAN Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and
Provisioning
401-662-113 User Interface Guide
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9253/9254 OMC-RAN. For a listing of these classes,
go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url: https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/
Saba/Web/Main and search on the keyword “OMC-RAN”.
For a list of recommended classes, see also the “Recommended classes for CDMA”
(p. B-25).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9256 OMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9256 OMP
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9256 Operations and Management Platform (OMP) as used in
Contents
About the 9256 OMP 22-34

About the 9256 OMP

What is the 9256 OMP?
The Alcatel-Lucent 9256 Operations and Management Platform (OMP) is the next
generation Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P)
platform for Alcatel-Lucent CDMA Radio Access Network. The 9256 OMP provides a
cost-effective Element Management System (EMS) platform to perform critical OA&M
functionalities, including: Configuration Management, Service Measurement, and Fault
Management of the ECP, DCS, RNC, and cell sites. It also provides generic retrofit and
software update automation. The 9256 OMP is necessary for the Alcatel-Lucent-provided
CDMA RAN network.
Role of the 9256 OMP

The 9256 Operations and Management Platform (OMP) is a required, adjunct, standalone
processor that serves as a user interface and general OA&M processing platform for
Alcatel-Lucent CDMA network elements. The 9256 OMP also hosts special tools such as
Software Update Automation (SUA) for performing retrofits and software updates,
service measurement collection, and so forth.
The 9256 OMP can be used to monitor many functional areas of the 3G1X and 1xEV-DO
Network, including the:
• 9290 MM-Based Access Manager
• 9290 MMC-Based Access Manager
• 9281 Packet Switch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the 9256 OMP
9256 OMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• 9271 1xEV-DO Radio Network Controller (RNC)
• 9290 Mobility Manager Application Processors (MM-APs)
• Base Stations
• Data links
• Trunks
Note that the 9256 OMP user interface functions are enhanced and available on the
OMC-RAN.
In addition to providing user interfaces, the 9256 OMP serves as:
• A data repository for applications such as the Read-Only Printer (ROP), Service
Measurement (SM) data, Per Call Measurement Data (PCMD), database backup, and
Software Update Automation (SUA) staging
• An emergency access point for the MSC
• An OA&M tool platform (for both Alcatel-Lucent and customer tools)
Advantages of the 9256 OMP

The 9256 Operations and Management Platform offers efficient management of CDMA
Radio Access Network elements for continued operations, maintenance, and performance
monitoring of the network.
Some advantages of the 9256 OMP include:
• Performs generic retrofit and software update automation support for the whole
network
• Allows local emergency access with Technician Interface Command Line Interface,
Status Display Page, and Recent Change and Verify interfaces
• Performs database backup and restore
• Collects and stores
• Provides cut-through access to Packet Switch (digital access and cross connect
switch) via Supplemental Trunkline workstation and Recent Change and Verify
interface
• Allows direct connection to Executive Cellular Processor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9256 OMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent 9256 OMP, see CDMA Network
CDMA2000 3G1X and 1xEV-DO Network Overview, 401-610-102.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9256 OMP. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “9256 OMP”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9353 WMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9353 WMS as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 9353 WMS 22-37

Changes in the 9353 WMS to support LTE 22-38
About the 9353 WMS

What is the 9353 WMS?
The 9353 Wireless Management System (WMS) delivers an integrated UMTS
management platform through which all NEs are monitored and controlled. The 9353
WMS provides the complete end-to-end management solution for UMTS networks. The
WMS manages the UTRAN part of the UMTS network.
Advantages of the 9353 WMS

Advantages of the 9353 WMS include:
• Provides the operator full autonomy with a self-sufficient set of capabilities, including
specific know-how in best-practices for Alcatel-Lucent network planning, building,
operating, and maintenance.
• Is designed for insuring carrier-grade network behavior across ends of the
Alcatel-Lucent Wireless solution, contributing in the areas of configuration control,
patching and upgrade, recovery, and permanent key network services availability
control.
• Preserves the operator’s existing OSS investments.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the 9353 WMS
9353 WMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Is designed for proper balance and clarity of responsibilities and complexity of
problem resolution between vendor, ISV, SIs, and the operator, leading to manageable
long term relationship and minimized operating and integration costs.
• Enables cost effective and fully controlled projects, supported by Alcatel-Lucent
service teams who help the operators plan, build, operate, and maintain activities upon
customer requests.
Hardware
The WMS solution is delivered on a scalable hardware platform designed to grow with
the rollout of UMTS services. The management functions are hosted by Sun servers and
associated storage arrays. A PC or workstation provides the client support for W-CDMA
network management.
Software
For a description of the software on the WMS, see the W-CDMA Alcatel-Lucent 9353
Management System Overview, NN-20500-031.
User interfaces
For information on 9353 WMS user interfaces, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Management
System - User Guide, NN-20500-032.
Changes in the 9353 WMS to support LTE

Use of the 9353 WMS in a combined GSM and LTE network
network, the 9353 WMS continues to be used for OAM&P on the W-CDMA portion of
the network.
Nothing changes
Nothing changes for the 9353 WMS when it is used in conjunction with a LTE network.
The 9353 WMS only interfaces with the W-CDMA network elements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9353 WMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation
For documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS, go to the following url:
“93”. To find all the documentation for the W-CDMA Solution, look under
“UMTS/W-CDMA Solutions”.
Select the Product Index and then search for “9353 WMS”.
See the W-CDMA Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Management System Overview, NN-20500-031
and the Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Management System - User Guide, NN-20500-032.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9353 WMS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “9353 WMS”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9452 WPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9452 WPS
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent 9452 Wireless Provisioning System (WPS) as
Contents
About the 9452 WPS 22-40

About the 9452 WPS

What is the 9452 WPS?
The Alcatel-Lucent 9452 Wireless Provisioning System (WPS) allows network
administrators to configure, change and optimize parameters of the W-CDMA access
network. Configuration management of mobile networks is a complex and tedious task
and this provisioning system has been specifically designed to cope with this complexity.
The system is a Java® based solution running on Microsoft Windows®-based desktops. It
includes a generic engine providing a wide range of configuration management
capabilities.
Role of the 9452 WPS

The 9452 WPS has been uniquely designed with the ability to handle and manage
network access objects and components with ease. It uses XML work orders to provide
the flexibility to enable multiple users, working concurrently, to configure the entire
network (or a subset / or single object only if required).
The 9452 WPS system works by loading a reference snapshot in an XML format and
incrementally modifying this view by generating XML work-orders containing create,
delete, and modify unitary actions that increment on the reference network view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the 9452 WPS
9452 WPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9452 WPS is composed of the following features:
• Network Tree - The main window contains a representation of the managed objects or
components in a Windows® Explorer type tree. Many applications are available
contextually from the tree allowing network administrators to navigate easily across
the entire set of applications offered.
• Component/Object Editor - Enables the creation of components or objects.
• Tabular Editor - Provides a tabular view of attribute settings and allows end users to
create, update, and delete attributes.
• Dataset - Offers a mechanism to build assorted lists of managed objects. Datasets
facilitate data manipulation by isolating working sets, and are created by selecting
components or objects from the network tree or, by converting existing datasets.
• Templates - Templates are user-defined containers of values shared among several
objects. The use of templates allows a reduction in the amount of information to be
typed in by the end-user, and more importantly, allows the network administrator to
benefit from Alcatel-Lucent engineering expertise.
• Network Checker - Enables network administrators to check the updated
configuration before applying it in the network. This functionality is exceedingly
important in order to avoid any potential network malfunction.
• Audit Capabilities - Allows network administrators to assess the 'health' of actual or
planned network configurations. It allows the comparison of two objects in order to:
evaluate an object against a template; do a global tabular display of a given object
class; do a global comparison against a given template; do a comparison against a
default value; generate a synchronization report over two days; or generate a
synchronization report between a target and an actual configuration of the network.
Advantages of the 9452 WPS

The 9452 WPS provides the following advantages:
• Market leader - Recognized by the market place as a leading product in its space.
With its large set of configuration management functionalities, high capacity, and
performance, it enables network administrators to configure and optimize
W-CDMA/HSPA networks quickly in an assisted and reliable manner.
• Capacity - Able to cope with the configuration of access W-CDMA networks
managed by up to two different regional operational centers. Up to 12000 NodeBs can
be managed.
• Revenue Generation - Allows rapid configuration and optimization of W-CDMA
access networks. It accelerates the deployment of new services and the revenues
associated with them.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the 9452 WPS
9452 WPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Rapid Deployment/Reliability/Flexibility - With its large set of features focused on
operational effectiveness and providing intelligent assisted capabilities such as
templates, the 9452 WPS enables reliable and rapid network deployment.
• Low Cost of Ownership - This solution runs on low-cost hardware. In addition, it
allows network administrators to efficiently configure and optimize the W-CDMA
network, resulting in a reduction of the total OPEX required to operate a W-CDMA
access network.
Use of the 9452 WPS in LTE Network

The 9452 Wireless Provisioning System (WPS) is a high-performance kernel that
provides support to design and configure Alcatel-Lucent LTE networks based on specific
network recommendations. The 9452 WPS offers a centralized view and configuration of
all LTE network elements (Es) and parameters.
The 9452 WPS kernel-based applications can be used for configuration at every stage of
LTE management including:
• Data engineering of a new network.
• Data engineering for network expansion and additional density.
• Data engineering for network optimization.
• Data engineering for upgrade provisioning.
The 9452 WPS manages configuration data coming from various sources and the file
format used is CM XML.

For documentation
For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 9452 WPS, see Table
B-10, “Documentation Library for LTE 9452 WPS” (p. B-20).
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9452 WPS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “9452 WPS”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9958 WTA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9958 WTA
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9958 WTA as it is used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Contents
About the 9958 WTA 22-43

Changes in the 9958 WTA to support LTE 22-45
About the 9958 WTA

What is the 9958 WTA?
The 9958 Wireless Trace Analyzer (9958 WTA) (formerly known as eDAT) is a PC
client-based application that enables rapid troubleshooting of subscriber problems by
producing detailed end-to-end analysis of calls. The 9958 WTA enables operators to
address the challenge of diagnosing and troubleshooting complex issues via call trace
data, thereby eliminating the need for costly analyzers and probes to be temporarily
installed on multiple network interfaces.
How it works
The 9958 WTA provides postprocessing of Call Trace data provided by Alcatel-Lucent
LTE network elements. The 9958 WTA supports tracing the entire call signaling from
inception to completion on the eNodeB and MME.
History
Prior to this release, the 9958 WTA product has been used internally by Alcatel-Lucent
service teams and for trials.
First commercial release

The first commercial release of the 9958 WTA product is occurring in the LE3.0 time
frame, and is intended for use starting with LE3.0 LTE networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the 9958 WTA
9958 WTA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Need for the 9958 WTA
LTE trials are operated with significant support from Alcatel-Lucent, however, when
switching to commercial deployments, operators will require increased independence in
solving their network issues by themselves. As more networks are deployed, the number
of networks will not allow Alcatel-Lucent to sustain the same involvement from the
services team.
Advantages
The 9958 WTA efficiently addresses common problems such as identifying the reasons
for subscriber authentication failures, and very complex ones requiring detailed protocol
layers message decoding. The 9958 WTA is also extremely helpful for troubleshooting
the behavior of new devices, or for performing in-depth analysis of call traces following a
subscriber complaint. In addition, as the 9958 WTA can combine trace analysis from
multiple network elements, complex time-intensive manual correlation of traditional
probe-based traces is avoided.
Unique software-based approach

The centralized, comprehensive and software-based approach of the 9958 WTA provides
many benefits for the service provider. For example,
• There is no need to deploy several analyzers over the different network element
interfaces, which results in significant CAPEX savings.
• The 9958 WTA ensures aggregation of the different trace elements from multiple
NEs, helping understand the overall, end-to-end message sequence.
• Trace acquisition and analysis can be triggered from the Network Operation Center
(NOC) without sending technical staff to different locations, thereby helping to reduce
OPEX.
• Since traces can be configured and analyzed from the NOC, where additional
information is also available from other important sources such as the 9959 NPO,
operators can more quickly identify fixes and optimizations.
• Trace activation can be handled in the different modes defined by the 3GPP
specifications (signaling-based or management-based activations). This allows, for
example, the trace activation to be propagated by a given MME to multiple eNodeBs
involved in the investigated call.
Software
WTA is a stand-alone software application, which can be run on a Windows platform.
The 9958 WTA uses the Reality Services Platform Satellite Agent software running on
each of the appropriate nodes to access the call trace data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products Changes in the 9958 WTA to support LTE
9958 WTA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes in the 9958 WTA to support LTE

No change
There is no change in the functionality of the 9958 WTA when the 9958 WTA is used in
support of LTE.

Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9958 WTA. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “9958 WTA”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9959 NPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9959 NPO
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9959 NPO with PCMD option as used in the Alcatel-Lucent
Contents
About the 9959 NPO 22-46

Hardware 22-48
Software 22-48
Changes in the 9959 NPO to support LTE 22-48
About the 9959 NPO

What is the 9959 NPO?
The 9959 Network Performance Optimizer (9959 NPO) is the Alcatel-Lucent
multi-standard performance management system. The 9959 NPO is available for
GSM/EDGE, W-CDMA/HSPA and LTE radio access technologies. The 9959 NPO allows
mobile service providers to monitor and optimize the performance of the radio access part
of their wireless networks.
How it works
The 9959 NPO uses a powerful database containing data from the 2G, 3G and/or 4G
EMSs in the network. The 9959 NPO imports into this database performance
measurements and calculated indicators as well as radio parameters, planned data,
topology information, inventory, alarms, and logs. This enables the operator to define
indicators combining all data sources.
Used with additional PCMD module

In the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the 9959 NPO is used with an additional
PCMD module. Adding the PCMD module to the 9959 NPO provides additional
granularity to speed up finding and solving key problems.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the 9959 NPO
9959 NPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What is PCMD?
Per Call Measurement Data (PCMD) is a feature that provides information on the key
procedures of each call: call setup and termination (success or failure), traffic area update,
and handover. For each call, PCMD data contains a great deal of information, including
the following:
• Identification for the call, such as the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI),
International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI), cell identifier (ID), eNodeB, MME,
SGW IP, and so forth
• The ongoing procedures and their success or failure (with detailed failure cause)
• The radio conditions (power, quality, round trip delay)
• Bytes transmitted
• Cells detected by the UE
How it works
When the PCMD module is added to the 9959 NPO, PCMD data is sent from the eNodeB
to the MME and then to the 5620 SAM. The 9959 NPO then retrieves the information
from the 5620 SAM.
Advantages
The primary benefit of the 9959 NPO is to consolidate into a single tool a combined view
of performance measurements, topology data and configuration information of the
cellular network.
In addition, the 9959 NPO delivers a rich tool set enabling QoS diagnostics, correlation of
performance and configuration, and QoS tuning based on network performance
collection.
The 9959 NPO also delivers advanced reporting functions on network QoS across
multi-standard wireless 2G-3G-LTE technologies.
Unique design
The 9959 NPO is based on a unique combination of an intuitive but sophisticated user
interface, multiple data sources, and a Geographical Information System. Because of
these attributes the 9959 NPO significantly increases the efficiency of a service provider's
QoS monitoring, troubleshooting and optimization activities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products Hardware
9959 NPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware
The 9959 NPO has a distributed architecture on HP servers (running Linux) plus
terminals.
Software
Software
The 9959 NPO has a multi-user client-server architecture and relies on the Oracle
database for storing performance data.
Changes in the 9959 NPO to support LTE

No changes
No changes are required in the 9959 NPO to support LTE.

For documentation
For documentation on the 9959 NPO go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
Documentation) and search for “9959 NPO”.
For documentation
Overview documents for the 9959 include:
• 9959 NPO Customer Product Overview
• 9959 Network Performance Optimizer Feature Planning Guide
For a list of recommended documentation on the Alcatel-Lucent 9959 NPO, see Table
B-12, “Documentation Library for LTE 9959 NPO” (p. B-21).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
9959 NPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the 9959 NPO. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “9959 NPO”.
Note: The 9459 NPO and 9959 NPO are the same product. From LE3.0 onward, the
name 9959 NPO is used even though some databases (and training classes) may still
contain the term 9459 NPO.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NEM
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Network Element Manager (NEM) as used in the
Contents
About the NEM 22-50

Changes in the NEM to support LTE 22-51
About the NEM

What is the NEM?
The Network Element Manager (NEM) is an application that provides OA&M functions
for the 9412 eNodeB.
Role
Think of the NEM as the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) for the 9412 eNodeB.
The NEM is needed (in addition to the 5620 SAM) to configure certain equipment-related
parameters, to direct the 9412 eNodeB to ping another network element (for
troubleshooting), and to support the 9412 eNodeB restore procedure.
How it works
The NEM is an application that runs on a PC.
Benefit
The NEM offers direct access to the 9412 eNodeB.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products Changes in the NEM to support LTE
NEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes in the NEM to support LTE

No changes
No changes are required in the NEM to support LTE.

User Guide
For information on the NEM, see the eNodeB Network Element Manager (NEM) User
Guide, 418-000-390.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the NEM in the eNodeB Maintenance classes. For a
listing of these classes, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url:
https://training alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and search on the keyword ”NEM” or
“eNodeB Maintenance”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OMC-CN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OMC-CN
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Alcatel-Lucent OMC-CN as used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
About the OMC-CN 22-52

Changes in OMC-CN to support LTE 22-54
About the OMC-CN

What is the OMC-CN?
The Operations and Maintenance Center - Core Network (OMC-CN), supports the
network elements that comprise the Core Network for both wireline and wireless
applications. The Core Network refers to the set of network elements used for the
switching and signaling portion of a Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) network. These
elements also offer features to subscribers, both residential and business.
OMC-CN acts as an interface between the Network Management System (NMS) and the
Network Elements (NEs). These NEs can be geographically dispersed over multiple
regions and can still be managed remotely from a central facility using OMC-CN.
Role of the OMC-CN

OMC-CN's role is to support the network elements that comprise the Core Network for
both wireline and wireless applications.
OMC-CN delivers the functionalities identified at the Element Management Layer (EML)
of the Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning (OAM&P). An
important distinction of OMC-CN is that it supports multiple network element types. That
is, OMC-CN is used as the Element Management System (EMS) for the Core Network
elements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the OMC-CN
OMC-CN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of the OMC-CN
Advantages of the OMC-CN include:
• OMC-CN supports the network elements that comprise the Core Network for both
wireline and wireless applications.
• OMC-CN is used as an Element Management System (EMS) for the Core Network
elements.
Use of OMC-CN in LTE Network

OMC-CN manages the 9380 3G MSC (9380 WCS) network element in the GSM/UMTS
network. During LTE network coverage buildup stage, the 9380 3G MSC provides
voice/SMS fallback to circuit core for LTE-capable UEs. OMC-CN provides the element
management layer for 9380 3G MSC call server in such GSM/UMTS and LTE coverage
areas.
Figure 22-1 Use of OMC-CN in LTE network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products Changes in OMC-CN to support LTE
OMC-CN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes in OMC-CN to support LTE

Purpose
This section describes any changes in the OMC-CN when it is used in the Alcatel-Lucent
OMC-CN in LTE
There is no change required for OMC-CN to support LTE network fallback coverage to
3G-MSC call server.

For documentation
For details on the Alcatel-Lucent OMC-CN documentation, see OLCS:
Manuals and Guides: (https://infoproducts.alcatel-lucent.com/aces/cgi-bin/
dbaccessproddoc.cgi.edit?entryId=1-0000000001245&doctype=DOC)
Release Notes: (https://infoproducts.alcatel-lucent.com/aces/cgi-bin/dbaccessproddoc.
cgi.edit?entryId=1-0000000001245&doctype=RLNT)
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the OMC-CN. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “OMC-CN”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
SMT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SMT
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Server Management Tool (SMT) as used in the Alcatel-Lucent
Contents
The SMT 22-55

How it works 22-55
Changes in the SMT to support LTE 22-56
The SMT
What is the SMT?
The Server Management Tool (SMT) is the management platform for the 8950 AAA
server.
How it works
What does the SMT do?
The SMT is an Element Management System (EMS) application that is used to configure
and manage all aspects of the 8950 AAA. The SMT is a stand-alone application that may
be run on the same computer as the AAA, or on a different computer.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products Changes in the SMT to support LTE
SMT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changes in the SMT to support LTE

Purpose
There are not changes in the SMT when the SMT is used as part of the Alcatel-Lucent

For documentation
For information on the 8950 AAA, including information on the SMT, see “Accessing
and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web site” (p. B-11).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
TSIS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TSIS
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Troubleshooting and Statistical Interface System (TSIS) as
Contents
About TSIS 22-57

Changes in the TSIS to support LTE 22-59
About TSIS
What is TSIS?
The Troubleshooting and Statistical Interface (TSIS) provides a robust web-based
Graphical User Interface (GUI) for troubleshooting, monitoring, and provisioning the
5110 Short Message Service Center (SMSC). TSIS is a stand-alone component that can
be configured to run either on the 5110 SMSC platform or on a stand-alone server. When
running on a stand alone server, TSIS allows operators to manage all 5110 SMSCs in
their network from a single platform.
Included with 5110 SMSC

TSIS is included with the 5110 SMSC and needed to accomplish many SMSC-specific
OA&M capabilities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About TSIS
TSIS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Key capabilities
TSIS provides many capabilities for the 5110 SMSC, including the following:
• Administration
– Control of users’ accounts
– Ability to assign users access to different levels of functionality within TSIS
• Dashboard
– Provide traffic statistics: Busy Hour Short Message (BHSM), Transmission
Control Protocol/internet Protocol (TCP/IP), Signaling System 7 (SS7)
– Display Central Processor Unit (CPU) usage
• Troubleshooting - For a detailed list, see “Troubleshooting assistance” (p. 22-58)
• Provisioning - For a detailed list, see “Provisioning assistance” (p. 22-58)
Troubleshooting assistance
The TSIS provides tools and information to assist in tracking down and resolving 5110
SMSC message delivery or service problems, including the following:
• Message submission and review pending and completed messages
• Details of past delivery attempts for messages
• One-click subscriber information
• Tracing
• Billing Call Detail Record (CDR) record review
• Port Status and Control
• Platform information such as Initialization (INIT) process, Real Time Data Base
(RTDB), SS7 link status, SS7 Stream Connection Transport Layer (SCTP) link status,
Mate Update Status, and software versions
• SPA information, such as Service Package Application (SPA) status, RTDB
connection status, Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) data view status,
and patches
Provisioning assistance
The TSIS provides provisioning assistance for the 5110 SMSC, including the following:
• SUBDB RTDB (including directory number (DN), Mobile Identification Number
(MIN), Cellular Office Service (COS), Rating, Signature, Copy, Forward, and Send
Blocked Notification)
• Subscriber Blocklists, Subscriber White Lists, Global White List
• Destination Routing
• Notification Forwarding
• Message Service Center (MSC) Table (MSC Point Code or Global Title Address
[GTA])
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About TSIS
TSIS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Broadcast List Groups and Members
• Banner Categories, and Banners
TSIS provisioning also supports Short Message Peer-to-Peer (SMPP) multiplex port
status, and rebuilding the SMPP Multiplex Table. It also supports bulk provisioning of the
Destination Routing tables, and the Subscriber Database (SUBDB) RTDB.
Hardware
The TSIS software package runs on the same hardware as the 5110 SMSC.
Software
TSIS is a stand-alone component that can be configured to run either on the SMSC
platform or on a stand-alone server.

The TSIS has no connections to other network elements (apart from the 5110 SMSC).
User interfaces
The Troubleshooting and Statistical Interface (TSIS) supports the following two user
interfaces:
• A robust web-based Graphical User Interface (GUI)
• A character-based Text Interface with limited functionality
Changes in the TSIS to support LTE

No changes
No changes are required in the TSIS to support LTE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
TSIS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For documentation
For documentation on the TSIS go to the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
Documentation) and search for “5110 SMSC”. TSIS is written up within the 5110 SMSC
documentation.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the TSIS. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “5110 SMC”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products Revisions to this document
WEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEM
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the Wireless Element Manager (WEM) as used in the
Contents
About the WEM 22-61

About the WEM

What is the WEM?
The Alcatel-Lucent Wireless Element Manager (WEM) is the management platform for
the 5060 WCS and 7549 MGW, used for the Global System for Mobile Communications
(GSM) and Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) networks.
Role of the WEM

The WEM offers simplified configuration, fault and performance management of the
Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS, all subtending MGWs and MSC pools server.
Use of the WEM

The main functions provided by the WEM include the following:
• Single Provisioning Interface
that:
– Allows the WCS and MGWs to be provisioned via one EMS, including WCS and
MGW nodes, slots, cards, protection groups, trunk groups, cross-connects, SGW,
IWF, etc.
– Provides integrated view of WCS and MGW HW and SW inventory
– Enables the integrated provisioning of trunks groups with automatic mapping of
WCS trunk groups onto MGW trunk circuits
• Unified Operations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
OAM&P products About the WEM
WEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
that:
– Provides centralized operations for WCS and MGW SW upgrades, backups, and
restores
– Central repository for WCS & MGW SW loads and backups
– WEM toolset integrated for both WCS and MGW, e.g. Call Trace performs both a
WCS and MGW trace
– Provides unified view of alarms, events, OM pegs, device status, etc. for the WCS
and all subtending MGWs
– Centralized management of all MGWs in a MSC Pool, by one designated primary
WCS WEM

For documentation
For a detailed description of the Alcatel-Lucent WEM, see Alcatel-Lucent 5060 WCS
Product Description.
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on the WEM. For a listing of these classes, go to
Web/Main and search on the keyword “WEM”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Appendix A: LTE interfaces
Overview
Purpose
This chapter lists LTE interfaces. Note that some of these interfaces are not used in the
current the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution.
Contents
IP connectivity A-1
Graphical view of the LTE interfaces A-2
Reference table of interfaces A-3
IP connectivity
Either IPv4 or IPv6
The IP connectivity between network elements can be either IPv4 or IPv6, though dual
stack is not supported in LE4.0 by RAN and EPC elements.
Note: IPSec over IPv6 is not possible in LE4.0 since IPSec is not supported on the
7750 SR security gateway.
IPv6 for OAM and Telecom traffic

The service provider can, however, deploy IPv6 for OA&M and Telecom traffic within
the service provider's transport network. Deploying IPv6 helps eliminate the need for
IPv4 addresses for the thousands of eNodeBs that will be deployed in the network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary A-1
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE interfaces Graphical view of the LTE interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Graphical view of the LTE interfaces

FDD Reference Architecture
The following figure shows the ALU End-to-End Solution with the architecture and the
LTE interfaces.
Figure A-1 End-to-End LTE Solution architecture and interfaces
For another graphical view of all LTE interfaces used in the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution, see Figure 15-1, “Network elements and interfaces in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution” (p. 15-3).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
LTE interfaces Reference table of interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference table of interfaces

Reference table
Note: This list of interfaces is provided for reference purposes. Some of these
interfaces are not used in the current release of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End
Solution.
Table A-1 LTE Network Interfaces and Protocols
Reference Point End Points Protocol LTE Standards

Reference
A, Ac(Cntrl), MSC<->BSS BSSAP 43.051
Au(User) 48.xxx-Series
A1 PS <->3G1x BS Proprietary (runs on top A.S0014-0
of UDP) (3gpp2)
A10/A11' HS Gateway <-> RNC 3GPP2 X.0087 A.S0017-0
(3gpp2)
A13 RNC <-> RNC 3GPP2 X.0087 A.S0007-A
(3gpp2)
Abis BSC <-> BTS TDM for traffic LAPD for 48.5x-Series
BTS supervision signaling
and synchronization.
Ater TC <-> BSC/MFS BTAP Proprietary
C MSC Server <-> HSS/HLR MAP 23.078
GMSC <-> HSS/HLR (CAMEL)
OCS <-> HSS/HLR 29.002
CAP OCS <-> MSC CAP 23.078
29.078
CPRI Radio Equip Ctrl<-> BBU <-> Radio Interface CPRI
RRU Specification
Cx x-CSCF <-> HSS Diameter 29.228
29.229
D MSC/VLR <-> HSS/HLR MAP 23.078
(CAMEL)
29.002
1 1
D /Gr 3GPP Server <-> HLR 23.234
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1 LTE Network Interfaces and Protocols (continued)

Reference
Ga SGSN <-> OFCS (CGF) GTP’ 32.295
S-GW (CDG) <-> OFCS (CGF)
P-GW (CDG) <-> OFCS (CGF)
OFCS (CDF <-> CGF)
Gb SGSN <-> BSS BSSGP 48.014
48.016
48.018
Gi GGSN <-> Packet Data Networks Diameter 20.061
29.274
Gn-C/S3 SGSN<-> MME GTPv1-c 29.274
Gn/Gp SGSN <-> GGSN UDP/IP GTP/V1 29.060
29.274
Gn-U GGSN <-> RNC GTPU 23.060
GGSN <-> SC-TDMA RNC
Gr SGSN <-> HLR MAP 23.060
MME <-> HSS/HLR 29.002
29.305
Gs MSC/VLR <-> SGSN SCCP 29.008
29.016
29.018
29.118
Gx PCEF <-> PCRF/H-PCRF/V-PCRF Diameter 23.203
PCRF <-> P-GW 29.212
Gxa Trusted non-3GPP IP Access <-> Diameter 23.203
PCRF/V-PCRF 29.21x-Series
HS Gateway <-> PCRF
Gxc S-GW <-> PCRF/V-PCRF Used only with S5/S8 23.203
PMIP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reference
Gy/Ro OCS <-> PCEF Diameter 32.240
OCS <-> P-GW/GGSN 32.251
OCS <-> SGSN 32.260
OCS <-> TAS 32.29x-Series
OCS <-> P/S/I-CSCF RFC 4006
Gz OFCS <-> PCEF Diameter 32.240
OFCS (CDF) <-> P-GW 32.295
OFCF(CDF) <-> S-GW 32.299
OFCF(CDF) <-> P/S/I-CSCF
Iub RNC <-> NodeB NBAP 25.43x-Series
SC-TDMA RNC <-> SC-TDMA
NodeB
Iu-CSc RNC <-> MSC RANAP/SCCP 25.413
SC-TDMA RNC <-> MSC
Iu-CSu RNC <-> MGW Iu-up/AAL2 or RTP 25.410
SC-TDMA RNC <-> MGW 25.415
Iu-PS SGSN <-> BSS RANAP 25.41-Series
SGSN <-> RNS
SGSN <-> SC-TDMA RNS
Iur RNC <-> RNC RNSAP 25.42x-Series
SC-TDMA RNC <-> SC-TDMA
RNC
M1 MBMS-GW <-> eNB M1 36.441
36.445
25.446
M2 MCE <-> eNB M2AP 36.441
36.442
36.443
M3 MCE <-> MME M3AP 36.441
36.442
36.444
Mc (G)MSC Server <-> CS-MGW H.248 29.232
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reference
Rf OFCS(CDF) <-> HS Gateway Diameter 32.225
OFCS(CDF) <-> TAS 32.240
OFCS(CDF) <-> P/S/I-CSCF 32.251
OFCS(CDF) <-> S-GW 32.260
OFCS(CDF) <-> P-GW 32.299
RFC 4006
Rx PCRF <-> Application Function Diameter 23.203
29.214
S1-MME MME <-> E-UTRAN S1-AP Access Stratum 23.401
(AS) Protocol 24.301
36.41x-Series
S1-U S-GW <-> E-UTRAN GTP-U 29.274
36.41x-Series
S2a Trusted Non-3GPP IP Access <-> PMIPv6 24.304
S-GW/P-GW 29.274 (GTP)
HS Gateway <-> P-GW 29.275 (PMIP)
S2b Untrusted Non-3GPP Access PMIPV6 29.275
(WLAN) <-> P-GW 33.402
S4 SGSN <-> S-GW GTPU 23.401
29.274
S5(non-roaming)/ S-GW <-> P-GW GTP 23.060 (GTPv1)
S8(roaming) 29.274 (GTPv2)
29.275 (PMIP)
S6a MME <-> HSS Diameter 23.401
29.272
S6b PDN-GW <-> 3GPP AAA Diameter 29.273
Server/Proxy
S6d SGSN <-> HSS Diameter 23.060
29.272
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reference
S9 PCRF <-> V-PCRF Diameter 23.203
23.215
23.402
29.125
29.215
S10 MME <-> MME GTPv2-c 23.401
29.274
S11 MME <-> S-GW GTP 29.274
S12 S-GW <-> UTRAN GTP-U 29.274
S-GW <-> SC-TDMA UTRAN
S13 MME <-> EIR Diameter 29.272
S16 SGSN <-> SGSN GTPv2-C 23.060
29.274
S101 HRDP AN <-> MME S101-AP 23.402
29.276
C.S0087-0
(3GPP2)
S102 3GPP2 1xCS IWS <-> MME UDP Over IP 23.216(SRVCC)
23.272(CSFB)
29.277
A.S0008-C
SBc CBC <-> MME SBc-AP 29.168
SGi PDN-GW <-> Packet Data Diameter, Radius 29.061
Networks
SGs MSC/VLR <-> MME SCTP SGs AP 23.272
29.118
Sh HSS <-> SIP AS or OSA SCS Diameter 23.228(Section
HSS <-> IP-SM-GS for SMSIP 4.2.4)
delivery 29.328
PCRF <-> HSS 29.329
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reference
Sp SPR <-> PCRF Not Specified 3GPP. ALU 23.203
uses Diameter 29.328
29.212 (Gx)
29.213 (Call Flows)
29.238
29.239
STa Trusted 3GPP Access <-> AAA Diameter 23.402
Server/Proxy 29.273
HS Gateway <-> AAA
Sv MSC Server <-> MME Sv AP 29.280
MSC Server <-> SGSN
Swa Untrusted Non-3GPP Access <-> Diameter 23.402
AAA Server/Proxy 29.273
SWm ePDG <-> AAA Server/Proxy Diameter 23.402
29.273
SWx HSS <-> 3GPP AAA Server Diameter 23.402
29.273
Um(Geran) MS<-> BSS GSM, GPRS Air Interface 25.xxx Series
44.xxx-Series
45.xxx-Series
Um(3gpp2) CDMA 1X UE <-> 3G1X BS
CDMA eHRPD UE <-> 1xEV-DO
BS
Ut UE<-> AS HTTP(s), XCAP (XML 24.6xx- Series
Based) (Supp Svcs)
33.222 (security)
Uu (LTE) UE <-> E-UTRAN Air Interface 36.xxx-Series
Uu UE <-> RNS Air Interface 24.xxx-Series
UE <-> SC-TDMA RNS 25.xxx-Series
26.xxx-Series
Wf Untrusted non-3GPP access Diameter 23.234
(WLAN) <-> OPCS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reference
Wo OCS <-> ePDG Diameter 23.234
X1_1 LIG <-> HSS SSH Proprietary
LIG <-> MME
LIG <-> P-GW
LIG <-> S-GW
LIG <-> P/S/I-CSCF
LIG <-> 3G MSC
X2(AN) eNB <-> eNB 36.42x-Series
X2 (LI) LIG <-> MME X2-AP, GTP-U Proprietary
LIG <-> P-GW
LIG <-> S-GW
LIG <-> P/S/I-CSCF
X3 LIG <-> MRF UDP Proprietary
LIG <-> P-GW
LIG <-> S-GW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Appendix B: Resources
Overview
Purpose
This chapter lists resources for further information on LTE and on the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Contents
Release Notes B-2

Planning Hub site B-2
Technical reading on LTE B-3
Accessing and navigating the LTE Library B-3
More about the LTE Library on OLCS B-6
Accessing and navigating the OLCS web site B-9
Accessing network element documentation through the Product Index B-11
Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web site B-11
List of LTE customer documentation B-13
Alcatel-Lucent official web sites on LTE and LTE-related topics B-23
Alcatel-Lucent training on LTE B-24
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Services support for LTE B-26
Tips for getting started with LTE Specifications B-26
Glossary B-31
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary B-1
Issue 1 March 2012
Resources Release Notes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Release Notes
Release Notes document
The Release Notes explain what particular product releases are included in a Solution
release.
A Solution release notes document is available, at the following site:
(https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/lte/)
To access the Release Notes, choose a Release and then click on the Release Notes. For a
picture showing this, see “Release Notes and manuals” (p. B-6).
Planning Hub site

Planning Hub Site
An LTE Planning Hub website has been created to provide planning information and
release notes to the customer.
To access the site

To access the LTE Planning Hub website, carry out the following steps:
• Go to the following url and log in:
• Select an LTE release
• Select LTE x Manuals and Guides, where x is the LTE release you are working
with
• Select Preliminary Solution Documents
• Select Planning Hub
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Resources Technical reading on LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Technical reading on LTE

Books for additional reading
The following books give a good overview of LTE and related topics:
• Sesia, Stefania, Toufik, Issam and Baker, Matthew, LTE - The UMTS Long Term
Evolution - From Theory to Practice, John Wiley & Sons, 2009, ISBN
978-0-470-69716-0
• Lescuyer, Pierre and Lucidarme, Thierry, Evolved Packet System (EPS) The LTE and
SAE Evolution of 3G UMTS
• Agilent Technologies, edited by Rumney, Moray, LTE and the Evolution to 4G
Wireless Design and Measurement Challenges
Accessing and navigating the LTE Library

What is the LTE Library?
The LTE Library is a complete set of LTE-related customer documentation, all in one
place to help the user.
Benefits
Benefits of the LTE Library include the following:
• A complete set of Solution-level documents that provide a framework for all the
network pieces
• A complete set of documentation for all network elements used in the Solution
• A separate site for each LTE Solution release
• Capability to search across all LTE-related documents
Release numbers may vary

Some customer documentation may have release numbers that don't match the current
LTE release. For information on what other releases map to the current LTE release, go to
the Release Notes, which are at the following url:
To access the Release Notes, choose a Release and then click on the Release Notes. For a
picture showing this, see “Release Notes and manuals” (p. B-6).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Resources Accessing and navigating the LTE Library
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Solution-level and core LTE documents
The following figure shows the Solution-level and core LTE documents for LE4.0.
Figure B-1 Solution-level and core LTE customer documentation
Dedicated site
LTE Solution documents are available from OLCS Services Collaboration at the
following dedicated site: https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/lte. This site
contains the solution-level documents and links to all the related LTE network element
documents (9471 MME, 5620 SAM, and so forth). The site is therefore “one-stop
shopping” for LTE documentation and software.
This topic describes the LTE documentation site on the online customer support (OLCS)
web site and tells how to use it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Resources Accessing and navigating the LTE Library
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About OLCS
The OLCS web site is part of the Alcatel-Lucent Customer and Business Partner Portals
(http://support.alcatel-lucent.com). The web site is designed mainly for registered
customers and business partners.
For a detailed overview of OLCS and instructions on its use, see “Accessing and
LTE documentation site

To find the LTE documentation site, go to the following url:
(https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/lte)
Limited to LTE customers

The LTE customer documentation site is restricted to LTE customers.
To find LTE documentation

To access documentation on the LTE Solution and on network elements used in LTE,
carry out the following steps:
(https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/lte)
• Click on the subsystem that the network element belongs to: for example, IMS or LTE
or 1xEV-DO.
• Go to the box at the center in the top of the screen called “Model/Subgroup” and from
the drop-down select the network element you are interested in, for example, “9412
eNodeB”.
selected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Resources More about the LTE Library on OLCS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
More about the LTE Library on OLCS

Introduction
This topic gives tips for navigating with the OLCS LTE Library.
OLCS access
The LTE Solutions Documents and Software services collaboration area provides
one-stop shopping for solution and network element resources.
Figure B-2 OLCS access
Release Notes and manuals

Choose a release to access the appropriate documentation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure B-3 Release Notes and manuals
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Displaying documents for a single network element
Use the drop down box to select a document.
Figure B-4 Selecting a document in the OLCS LTE Library list
Note: The automatic mapping mentioned in the figure means that when you start at
the solution level (LE2.1 for example) and then go to MME or SAM or DSC, the
correct NE versions correlating to LE2.1 are automatically displayed. If you use the
drop-down box, you will see all available releases of the NE software.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Resources Accessing and navigating the OLCS web site
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Accessing and navigating the OLCS web site

Introduction
The online customer support (OLCS) web site contains documentation and other
resources to help Alcatel-Lucent customers. This topic describes the OLCS web site and
tells how to use it.
About OLCS
Registration benefits
Depending on your service level as outlined in your customer contract, you can enjoy the
following benefits as a registered user:
• Create, view, edit, delete, and share your product lists.
• Receive 24/7 technical support service to help you operate and maintain your
communications network at peak performance.
• Keep current on relevant news and events with customized alerts.
• Review a library of technical documents, case studies, white papers, catalogs, industry
intelligence, and expert articles to help advance your research and business practices.
The level of benefits to which you may be entitled is determined by the customer contract
for your company or organization.
If your company or organization is a registered business partner, you can use the
following options:
• Gain access to powerful marketing tools that help you make the most of your
Alcatel-Lucent products and solutions.
• Enhance the cooperation and efficiency of your team by sharing documents and ideas
in the collaboration work space.
• Create, view, edit, delete, and share your product lists.
• Draw on our extensive library of case studies, white papers, catalogs, and expert
articles to advance your research and work.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Registering for the portals
To register for the Alcatel-Lucent Customer and Business Partner Portals
(http://support.alcatel-lucent.com), proceed as follows:
1. Click Register for Access.
2. On the Registration for access to Alcatel-Lucent Customer and Business Partner
Portals page, follow the steps displayed under Registration Progress.
You will receive an e-mail confirmation of your registration and site access privileges.
Alcatel-Lucent strives for two business days or less response.
How the site is designed

The “My Customer Support” portal is the umbrella portal to all of the underlying content
and tools. Product-specific content is organized by product. You can also gain access to
content and tools by going directly to each of the underlying applications.
Navigating on OLCS
The following primary ways to navigate are provided on OLCS.
• Jump to Content Page list
This option is the primary means to navigate between “My Customer Support” home
and the underlying applications or among the applications without returning home.
• Technical Content for portlet
This option allows easy access to product-specific content without navigating deeper
into the product pages.
• My Products
This option takes you to the My Products page, the access to both product-specific
content and any other available applications. The names of products for which your
company has service agreements or warranties are displayed on this page. If your
company has purchased a number of products from Alcatel-Lucent, and you wish to
shorten the list to only those products that you are responsible for, select Manage My
Products.
• Quick access portlets
These portlets provide easy access from the home page to heavily used applications
and useful support information. For example, the portlets provide quick access to the
“CARES” system and the “ask AL Knowledgebase”.
Technical support information

To locate technical support telephone numbers and e-mail contact information for your
area, use the Product Technical Support, Phone and E-mail Contact Information
drop-down menu.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Technical documentation on OLCS
Depending on the product, technical documentation may include:
• Manuals and guides
• Technical notes
• Release information
The Manuals and Guides category of documentation points directly to corporate libraries
for our highest volume products. In addition to listing documents available for online
viewing, the libraries may include CD-ROMs, videos, and other tangible media for
purchase. The libraries use “Topic Finder” which is a search engine designed to search
documents more efficiently than full text search.
Accessing network element documentation through the

Product Index
Product Index page
OLCS has a product index page that can be used to search for documentation on a
particular network element (for example, on the 9471 MME). To reach the product index
page, go to the following url:
(https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/portal/productIndex.do?path=Documentation)
Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS web

site
Introduction
This topic describes the IMS documentation site on the online customer support (OLCS)
web site and tells how to use it.
About OLCS
For a detailed overview of OLCS and instructions on its use, see “Accessing and
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Resources Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on the OLCS
web site
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IMS documentation site
To find the IMS documentation site, go to the following url:
(https://infoproducts.alcatel-lucent.com/aces/cgi-bin/dbaccessproddoc.cgi.edit?entryId=
1-0000000001901&doctype=DOC)
Limited to IMS customers

The IMS customer documentation site is restricted to IMS customers.
To find IMS Solution documentation

To access general documentation on the IMS Solution, for example, the product
description, carry out the following steps:
(https://infoproducts.alcatel-lucent.com/aces/cgi-bin/dbaccessproddoc.cgi.edit?
entryId=1-0000000001901&doctype=DOC)
• From the drop-down list to the right of the Model/Subgroup filter, select “IMS
Solution-General”
Result: A list of IMS Solution-level documentation appears.
• To select the product description document, scroll down to number 275-000-000, IP
Multimedia Subsystem Release x Technical Description (where x stands for a software
release), and click on the word “pdf” to the left of the title of the document.
To find IMS documentation on a network element

To find the IMS documentation for a particular IMS network element, for example, the
5420 CTS, carry out the following steps:
(https://infoproducts.alcatel-lucent.com/aces/cgi-bin/dbaccessproddoc.cgi.edit?
entryId=1-0000000001901&doctype=DOC)
• From the drop-down list to the right of the Model/Subgroup filter, select “5420
CTS”
Result: A list of IMS documentation for the 5420 CTS appears.
Product Index page

OLCS has a product index page that can be used to search for documentation on a
particular network element. To reach the product index page, go to the following url:
url to Product Index (https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/portal/productIndex.do?path=
Documentation)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Resources List of LTE customer documentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
List of LTE customer documentation

Partial list
The following tables give a partial list of the available customer documentation on the
The first table gives the list of the domains then the other tables give a list of customer
documentation per domain.
Table B-1 LTE End-to-End Solution Documentation Library
Documentation List Where to find the list

LTE End-to-End Solution See Table B-2, “Documentation Library for LTE End-to-End
Solution” (p. B-14)
ePC - 5780 DSC See Table B-3, “Documentation Library for ePC – 5780 DSC”
(p. B-15)
ePC and RAN – 5620 SAM Core See Table B-4, “Documentation Library for ePC and RAN - 5620
SAM Core” (p. B-15)
ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM LTE See Table B-5, “Documentation Library for ePC and RAN - 5620
SAM LTE” (p. B-16)
ePC - 9471 MME See Table B-6, “Documentation Library for ePC – 9471 MME”
(p. B-16)
ePC - 7750 SR (backhaul and See Table B-7, “Documentation Library for ePC – 7750 SR
PGW/GGSN & SGW support) (Backhaul and PGW/GGSN/SGW support)” (p. B-17)
ePC – 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN & SGW) See Table B-8, “Documentation Library for ePC – 7750 SR
(PGW/GGSN/SGW)” (p. B-18)
LTE RAN Access See Table B-9, “Documentation Library for LTE RAN Access”
• LTE RAN Concept Guides (p. B-18)
• LTE RAN Reference Guides
• LTE RAN Network
Re-configuration and Activation
Procedures
• LTE 9412 eNodeB Guides
• LTE 9926 d2U BBU Manuals
• LTE 9412 eNodeB Compact
Manuals
• LTE 9460 Pico eNodeB Manuals
• LTE RRH Manuals
LTE 9452 WPS Guides See Table B-10, “Documentation Library for LTE 9452 WPS”
(p. B-20)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-1 LTE End-to-End Solution Documentation Library (continued)
Documentation List Where to find the list

LTE 9958 WTA Guides See Table B-11, “Documentation Library for LTE 9958 WTA”
(p. B-21)
LTE 9959 NPO Guides See Table B-12, “Documentation Library for LTE 9959 NPO”
(p. B-21)
CDMA - eBTS, eRNC See Table B-13, “Documentation Library for CDMA – eBTS, eRNC
” (p. B-22)
WCDMA See “Documentation for W-CDMA” (p. B-23)
3rd Party Components See “Documentation for 3rd Party Components” (p. B-23)
IMS Solution See “Documentation for IMS Solution” (p. B-23)
Documentation for LTE End-to-End Solution

Partial list of the available customer documentation for the LTE End-to-End Solution :
Table B-2 Documentation Library for LTE End-to-End Solution

418-111-000 LTE End-to-End Solution Solution Overview
418-111-001 LTE End-to-End Solution Operations, Administration and
Maintenance (OAM)
418-111-005 LTE End-to-End Solution Release Notes
418-111-006 LTE End-to-End Solution Software Upgrade Procedure
418–111–007 LTE End-to-End Solution Capabilities Guide Technical Description
418-111-008 LTE End-to-End Solution Call Flows with Performance
Measurements Technical Description
418-111-010 LTE End-to-End Solution Planning Hub Reference Guide
418-111-012 LTE End-to-End Solution Terminology Overview
LTE/DCL/APP/030940 LTE Network Capacity Monitoring and Engineering (LNCME)
LTE/DCL/APP/034072 Transport Engineering Guide (TEG)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Documentation for ePC – 5780 DSC
Partial list of the available customer documentation for the ePC – 5780 DSC:
Table B-3 Documentation Library for ePC – 5780 DSC

3HE 06673 AAAA 5780 DSC User Guide
3HE 06674 AAAA 5780 DSC Installation and Upgrade Guide
3HE 06676 AAAA 5780 DSC Integration Guide
3HE 06675 AAAA 5780 DSC Policy Management Use Cases
3HE 06928 AAAA 5780 DSC Planning Guide
Documentation for ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM Core

Partial list of the available customer documentation for the ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM
Core:
Table B-4 Documentation Library for ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM Core

3HE 06505 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM Glossary
3HE 06494 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM Installation and Upgrade Guide
3HE 06504 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM Integration Guide
3HE 06502 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM Maintenance Guide
3HE 06686 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM Network Element Compatibility Guide
3HE 06496 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM Parameter Guide
3HE 06557 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM Planning Guide
3HE 06473 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM Release Description
3HE 06499 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM Scripts and Templates Developer Guide
3HE 06497 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM Statistics Management Guide
3HE 06514 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM Supervision Module User Guide
3HE 06500 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM System Architecture Guide
3HE 06501 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM Troubleshooting Guide
3HE 06495 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM User Guide
3HE 06498 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM XML OSS Interface Developer Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Documentation for ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM LTE
Partial list of the available customer documentation for the ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM
LTE:
Table B-5 Documentation Library for ePC and RAN - 5620 SAM LTE

3HE 06510 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM 3GPP Interface Compliance Statements
3HE 06509 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM 3GPP OSS Interface Developer Guide
3HE 06507 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM LTE Alarm Reference
3HE 06503 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM LTE ePC User Guide
3HE 06861 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM LTE RAN Release Description
3HE 06508 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM LTE Parameter Reference
3HE 06506 AAxx TQZZA 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide
Documentation for ePC – 9471 MME

Partial list of the available customer documentation for the ePC – 9471 MME:
Table B-6 Documentation Library for ePC – 9471 MME

418-111-200 9471 MME Technical Description
418-111-201 9471 MME Operations, Administration and Maintenance
418-111-203 9471 MME Security Management
418-111-206 9471 MME Software Update
418-111-207 9471 MME Configuration Management
418-111-208 9471 MME Alarm Dictionary
418-111-209 9471 MME Observation Counters
418-111-210 9471 MME Site Preparation
418-111-250 9471 MME Chassis-only Site Preparation
LTE/DCL/APP/031094 MME LTE Parameter Guide (LPUG) for LM4.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Documentation for ePC – 7750 SR (Backhaul and PGW/GGSN/SGW Support)
Partial list of the available customer documentation for the ePC – 7750 SR (Backhaul and
PGW/GGSN/SGW support):
Table B-7 Documentation Library for ePC – 7750 SR (Backhaul and

PGW/GGSN/SGW support)

93-0070-08–xx 7750 SR OS Basic System Configuration Guide
93-0071-08–xx 7750 SR OS System Management Guide
93-0072-08–xx 7750 SR OS Interface Configuration Guide
93-0073-08–xx 7750 SR OS Router Configuration Guide
93-0074-08–xx 7750 SR OS Routing Protocols Guide
93-0075-08–xx 7750 SR OS MPLS Guide
93-0076-08–xx 7750 SR OS Services Guide
93-0077-08–xx 7750 SR OS Quality of Service Guide
93-0098-07–xx 7750 SR OS Triple Play Guide
93-0181-05–xx 7750 SR OS OAM and Diagnostics Guide
93-0184-03-xx 7750 SR OS Integrated Services Adapter Guide
93-0252-01-xx 7750 SR OS Video Integrated Services Adapter Guide
93-0262-02-xx OS Multi-Service Integrated Services Adapter Guide
93-0019-08-xx 7750 SR-12 Installation Guide
93-0032-08-xx 7750 SR-7 Installation Guide
93-0186-02-02 SR-Series Channelized OC3/OC12/STM-1 Circuit Emulation
Services (CES) CMA/MDA Installation Guide
93-0218-02-xx 7x50 MDA-XP Installation Guide
93-0235-02-xx 7x50 High Scale (HS) MDA Installation Guide
93-0253-01-xx 7x50 10 Gigabit Ethernet Tunable DWDM MDA Installation Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Documentation for ePC – 7750 SR PGW/GGSN/SGW
Partial list of the available customer documentation for the ePC – 7750 SR
PGW/GGSN/SGW:
Table B-8 Documentation Library for ePC – 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN/SGW)

93-0298-02-xx 7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway Configuration Guide
93-0299-02-xx 7750 SR OS MG Basic System Configuration Guide
93-0300-02-xx 7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway System Management Guide
93-0301-02-xx 7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway Interface Configuration Guide
93-0302-02-xx 7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway Router Configuration Guide
93-0303-02-xx 7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway Routing Protocols Guide
93-0304-01-xx 7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway MPLS Guide
93-0305-02-xx 7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway Services Guide
93-0306-02-xx 7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway Quality of Service Guide
93-0317-02-xx 7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway OAM and Diagnostics Guide
93-0363-03-01 7750 SR OS Mobile Gateway KPI/KCI Counters
Documentation for LTE RAN Access

Partial list of the available customer documentation for the LTE RAN Access:
Table B-9 Documentation Library for LTE RAN Access
Document Document Title

Number
LTE RAN Concept Guides
418-000-010 LTE RAN Customer Documentation Overview
418-000-011 LTE RAN Terminology
418-000-012 LTE RAN Overview
418-000-014 LTE RAN Release Operational Impact (ROI) Technical Description
418-000-015 LTE RAN Release Operational Impact (ROI) FDD Reference Guide
418-000-019 LTE RAN Release Operational Impact (ROI) TDD Reference Guide
418-000-134 LTE RAN Customer License Manager (using LKDI) User Guide
LTE/DCL/APP/ FDD LTE Parameters User Guide (LPUG) for LA4.0
031078
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-9 Documentation Library for LTE RAN Access (continued)

Number
LTE RAN Reference Guides
418-000-032 LTE RAN 9412 eNodeB FDD Parameters Reference Guide
418-000-033 LTE RAN 9412 eNodeB TDD Parameters Reference Guide
418-000-034 LTE RAN 9412 eNodeB Alarms and Events Reference Guide
418-000-035 LTE RAN 9412 eNodeB FDD Counters Reference Guide
418-000-039 LTE RAN 9412 eNodeB TDD Counters Reference Guide
LTE RAN Network Re-configuration and Activation Procedures
418-000-018 LTE RAN Release LA4.0 LA3.0.2/TLA3.0.2 to LA4.0.1/TLA4.0.1 Migration
Procedure
418-000-050 LTE RAN Feature Activation Procedure
418-000-051 LTE RAN IP security Integration Procedure
418-000-052 LTE RAN Migration to IP v6 (Telecom and/or OAM) Procedure
418-000-054 LTE RAN 9412 eNodeB Reconfiguration for 1588 V2 Synchronization
Procedure
418-000-055 LTE RAN VLAN Reconfiguration Procedure (FDD)
418-000-056 LTE RAN VLAN Reconfiguration Procedure (TDD)
418-000-140 LTE OAM operations for RRH Redundancy via Antennae Cross-Connect
User Guide
418-000-311 LTE RAN Reconfiguration Procedures
LTE 9412 eNodeB Guides
418-000-403 LTE 9926 BBU Technical Description
418-000-404 LTE 9926 BBU Maintenance Guide
418-000-460 LTE 9922 BBU (small) sBBU Technical Description
418-000-461 LTE 9922 BBU (small) sBBU Maintenance Guide
418-000-410 LTE 9412 eNodeB Compact Technical Description
418-000-411 LTE 9412 eNodeB Compact Maintenance Guide
418-000-420 LTE FDD RRH Technical Description
418-000-421 LTE FDD RRH Maintenance Guide
418-000-436 LTE TDD RRH Technical Description
418-000-437 LTE TDD RRH Maintenance Guide
418-000-390 LTE 9400 eNodeB NEM User Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-9 Documentation Library for LTE RAN Access (continued)

Number
LTE 9926 d2U BBU Manuals
418–000–472 9926 Distributed Base Station (DBS) Base Band Unit (BBU) Site
Preparation Guidelines
418–000–470 9926 Distributed Base Station (DBS) Base Band Unit (BBU) in PSU
Medium Outdoor Cabinet Site Preparation Guidelines
418–000–462 9926 Distributed Base Station (DBS) 9922 small Base Band Unit (BBU)
Site Preparation Guidelines
LTE 9412 eNodeB Compact Manuals
418-000-412 9412 eNodeB Compact Indoor Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-414 9412 eNodeB Compact Outdoor Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-416 9412 eNodeB Compact Indoor Rack Mount Site Preparation Guidelines
LTE 9460 Pico eNodeB Manuals
418-000-450 9460 eNodeB FDD Pico eNodeB Site Preparation Guidelines
LTE RRH Manuals
NOTE: In this document, the RRH is called “LTE RRH Product Family”
418-000-422 LTE FDD RRH 2x30W/2x40W 2600 MHz Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-424 LTE FDD RRH 2x40W 700 MHz Lower Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-426 LTE FDD RRH 2x40W AWS Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-428 LTE FDD RRH 2x40W 700 MHz Upper Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-430 LTE FDD RRH 2x40W 800 MHz Upper Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-434 LTE TDD RRH 2x20W 2300 MHz & 2600 MHz Site Preparation
Guidelines
418-000-438 LTE TDD RRH 8x5W 2600 MHz Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-440 LTE RRH Antenna Cross-Connected Site Preparation Guidelines
Documentation for LTE 9452 WPS

Partial list of the available customer documentation for the LTE 9452 WPS:
Table B-10 Documentation Library for LTE 9452 WPS

418-000-200 9452 WPS Software Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-10 Documentation Library for LTE 9452 WPS (continued)

418-000-201 9452 WPS User Guide
Documentation for LTE 9958 WTA

Partial list of the available customer documentation for the LTE 9958 WTA:
Table B-11 Documentation Library for LTE 9958 WTA

418-112-001 9958 Wireless Trace Analyzer Installation and User Guide for LTE
418-112-010 9958 Wireless Trace Analyzer Installation and User Guide for
W-CDMA
9YZ04122000PCZZA 9958 Wireless Trace Analyzer Installation and User Guide for LTE
and W-CDMA
Documentation for LTE 9959 NPO

Partial list of the available customer documentation for the LTE 9959 NPO:
Table B-12 Documentation Library for LTE 9959 NPO

418-000-124 9959 NPO Server and Client PC Site Preparation Guidelines
418-000-230 9959 NPO eNodeB and MME Indicators Reference Guide
418-000-231 9959 NPO PCMD Counters and Indicators Reference Guide
418-000-232 9959 NPO NUART Counters and Indicators Reference Guide
3BK 17446 5100 TQZZA NPO Introduction
3BK 17446 0018 RJZZA NPO Install/Configure Client Application on Windows XP
3BK 17446 0019 RJZZA NPO Install/Configure Client Application on Windows Vista
3BK 17446 4019 RJZZA NPO Install/Configure Client Application on Windows 7
3BK 17446 5142 PCZZA NPO Security Guide
3BK 17446 8120 PCZZA NPO User Administration Handbook
3BK 17446 2110 TQZZA NPO PCMD User Guide
3BK 17446 2111 TQZZA NPO WCT User Guide
3BK 17446 5110 TQZZA NPO Analysis Desktop User Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-12 Documentation Library for LTE 9959 NPO (continued)

3BK 17446 5111 TQZZA NPO Platform User Guide
3BK 17446 5112 TQZZA NPO Administration User Guide
3BK 17446 5113 TQZZA NPO Unavailability User Guide
3BK 17446 5114 TQZZA NPO Remote Inventory User Guide
3BK 17446 5116 TQZZA NPO Diagnosis Development User Guide
3BK 17446 5117 TQZZA NPO WEB Client User Guide
3BK 17446 5118 TQZZA NPO WEB Publishing User Guide
3BK 17446 5119 PCZZA NPO Export Interface User Guide
3BK 17446 5120 TQZZA NPO SNMP Interface for Traps Configuration User Guide
3BK 17446 5123 PGZZA NPO Engineering Guide
Documentation for CDMA – eBTS, eRNC

Partial list of the available customer documentation for the CDMA – eBTS, eRNC:
Table B-13 Documentation Library for CDMA – eBTS, eRNC

401-614-322 1xEV-DO Air Interface Performance Monitoring Tool
401-614-104 1xEV-DO Base Station Operation, Administration, and Maintenance
401-614-325 1xEV-DO Configuration Management Bulk Provisioning Guide
401-614-413 1xEV-DO Feature Provisioning Guide
401-614-101 1xEV-DO Radio Access System Planning and Implementation Guide
401-614-321 1xEV-DO Radio Access System Retrofit Procedures
401-614-102 1xEV-DO Radio Network Controller Operations, Administration,
and Maintenance (OA&M)
401-614-323 1xEV-DO RF Engineering
401-614-107 1xEV-DO Security Features
401-614-326 1xEV-DO Service Measurements
401-610-165 1xEV-DO Service Measurements Flowcharts
401-614-106 1xEV-DO Software Update
401-614-331 1xEV-DO System Capacity Monitoring and Engineering (SCME)
401-610-055 CDMA Network Input Messages
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-13 Documentation Library for CDMA – eBTS, eRNC (continued)

401-610-057 CDMA Network Output Messages
401-610-166 Status Display Pages (SDPs) Reference Guide
Documentation for W-CDMA

See W-CDMA Documentation Library for list of NE documents
Documentation for 3rd Party Components

Documentation provided via Starent Support Site only
Documentation for IMS Solution

See IMS Solution Documentation Library for list of NE documents
Alcatel-Lucent official web sites on LTE and LTE-related topics

Alcatel-Lucent LTE web site
http://www-lte.alcatel-lucent.com/#/home/ecosystem
LTE Solution customer documentation web site

LTE Solution customer documents are available from OLCS Services Collaboration at the
following dedicated site: https://services.support.alcatel-lucent.com/services/lte/. This site
contains the solution-level documents and links to all the related LTE network element
documents (9471 MME, 5620 SAM, and so forth).
ng Connect web site

ng Connect is an application-enablement and application design organization started by
Alcatel-Lucent to bring together stakeholders from traditional industries to do the
following:
• Accelerate deployment of new services and devices
• Drive new sources of revenue with new business models
• Expand the connectivity landscape
To access the ng Connect web site, go to the following link:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Resources Alcatel-Lucent official web sites on LTE and LTE-related
topics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
One of the most popular ng Connect products so far is an LTE-connected car. For more
information, visit this site:
http://www.ngconnect.org/ecosystem/connected-car.htm
High leverage networks web site

Alcatel-Lucent Mobile Backhaul Solution web site

To see this site, go to the following url:
Detail_000021.xml)
Alcatel-Lucent training on LTE

To reach the training web site
To access the Alcatel-Lucent training web site, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the
following link:
https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main
For more about the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution

For more about the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, see the TMO21020
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Overview class.
For more about LTE technology

For more about LTE technology, see
• LTW543W - LTE Overview
Recommended classes for LTE

For additional training on LTE, the following classes are recommended:
Table B-14 Recommended classes for LTE
Class Reference Class Title

TMO21024 Alcatel-Lucent Evolved Packet Core 9471 Mobility Management Entity
(MME) Technical Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Resources Alcatel-Lucent training on LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-14 Recommended classes for LTE (continued)

TMO21025 Alcatel-Lucent Evolved Packet Core 9471 Mobility Management Entity
(MME) Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning
TMO21026 Alcatel-Lucent LTE Evolved Packet Core (ePC) Technical Overview
TMO21027 LTE Solution Fault and Alarm Management
TMO18213 9400 LTE RAN Technical Overview
TMO18214 9400 LTE RAN Radio Principles
Recommended classes for 1xEV-DO

For additional training on 1xEV-DO, the following classes are recommended:
Table B-15 Recommended classes for 1xEV-DO

TMO21028W eHRPD Technical Overview
CL5594W 1xEV-DO HDLC to MLPPP Conversion
CL5597W Ethernet Backhaul (EBH) Cell Site Conversion
CL5661 1xEV-DO Radio Access System OA&M Hands-On course
CL8306 1xEV-DO Rev 0 RF Design Engineering and Call Processing
Recommended classes for CDMA

For additional training on CDMA, the following classes are recommended:
Table B-16 Recommended classes for CDMA
Class Class Title

Reference
CL5530AW CDMA Network Operations & Maintenance Center Radio Access Network
(OMC-RAN) Overview
CL5530B 9253/9254 OMC-RAN (Operations and Maintenance Centre - Radio Access
Network OA&M
Other classes
To see a complete listing of LTE-related courses, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at
https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main and search using the keyword “LTE”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Resources Alcatel-Lucent training on LTE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sign up for Alcatel-Lucent training
To sign up for a training, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url:
https://training.alcatel-lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Services support for LTE

Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent offers a wide variety of LTE Services to support service providers who are
evolving to LTE. For more information on the many types of services available, see “LTE
Services” (p. 2-13).
Tips for getting started with LTE Specifications

Introduction
This topic gives tips for getting started with standards for the Evolved Packet System
(EPS) and an overview of the standards themselves.
Reminder: “LTE” is not the official name

Technically speaking, the new network and the associated standards commonly referred
to as” LTE” are named the Evolved Packet System (EPS) and the name “LTE” only refers
to the radio access component of the new network. Though the name “LTE” is now
widely associated with the entire new network and is commonly used to refer to the
whole of the new network, the standards use the name EPS, not LTE, except when
referring to the radio access component of the new network.
Divided into stages

3GPP specifications are classified as Stage 1, Stage 2 or Stage 3.
Stage 1 specifications
Stage 1 specifications define service level requirements and normally capture the needs of
operators for a certain feature to be part of the 3GPP system. Reading Stage 1
specifications is normally essential for an engineer in product development, while it could
be beneficial for a product manager or a marketing person willing to understand market
requirements formally accepted by 3GPP to drive the specification of the EPS.
Stage 1 specifications are numbered like this: 3G TS 21.xyz or 3G TS 22.xyz where xyz are
digits identifying the particular specification.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Resources Tips for getting started with LTE Specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stage 1 specification for the ePS
The stage 1 specification for the ePS is 3G TS 22.278.
PS domain requirements apply to ePS

Requirements applicable to the PS domain of 3GPP system are largely applicable to the
ePS. These requirements are defined in 3G TS 22.101.
Stage 2 specifications define the architecture of the system. These specifications normally
include the definition of network functional entities and their role in the architecture, the
interfaces interconnecting them as well as message flows describing how these interfaces
and network entities interact. Stage 2 specifications for the overall architecture and core
network aspects (with some exceptions that we will not enumerate here) are numbered
like this: 3G TS 23.xyz.
Stage 2 specifications are normally developed within 3GPP SA WG2, but in some cases
they are defined by other groups.
Stage 2 specification for the ePS

The Stage 2 specification for the ePS is described in 3G TS 23.401. The Stage 2
specification for the ePS sets standards for systems based on GPRS tunnelling Protocol
(GTP). 3G TS 23.402 outlines the operation of the system for interworking with non
3GPP accesses – including CDMA. In the Stage 2 specification Proxy Mobile IP (PMIP)
was used.
How to connect to the EPC without LTE access

The 3G TS 23.060 standard explains how 2G/3G 3GPP accesses could be connected to
the evolved Packet Core even without any LTE access being deployed.
How LTE supports voice services

Several Stage 2 standards outline how voice services are supported in LTE. 3G TS 23.216,
“Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC),” defines the way a voice call that started
as VoIP in LTE can be continued over a legacy cellular access in the CS domain (that is,
as a normal CS GSM, UMTS or 1X-RTT call). 3G TS 23.272, “Circuit Switched (CS)
fallback in Evolved Packet System (EPS), Stage 2,” defines how to place a voice call on
legacy CS systems and use LTE only for Broadband wireless data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stage 2 specifications on QoS
To understand the way applications interact with the ePS to deliver the necessary Quality
of Service (QoS), and how QoS is handled in PMIP based systems, read 3G TS 23.203 on
the “Policy and charging control architecture”.
Stage 3 specifications define protocols used over the interfaces identified by Stage 2
specifications according to the behavior of the network element that was defined in the
Stage 2 specifications. The numbering of these specifications follows roughly this logic:
specifications are numbered as 3G TS 24.xyz if they relate to terminal to network
signalling protocols, or 3G TS 29.xyx if they relate to protocols between network
elements.
Key specifications
Key examples (and the most relevant) of these stage 3 specifications for the ePS are:
Table B-17 Stage 3 specification documents for the ePS
Specification Title
TS 24.301 Non-Access-Stratum (NAS) protocol for Evolved Packet System (EPS);
Stage 3
TS 24.302 Access to the Evolved Packet Core (EPC) via non-3GPP access
networks; Stage 3
TS 24.303 Mobility management based on Dual-Stack Mobile IPv6; Stage 3
TS 24.304 Mobility management based on Mobile IPv4; User Equipment (UE) -
foreign agent interface; Stage 3
TS 29.274 General Packet Radio Service (GPRS); Evolved GPRS Tunnelling
Protocol (eGTP) for EPS
TS 29.275 PMIP based Mobility and Tunnelling protocols
TS 29.276 Optimized Handover Procedures and Protocols between EUTRAN Access
and cdma2000 HRPD Access
TS 29.277 Optimized Handover Procedures and Protocols between EUTRAN Access
and 1xRTT Access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Security
In general, security specifications are numbered as 3G TS 33.xyz. Key security
specifications for the EPS are:
Table B-18 Security specifications for the ePS
Specification Title
TS 33.401 3GPP System Architecture Evolution (SAE); Security architecture
TS 33.402 3GPP System Architecture Evolution (SAE)
OA&M
Table B-19 OA&M specifications for the ePS
Specification Title
TS 425 Telecommunication management; Performance Management (PM);
Performance measurements Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
Network (E-UTRAN)
TS 32.426 Telecommunication management; Performance Management (PM);
Performance measurements Evolved Packet Core (EPC) network
TS 32.450 Telecommunication management; Key Performance Indicators (KPI) for
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN):
Definitions
TS 32.451 Telecommunication management; Key Performance Indicators (KPI) for
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN):
Requirements
TS 32.500 Telecommunication management; Self-Organizing Networks (SON);
Concepts and requirements
Self-establishment of eNodeBs; Concepts and requirements
Self-establishment of eNodeBs; Stage 2
Automatic Neighbour Relation (ANR) management; Concepts and
requirements
Self-optimization and self-healing; Concepts and requirements
TS 32.751 Telecommunication management; Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Network
Resource Model (NRM) Integration Reference Point (IRP); Requirements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-19 OA&M specifications for the ePS (continued)
Specification Title
Resource Model (NRM) Integration Reference Point (IRP): Information
Service (IS)
Resource Model (NRM) Integration Reference Point (IRP): Common
Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA) Solution Set (SS)
Resource Model (NRM) Integration Reference Point (IRP): Bulk CM
eXtensible Markup Language (XML) file format definition
32.761 Telecommunication management; Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio
Access Network (E-UTRAN) Network Resource Model (NRM) Integration
Reference Point (IRP); Requirements
TS 32.762 Telecommunication management; Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio
Reference Point (IRP): Information Service (IS)
Reference Point (IRP): Common Object Request Broker Architecture
(CORBA) Solution Set (SS)
Reference Point (IRP): Bulk CM eXtensible Markup Language (XML) file
format definition
Charging specifications
Charging specifications are still in the study phase.
Now defined in 3GPP

From release 8 onwards, LTE is defined in the 3GPP standards.
How to access
The LTE specifications documents are updated periodically and can be found at:
http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/specs/archive/36_series/.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Resources Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Glossary
Glossary
For an extensive glossary of LTE terms and telecommunications-related terms, go to the
LTE End-to-End Solution Terminology, 418-111-012.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Resources Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Appendix C: Alcatel-Lucent LTE
project release naming
convention
Project release naming conventions

Introduction
This appendix explains the conventions used in Alcatel-Lucent LTE project release
naming.
Conventions
The list of current project releases includes the following:
• LEx.x – End-to-End LTE Release
• LSx.x – Solution Product Release - EPC
• LMx.x – LTE MME
• LAx.x – LTE Access, eNodeB
Explanation
Alcatel- Lucent’s product release naming conventions are shown in this appendix. LE is
used for the end to end solution. LS, LM, and LA are used for the solution, MME,
eNodeB, and voice interworking components of the network, respectively. For product
release dates, contact your Account Representative.
Load conventions for the other network elements

Other network elements used within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, such
as the SGW and the PGW, have their own load numbering conventions. For a complete
list of all the loads for all the network elements used within the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution, see the LTE End-to-End Solution Release Notes. For information on
how to access the LTE End-to-End Solution Release Notes, see “Release Notes” (p. B-2).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary C-1
Issue 1 March 2012
Alcatel-Lucent LTE project release naming convention Project release naming conventions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Appendix D: Mobile Backhaul
Solution
Overview
Purpose
The key to controlling the costs of an LTE network is to control the cost of the backhaul.
The topics in this appendix describe the Mobile Backhaul Solution, Alcatel-Lucent's
answer for the twin problems of increasing demand for data transport and the large cost of
transport media.
Contents
Need for the Mobile Backhaul Solution D-2

About the Mobile Backhaul Solution D-2
Mobile Backhaul Solution architecture D-4
For help with your Mobile Backhaul Solution D-6
Training D-7
For further information D-7
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary D-1
Issue 1 March 2012
Mobile Backhaul Solution Need for the Mobile Backhaul Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Need for the Mobile Backhaul Solution

Need for the Mobile Backhaul Solution
As fourth generation cell sites are rolled out in support of Long Term Evolution (LTE)
services, and the increase in mobile data services continues unabated, it is expected that
average bandwidth requirements will increase to tens of Mb/s per site. To keep pace with
this growth, service providers need an end-to-end architecture — from cell site to core —
that supports a variety of network evolution alternatives and service provider
deployments.
To meet the explosively growing demand for enhanced mobile broadband services,
service providers need a new way to deliver increased bandwidth at lower cost while
providing the reliability and quality of experience of traditional wired networks.
About the Mobile Backhaul Solution

What is the Mobile Backhaul Solution?
The Alcatel-Lucent Mobile Backhaul Solution is a product offering developed by
Alcatel-Lucent that provides the industry's first and most comprehensive framework for
mobile transport evolution to all-IP.
What does the Mobile Backhaul Solution do?

The Mobile Backhaul Solution integrates multiple mobile transport technologies
including IP/Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS), Optical, Microwave, Digital
Subscriber Line (DSL) and Gigabit-capable Passive Optical Network (GPON) into an
end-to-end network architecture with more intelligence, flexibility, simplicity and
cost-effectiveness.
How it works
The Mobile Backhaul Solution supports the efficient, end-to-end mobile transport of
existing TDM-based and next generation packet-based mobile technologies
simultaneously over any media (including fiber, copper, and wireless transport) providing
flexible evolution paths for any last mile access. The Mobile Backhaul Solution enables
3GPP2 and 3GPP wireless network providers to transform and scale their networks,
leveraging existing infrastructure investments while evolving to all-IP networking at their
individual business pace and with the level of QoS required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Mobile Backhaul Solution About the Mobile Backhaul Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Scalable bandwidth at lower cost
The Mobile Backhaul Solution allows mobile providers to support new broadband mobile
services while lowering costs, achieving up to 44% Total Cost of Ownership (TCO)
savings, and improving overall network performance. To do this, the Mobile Backhaul
Solution leverages the optimal cost points of Ethernet, coupled with the proven
scalability, availability and service aware capabilities of MPLS, as well as customers'
existing infrastructure investments to provide flexible evolution options that satisfy
customers' new service demands.
Note that the 44% cost savings is based on a Bell Labs model. Actual costs savings will
differ based on differences in individual networks.
Support for All Mobile Services

The Mobile Backhaul Solution offers support for all types of mobile services. With the
Mobile Backhaul Solution, a service provider can do all of the following:
• Offer new mobile broadband services profitably: deliver voice, video, multimedia and
data services with high reliability, availability, and guaranteed QoS
• Support 2G, 3G, WiMAX and LTE services
Deliver triple play (voice, data and video) over fixed and mobile networks for seamless
delivery of all services
Service Awareness features

The Mobile Backhaul Solution provides the following in wireless networks:
• Service-aware access nodes that provide traffic prioritization in support of multiple
classes of service.
• Service aware packet transport for larger numbers of simultaneous users
• Service driven adaptive modulation, which provides air link bandwidth optimization
• Guaranteed Quality of Experience with end-to-end QoS management in real-time
Other benefits
Other benefits provided by Mobile Backhaul Solution include the following:
• Graceful introduction of LTE with the Mobile Backhaul Solution backhaul
components previously deployed for CDMA/1xEVDO or GSM/UMTS
• Seamless convergence of backhaul/backbone networks
• Support of flexible eNodeB access alternatives to Metro Ethernet network
• Flexible Ethernet backhaul alternatives supporting leased/owned strategies
• IP OAM and IP Management
• Industry leading integrated end-to-end management of both wireless and wireline to
simplify operations and reduce operating expenditures (OPEX)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Mobile Backhaul Solution About the Mobile Backhaul Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Delivers dramatic network simplification via advanced troubleshooting and SLA
monitoring tools
• unified operations
• simplified node, network and service-level provisioning
• End-to-End QoS between the eNodeB and the Evolved Packet Core.
• Provides scalable, multiservice transport in support of all mobile traffic (2G/3G and
4G/LTE).
Mobile Backhaul Solution architecture

Mobile Backhaul Solution architecture
The following figure shows the architecture of the Mobile Backhaul Solution.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Mobile Backhaul Solution Mobile Backhaul Solution architecture
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure D-1 Combined network management provided by the Mobile Backhaul

Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Mobile Backhaul Solution For help with your Mobile Backhaul Solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For help with your Mobile Backhaul Solution

Alcatel-Lucent can help
Alcatel-Lucent has a backhaul solution that provides a variety of ways to set up and
maximize a service provider's Backhaul Part of the Transport Network.
For help with design and implementation

Drawing on the expertise of Alcatel-Lucent in backhaul and traffic modeling, a member
of the Alcatel-Lucent Services team can put together a customized LTE backhaul solution
to fit the unique needs of a service provider network.
Alcatel-Lucent services offered include planning, design, and optimization for the
following parts
• Cell site terminating equipment
• Backhaul access network architecture, topology, and equipment
• Aggregation node placement and equipment
• Backhaul aggregation network architecture, topology and equipment
• Multiple Service Operator (MSO) aggregation terminating equipment
To contact the Alcatel-Lucent Services organization, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account
Executive.
For help managing and reducing ongoing costs

Reducing the cost and complexity of customer backhaul networks once they are installed
is essential to a customer's success with LTE. For information on Alcatel-Lucent's
solution for optimizing and reducing costs in customer IP networks, see Appendix D,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Mobile Backhaul Solution Training
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Training
Training
Alcatel-Lucent offers classes on IP Backhaul and Ethernet Backhaul. For a listing of these
classes, go to Alcatel-Lucent University at the following url:: https://training.alcatel-
lucent.com/Saba/Web/Main.

For further information about the Mobile Backhaul Solution, go to the following url
Detail_000021.xml)
or contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Mobile Backhaul Solution For further information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Appendix E: Defining and
displaying the user and control
plane
Overview
Purpose
This appendix gives background information defining the user plane and control plane
and explains how the user plane and control plane are shown in diagrams throughout this
document.
Contents
User plane and control plane defined E-1
User plane and control plane defined

Introduction
This write-up defines the terms user plane and control plane and explains how they are
shown in the following LTE network diagrams and throughout this document.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary E-1
Issue 1 March 2012
Defining and displaying the user and control plane User plane and control plane defined
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure E-1 Control plane and user plane as shown in network diagrams
Blue dashed lines

The blue dashed lines in the network diagram shown here refer to the control plane.
What is the control plane?

The control plane (also called control function or control path) is a portion of a channel or
protocol that carries signaling and control data. The signaling is used to establish, modify
and clear a call. Traditionally, the signaling can be either SIP signaling or ISUP signaling.
The SIP would be carried on a separate IP connection from the bearer functions on the
user plane. The same is true for ISUP signaling, where the signaling is on a separate
circuit from the user plane.
For LTE, however, the control function is always SIP signaling, never ISUP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Examples of control plane functions
Examples of control plane functions include establishing the call, conveying information
such as dialed digits, controlling features, and disconnecting the call.
Solid red line

The solid red line in the network diagram shown here refers to the user plane.
What is the user plane?

The user plane (data plane) is the portion of a channel or protocol that carriers user data
packets. In traditional circuit-based wireless networks, the user plane would carry voice.
The user plane also performs the bearer function. The user plane is also sometimes known
as the bearer plane.
For LTE, however, since LTE does not handle voice traffic, the user plane contains pure
data (non-voice) traffic.
What is the bearer function?

The bearer function is the function that performs any action that can be applied to a user
plane, such as inserting a tone or announcement or establishing a conference connection.
Separate network elements

The control plane and user plane are typically separated in an IP network and often
handled by separate network elements. This is true within the LTE EPC.
The EPC separates the control plane from the user plane (called data plane in the
following diagram). The control plane provides scalable, secure dynamic mobility and
connection management. The control plane also provides network-wide, real-time policy
control. The user (data) plane provides high aggregate throughput (over 100 Gbps) for
high bandwidth on-demand services. The separation of control and user planes allows
each element to be optimized for its function and to be scaled independently. The MME
provides control plane functions and is optimized for signaling. The SGW provides user
(data) plane functions and is optimized to provide data (bearer) services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary E-3
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Appendix F: What's new in the
Releases
Revisions to this document

Introduction
Listed here are the revisions to this document that were made in previous releases.
New material and changes in the LE3.0

A complete list of the changes and new material for LE3.0 introduced in this document
are detailed.
Table F-1 Technical information that is added or changed in LE3.0

— To give additional The section “Aids to using this document” (p. 1-3) was
information on how to added.
use this document
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary F-1
Issue 1 March 2012
What's new in the Releases Revisions to this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table F-1 Technical information that is added or changed in LE3.0 (continued)

— To help the reader To help the reader understand more about LTE and the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution, the
following additional figures and topics were added in
this issue:
• Figure 1-3, “Key innovations of LTE” (p. 1-17)
• Figure 1-4, “Basics of OFDM” (p. 1-19)
• Figure 1-5, “Comparison of OFDM and CDMA”
(p. 1-20)
• Figure 1-6, “Basics of SC-FDMA ” (p. 1-21)
• Figure 1-8, “Multiple antenna techniques”
(p. 1-23)
• Figure 1-9, “MIMO support on the downlink vs
MIMO support on the uplink” (p. 1-24)
• “Layers of OAM&P support” (p. 22-4)
• “IP connectivity” (p. A-1)
— To clarify The following topics were added:

Alcatel-Lucent's • “Converged RAN approaches” (p. 2-26)
Converged RAN
• “Converged RAN” (p. 2-26)
offering
• “LightRadio ™ ” (p. 2-28)
NM2345 5620 SAM migration In LE3.0 the 5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM)
from XMS LA2.0 (for replaces the 9453 XMS. The following parts of this
mgt of eNB LA2.0) book were updated for this:
• “Converged OA&M for LTE” (p. 2-11)
• “5620 Service Aware Manager (SAM)” (p. 22-20)
— To describe support for Added a new topic: “Use of Self-Organizing Networks

Self-Optimizing (SONs)” (p. 2-24)
Networks (SONs) in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution
— To show the Chapter 3, “LTE Services” was completely rewritten.
comprehensive range of “LTE Services” (p. 2-13) was also updated.
services offered by the
Services organization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LS33007-03 LTE to UMTS A statement was added at “Both voice and data
Inter-RAT PS Handover supported” (p. 4-14) that data handoffs from LTE to
using Gn/Gp (Pre-Rel GSM within the network are supported.
8) with measurements
LS31037-01 Enhanced A statement was added at “Both voice and data
Non-Optimized supported” (p. 4-9) that data handoffs from LTE to
LTE-eHRPD HO with GSM within the network are supported.
eHRPD Radio
Measurement
— Request from users for New chapter: Chapter 6, “UEs and Alcatel-Lucent's
information on Devices and IOT Team”.
Alcatel-Lucent's See also “About User Equipment” (p. 2-4).
interoperability testing
of UEs for service
providers
LS30035-01 Dynamic Quality of New chapter: Chapter 7, “Approaches for voice with
Service (QoS) for VoIP LTE”.
References to Voice over LTE (VoLTE) and the new
Voice Services chapter, Chapter 7, “Approaches for
voice with LTE”, were added throughout Chapter 4,
“Deployment options”.
LS33008-01 Circuit Switched Fall New chapter: Chapter 7, “Approaches for voice with
Back for LTE/WCDMA LTE”
The following additional information throughout the
document:
• “Providing Call Session Control Function (CSCF)
functions” (p. 21-27)
LS30035-01 Dynamic Quality of This information was also included in the new chapter,
Service (QoS) for VoIP Chapter 7, “Approaches for voice with LTE”.
References to Voice over LTE (VoLTE) and the new
Voice Services chapter, Chapter 7, “Approaches for
voice with LTE”, were added throughout Chapter 4,
“Deployment options”.
— Use of SMS within LTE New chapter: Chapter 8, “SMS with LTE”
— video over LTE New chapter: Chapter 10, “Approaches for video on
LTE”
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LS30032-02 A chapter on regulatory New chapter: Chapter 12, “Government-mandated
services, including the services”
Lawful Interception The 1357 Unified Lawful Interception Suite (ULIS)
solution for the solution was added to the Alcatel-Lucent LTE
Solution, was added. End-to-End Solution (along with descriptions of other
government-mandated services).
See also:
• “1357 LIG” (p. 20-3)
• “1357 IMC” (p. 22-16)
— To explain security New chapter: Chapter 14, “LTE End-to-End Security”

needed in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE
End-to-End Solution
Support of TDD in the To show the Solution's support for TDD, the following
Alcatel-Lucent LTE topics were rewritten
End-to-End Solution • “9926 d2U eNodeB Base Band Unit” (p. 16-39)
— support for TDD To show new versions of these Radio Access Network
(RAN) network elements to support TDD, the
following network element descriptions were updated:
14000.9 R-OCM “Reverse New topic to explain the use of the Reverse Optical
Optical Communication Communication Module (OCM) to share radios
Module” and Support between LTE and 2G/3G technologies: “Support for
for 3G-1X/LTE BTS the R-OCM” (p. 16-47)
— To correct a The following network elements were moved from
classification error Radio/core (hybrid) component into the Radio Access
Network (RAN) component:
• “9125 TC” (p. 16-7)
• “9130 BSC/MFS” (p. 16-10)
• “9370 RNC” (p. 16-19)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

— SPR is now hosted on Changed the descriptions in “5780 DSC” (p. 18-7) and
the 5780 DSC in “8650 SDM HSS” (p. 20-13) to show that as of
LE3.0 the Subscriber Profile Repository (SPR) in the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution is hosted on
the 5780 DSC instead of on the 8650 SDM HSS.
— To explain that the Sun “Capacity and performance” (p. 21-13)
N1290 is now in DA
mode.
— To clarify that both the “9253/9254 OMC-RAN” (p. 22-30)
9253 OMC-RAN and
9254 OMC-RAN can
be used with the
Solution
— To explain use of a 3rd “Special case” (p. 18-25)
party PGW in LE3.0
— To help users find the Added the following: “Release Notes” (p. B-2)
LTE End-to-End Pointers to the Release Notes topic were added
Solution Release Notes throughout the document.
To help users find the Added the following: “Planning Hub site” (p. B-2)
LTE End-to-End
Solution Planning Hub
— To help users find The following new information was added
customer • “Accessing and navigating the LTE Library ”
documentation on LTE (p. B-3)
and related topics
• “More about the LTE Library on OLCS” (p. B-6)
• “Accessing network element documentation
through the Product Index” (p. B-11)
• “Accessing and navigating IMS documentation on
the OLCS web site” (p. B-11)
— LTE 3.0 The table of customer documentation at Table B-1,

“LTE End-to-End Solution Documentation Library”
(p. B-13) was updated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

— LE3.0 To support the new functionality and enhancements in
LE3.0, the following network elements were added:
• “1357 IMC” (p. 22-16)
• “1357 LIG” (p. 20-3)
• “5100 CMS” (p. 21-11)
• “5410 PS/XDMS” (p. 21-20)
• “5420 CTS” (p. 21-23)
• “5900 MRF” (p. 21-30)
• “7510 MGW” (p. 21-33)
• “7520 MGW” (p. 21-42)
• “8965 C3S”
• “9471 Wireless Mobility Manager” (p. 18-60).
• “9958 WTA” (p. 22-43)
• “9959 NPO” (p. 22-46).
• “NEM” (p. 22-50)
• “SMT” (p. 22-55)
• “TSIS” (p. 22-57)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

— Changes to graphics for The following graphics were updated for LE3.0:
LE3.0 • Figure 2-2, “Major components of the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE network” (p. 2-7)
• Figure 4-1, “LTE Network Deployment Option
(data only)” (p. 4-6)
• Figure 4-2, “Major components of the LTE
Network Deployment Option” (p. 4-7)
• Figure 4-3, “ LTE Interworking with 3GPP2
Interworking with 3GPP2 Network Deployment
Option” (p. 4-11)
• Figure 4-5, “ LTE Interworking with 3GPP
Interworking with 3GPP Network Deployment
Option ” (p. 4-16)
• Figure 15-1, “Network elements and interfaces in
the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution”
(p. 15-3)
— — The 9926 D2U BBU is now known as the 9926

eNodeB BBU. This change has been made in this
document.
— To help the user New information was added to “5780 DSC” (p. 18-7).
— Support of FDD and To show the hardware versions of these Radio Access
TDD in the Network (RAN) network elements to support FDD
Alcatel-Lucent LTE and TDD, the following network element descriptions
End-to-End Solution were updated:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
New material and changes in the LE4.0 before this last issue
A complete list of the changes and new material for LE4.0 already introduced in the
previous issues of this document are detailed here.
Table F-2 Technical information that is added or changed in LE4.0

__ What's new in the In order to track the evolutions of this document
Releases whatever the LEx.0 Release, this appendix has been
reworked. As such, we have kept and moved all the
“LE3.0 History revisions” in a specific section, while a
new section is opened to keep all the LE4.0 History
revisions”. Then the last section is related to the last
issue of the current Release and is linked to the section
“Reason for reissue”.
Moreover, the Appendix “History of revisions” has
been renamed as “What's new in the Releases.
The following changes where done in Appendix F,
“What's new in the Releases”.
__ Changes to graphics for The following graphics were updated for LE4.0
LE4.0 • Figure 2-2, “Major components of the
Alcatel-Lucent LTE network” (p. 2-7)
The following graphics were added in the
documentation:
• Figure A-1, “End-to-End LTE Solution
architecture and interfaces” (p. A-2)
LS30033–03 LTE Offline Charging The following descriptions have been updated:
Support with ALU • Figure 2-2, “Major components of the
PGW/SGW and IeCCF Alcatel-Lucent LTE network” (p. 2-7)
on Ga Interface
• Appendix A, “LTE interfaces”
The following network element descriptions were
updated:
• “7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)” (p. 18-25)
• “7750 SR (SGW)” (p. 18-37)
• “8615 IeCCF (OFCS)” (p. 20-10)
The 8965 C3S network element description has been
removed as this material is not needed anymore
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

__ Ease the reading of this The following parts have been introduced in the
document document
• Part I: “LTE Solution Introduction”
• Part II: “LTE Network Provided Services”
• Part III: “Network Elements Overview”
LS39000–01 Public Warning System The following descriptions have been updated:
(Commercial Mobile • Figure 2-2, “Major components of the
Alert System or Alcatel-Lucent LTE network” (p. 2-7)
CMAS)
• Appendix A, “LTE interfaces”
A new chapter is added in Part II: “LTE Network
Provided Services”
• Chapter 9, “Cell Broadcast with LTE”
updated:
• “About the 9471 Mobility Management Entity
(MME)” (p. 18-52)
The following network element were added:
• “5140 BMC” (p. 21-16)
LS33048–01 CSFB to The following descriptions have been updated:

UTRAN/GERAN • “The CSFB approach” (p. 7-5)
enhancements with
• “The VoLTE approach” (p. 7-9)
enhanced Redirection
• “Comparison of approaches for voice with LTE”
(p. 7-27)
• “Emergency Services” (p. 12-8)
updated:
• “5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF)” (p. 21-26)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LS115695 Solution Level FID for The following network element descriptions were
1900Mhz support of updated:
LTE for Sprint, based • “LTE RRH Product Family” (p. 16-31)
on
• L114561 PCS Band
Distributed eNB
configurations in
LA4.0.1
• L115461
LTE/CDMA
technology OAM
support
T113799 TD-LTE_2.6G_RRH8x5_ The following network element descriptions were
PU requirements updated:
_ eNodeB HW evolutions The following network element of the Radio Access

Network (RAN) descriptions were updated with the
list of hardware versions of the components supported
in LE4.0:
• “9412 eNodeB” (p. 16-22)
— — Following a remark , it seems that 9926 eNodeB BBU

is known as 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU. This change has
been made in this document.
updated:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LS31001–03 7750 PGW The following descriptions have been updated:
interworking with • “LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network
eHRPD Deployment Option: eHRPD 1xEVDO” (p. 4-9)
updated:
• “5780 DSC” (p. 18-7)
• “8650 SDM HSS” (p. 20-13)
LS33010–01 Support IRAT neighbor The following descriptions have been updated:
exchange between • “Use of Self-Organizing Networks (SONs)”
UMTS and 4G systems (p. 2-24)
LS30043–01 Inter LTE Service A new chapter is added in Part II: “LTE Network
LS30038–01 Provider Roaming Provided Services”
(using Home PGW) • Chapter 11, “Roaming in LTE networks”
LTE Local Breakout The following network element descriptions were
with S9 (for future) updated:
• “5780 DSC” (p. 18-7)
LS30100–01 Network Sharing - A new chapter is added in Part II: “LTE Network
LS30100–04 Multiple Public Safety Provided Services”
Networks Share A • Chapter 13, “Public Safety”
Common Core
Priority Access With
Pre-Emption (for all
bearers)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

— 1360 Centralized The following descriptions have been updated:
Operations Manager • Figure 2-2, “Major components of the
introduction Alcatel-Lucent LTE network” (p. 2-7)
updated:
• “8650 SDM HSS” (p. 20-13)
• “7510 MGW” (p. 21-33)
• “7520 MGW” (p. 21-42)
• “1310 OMC-P” (p. 22-13)
• “1360 COM” (p. 22-6)
LS30030–02 Online Charging The following descriptions have been updated:

between ALU PGW • Figure 2-2, “Major components of the
and 8610 ICC over Alcatel-Lucent LTE network” (p. 2-7)
Ro/Gy
The following descriptions were updated:
• “The VoLTE approach” (p. 7-9)
updated:
• “7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)” (p. 18-25)
• “8615 IeCCF (OFCS)” (p. 20-10)
• “5450 ISC (P/S/I-CSCF)” (p. 21-26)
• “8610 ICC (OCS)” (p. 20-7)
The 8620 SurePay® network element description has
been removed as this material is not needed anymore
__ Training All NEs training sections have been checked and
notably the keyword within the Alcatel-University web
site. So, everywhere in the document the Training
sections were updated.
All the recommended classes have been moved into
the Appendix Ressources. The following description
was updated:
• “Alcatel-Lucent training on LTE” (p. B-24)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

__ Documentation All Customer Documentation References were
updated to LE4.0 Solution Release.
To improve the access of the Customer Documentation
Reference list, the “big” table into the Appendix B,
“Resources” was split into “little” tables per domain or
per product. Global Index has also been improved.
All these changes are done into :
• “List of LTE customer documentation ” (p. B-13)
To avoid any duplication, all references found in the
network element descriptions were removed and
replaced by a link toward the related table into the
Appendix B, “Resources”. So, everywhere in Part II:
“LTE Network Provided Services”, when needed, the
“For documentation” section of the network element
description was updated.
__ VitalQIP is move in All NEs training sections have been checked and
Common Core Network notably the keyword within the Alcatel-University web
category site. So, everywhere in the document the Training
sections were updated.
The following descriptions were updated:
• “A sample LTE network” (p. 1-36)
• “LTE network” (p. 2-6)
• “LTE Interworking with 3GPP2 Network
Deployment Option: eHRPD 1xEVDO” (p. 4-9)
• “LTE Interworking with 3GPP Network
Deployment Option: GSM and W-CDMA”
(p. 4-14)
• “VitalQIP ENUM/DNS” (p. 20-19)
LS30033-03 LTE Offline Charging Following review, the following description was
Support with ALU updated:
PGW/SGW and IeCCF • “8615 IeCCF (OFCS)” (p. 20-10)
on Ga Interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

_ eNodeB HW evolutions The following network element of the Radio Access
Network (RAN) descriptions were updated with the
list of hardware versions of the components supported
in LE4.0 — Step 4.0.3:
• “9412 eNodeB” (p. 16-22)
_ LTE RRH Product With the introduction of the TDD RRH8x5, the “LTH
Family RRH 2x” Product Family, is renamed by “LTE RRH”
Product Family. As such, the chapter has been
reviewed accordingly:
- The ng Connect The purpose of the ng Connect program has been

program updated to be in line with the last marketing
information. The following description was updated:
• “The ng Connect program” (p. 2-16)
- LE4.0 Blueprint Following the LE4.0 Blueprint Specification, the

Specification – 3GPP following Network Elements of the 3GPP variant were
variant introduced in this document:
• “5060 WCS” (p. 18-4)
• “7549 MGW” (p. 18-17)
• “WEM” (p. 22-61)
New material and changes in this LE.4.0 issue 1.00

This issue of this document is for LE4.0. A complete list of the changes and new material
for LE4.0 is given in the Reason for Revision in the “About this document” chapter. Click
on “Reason for reissue” (p. xxxvii) to be taken to that list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
Numerics 1357 IMC defined, 12-2

112 calls advantages, 22-17 for further information, 12-6
handling off, 21-29 configurations available, 22-17 functions of, 12-3
1300 XMC connections to the network, how it works, 12-3
about, 22-10 22-18
information collected, 12-3
advantages, 22-11 defined, 22-16
provides centralized solution,
and 8650 SDM HSS, 20-18 hardware, 22-17, 22-17 12-6
defined, 22-10 interfaces, 22-18 purpose of, 12-2
documentation, 22-12 NEBS compliant, 22-17 software, 20-4
role, 22-10 one for all networks, 22-16 standards for, 12-6
training, 22-12 software, 22-17 training, 20-6
use in LTE Network, 22-11 training, 22-19 1357 ULIS Graphical User
Interface
1310 OMC-P 1357 LIG
defined, 20-5
about, 22-13 advantages, 20-4
1357 Unified Lawful Interception
advantages, 22-14 configurations available, 20-4
Suite
defined, 22-13 connections to the network, See: 1357 ULIS
20-5
documentation, 22-15 1360 Centralized Operations
defined, 20-3 Manager
role, 22-13
hardware, 20-4, 20-4 See: 1360 COM
supports 7510 MGW, 21-40
interfaces, 20-5, 20-5 1360 COM
supports 7520 MGW, 21-44
multiple may be needed, 20-3 about, 22-6
training, 22-15
advantages, 22-7
NEBS compliant, 20-4
use of, in IMS, 22-14
software, 20-4, 20-4 and 8650 SDM HSS, 20-18
1310 Operations and Management
user interfaces, 20-5 defined, 22-6
Console – Plus
See: 1310 OMC-P documentation, 22-9
1357 ULIS
role, 22-6
advantages of, 12-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary IN-1
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
supports 7510 MGW, 21-40 defined, 18-4 5400 LCP, 18-61
supports 7520 MGW, 21-44 for further information, 18-6 5410 PS/XDMS
training, 22-9 ready to support evolution to compliance with standards,
LTE, 18-6 21-20
use, 22-7
role, 18-4 configurations available, 21-21
1xEVDO Base Station
See: 922x 1xEVDO BS training, 18-6 defined, 21-20
2G network use of, 18-5 documentation, 21-22
compared to LTE network, 5060 Wireless Call Server hardware, 21-21, 21-21
1-27 See: 5060 WCS
NEBS compliant, 21-21
2x 5100 CMS
training, 21-22
defined, 16-31 components, 21-12
5420 CTS
3G Mobile Switching Center defined, 21-11, 21-11
advantages, 21-23
See: 9380 3G MSC
documentation, 21-12
defined, 21-23, 21-23
3G network
how it works, 21-11
compared to LTE network,
interfaces, 21-12
1-27 hardware, 21-24
training, 21-12
3GPP standards how it works, 21-24
5100 Converged Messaging
technologies, 1-14 training, 21-25
System
3GPP2 standards See: 5100 CMS 5450 ISC P/S/I-CSCF
technologies, 1-14 5110 Short Message Service about, 21-26

Center advantages, 21-27
3GPP/NGN IMS Multimedia
See: 5110 SMSC
Telephony Service
defined, 21-26
See: MMTel 5110 SMSC
5060 Media Gateway Controller-8 about, 21-13
See: 5060 MGC-8 role, 21-26
advantages, 21-14
5060 MGC-8 training, 21-29
defined, 21-13
about, 21-9 use of, in IMS, 21-29
advantages, 21-9 5620 SAM
role, 21-13
defined, 21-9, 21-9 and 7750 SR, 18-35
training, 21-15
documentation, 21-10 and the 9412 eNodeB, 16-30
5140 BMC
role, 21-9 and the 9471 MME, 18-58,
advantages, 21-17 18-63
training, 21-10
defined, 21-16, 21-16
capabilities, 22-21
5060 WCS
See: also 7549 MGW converged OA&M, 22-20
hardware, 21-18
about, 18-4 defined, 22-20
standards, 21-19 documentation, 22-22
advantages, 18-4
training, 21-19
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent LTE Solution
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
hardware, 22-21 documentation, 21-31 role, 21-42
role, 22-20 role of, 21-30 software, 21-44
support of 5780 DSC, 18-15 services provided, 21-30 training, 21-44
supports Backhaul Network, support for LI, 21-31 use in the Solution, 21-43
Transport Network, MME,
training, 21-32 user interfaces, 21-44
and eNodeB, 2-11
7500 Serving GPRS Support Node 7549 Media Gateway
training, 22-22
(SGSN) See: 7549 MGW
5620 Service Aware Manager See: 7500 SGSN See: also 5060 WCS
(SAM)
7500 SGSN 7549 MGW
See: 5620 SAM
advantages, 18-21 about, 18-17
5780 DSC
alternate for, 18-20 advantages, 18-18
3GPP-compliant, 18-8
defined, 18-20, 18-20 as used in the Solution, 18-18
advantages, 18-9
documentation, 18-23 defined, 18-17
benefits to service provider,
18-9 hardware, 18-21 for further information, 18-19
blades, 18-12 product description page, role, 18-17
18-23
defined, 18-7, 18-7 training, 18-19
role, 18-20
hardware configuration, 18-12 use of, 18-18
training, 18-24
hardware platform, 18-10 7705 SAR
use of in LTE, 18-23
how it works, 18-8 defined, 17-9
7510 MGW
need for, 18-8 documentation, 17-12
advantages, 21-35
network connections, 18-14 fixed configuration, 17-11
defined, 21-33, 21-33
product description page, hardware, 17-10
18-15 documentation, 21-41
how it works, 17-10
purpose of, 18-8 hardware, 21-35
software, 17-12
RADIUS support, 18-8 market leader, 21-35
support for local routing, 4-8
role, 18-8 network connections, 21-38
training, 17-13
software, 18-13 role of, 21-34
user interfaces, 17-12
training, 18-16 software, 21-38
7705 Service Aggregation Router
two ways of hosting SPR, training, 21-41 (SAR)
18-14 See: 7705 SAR
user interface, 21-40
user interfaces, 18-15 7705 SR
7520 MGW
5780 Dynamic Services Controller hardware, 17-10
advantages, 21-43
See: 5780 DSC 7750 Service Router Serving
defined, 21-42, 21-42
5900 MRF Gateway
documentation, 21-44 See: 7750 SR (SGW)
defined, 21-30, 21-30
hardware, 21-43
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7750 Service Router (SR) 7750 SR (PGW) documentation, 20-12
See: 7750 SR
defined, 18-26 role, 20-10
7750 SR
how it works, 18-27 training, 20-12
benefits, 18-29
network connections, 18-35 use of, in IMS, 20-11
benefits of, 17-15
training, 18-36 use of, in LTE, 20-11
changes for supporting Core
7750 SR (PGW/GGSN) 8650 SDM HSS
Network elements, 17-20
defined, 18-25 advantages, 20-14
changes in, to support LTE,
17-20, 18-28 documentation, 18-35 defined, 20-13, 20-13
changes to support Mobile hardware, 18-30 documentation, 20-18
Backhaul, 17-20 software, 18-34 hardware, 20-15
defined, 17-14 training, 18-36 how it works, 20-14
documentation, 17-20, 18-34
7750 SR (SGW) LDAP interface, 20-17
function, 17-15
about, 18-37 network connections, 20-17
hardware, 17-17, 18-30 benefits, 18-38 software, 20-17
in a sample LTE network,
defined, 18-37 support of AAA server, 20-17
17-18
documentation, 18-45 training, 20-18
role, 17-15
hardware, 18-39 user interfaces, 20-18
role in LTE network, 17-18
network connections, 18-44 8650 Subscriber Data Manager
software, 17-18
(SDM) HSS
role, 18-38
support for many applications, See: 8650 SDM HSS
18-26 software, 18-43
8950 AAA
support for PGW and GGSN training, 18-45
about, 21-45
simultaneously, 18-26, 18-37 user interfaces, 18-45
advantages, 21-47
training, 17-20 8610 ICC (OCS)
defined, 21-45
user interfaces, 18-35 about, 20-7
7750 SR (GGSN) advantages, 20-8
See: 7750 SR PGW/GGSN role, 21-46
connection to the network,
about, 18-27 training, 21-48
20-9
benefits, 18-28 8950 Authentication,
defined, 20-7
Authorization and Accounting
defined, 18-26 documentation, 20-9 (AAA)
training, 18-36 role, 20-8 See: 8950 AAA
7750 SR MPG training, 20-9 8950 SAM
benefits, 18-30 8615 IeCCF (OFCS) advantages, 22-24
7750 SR Packet Data Network about, 20-10, 20-10 changes for LTE, 22-25
(PDN) Gateway defined, 22-23
See: 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN) advantages, 20-11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
documentation, 22-26 defined, 16-10 role, 22-31
role, 22-23 documentation, 16-11 software, 22-32
training, 22-26 how used in GSM, 16-11 training, 22-33
use of, in IMS, 22-25 role of, 16-10 user interfaces, 22-32, 22-32
8950 Service Aware Manager training, 16-12 9254 OMC-RAN, 22-31
(SAM) See: 9253/9254 OMC-RAN
use of, 16-11
See: 8950 SAM
9256 OMP
9153 OMC-R
8x
See: 9153 OMC-R about, 22-34
defined, 16-31
advantages, 22-28 advantages, 22-35
9100 Base Transceiver Station
See: 9100 MBI/O (BTS)
role, 22-27 documentation, 22-36
9100 BTS
See: 9100 MBI/O (BTS) training, 22-29 role, 22-34
9100 MBI/O (BTS) 9153 Operation & Maintenance training, 22-36

Center for Radio Part
advantages of, 16-4 9256 Operations and Management
See: 9153 OMC-R
Platform
changes in, to support LTE,
922x 1xEVDO Base Station See: 9256 OMP
16-5
advantages of, 16-15 9271 eRNC
defined, 16-4
defined, 16-13 connections to network, 19-5
for more information, 16-6
role of, 16-4
network connections, 16-14 documentation, 19-6
training, 16-6
role of, 16-13 hardware, 19-4
use of with GSM and LTE,
16-5 software, 16-15 how it works, 19-4
911 calls training, 16-15 server components, 19-4
handling of, 21-29 use of, with CDMA and LTE, software, 19-5
16-14
9125 Compact Transcoder (TC) support of HSGW, 19-4
See: 9125 TC 922x 1xEVDO Base Station (BS)
supported frame types, 19-4
See: 922x 1xEVDO BS
9125 TC training, 19-6
9253 Operations and Maintenance
advantages, 16-8 user interfaces, 19-6
Center Radio Access Network
defined, 16-7 See: 9253/9254 OMC-RAN 9271 Evolved Radio Network
documentation, 16-9 9253/9254 OMC-RAN Controller (eRNC)
See: 9271 eRNC
role, 16-7 about, 22-30
9326 NodeB
training, 16-9 defined, 22-31
about, 16-16
9130 BSC/MFS documentation, 22-32
defined, 16-16
about, 16-10 hardware, 22-31
advantages, 16-11 network connections, 22-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
hardware, 16-16 9380 3G Mobile Switching Center 9412 eNodeB TRDUs
See: 9380 3G MSC
network connections, 16-17 defined, 16-26
9380 3G MSC
role, 16-16 9442 RRH
advantages, 18-48
software, 16-17 See LTE RRH Product Family,
components, 18-46 16-31
training, 16-18
defined, 18-46, 18-46 9452 Wireless Provisioning
System
with W-CDMA and LTE, See: 9452 WPS
16-17 role, 18-48
9452 WPS
9353 Wireless Management training, 18-51
about, 22-40
System (WMS)
use of in LTE network, 18-51
See: 9353 WMS advantages, 22-41
9353 WMS, 16-20 auto-assignment of cell ID,
9412 eNodeB 2-25
about, 22-37
about, 16-23 defined, 22-40
advantages, 22-37
advantages, 16-23, 16-24 documentation, 22-42
and 9326 NodeB, 16-17
defined, 16-23 role, 22-40
defined, 22-37
documentation, 16-30 training, 22-42
hardware, 16-24, 16-24 use of, in LTE, 22-42
hardware, 22-38
how it works, 16-23 use of SON principles, 2-25
software, 22-38
network connections, 16-29 9471 MME
training, 22-39
OA&M for, 22-50 advantages, 18-53
software, 16-29 blades, 18-56
9370 Radio Network Controller
(RNC) support of FDD, 16-29 defined, 18-52, 18-52
See: 9370 RNC training, 16-30 documentation, 18-59
9370 RNC user interfaces, 16-30 hardware configuration, 18-56
about, 16-19 9412 eNodeB BBUs hardware platform, 18-54
advantages, 16-20
controller unit, 16-26 how it works, 18-53
defined, 16-19
modem unit, 16-26 network connections, 18-57
9412 eNodeB MC-TRX role, 18-52
hardware, 16-20 defined, 16-27 software, 18-57
network connections, 16-20
9412 eNodeB Multi—Carrier training, 18-59
role, 16-19 Transceiver
See: 9412 eNodeB MC-TRX
software, 16-20
9412 eNodeB Transmit Receive
training, 16-21
Duplex Units 9471 Mobility Management Entity
user interfaces, 16-20 See: 9412 eNodeB TRDUs See: 9471 MME
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9471 Wireless Mobility Manager role of, 16-43 how it works, 22-46
See: 9471 WMM
software, 16-47 select documentation list,
9471 WMM 22-48
sub-racks, support of TDD vs
advantages, 18-61 FDD, 16-45 software, 22-48
alternate for, 18-60 support for R-OCM, 16-47 training, 22-49
defined, 18-60, 18-60, 18-60 supports both FDD and TDD, unique design, 22-47
16-36, 16-45
documentation, 18-63 with PCMD module, 22-46
training, 16-49
hardware, 18-61 .............................................................
how it works, 18-61 A AAA
9926 DBS See: 8950 AAA
interfaces, 18-62
See: Distributed eNodeB
product description page, Solution Access Point Names
18-63 See: APNs
9926 digital 2 Unit (D2U)
role, 18-61 See: 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU Access Terminal
See: UE
role of, 18-61 9926 digital 2U eNodeB Base
Band Unit Accessing and navigating the
support for both SGSN and OLCS web site, B-9
MME, 18-61 See: 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU
9926 Distributed Base Station accessing customer
training, 18-63 documentation, B-9
See: Distributed eNodeB
user interfaces, 18-63 Solution Accessing IMS documentation,
9926 d2U eNodeB Base Band Unit 9926 eNodeB BBU B-11
See: 9926 d2U eNodeB BBU Accessing LTE documentation,
size, 16-44
9926 d2U eNodeB BBU B-3
9958 WTA
about, 16-43 Accessing network element
advantages, 22-44 documentation, B-11
advantages, 16-43, 16-43
defined, 22-43, 22-43 administration function
cards used for LTE, 16-45
first commercial release, 22-43 defined, 12-3
controller, support of TDD vs
history, 22-43 Advanced Exchange Service, 3-23
FDD, 16-46
controller unit, defined, 16-44 how it works, 22-43 Advanced Integration
need for, 22-44 Methodology
defined, 16-39
See: AIM
documentation, 16-49 software, 22-44
aggregation, in backhaul, 17-4
training, 22-45
hardware, 16-44 AIM
modem unit, defined, 16-44 unique benefits, 22-44
defined, 3-5
9959 NPO
modems, support of TDD vs defines, 3-4
FDD, 16-46 advantages, 22-47
air interface
rack back plane, defined, 16-44 defined, 22-46
security threats to, 14-4
rack user commissioning, documentation, 22-48
defined, 16-44
hardware, 22-48
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Air Interface Security performed on 7750 SR, 18-27 challenges of LTE, 17-6
common security threats, 14-4 application enablement changes caused by LTE, 17-6
control plane, 14-4 defined, 1-8 connectivity models, 17-5
defined, 14-2 Application Enablement, Service defined, 2-8
Creation and Monetization, 3-7
for further information, 14-7 logical models, 17-5
purpose of, 14-3 mobile gateways segment,
defined, 3-17 17-4
two planes to protect, 14-4
Architecture Security Assessment, network elements, 17-1
user plane, 14-6
3-12
security, 17-5
Alcatel-Lucent Devices and IOT
assignment of Cell ID
Team segments of, 17-3
automatic, 2-25
achievements, 6-8 Base Station
ATCA platform
band availability testing, 6-8 defined, 16-13
defined, 18-10
benefits of using, 6-5 Base Station Controller (BSC)
used for 5420 CTS, 21-24 See: BSC
defined, 6-5
used for 5780 DSC, 18-10 Base Transceiver Station
expertise, 6-8
See: 9100 MBI/O (BTS)
used for 9471 MME, 18-54
process, 6-7
defined, 1-31
used for 9471 WMM, 18-61
support for both LTE and
BBU
W-CDMA, 6-5 audience
converged, 2-27
support for standards, 6-5 for this document, xxxviii
distributed solution, 2-28
UE testing, 6-9 authentication
bearer function
Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End defined, 14-11
Solution defined, E-3
Authentication, Authorization and
See: Solution
Accounting benefits of LTE
Alcatel-Lucent University See: 8950 AAA
easy convergence, 1-44
how to get training, B-26 Automatic Neighbor Relations,
Efficient Always-On support,
2-25
how to reach the site, B-24 1-42
.............................................................
recommended classes, B-24 flexibility in spectrum use,
B backhaul 1-43
Analysis Services
leasing, 14-10 increased downlink and uplink
types offered, 3-9
rates, 1-39
ANR Backhaul Network
more throughput; less latency,
defined, 2-25 defined, 1-36 1-39
APNs Backhaul Part of the Transport reduced OPEX, 1-41
Network
defined, 18-26 spectrum efficiency, 1-43
aggregation segment, 17-4
Application Assurance support for high leverage
cell site segment, 17-3 networks, 1-40
defined, 18-27
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
user-visible benefits, 1-44 CC client
BG defined, 12-3 defined, 10-3
defined, 17-8 CCM cloud computing
BMC defined, 16-45 defined, 1-40
See: 5140 BMC
CDMA CMAS
Broadcast Message Center
compared to OFDM, 1-20 architecture, 9-3
See: 5140 BMC
cell broadcast with LTE defined, 9-2
broadcast video
defined, 9-1 how it works, 9-3
compared to conversational
video, 10-3 Cell ID implementation in LTE, 9-5
defined, 10-2 automatic assignment of, 2-25 LTE network requirements, 9-5
BS cell phone network and UE impacts, 9-6
See: UE
defined, 1-31, 16-13 what is Commercial Mobile
cell site Alert System, 9-3
BSC
in backhaul, 17-3 CMS
defined, 1-31
See: 5100 CMS
CEM
BSC/MFS
COM
See: 9130 BSC/MFS defined, 16-45
See: 1360 COM
BT Centralized Access Border
Commercial Mobile Alert System
Gateway (C-BGF)
defined, 17-7 See: see CMAS
See: C-BGF
BTP Aggregation Gateway Common Core Network
Centralized Access Gateway
See: BG
(C-AGW) defined, 1-36, 2-10
BTP Termination Device See: C-AGW
network elements, 20-1
See: BT
Centralized Operations Manager
common core network elements
BTS See: 1360 COM
See: 9100 MBI/O (BTS) used by VoLTE, 7-15
changes
defined, 1-31 Common Services blade
to this document for this
Build Operate Managed for release, xxxvii configuration, 18-12
Mobility, 3-25 software, 18-13
Channel Element Module
............................................................. See: CEM Compact Transcoder (TC)
C C-AGW circuit connections See: 9125 TC
defined, 21-39 for SMS, 8-2 Component
C-BGF Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) as defined in this document,

1-3, 4-3
defined, 21-39 See CSFB, 7-5
connectivity models
Call Session Control Function circuit-switched traffic
See: CSCF in Backhaul Part of the
none, in LTE, 1-25
Transport Network, 17-5
Carrier Network Outsourcing,
3-25
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Consulting Services Core Network UE registration, 7-6
defined, 3-6 defined, 1-32, 1-36, 2-9, 18-1 CSFB scenario
types offered, 3-7 network elements, 18-1 assumptions, 7-6
Content of the communication types of NEs, 18-1 how it works, 7-6
(CC)
CSCF CTAs, 3-24
See: CC
defined, 10-15 CTS
control plane
See: 5420 CTS
CSFB
defined, E-2
customer documentation
always in demand, 7-7
security for, 14-4
3rd Party components, B-23
basic service, 7-6
control plane latency
CDMA, B-22
benefits, 7-6
defined, 1-42
ePC and RAN – 5620 SAM
coexist with VoLTE, 7-10
controller unit Core, B-15
control of UEs, 7-6
defined, 16-44 ePC and RAN – 5620 SAM
current implementation, 7-8 LTE, B-16
Converged base station, 2-27
defined, 7-5 ePC – 5780 DSC, B-15
Converged BTS portfolio, 2-27
does not require IMS, 7-7 ePC – 7750 SR, B-17
Converged Messaging System
See: 5100 CMS how it works, 7-6 ePC – 7750 SR Mobile
increased load on the network, Gateway, B-18
Converged OA&M, 2-11
7-7 ePC – 9471 MME, B-16
Converged RAN, 2-28
increases call setup delay, 7-7 global list, B-13
approaches, 2-26
limitations of, 7-7 how to access, B-9
Converged BBU, 2-27
loss of data session, 7-7 IMS solution, B-23
Converged BS, 2-27
low-cost alternative, 7-7 LTE 9452 WPS, B-20
defined, 2-26
network and UE impacts, 7-8 LTE 9958 WTA, B-21
deployment scenarios, 2-26
network impact, 7-8 LTE 9959 NPO, B-21
distributed solution, 2-28
Required interface, 7-8 LTE end-to-end solution, B-14
integrated frame, 2-27
reuse of existing equipment, LTE RAN Access, B-18
LightRadio, 2-28
7-6
W-CDMA, B-23
Converged Telephony Server
slowing down of data session,
See: 5420 CTS Customer Technical Advocates
7-7
See: CTAs
conversational video
support for Emergency
.............................................................
compared to other types of Services, 12-8
video, 10-3 D delay
support for Number Portability,
defined, 10-3, 10-3 12-9 minimizing, 10-5
Core Controller Module TTY/TTD Support, 12-10 demand
See: CCM
UE impacts, 7-8 for higher level services, 1-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
for mobile broadband, 1-7 documentation how it works, 4-12
deployment options customer, how to access, B-9 impacted network elements,
4-12
for further information, 4-1 LTE, how to access, B-5
need for, 4-12
in the Solution, 4-1 on LTE, xxxviii
Also see: OLCS new OMC-RAN release, 22-32
related terminology, 4-3
product index, B-11 eHRPD 1xEV-DO Interworking
Deployment Services
Deployment Option
dongle
defined, 3-14
defined, 4-9, 4-9
current use of term, 6-2
types offered, 3-14
Element Management Layer
defined, 6-2
Design Engineering, 3-9
See EML, 22-5
downlink
Design Services
Element Management Server
defined, 1-18
types offered, 3-13
See EMS, 22-5
DPA
Distributed base station, 2-28
emergency calls
defined, 18-13
Distributed eNodeB Solution
handling of, 21-29
DSC
about, 16-40
See: 5780 DSC Emergency Services
architecture, 16-40
dual stack defined, 12-8
benefit of, 16-33
support for, A-1 how supported, 12-8
components of, 16-40
Dynamic Services Controller EML
defined, 16-40 See: 5780 DSC
defined, 22-5
flexibility in radio installation, .............................................................
EMS
16-42, 16-42
E E2E LTE Solution Integration and defined, 22-5
flexibility of placement, 16-33 Validation, 3-22
encryption
greater flexibility in placement, EAB
16-41 defined, 14-4
defined, 10-3, 10-9
linked by optical fibers, 16-41 for NAS, 14-5
eBTS
reduced power consumption, for RRC, 14-5
16-42 advantages, 16-14
Engineering Assessment, 3-10
rooftop installations, 16-42 defined, 16-14
Enhanced Address Book
support of PCMD, 16-42 how created, 16-14 See: EAB
use of, 16-14 See: EAB
document, this
eDAT defined, 21-20
covers current release only, 1-5
See: 9958 WTA how it works, 21-20
covers multiple access
technologies, 1-5 Efficient Always-On support eNodeB
how to read, 1-5 defined, 1-42 about, 16-23
scope, xxxvii eHRPD, 10-17 defined, 1-31, 16-22
defined, 4-12, 18-64 functions, 1-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
parts, 16-24 evolved NodeB GGSN function
See: eNodeB
transport for, 17-9 on the 7750 SR, 18-26
Evolved Packet Core
enterprise applications Global Suppliers Association
See: EPC
(GSMA)
defined, 1-41
Evolved Radio Network Controller See: GSMA
ENUM Manager (eRNC)
Glossary, 1-3
See: 9271 eRNC
defined, 20-19
government-mandated
evolved Universal Terrestrial
EPC requirements
Radio Access Network
benefits, 1-33 (eUTRAN) support for, 7-1
compared to earlier networks, See: eUTRAN
Green Touch
1-33 .............................................................
benefits, 2-25
defined, 1-32, 2-9 F Fall back defined, 2-25
entities, 1-34 for voice services, 7-18 web site, 2-26
ePC FD-RRHx GSMA
security, 14-10 support of FDD, 16-36 web site, 6-3
EPC FDD .............................................................
what it does, 1-32 defined, 1-14, 16-36, 16-45 H Handoff Interface 1
ePC and eUTRAN Network supported by 9926 d2U
Architecture and Design, 3-13 defined, 22-18
eNodeB BBU, 16-36, 16-45
EPS Handoff Interface 2
use of OFDMA, 1-18
defined, 1-12 defined, 22-18
use of SC-FDMA, 1-20
Equipment Engineering, 3-10 Handoff Interface 3
used in LTE, 16-36, 16-45
Equipment Installation, 3-15 defined, 20-5
Field Integration
Equipment Removal, 3-15 HI 1
defined, 3-16
Ethernet Backhaul defined, 22-18
finding customer documentation,
defined, 17-9 B-9 HI 2
eUTRAN Fixed and Mobile Multimedia, 3-8 defined, 22-18
contains eNodeB, 1-31 Frequency Division Duplexing HI 3

(FDD) defined, 20-5
defined, 1-31, 1-31, 1-31, 2-8
See: FDD
security, 14-10 High Leverage Network and IP
functional entity Transformation, 3-7
evolution summary
defined, 1-3, 10-4 high leverage networks
for 3GPP to LTE, 5-5
.............................................................
defined, 1-8
for 3GPP2 to LTE, 5-4
G GGSN examples of, 1-40
evolved Base Transceiver Station See: 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
(eBTS) for further information, 1-8,
See: eBTS 1-41
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
need for, 1-8 hyper-availability IMS documentation
revenue opportunities, 1-40 characteristics of, 10-10 accessing, B-11
history of revisions defined, 10-10 for an IMS network element,
B-12
to this document, F-1 .............................................................
restricted to IMS customers,
Home Subscriber Server I IAP B-12
See: HSS
defined, 12-3 where to find, B-12
how to access LTE documentation,
B-5 IBGF IMS network elements
how to access LTE training, B-24 defined, 21-39 used in VoLTE, 7-11, 7-14
how to find IMS documentation, ICC IMS-based SMS
B-11 See: 8610 ICC (OCS)
availability, 8-6
HP ProLiant DL380 ICS
IMS-enabled applications
5410 PS/XDMS, 21-21 defined, 7-22
defined, 2-11
configurations, 22-17 IeCCF
See: 8615 IeCCF (OFCS) IMS-hosted SMS
for further information, 20-6,
IMC defined, 8-6
21-22, 22-19
See: 1357 IMC IMS-provided rich services
hosting 1357 IMC, 22-17
IMS can provide new services, 7-22
hosting 1357 LIG, 20-4
Alcatel-Lucent, use of, 21-6 defined, 7-22
HRPD Serving Gateway (HSGW)
See: HSGW call scenarios, 21-6 how it works, 7-22
HSGW defined, 2-10, 7-9, 8-6, 21-4 index
defined, 18-64, 18-64 documentation, 21-6 of product documentation,

implemented in the Solution, B-11
for further information, 18-66
21-7 Installation Quality Assessment,
hardware, 18-65
network elements, 21-1 3-15
network connections, 18-65
role, 21-5 Installation Services
role of, 18-64
role of, with LTE, 2-11 types offered, 3-15
selection of, by 9271 eRNC,
specifications, 21-5 Installation Staging, 3-15
19-4
training, 21-6 Instant Converging Charging Suite
software, 18-65
(ICC)
user interfaces, 18-66 IMS and Applications See: 8610 ICC (OCS)
HSS defined, 1-36 Instant Enhanced Charging
IMS Centralized Service (ICS) Collection Function (IeCCF)
defined, 10-15, 20-13
See: ICS See: 8615 IeCCF (OFCS)
Hybrid network elements, 19-1
IMS Centralized Services (ICS), Integration Services
defined, 19-1 7-4 defined, 3-16
why they exist, 19-2
types offered, 3-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inter Radio Access Technology need for, 6-3 ISC
See: IRAT See: 5450 ISC P/S/I-CSCF
IOT process, 6-7
Inter-Operability Testing program .............................................................
IOT testing
band availability testing, 6-8 J jitter
confidentiality of, 6-5
benefits of, 6-5 minimizing, 10-5
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)
UE testing, 6-9 See: IMS .............................................................
Intercept Access Point (IAP) IP network
K key
See: IAP
benefits, 1-25
defined, 14-11
Intercept-related information (IRI)
IP Session Controller (ISC)
See: IRI .............................................................
See: 5450 ISC P/S/I-CSCF
Interception Management Center L latency
IP Transformation Center
See: 1357 IMC
benefits of, 3-21 defined, 1-40
Interconnection Border Gateway
defined, 3-21 Lawful Intercept Gateway
(IBGF)
See: CSCF
See: IBGF services provided, 3-22
lawful interception
interfaces IPA
See: OSS/BSS Implementation defined, 12-2
LTE, A-3
Planning and Analysis for both voice and data, 12-5
related LTE standards, A-3
IPSec standards for, 12-6
used in Solution, A-3
defined, 14-11 Lawful Interception
interfaces used in the Solution
needed for security, 14-11 See: 1357 LIG
comprehensive list, 15-2
over IPv6, not supported, A-1 Lawful Interception Gateway
internal intercept function See: 1357 LIG
threats IPSec can protect from,
defined, 12-3 Lawful Interception platform,
14-11
InterOperability Testing 20-4, 22-17
IPv4
about, 6-4 LBO
support for, A-1 See: Roaming with Local
InterOperability Testing (IOT) Break Out
IPv6
See: IOT
benefit of, A-1 LDAP interface, 20-17
Interworking
for OAM and Telecom traffic, legacy networks
as used in this document, 4-4
A-1 designed for voice traffic, 1-7
defined, 4-4
support for, A-1 flattening revenue, 1-7
IOT
IRAT need to cut costs, 1-9, 1-9
benefits of, 6-4
as used in the Solution, 4-4 need to reduce complexity, 1-9
both UEs and chipsets, 6-4
defined, 4-4 need to save space, 1-9
commitment to, 6-5
IRI reducing carbon footprint, 1-10
defined, 6-4
defined, 12-3
how it works, 6-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LIG list of customer LTE documentation site, B-5
See: 1357 LIG documentation, B-13
LTE ecosystem
See: 1357 LIG
Multiple antenna techniques,
support for, 6-4
defined, 10-15 1-23
LTE Interworking with 3GPP
LightRadio need for, 1-6, 1-7
Network Deployment Option
compared to RRHs, 2-28 new network components, 1-29
about, 4-14
compared to traditional cell no circuit-switched traffic,
defined, 4-14
tower equipment, 2-28 1-25
how it works, 4-17
defined, 2-28 one network, not two, 1-26
interfaces, 4-17
how it works, 2-28 provides improved QoS, 1-26
major components, 4-15
used in Converged RAN, 2-28 quality improvements, 1-26
types of interworking, 4-16
local routing removal of RNC, 1-31
when to use, 4-14
supported by 7705 SAR, 4-8 standards committees, 1-13
LTE Interworking with 3GPP2
location-based services supports both FDD and TDD,
Network Deployment Option
1-14
defined, 1-41
defined, 4-9
technical reading, B-3
Long Term Evolution
how it works, 4-12
See: LTE training, B-24
interfaces, 4-13
LTE use of FDD, 16-36, 16-45
major components, 4-10
all IP, 1-25 use of MIMO techniques, 1-22
types of interworking, 4-11
applicable to 3GPP and use of OFDMA, 1-18
3GPP2, 1-14 when to use, 4-9
use of SC-FDMA, 1-20
as defined in this document, LTE Library
use of smaller spectrum
1-3
segments, 1-25 benefits of, B-3
compared with earlier
use of STANDBY state, 1-26 defined, B-3
architectures, 1-26, 1-27,
1-27, 1-28 use of TDD, 16-36, 16-45 how to access, B-3
defined, 1-6, 1-12 use of VoIP, 1-25 LTE Network
destination for both 3GPP and used as synonym for EPS, 1-14 defined, 4-5
3GPP2, 1-15 web sites, B-23 major components, 1-36, 2-6
glossary of terms, 1-3 LTE air interface sample, 1-36
how it works, 1-16 voice services, flowing through
defined, 14-3
how to find documentation on, a “data only” network, 4-6
LTE customer documentation
xxxviii LTE Network Deployment Option
glossary, B-31
increasing throughput, 1-18 call flow, 4-8
how to access, B-4, B-5, B-23
innovations, 1-16 data-only configuration, 4-6
LTE documentation
key innovations, 1-17 defined, 4-5, 4-8
accessing, B-3
how it works, 4-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
voice and data configuration, software, 16-38 LTE Video Communications
4-7 Service
support for 2X2 MIMO, 16-36
See: Video Communications
when to use, 4-5
support for 4-way Rx, 16-36 Service
LTE Network Transformation and
support of FDD, 16-36 .............................................................
Migration Service, 3-22
support of TDD, 16-36 M Maintenance services
LTE Product Validation and
Acceptance Service, 3-22 training, 16-38 defined, 3-23
LTE project, 1-13 LTE Services Managed End-to-End Service
LTE project release naming defined, 2-13 Operations, 3-25
conventions, C-1 LTE Solution Readiness, 3-22 Managed Infrastructure, 3-25
LTE Roaming, 11-2 Managed Network Operations,
LTE specifications
LTE Roaming approaches 3-25
for OA&M, B-29
defined, 11-4 Managing Services
for security, B-29
mobility requirements, 11-9 defined, 3-24
for the ePS, B-28
with home routed traffic, 11-4 master diagram
how to access, B-30
with local break out, 11-6 of all interfaces in the Solution,
understanding, B-26 15-2
LTE RRH
LTE standards of all NEs in the Solution, 15-2
See LTE RRH Product Family,
define logical not physical of the Solution, 2-3
16-31
entities, 1-35
LTE RRH Product Family Media Gateway
for interfaces, A-3
See: 7510 MGW
about, 16-31 getting started with, B-26 See: MGW
advantages, 16-33 See: MGW
LTE to eHRPD handoff, 19-5
characteristics, 16-32 Media Gateway Controller-8
LTE training
See: 5060 MGC-8
defined, 16-31
defined, B-24
media replication
how to reach the site, B-24
defined, 21-31
flexibility, 16-33, 16-33 LTE end-to-end Solution, B-24
how it works, 21-31
hardware, 16-35
other classes, B-25
media resource function
how it works, 16-31
recommended classes for
defined, 21-30
installation benefits, 16-33 1xEV-DO, B-25
Media Resource Function
multiple bandwidths, 16-36 recommended classes for
CDMA, B-25 See 5900 MRF, 21-30
part of distributed eNodeB
solution, 16-31 recommended classes for LTE, mediation function
B-24
reduced CAPEX, 16-34 defined, 12-3
sign up for Alcatel-Lucent
reduced footprint, 16-34 Mediation function
training, B-26
reduced OPEX, 16-34 defined, 12-3
technology, B-24
role, 16-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MG MIMO support mobile phone
See: UE
defined, 17-8 downlink vs uplink, 1-24
Mobile Service Provider Gateway
MG-ISM, 18-28 MME
See: MG
See: 9471 MME
configuration, 18-33
mobile station
MMTel standard
defined, 18-31, 18-40 See: UE
defined, 10-5
role of, 18-31, 18-40 mobile terminal
group, 10-5
software, 18-34, 18-43 defined, 6-2
mobile
sub-elements, 18-32, 18-41 mobile unit
See: UE
MG/BG See: UE
Mobile Backhaul Audit and
defined, 17-8 Mobility Management Entity
Design, 3-7
See: 9471 MME
MGC-8 Mobile Backhaul Solution
See: 5060 MGC-8 Mobility Management Entity
architecture, D-4 (MME)
MGW
benefits, D-3 defined, 1-34
See: 7510 MGW
See: 7520 MGW defined, 17-7, D-2, D-6 modem unit
defined, 21-34, 21-42 documentation, D-7 defined, 16-44
migration how it works, D-2 MRF
ample activities, 3-20 key network elements, 17-7 See: 5900 MRF
considerations, 7-24 need for, D-2 MSC, 3G

See: 9380 3G MSC
defined, 3-19, 3-19 packet-based, 17-7
MSP Termination Device
ease of, with LTE, 5-7 role, D-2 See: MT
migration options, 5-1 service awareness features, MT
D-3
migration path defined, 17-7
solution for transport
for Voice with LTE, 7-25 MT/BT
problems, 17-7
migration planning defined, 17-7
support for all mobile services,
basic principles, 5-6 D-3 multicast video
resources, 5-8 training, D-7 compared to conversational
Migration Services mobile broadband video, 10-3
types offered, 3-19 defined, 10-2

demand for, 1-7
migration tasks Multiple antenna techniques
Mobile Gateway-Integrated
Services Module (MG-ISM) defined, 1-23
for 3GPP to LTE, 5-5
See: MG-ISM
for 3GPP2 to LTE, 5-4 Multiple-input Multiple-Output
mobile gateways, 17-4 (MIMO)
MIMO See: MIMO
functions of, in Backhaul
defined, 1-22 Network, 17-4 Multivendor Maintenance, 3-25
how it works, 1-22
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................. in the Backhaul Part of the key facets, 2-17
Transport Network, 17-1
N NE purpose of, 2-16
See: network elements in the Common Core Network,
web site, 2-18
20-1
NEL NML
in the Core Network, 18-1
in the Radio Access Network,
NEM 16-1 NMS
advantage of, 22-50 used for IMS, 21-1 defined, 22-4
defined, 22-50 network level testing, 2-20 NPO
for further information, 22-51 See: 9959 NPO
Network Management Layer
how it works, 22-50 Number Portability
See NML, 22-4
OA&M for 9412 eNodeB, defined, 12-9
Network Management Server
22-50 how it works, 12-9
See NMS, 22-4
role, 22-50 NVIOT Forum
Network Migration
training, 22-51 benefits of, 6-6
defined, 3-19
user guide, 22-51 compliance with standards, 6-6
sample activities, 3-20
network defined, 6-6
Network Performance and QoS
common security threats, Analysis, 3-7 for further information, 6-6
14-10
Network Performance Optimizer url for, 6-6
network element (NPO) work of, 6-6
defined, 10-4 See: 9959 NPO
NVIOT process, 6-7
finding documentation in the network security
.............................................................
Product Index, B-12 authentication, 14-11
network element descriptions O OA&M network
defined, 14-8
as organized in this document, security, 14-10
how it works, 14-11
15-2 OAM&P
parts of the network protected,
Network Element Layer 14-9 defined, 2-11
See NEL, 22-5 purpose, 14-10 ITU-T standard, 22-4
network elements standard for, 14-12 layers of support, 22-4
as defined in this document, use of keys, 14-11 products, 22-1
1-3, 4-3
new value chain OAM&P Products
classified as hybrid, 19-1
comprehensive list, 15-2
ng Connect used in Solution, 22-1
defined, 1-3
areas of focus, 2-18 OCM
documentation on, B-11
grouping of, 15-4
how it works, 2-17
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OFC training, 22-54 Operations, Administration,
See: 8615 IeCCF (OFCS) Maintenance and Provisioning
use in LTE network, 22-53
See: OAM&P
OFDM
OMC-P
OSS/BSS Implementation
basics of, 1-18 See: 1310 OMC-P
Planning and Analysis, 3-11
compared to CDMA, 1-20 OMC-R
OSS/BSS Transformation and
See: 9153 OMC-R
OFDMA Integration, 3-18
OMC-RAN
defined, 1-18 .............................................................
See: 9253/9254 OMC-RAN
Offline Charging Systems (OFCS) P Packet Data Network (PDN)
both configurations can be
See: 8615 IeCCF (OFCS) Gateway
used in Solution, 22-30
OLC See: 7750 SR
two configurations, 22-30
See: 8610 ICC (OCS) Packet Data Network Gateway
OMP (PGW)
OLCS
See: 9256 OMP See: See 7750 SR
about, B-5, B-9, B-11 (PGW/GGSN)
OneBTS CPRI Module
benefits users enjoy, B-9 See: OCM PCI, 2-25
how site is designed, B-10 Onlibe Charging Systems (OCS) PCMD
navigating, B-10 See: 8610 ICC (OCS)
defined, 16-23, 16-42, 22-47
product index page, B-11 Operation and OSS/BSS
Transformation, 3-7 how data is collected, 22-47
registering for the portals, B-10 PCRF
Operation Services
technical support information, defined, 10-15
B-10 defined, 3-23
types offered, 3-23 PCRF Services blade
OLCS LTE Library
Operations and Maintenance configuration, 18-12
location, B-5
Center - Core Network software, 18-13
navigating through, B-6 (OMC-CN)
See: OMC-CN Per Call (or Connection)
OLCS web site Measurement Data
accessing, B-9 Operations and Maintenance See: PCMD
Center for Radio Part
IMS documentation, B-11 See: 9153 OMC-R Per Call (or Connection)
Measurement Data (PCMD)
LTE documentation, B-3 Operations and Maintenance See: PCMD
navigating, B-9 Center Radio Access Network
See: 9253/9254 OMC-RAN Per Call Measurement Data
OMC-CN See: PCMD
Operations and Management
about, 22-52 Console – Plus Personal Digital Assistants
See: 1310 OMC-P (PDAs), 6-2
advantages, 22-53
Operations and Management PGW
defined, 22-52
Platform See: 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN)
See: 9256 OMP PGW function
manages 9380 3G MSC, 22-53
Operations Readiness plan, 3-11 on the 7750 SR, 18-26
role, 22-52
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PGW/GGSN Product Integration Public Warning System
See: 7750 SR (PGW/GGSN) See: see PWS
defined, 3-16
Physical Cell ID, 2-25 PWS
Product Operations Knowledge
Planning Hub Transfer defined, 9-2
defined, B-2 defined, 3-17 what is Public Warning
System, 9-2
where to find, B-2 Product Operations Support
.............................................................
point to point topology, 17-4 defined, 3-17
Policy and Charging Rules Product Upgrades Q QoS
Function demanded by users, 1-7
defined, 3-17
See: PCRF
Product Validation improvements, 1-26
policy control
defined, 3-17 planning for, 3-10
defined, 18-7
Program Management, 3-20 Quality of Service
Post-Launch Optimization See: QoS
Project Management Services
defined, 3-24 .............................................................
types offered, 3-14
Pre-Launch RF Optimization, 3-13
R R-OCM
PS
pre-R8
See: Public Safety benefits, 16-48
defined, 4-17
PS handover of Voice over IMS, benefits of, 16-47
presence information 7-10
defined, 16-47
standards for, 10-5 PS/XDMS
easy migration to LTE, 16-48
See: 5410 PS/XDMS
Video Communications
how it works, 16-47, 16-48
Service, 10-17 PSAP, 12-8
purpose, 16-48
Presence Server Public Safety
R-OCM connections, 16-47
defined, 10-14 about, 13-2
unique in industry, 16-49
presence server configurations, 13-5
works with both CDMA and
1xEV-DO, 16-47
Presence Server definitions, 13-2
Rack Back Plane
See: 5410 PS/XDMS
devices, 13-5
defined, 16-44
presence-enabled
expectations with LTE, 13-3
Rack User Commissioning
defined, 10-9
frequency spectrum, 13-5
defined, 16-44
Product Capacity Growth
hosted core model, 13-9
Radio Access Network
defined, 3-17
how it works, 13-4 See: RAN
product index
no specific network equipment Radio Network Controller (RNC)
for documentation, B-11 required, 13-4 See: 9370 RNC
See: RNC
Product Index Priority Access, 13-10
Radio Network Planning and
for documentation, how to use, sharing network elements, 13-7
Audit Service, 3-10
B-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RAN ring topology, 17-4 use of software-defined
modules, 2-27
categories of network benefits, 17-4
elements, 16-1 RRH products
RNC
contains NEs from many See: 9370 RNC supported by OMC, 16-38
networks, 16-1
defined, 1-31 Rx
defined, 1-31, 1-36, 2-8, 16-1
functions of, redistributed in defined, 16-36
LTE-only network element, LTE, 1-31
.............................................................
16-1
Roaming in LTE networks
S S102 interface
network elements, 16-1
about inter LTE networks
Reason for revision, xxxvii roaming, 11-2 defined, 8-4
Release Notes approaches, 11-3 For further information, 8-5
defined, B-2 benefits, 11-3 SAM

See: 5620 SAM
where to find, B-2 defined, 11-1 See: 8950 SAM
releases definitions, 11-2 sample migration paths, 5-1
included in LTE End-to-End Roaming with Home routed traffic SAR
Solution release, B-2 See: 7705 SAR
about, 11-4
Remote Radio Head SC-FDMA
defined, 11-4
See LTE RRH Product Family, basics of, 1-20
how it works, 11-5
16-31
Roaming with Local Break Out defined, 1-20
Resident Engineer, 3-24
defined, 11-6 scalable networks
residential tree topology, 17-4
with Home IP services, 11-6 defined, 1-9
Return for Repair, 3-23
with Visited IP services, 11-8 SCs
revenue
Roaming with Local Break Out already developed, 2-17
diminishing, service providers,
and Home IP services defined, 2-17
1-7
about, 11-6 SDM HSS
Reverse OCM
See: R-OCM how it works, 11-7 See: 650 SDM HSS
See: 8650 SDM HSS
Reverse Optical Communication Roaming with Local Break Out
Module and Visited IP services security
See: R-OCM about, 11-8 control plane, 14-4
revisions how it works, 11-9 standards, 14-7
to this document, xxxvii RRH standards, for LTE, 14-2
revisions to this document two types needed, 14-1
converged, 2-27
history, F-1 distributed solution, 2-28 user plane, 14-6
RF Optimization, 3-13 Security Architecture Design, 3-12
See LTE RRH Product Family,
RF Planning and Design, 3-13 16-31
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
security assessment Installation help available, SIOP Services, 3-9
3-15
defined, 3-12 site acquisition
Integration help available, 3-16
steps in performing, 3-12 evaluation of candidate sites,
Managing Services, 3-24 3-10
Security Enabler Integration, 3-19
Migration help available, 3-19 Site Consolidation, 3-7
Security Organizational
Assessment, 3-12 Operations help available, 3-23 Site Engineering, 3-9
security, eUTRAN Project Management help Site Preparation, 3-15
available, 3-14
common threats, 14-10 Site Records, 3-10
Security Services, 3-12
security, network Site Survey, 3-9
services available, 3-3
common threats, 14-10 SLA enforcement
Services Portfolio
Self Config downstream, defined, 17-5
defined, 3-3
defined, 2-25 upstream, defined, 17-3
summary diagram, 3-3
Self-Organizing Networks (SONs) smart phones
See: SONs Serving Gateway
defined, 6-2
See: 7750 SR (SGW)
Server Management Tool
SMS
Serving Gateway (SGW)
See SMT, 22-55
and LTE, 8-3
defined, 1-34
Service Aggregation Router (SAR)
and service providers, 8-3
See: 7705 SAR Serving GPRS Support Node
(SGSN) and users, 8-3
Service Aware Manager (SAM)
See: 7500 SGSN between two LTE UEs, 8-4,
See: 5620 SAM
See: 8950 SAM SGs interface 8-4
Service Centralization, 7-4, 7-10 defined, 8-4 defined, 8-1

defined, 7-22 For further information, 8-5 delivery methods, 8-3
service providers SGSN for data-only networks, 8-5
See: 7500 SGSN how it works, 8-2
challenges faced, 1-10
SGW IMS-hosted, 8-6
pressures on, 1-6
See: 7750 SR (SGW)
Service Router (SR) need, 8-3
Short Message Service
See: 7750 SR no guaranteed transmission,
See: SMS
Service Router Serving Gateway 8-2
Short Message Service Center
See: 7750 SR (SGW) not a dedicated circuit, 8-2
See: 5110 SMSC
Services over IP, 8-6
simultaneous registration on two
Analysis help available, 3-9 networks, 7-18 over SGs/S102, 8-4
Consulting help available, 3-7 Simultaneous Voice and LTE required for all LTE
Deployment help available, See: SVLTE deployments, 7-1
3-14 Single Radio Voice Call transmitted over circuit
Design help available, 3-13 Continuity connections, 8-2
See: SR-VCC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
use with dual configurations, particular releases included, SPR
8-3 B-2
defined, 18-8
with any LTE network, 8-5 parts of, 1-3, 2-5
hosted by 5780 DSC, 18-7
SMS (IMS-hosted) provides a complete solution,
two ways of hosting, 18-14
2-3
defined, 8-6
SR
support for Emergency
SMS messages See: 7750 SR
Services, 12-8
length restraint, 8-1 SR Operating System
support for Public Safety, 13-2
See: SR OS
SMS over IP
support of CMAS, 9-2
SR OS
defined, 8-6
support of government-
defined, 18-34, 18-43
SMS over SGs/S102 mandated requirements, 7-1
functions supported, 18-34,
CSFB not needed, 8-5 support of Roaming, 11-2
18-43
defined, 8-4 use of SONs, 2-25
SR Packet Data Network (PDN)
SMS with LTE Solution Architecture Advisory Gateway
requires equipped MSC, 8-5 Services, 3-10 See: 7750 SR
Solution Concepts SR-VCC, 7-10
requires multiple equipped
See: SCs
MSC, 8-5 defined, 7-4, 7-21
SMT Solution Integration and Validation
standards for LTE, B-26
Service, 3-18
defined, 22-55, 22-55 Standby state, 1-26
Solution, benefits of
cost reductions, 2-24
how it works, 22-55 how it works, 1-42
ease of evolution, 2-22
software-defined modules need for, 1-42
LTE, 2-20
in RRH, 2-27 Subscriber Data Manager (SDM)
pre-integrated, 2-20
Solution HSS
preservation of capital, 2-23 See: 8650 SDM HSS
as defined in this document,
single-vendor solution, 2-21 Subscriber Profile Repository
1-3
(SPR)
defined, 1-3, 2-3 use of ng Connect, 2-23
See: SPR
“Green Touch” initiative, 2-25
deployment options, 4-1 Sustainable Energy Audit and
interfaces, A-3 SONs Design, 3-7
list of all interfaces in, 15-2 defined, 2-24 SVDO
list of all NEs in, 15-1, 15-2 examples, 2-25 defined, 7-20
first implemented in LTE, 2-24 SVLTE
LTE Services, 2-13
purpose of, 2-24 and the Solution, 7-20
major components of, 15-4
standards for, 2-24 attractive to 3GPP2 service
need for, 2-3
providers, 7-18
ng Connect program, 2-16 spectrum usage
benefits of, 7-18
need to conserve, 1-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
defined, 7-17 TDD documentation, 22-60
dependent upon UEs, 7-20 defined, 1-14, 16-36, 16-45 for provisioning, 22-58
Fall back required, 7-18 supported by 9926 d2U for troubleshooting, 22-58
eNodeB BBU, 16-36, 16-45
how it works, 7-18 hardware, 22-59
use of OFDMA, 1-18
impact on UE, 7-19 included with 5110 SMSC,
use of SC-FDMA, 1-20 22-57
limitations, 7-19
used in LTE, 16-36, 16-45 key capabilities, 22-58
need for SVDO, 7-20
TDM backhaul software, 22-59
no communication between
networks, 7-18 prohibitive cost, 17-6 training, 22-60
no network impact, 7-18 replace with packet-based user interfaces, 22-59
solutions, 17-7
short-term approach, 7-19 TTY/TTD Support
Technical Support Services, 3-23
simultaneous registration, 7-18 defined, 12-10
Telephony Application Server
simultaneous voice and data, how it works, 12-10
(TAS)
7-17, 7-18
requirements for, 12-10
defined, 21-23
two UEs in one
12-9 terminal
See: UE used for SVLTE, 7-19
TTY/TTD Support, 12-10
Terms used in this document, 1-3 .............................................................
UE requirements, 7-19
TGW U UE
SVLTE UEs
See: used for Video defined, 21-39 defined, 6-2
Communications Service
Time Division Duplexing (TDD) how it works, 6-2
defined, 10-12 See: TDD
not manufactured by
required for Video Training Alcatel-Lucent, 6-3
Communications Service See: LTE training
other names for, 6-2
UEs, 10-12
Transcoder (TC)
Switching Hub blades types of, 6-2
See: 9125 TC
ULIS Solution
configuration, 18-12 transport network
software, 18-13 components of, 12-4
defined, 2-8
need for, 12-6
System Architecture Evolution TRDU
(SAE) project, 1-13 UNI
defined, 16-44
............................................................. defined, 17-10
Troubleshooting and Statistical
T TAS Interface System Unified Lawful Interception Suite
See: TSIS See: 1357 ULIS
defined, 21-23
Trunking Gateway (TGW) uplink
TD-RRHx See: TGW
defined, 1-20
support of TDD, 16-36 TSIS
defined, 22-57
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Equipment (UE) how SVLTE UEs are used, video with Video Communications
10-12 Service
defined, 6-2
impacts, 10-18 approaches for, 10-6
user plane
impacts of, 10-12 VitalQIP ENUM/DNS
defined, E-3
limitations, 10-17 about, 20-19
security for, 14-6
need for IMS, 10-14 advantages, 20-20
User-to-Network Interface (UNI)
See: UNI new network elements needed changes in, to support LTE,
for, 10-13 20-22
user-visible benefits of LTE, 1-44
purpose, 10-7 defined, 20-19
UTRAN
QoS, 10-14 documentation, 20-22
defined, 16-19
requirement for SVLTE, 10-12 role, 20-19
.............................................................
requires client, 10-18 training, 20-22
V VANC
requires SVLTE UE, 10-18 use of in IMS, 20-21
defined, 7-4
roaming, 10-17 Voice Mail Server
vertical applications
use of HSS, 10-15 defined, 10-14, 21-11
defined, 1-41
use of IMS core, 10-14 Voice over IMS
Video Application Server
See: Video AS use of LIG, 10-15 defined, 7-10
Video AS use of PCRF, 10-15, 10-15 See VoLTE, 7-9
defined, 10-13 use of presence information, Voice over IMS over LTE
10-17
video call See VoLTE, 7-9
use of Presence Server, 10-14
defined, 10-4 Voice over LTE
use of Video Application See: VoLTE
video calling Server, 10-13
Voice over LTE using Generic
defined, 10-8 use of Voice Mail Server, Access
example of, 10-8 10-14
See VoLGA, 7-4
Video Communications Service voice call turning into video
voice services
call, 10-17
architecture, 10-11 over data-only LTE Network,
voice service handled by MSC,
benefits, 10-8 4-6
10-17
See: participation by voice with LTE, 7-1
non-LTE users Video Communications Service
buddy list approaches, 7-3
capabilities, 10-8
defined, 21-21 Voice with LTE
client, 10-13
video over LTE, 10-2 comparison of approaches,
complies with standards, 10-6 7-27
defined, 10-4
need for, 10-5
how it works, 10-16 voice with LTE
standards for, 10-5
features to be supported, 7-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
in-handset approach, 7-4 ............................................................. WTA
See: 9958 WTA
in-network approaches, 7-3 W walled garden
.............................................................
Voice with LTE defined, 1-11
migration path for, 7-25 X X2 interface
WEM
migration, information about, See: also 5060 WCS aggregation of, 17-4
7-24 See: also 7549 MGW
XDM server
often confused with VoLTE, about, 22-61
defined, 21-21
7-3 defined, 22-61
XDMS Server
voice with LTE documentation, 22-62 See: 5410 PS/XDMS
unsupported approaches, 7-4 for further information, 22-62
VoIP role of, 22-61
need for, with LTE, 1-25 training, 22-62
VoLGA use of, 22-61
defined, 7-4 what's new
not widely supported, 7-4 in this document, xxxvii
VoLTE Wireless Call Server
coexist with CSFB, 7-10 See: 5060 WCS
current implementation, 7-16 Wireless Element Manager

See: WEM
defined, 7-9
Wireless Management System
delay and jitter, 7-10 (WMS)
enhancements required, 7-10 See: 9353 WMS
Greenfield applications, 7-26 Wireless Provisioning System

See: 9452 WPS
how it works, 7-10
Wireless Trace Analyzer
network impacts, 7-16
See: 9958 WTA
often confused with Voice with
wireless triple play
LTE, 7-3
defined, 1-11
12-9 wireline networks
TTY/TTD Support, 12-10 security, 14-11
UE impacts, 7-16 WMM

See: 9471 WMM
use of existing common core
network elements, 7-15 WMS
See: 9353 WMS
use of existing IMS network
elements, 7-11 WPS
See: 9452 WPS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 1 March 2012

418111000LE4.0 - V1 - LTE End-to-End Solution Overview

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

418111000LE4.0 - V1 - LTE End-to-End Solution Overview

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Alcatel-Lucent Long Term Evolution (LTE)

Sun Solaris is a trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

About this document

Reason for reissue ................................................................................................................................................................ xxxvii

Scope ........................................................................................................................................................................................ xxxvii

Intended audience ............................................................................................................................................................... xxxviii

Related information ........................................................................................................................................................... xxxviii

How to comment ................................................................................................................................................................ xxxviii

Part I: LTE Solution Introduction

1 Long Term Evolution (LTE)

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

Aids to using this document

What has changed in this document? ............................................................................................................................... 1-3

Glossary ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-3

Specialized meaning for key terms .................................................................................................................................... 1-3

How to read this document .................................................................................................................................................... 1-5

The need for LTE

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6

Increasing demand .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-7

Flattening revenue per user ................................................................................................................................................... 1-7

The need for high leverage networks ................................................................................................................................ 1-8

Need to scale and converge older networks .................................................................................................................... 1-9

Summary .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-10

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-12

What is LTE? ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-12

Applicable to all major wireless standards .................................................................................................................... 1-14

How LTE works

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-16

All IP packet-based network .............................................................................................................................................. 1-25

Use of new radio spectrum ................................................................................................................................................. 1-25

Quality improvements .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-26

Comparing the LTE architecture with pre-existing architectures ......................................................................... 1-26

New network components defined by LTE

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-29

Evolved UTRAN (eUTRAN) ........................................................................................................................................... 1-31

Evolved Packet Core (EPC) ............................................................................................................................................... 1-32

A sample LTE network

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-36

Sample LTE network ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-36

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-39

High capacity and low latency ........................................................................................................................................... 1-39

High leverage networks - new revenue opportunities ............................................................................................... 1-40

Efficiency and reduced operating costs .......................................................................................................................... 1-41

Provides “Efficient Always-On support” ....................................................................................................................... 1-42

Increased flexibility in use of spectrum ........................................................................................................................ 1-43

Increased spectral efficiency .............................................................................................................................................. 1-43

User-visible benefits .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-44

2 The Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

About the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution

What is the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution? .............................................................................................. 2-3

Parts of the Alcatel-Lucent LTE End-to-End Solution ................................................................................................ 2-5

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-6

Components of the LTE Network ....................................................................................................................................... 2-6

About the Radio Access Network ....................................................................................................................................... 2-8

About the Backhaul Part of the Transport Network ..................................................................................................... 2-8

About the Core Network ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-9

About the Common Core Network .................................................................................................................................. 2-10

About the IMS and Applications Area ............................................................................................................................ 2-10

About the OAM&P products .............................................................................................................................................. 2-11

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-13